Omni 6600 PDF

Firmware Revisions 20/24.
71
Liquid: Turbine/PD/ Coriolis Meters

with K Factor Factor/Viscosity Linearization

elcome to Omni Flow Computers

System Architecture
and Installation
User Manual for Revisions 20/24.71.

Each of the selectable buttons allows
for easy access to your area of interest.

Basic Operation

Configuration and
Advanced Operation

Modbus Database Addresses
and Index Numbers

Technical Bulletins
Effective April 1998
Measure the Difference!

Volume 5
Compendium of Technical Bulletins
About Our Company

Omni Flow Computers, Inc. is the worlds leading manufacturer and supplier of
panel-mount custody transfer flow computers and controllers. Our mission is to
continue to achieve higher levels of customer and user satisfaction by applying
the basic company values: our people, our products and productivity.
Omni flow computers Our products are currently

being used world-wide at:
Offshore oil and gas
production facilities
Crude oil, refined
products, LPG, NGL and
gas transmission lines
Storage, truck and
marine loading/offloading
terminals
Refineries;
petrochemical and
cogeneration plants.
Our products have become the international flow computing standard. Omni
Flow Computers pursues a policy of product development and continuous
improvement. As a result, our flow computers are considered the brain and
cash register of liquid and gas flow metering systems.
Our staff is knowledgeable and professional. They represent the energy,
intelligence and strength of our company, adding value to our products and
services. With the customer and user in mind, we are committed to quality in
everything we do, devoting our efforts to deliver workmanship of high caliber.
Teamwork with uncompromising integrity is our lifestyle.
Contacting Our Corporate Headquarters
Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

10701 Corporate Drive, Suite 300
Stafford, Texas 77477 USA
Phone:
281-240-6161
Fax:
281-240-6162
World-wide Web Site:

http://www.omniflow.com
E-mail Addresses:
techsupport@omniflow.com
info@omniflow.com
Getting User Support

Technical and sales support is available world-wide through our corporate or
authorized representative offices. If you require user support, please contact the
location nearest you or our corporate offices. Our staff and representatives will
enthusiastically work with you to ensure the sound operation of your flow
computer.
ALL.71+ 04/98
OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.
Omni 6000/Omni 3000 User Manual
Manual Guide
About the Flow Computer Applications

Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 Flow Computers are integrable into the majority of
liquid and gas flow measurement and control systems. The current application
revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers are:
Revision 20/24.71: Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow
Metering Systems (with K Factor Linearization US/metric units)
Revision 21/25.71: Orifice/Differential Pressure Liquid Flow Metering
Systems (US/metric units)
Revision 22/26.71: Turbine/Positive Displacement Liquid Flow Metering
Systems (with Meter Factor Linearization - US/metric
units)
Revision 23/27.71: Orifice/Turbine Gas
(US/metric units)
Flow
Metering
Systems
About the User Manual

This manual applies to Versions .71+ application revisions of Omni 6000 and
Omni 3000 Flow Computers. It is structured into 5 volumes and is the principal
part of your flow computer documentation.
Target Audience
As a users reference guide, this manual is intended for a sophisticated audience
with knowledge of liquid and gas flow measurement technology. Different user
levels of technical know-how are considered in this manual. You need not be an
expert to operate the flow computer or use certain portions of this manual.
However, some flow computer features require a certain degree of expertise
and/or advanced knowledge of liquid and gas flow instrumentation and electronic
measurement. In general, each volume is directed towards the following users:
Volume 1. System Architecture and Installation
Installers
System/Project Managers
Engineers/Programmers
Advanced Operators
Operators
Volume 2. Basic Operation
All Users
Volume 3. Configuration and Advanced Operation
Advanced Operators
Volume 4. Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers
Advanced Operators
Volume 5. Technical Bulletins
Users with different levels of expertise.
ALL.71+ 04/98
Volume 5
Manual Structure
The User Manual comprises 5 volumes; each contained in separate binding for
easy manipulation. You will find a detailed table of contents at the beginning of
each volume.
Volume 1. System Architecture and Installation

Volume 1 is generic to all applications and considers both US and metric units.
This volume describes:
Basic hardware/software features

Installation practices
Calibration procedures
Flow computer specifications
Volume 2. Basic Operation

User Reference
Documentation - The User
Manual is structured into
five volumes. Volumes 1
and 5 are generic to all flow
computer application
revisions. Volumes 2, 3 and
4 are application specific.
These have four versions
each, published in separate
documents; i.e., one per
application revision per
volume. You will receive the
version that corresponds to
your application revision.
The volumes respective to
each application revision
are:
Revision 20/24.71:
Volume #s 2a, 3a, 4a
Revision 21/25.71:
Volume #s 2b, 3b, 4b
Revision 22/26.71:
Volume #s 2c, 3c, 4c
Revision 23/27.71:
Volume #s 2d, 3d, 4d
For example, if your flow
computer application
revision is 20/24.71, you will
be supplied with Volumes
2a, 3a & 4a, along with
Volumes 1 & 5.
This volume is application specific and is available in four separate versions (one
for each application revision). It covers the essential and routine tasks and
procedures that may be performed by the flow computer operator. Both US and
metric units are considered.
General computer-related features are described, such as:
The application-related topics may include:
Batching operations
Proving functions
PID control functions
Audit trail
Other application specific functions
Depending on your application, some of these topics may not be included in your
specific documentation. An index of display variables and corresponding key
press sequences that are specific to your application are listed at the end of
each version of this volume.
Volume 3. Configuration and Advanced Operation

Volume 3 is intended for the advanced user. It refers to application specific
topics and is available in four separate versions (one for each application
revision). This volume covers:
ALL.71+ 04/98
Overview of keypad functions

Adjusting the display
Clearing and viewing alarms
Computer totalizing
Printing and customizing reports
Application overview
Flow computer configuration data entry
User-programmable functions
Modbus Protocol implementation
Flow equations and algorithms
Manual Guide
Volume 4. Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers

Volume 4 is intended for the system programmer (advanced user). It comprises
a descriptive list of database point assignments in numerical order, within our
firmware. This volume is application specific, for which there is one version per
application revision.
Volume 5. Technical Bulletins

Manual Updates and
Technical Bulletins Volume 5 of the User
Manual is a compendium of
Technical Bulletins. They
contain updates to the user
manual. You can view and
print updates from our
website:
http://www.omniflow.com
Volume 5 includes technical bulletins that contain important complementary

information about your flow computer hardware and software. Each bulletin
covers a topic that may be generic to all applications or specific to a particular
revision. They include product updates, theoretical descriptions, technical
specifications, procedures, and other information of interest.
This is the most dynamic and current volume. Technical bulletins may be added
to this volume after its publication. You can view and print these bulletins from
our website.
Conventions Used in this Manual

Typographical
Conventions - These are
standard graphical/text
elements used to denote
types of information. For
your convenience, a few
conventions where
established in the manuals
layout design. These
highlight important
information of interest to the
reader and are easily
caught by the eye.
Several typographical conventions have been established as standard reference

to highlight information that may be important to the reader. These will allow you
to quickly identify distinct types of information.
CONVENTION USED
Sidebar Notes / InfoTips
Example:
INFO - Sidebar notes are used to
highlight important information in
a concise manner.
Keys / Keypress
Sequences
Example:
[Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n]
DESCRIPTION
Sidebar notes or InfoTips consist of concise
information of interest which is enclosed in a grayshaded box placed on the left margin of a page.
These refer to topics that are either next to them, or
on the same or facing page. It is highly
recommended that you read them.
Keys on the flow computer keypad are denoted with
brackets and bold face characters (e.g.: the up
arrow key is denoted as [ ]). The actual function of
the key as it is labeled on the keypad is what
appears between brackets. Keypress sequences
that are executed from the flow computer keypad are
expressed in a series of keys separated by a space
(as shown in the example).
Screen Displays
Example:

Sample screens that correspond to the flow

computer display appear surrounded by a dark gray
border with the text in bold face characters and
mono-spaced font. The flow computer display is
actually 4 lines by 20 characters. Screens that are
more than 4 lines must be scrolled to reveal the text
shown in the manual.
ALL.71+ 04/98
Volume 5
CONVENTION USED
Headings
Example:
2. Chapter Heading
2.3. Section Heading
DESCRIPTION
Sequential heading numbering is used to categorize
topics within each volume of the User Manual. The
highest heading level is a chapter, which is divided
into sections, which are likewise subdivided into
subsections. Among other benefits, this facilitates
information organization and cross-referencing.
2.3.1. Subsection Heading
Figure Captions
Example:
Fig. 2-3. Figure No. 3 of
Chapter 2
Page numbering restarts at the beginning of every

chapter and technical bulletin. Page numbers are
preceded by the chapter number followed by a
hyphen. Technical bulletins only indicate the page
number of that bulletin. Page numbers are located
on the outside margin in the footer of each page.
Page Numbers
Example:
2-8
Application Revision and
Effective Publication Date
Examples:
All.71
20/24.71
21/25.71
22/26.71
23/27.71

Figure captions are numbered in sequence as they

appear in each chapter. The first number identifies
the chapter, followed by the sequence number and
title of the illustration.
03/98
03/98
03/98
03/98
03/98
The contents of Volume 1 and Volume 5 are

common to all application revisions and are denoted
as All.71. Content of Volumes 2, 3 and 4 are
application specific and are identified with the
application number. These identifiers are included
on every page in the inside margin of the footer,
opposite the page number. The publication/effective
date of the manual follows the application
identification. The date is expressed as month/year
(e.g.: March 1998 is 03/98).
Trademark References
The following are trademarks of Omni Flow Computers, Inc.:
Omni 3000
Omni 6000
OmniCom
Other brand, product and company names that appear in this manual are
trademarks of their respective owners.
ALL.71+ 04/98
Manual Guide
Copyright Information and Modifications Policy

This manual is copyright protected. All rights reserved. No part of this manual
may be used or reproduced in any form, or stored in any database or retrieval
system, without prior written consent of Omni Flow Computers, Inc., Stafford,
Texas, USA. Making copies of any part of this manual for any purpose other than
your own personal use is a violation of United States copyright laws and
international treaty provisions.
Omni Flow Computers, Inc., in conformance with its policy of product
development and improvement, may make any necessary changes to this
document without notice.
Warranty, Licenses and Product Registration
Important!
Product warranty and licenses for use of Omni Flow Computer Firmware and of
OmniCom Configuration PC Software are included in the first pages of each
Volume of this manual. We require that you read this information before using
your Omni Flow Computer and the supplied software and documentation.
If you have not done so already, please complete and return to us the product
registration form included with your flow computer. We need this information for
warranty purposes, to render you technical support and serve you in future
upgrades. Registered users will also receive important updates and information
about their flow computer and metering system.
Copyright 1991-1998 by Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
ALL.71+ 04/98

Volume 1
System Architecture and Installation
SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE AND

INSTALLATION
Contents of Volume 1
Figures of Volume 1 ........................................................................................................ vi
1. Overview of Hardware and Software Features ....................................................... 1-1
1.1. Introduction.............................................................................................................1-1
1.2. Operators Panel.....................................................................................................1-2
1.2.1. LCD Display ........................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2. Electromechanical Totalizers................................................................................ 1-2
1.2.3. Diagnostic and Program LEDs ............................................................................. 1-2
1.2.4. Active Alarm LED................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.5. Alpha Shift LED ..................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.6. Operator Keypad ................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3. Passive Backplane Mother Board .........................................................................1-4

1.4. Back Panel Terminal Module .................................................................................1-6
1.4.1. Back Panel Terminations ...................................................................................... 1-6
1.4.2. Extended Back Panel ............................................................................................ 1-7
1.5. Central Processor Module......................................................................................1-8
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 User Manual
1.6. Input/Output (I/O) Modules..................................................................................... 1-9

1.6.1. Photo-Optical Isolation........................................................................................ 1-10
1.6.2. Digital I/O Modules............................................................................................... 1-11
1.6.3. Serial Communication Modules .......................................................................... 1-12
RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205....................................................... 1-12
Dual RS-232-Compatible Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005 .................................. 1-15
Serial Port Assignments ........................................................................................... 1-15
1.6.4. Process I/O Combination Modules ..................................................................... 1-16
1.7. Operating Power .................................................................................................. 1-17

1.8. Firmware and Software ........................................................................................ 1-19
1.8.1. Interrupt-Driven CPU............................................................................................ 1-19
1.8.2. Cycle Time............................................................................................................ 1-19
1.8.3. On-line Diagnostics and Calibration................................................................... 1-19
1.8.4. PC Communications Interface............................................................................. 1-19
1.8.5. OmniCom Configuration PC Software.............................................................. 1-20
1.8.6. Year 2000 Compliance ......................................................................................... 1-20
1.9. Initializing Your Flow Computer .......................................................................... 1-21

2. Process Input/Output Combination Module Setup............................................................. 2-1
2.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2. Features of the I/O Combo Modules ..................................................................... 2-1
2.2.1. Setting the Address of the Combo Modules ........................................................2-2
2.2.2. Hardware Analog Configuration Jumpers ............................................................2-2
2.2.3. Process I/O Combo Module Addresses Versus Physical I/O Points..................2-2
2.2.4. Assigning Specific Signal Inputs..........................................................................2-3
2.2.5. Sample Omni Flow Computer Configuration Charts ...........................................2-4
2.3. The A and B Combo I/O Modules .......................................................................... 2-6

2.3.1. A and B Combo Module Non-Selectable or Selectable Address.........................2-7
2.3.2. The A Type Combo I/O Module .............................................................................2-8
2.3.3. The B Type Combo I/O Module ........................................................................... 2-10
2.4. The E/D and E Combo Modules........................................................................... 2-11

2.4.1. The E/D Type Combo I/O Module........................................................................ 2-11
2.4.2. The E Type Combo I/O Module ........................................................................... 2-12
2.5. The H Type Combo I/O Module............................................................................ 2-13

2.6. The HV Type Combo I/O Module ......................................................................... 2-15
2.7. The SV Type Combo I/O Module ......................................................................... 2-16
ii
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
3. Mounting and Power Options................................................................................... 3-1

3.1. Mechanical Installation...........................................................................................3-1
3.1.1. Panel Mounting...................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2. Nema 4 / 4X Configurations .................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.3. Nema 7 Specification............................................................................................. 3-2
3.2. Input Power .............................................................................................................3-3

3.2.1. AC Power ............................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.2. DC Power ............................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.3. Safety Considerations........................................................................................... 3-3
3.3. Power Terminals .....................................................................................................3-4

3.3.1. CE Equipment Power Terminals........................................................................... 3-4
3.3.2. Extended Back Panel Power Terminals ............................................................... 3-5
3.4. Power Supply Module Switching Regulator..........................................................3-7
4. Connecting to Flowmeters ....................................................................................... 4-1

4.1. Turbine Flowmeter (A or B Combo Module)..........................................................4-1
4.2. Wiring Flowmeter Signals to E Type Combo Modules .........................................4-2
4.3. Faure Herman
Turbine Meters (E Combo Module) ............................................4-3
4.4. Pulse Fidelity and Integrity Checking with E Type Combo Modules...................4-4
5. Connecting to Transducers and Transmitters........................................................ 5-1

5.1. Wiring the Input Transducers ................................................................................5-1
5.2. Wiring of a Dry C Type Contact ...........................................................................5-2
5.3. Wiring RTD Probes .................................................................................................5-3
5.4. Wiring Densitometers .............................................................................................5-4
5.4.1. Wiring Densitometer Signals to an E/D Type Combo Module ............................ 5-4
5.4.2. Solartron
Densitometers .................................................................................... 5-4
5.4.3. Sarasota
Densitometers ..................................................................................... 5-6
5.4.4. UGC
Densitometers ............................................................................................ 5-8
5.5. Wiring of Honeywell

ST3000 Transmitters .......................................................5-10
5.6. Wiring Micro Motion
Transmitters.....................................................................5-11
5.6.1. Connecting Micro Motion
RFT9739 Transmitter to A Type or E Type
Process I/O Combination Modules ..................................................................... 5-11
RFT 9739 via RS-485 Serial Communications...... 5-12
RFT9739 via Serial RS-232-C to 485 Converter .... 5-13
ALL.71+ w 04/98
iii
6. Connecting Analog Outputs and Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers ............... 6-1
6.1. Analog Outputs....................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2. Digital Inputs/Outputs ............................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.1. Wiring a Digital Point as an Input or an Output ...................................................6-2
6.2.2. Connecting Various Digital I/O Devices................................................................6-4
6.3. Provers.................................................................................................................... 6-5

6.3.1. Connecting Pipe Prover Detector Switches .........................................................6-5
6.3.2. Interfacing to a Brooks
Compact Prover ...........................................................6-5
6.3.3. Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooks
Compact Prover.......................6-6
7. Connecting to Serial Devices .................................................................................. 7-1

7.1. Serial Port Connection Options ............................................................................ 7-1
7.2. Connecting to Printers........................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.1. Connecting to a Dedicated Printer (Port 1)...........................................................7-2
7.2.2. Connecting to a Shared Printer (Port 1) ...............................................................7-3
7.2.3. Print Sharing Problems .........................................................................................7-3
7.3. Connecting to a Personal Computer and Modem ................................................ 7-4

7.4. Peer-to-Peer Communications and Multi-drop Modes......................................... 7-6
7.4.1. Peer-to-Peer RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop Mode ..................................................7-6
7.4.2. Peer-to-Peer via RS-232-C Communications ........................................................7-7
7.4.3. Keying the Modem or Radio Transmitter Carrier in Multi-drop Applications.....7-7
7.4.4. RS-485 Four-wire Multi-drop Mode .......................................................................7-8
7.5. Connecting to a SCADA Device ............................................................................ 7-9

7.6. Interfacing the Fourth Serial Port to an Allen-Bradley
KE Module................. 7-10
8. Diagnostic and Calibration Features....................................................................... 8-1

8.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................ 8-1
8.2. Calibrating in the Diagnostic Mode ....................................................................... 8-2
8.2.1. Entering The Diagnostic Mode..............................................................................8-2
8.2.2. Display Groups in the Diagnostic Mode...............................................................8-3
8.2.3. Leaving The Diagnostic Mode...............................................................................8-3
iv
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
8.3. Calibration Instructions ..........................................................................................8-4

8.3.1. Calibrating A Voltage or Current Analog Input.................................................... 8-4
8.3.2. Calibrating an RTD Input Channel........................................................................ 8-5
8.3.3. Calibrating a 4 to 20 mA Digital to Analog Output .............................................. 8-7
8.3.4. Verifying the Operation of the Digital I/O Points ................................................. 8-8
9. Flow Computer Specifications ............................................................................... 9-1

9.1. Environmental.........................................................................................................9-1
9.2. Electrical..................................................................................................................9-1
9.3. Microprocessor CPU ..............................................................................................9-1
9.4. Backplane ...............................................................................................................9-2
9.5. Process Input/Output Combo Modules .................................................................9-2
9.6. Flowmeter Pulse Inputs..........................................................................................9-2
9.7. Detector Switch Inputs ...........................................................................................9-3
9.8. Detector Switch Inputs of E Combo Module .........................................................9-3
9.9. Analog Inputs ..........................................................................................................9-3
9.10. RTD Inputs ............................................................................................................9-3
9.11. Analog Outputs .....................................................................................................9-4
9.12. Control Outputs/Status Inputs .............................................................................9-4
9.13. Multi-bus Serial I/O Interface................................................................................9-5
9.13.1. RS-232 Compatible .............................................................................................. 9-5
9.13.2. RS-485 .................................................................................................................. 9-5
9.14. Operator Keypad ..................................................................................................9-5

9.15. LCD Display...........................................................................................................9-5
9.16. Electromechanical Counters................................................................................9-6
9.17. Operating Mode Indicator LEDs...........................................................................9-6
9.18. Security .................................................................................................................9-6
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Figures of Volume 1
Fig. 1-1. Features of the Operator Front Panel ....................................................................................1-3
Fig. 1-2. Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 3000 .........................................................................1-4
Fig. 1-3. Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 6000 .........................................................................1-5
Fig. 1-4. Back Panel Terminations Omni 6000 and Omni 3000............................................................1-6
Fig. 1-5. Extended Back Panel - Omni 6000 (left); Omni 3000 (right) ..................................................1-7
Fig. 1-6. Central Processor Module - Jumper Settings .........................................................................1-8
Fig. 1-7. Matching the I/O Modules to the Back Panel Terminations ....................................................1-9
Fig. 1-8. Photo-optical Isolation - How It Works ................................................................................. 1-10
Fig. 1-9. Digital I/O Module Model # 6011 - Jumper Settings ............................................................. 1-11
Fig. 1-10. RS-232/485 Module #68-6205 Showing Selection Jumpers and LED Indicators................. 1-12
Fig. 1-11. Layout of Jumper Blocks Showing RS-232/485 Formats.................................................... 1-13
Fig. 1-12. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232/485 Module #68-6205.................................................... 1-14
Fig. 1-13. Dual RS-232 Serial I/O Module Model - Jumper Settings................................................... 1-15
Fig. 1-14. Power Supply Module Model # 68-6118............................................................................. 1-18
Fig. 2-1. Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 3000 ..................................................................2-4
Fig. 2-2. Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 6000 ..................................................................2-5
Fig. 2-3. The A and B Combo I/O Module - Configuration Jumpers .....................................................2-6
Fig. 2-4. A and B Combo Module - Non-Selectable / Selectable Address.............................................2-7
Fig. 2-5. A Type Combo Module - Flow Pulse Jumper Settings (Channel 3 or Channel 4) ...................2-8
Fig. 2-6. A Type Combo Module - Analog Input Jumper Settings.........................................................2-9
Fig. 2-7. B Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings - Frequency Densitometer Setup ........................ 2-10
Fig. 2-8. E/D Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings ........................................................................ 2-11
Fig. 2-9. E Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings ........................................................................... 2-12
Fig. 2-10. H Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings ......................................................................... 2-13
Fig. 2-11. HV Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings ....................................................................... 2-15
Fig. 2-12. Omni Multivariable Interface (SV Type Combo) Module Model 68-6203 - Jumper Settings 2-16
Fig. 3-1. Panel Mounting - Omni 6000 (upper), Omni 3000 (lower) ......................................................3-1
Fig. 3-2. Input Power Terminals - Omni 3000 (upper), Omni 6000 (lower) ...........................................3-4
Fig. 3-3. Input Power Terminals - Extended Back Panel (Omni 6000 only) ..........................................3-5
Fig. 3-4. Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 6000)....................................................3-6
Fig. 3-5. Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 3000)....................................................3-6
Fig. 3-6. Power Supply Module Model 68-6118....................................................................................3-7
vi
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
Fig. 4-1. Connecting to a Turbine Pre-amp (A or B Combo Modules) .................................................. 4-1

Fig. 4-2. Wiring to Turbine Pre-Amps (E Type Combo Modules Only)................................................. 4-2
Fig. 4-3. Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using Omni 24 VDC......................................................... 4-3
Fig. 4-4. Wiring of Faure Herman
Pre-amp Using External 24 VDC ................................................. 4-3
Fig. 4-5. Connecting Dual Coil Turbines for Pulse Fidelity Checking ................................................... 4-4
Fig. 5-1. Wiring the 4-20 mA Inputs (Input Channels 1 & 2 shown)...................................................... 5-1
Fig. 5-2. Wiring for Dry C Type Contact .............................................................................................. 5-2
Fig. 5-3. Wiring a 4-Wire RTD Temperature Probe ............................................................................. 5-3
Fig. 5-4. Wiring a Solartron
Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a B Type I/O Combo Module ...... 5-4
Fig. 5-5. Wiring a Solartron
Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a B Type I/O Combo Module . 5-5
Fig. 5-6. Wiring a Sarasota
Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a B Type I/O Combo Module....... 5-6
Fig. 5-7. Wiring a Sarasota
Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a B Type I/O Combo Module.. 5-7
Fig. 5-8. Wiring a UGC
Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a B Type I/O Combo Module............. 5-8
Fig. 5-9. Wiring a UGC
Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a B Type I/O Combo Module........ 5-9
Fig. 5-10. Wiring of a Honeywell
Smart Transmitter ....................................................................... 5-10
Fig. 5-11. Wiring of a Micro Motion
RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter .............. 5-11
Fig. 5-12. Wiring of a Micro Motion
RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter Via
Two-wire RS-485 Communications (Serial I/O Module #68-6205) ...................................... 5-12
Fig. 5-13. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter Via Serial
RS-485 Converter.............................................................................................................. 5-13
Fig. 6-1. Wiring Devices to the Flow Computers Analog Outputs........................................................ 6-1
Fig. 6-2. Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Input ................................................................................ 6-2
Fig. 6-3. Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Output.............................................................................. 6-3
Fig. 6-4. Connecting Digital I/O Devices to the Flow Computer ........................................................... 6-4
Fig. 6-5. Wiring to a Brooks
Compact Prover ................................................................................... 6-5
Fig. 6-6. Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooks
Compact Prover ........................................... 6-6
ALL.71+ w 04/98
vii
Fig. 7-1. Connecting a Printer to Serial Port #1 of the Flow Computer .................................................7-2
Fig. 7-2. Connecting Several Flow Computers to a Shared Printer ......................................................7-3
Fig. 7-3. Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB25 Female Connector (Using Port #2 as an
example)................................................................................................................................7-4
Fig. 7-4. Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB9 Female Connector .........................................7-5
Fig. 7-5. Connecting Port #2 to a Modem ............................................................................................7-5
Fig. 7-6. Wiring of Several Flow Computers using the Peer-to-Peer Feature via RS-485
Communications in Two-wire Multi-drop Mode .......................................................................7-6
Fig. 7-7. Wiring of Several Flow Computers in the Peer-to-Peer Mode using RS-232-C
Communications. ...................................................................................................................7-7
Fig. 7-8. Wiring of Multiple Flow Computers to a PLC Device Via RS-485 Communications in
Four-wire Multi-drop Mode .....................................................................................................7-8
Fig. 7-9. Typical Wiring of Port #3 to a SCADA Device via Modem .....................................................7-9
Fig. 7-10. Wiring Serial Port #4 to Allen-Bradley
KE Communications Module................................ 7-10
Fig. 8-1. Figure Showing Calibration of RTD Input Channel.................................................................8-6
viii
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
1. Overview of Hardware and Software

Features
1.1.
BASIC FEATURES - Omni
flow computers are
applicable to liquid and gas
flow measurement, control
and communication systems,
and custody transfer
operations. Its basic features
are:
q 32-bit processing with
math co-processor for
fast, multi-tasking
execution
q 500 msec calculation
cycle
q Plug-in, assignable digital,
serial and combination I/O
modules
q Point-to-point digital
transmitter interface
q 14-bit A/Ds, temperature
trimmed
q No I/O multiplexers, no
potentiometers
q Photo-optical Isolation of
each I/O point
q Meter pulse fidelity
checking
q Optional Honeywell and
Rosemount digital
transmitter interface
modules
q Dual LEDs indicate
active/fused digital I/O
q Selectable digital I/O,
individually fused
q Standard, field-proven
firmware no need for
custom programming
q User-configurable control
logic
q Up to 4 flow/pressure
control loops
q User-configurable
variables for displays and
reports
(Continues)
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Introduction
Omni 3000 and Omni 6000 Flow Computers are reliable, easy to use,
uniquely versatile measurement instruments. They are factory-programmed for
single or multiple meter run configurations to measure crude oils, refined
products, NGLs, LPGs, ethylene, propylene, natural gas, and specialty gases.
Measurement of other flowing products can also be provided.
Extensive communications capability enables the Omni 6000 to be used in a
variety of Master/Slave configurations for high-speed data transfer applications,
and as a large communication submaster. The flow computer can also be
hardware configured as a medium-size Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) with
significant digital I/O capability.
Your Omni Flow Computer connects to various sensors monitoring pipeline flow
in your transmission, petrochemical or process measurement application. It
calculates, displays and prints data that will be used for operational or billing
functions.
The computer is configured to match your piping system requirements. Its nonrestrictive bus design permits any combination of inputs and outputs to meet
most metering, flow and valve control, and communication requirements.
Plug-in modules furnish the input and output channels as needed and provide
an assurance of maximum product life by higher accuracy measurement
technologies such as meter pulse fidelity checking, and Rosemount and
Honeywell digital transmitter interface modules. Up to 4 serial ports in some
models are available for printing reports and other communications tasks. All
I/O modules are quality tested and temperature trimmed to optimize the 14-bit
analog resolution, and burned-in before shipment for field installation.
1-1
1.2.
BASIC FEATURES (Continued)
q Data archive and report
storage
q Modbus peer-to-peer
communications to
38.4kbps for PLC/DCS
q Real-time dial-up for
diagnostics
q International testing
q Includes OmniCom
configuration software
q Three year warranty
For Your Information
Operators Panel
The operators panel shown (Fig. 1-1) is standard for all applications and is
used to display and enter all data. All data can also be accessed via any of the
serial ports.
1.2.1.
LCD Display
The 4-line by 20-alpha-numeric character, back-lit Liquid Crystal Display is

updated every 200 ms. It displays all messages and system variables in English
language engineering units. Backlighting and display viewing angle are
adjustable from the keypad (press [Setup] then [Display] and follow the
displayed instructions).
1.2.2.
Electromechanical Totalizers
Three non-resetable, 6-digit electromechanical counters are included on the

front panel for non-volatile backup totalizing. They can be programmed to count
gross, net, mass or energy units at any rate up to 10 counts per second.
1.2.3.
Diagnostic and Program LEDs
These dual-color LEDs indicate when the user is in the Diagnostic Mode
calibrating the I/O modules, or when in the Program Mode changing the
configuration of the computer. The LEDs change from green to red after a valid
password is requested and entered. The computer is in the normal Display
Mode when neither of these LEDs are on.
1.2.4.
Active Alarm LED
New unacknowledged alarms cause this LED to glow red. This changes to
green as soon as the alarm is acknowledged by pressing the [Cancel/Ack] key
on the keypad.
1.2.5.
INFO - Pressing the [Alpha
Shift] key twice will put the
shift lock on. The shift lock is
canceled by pressing one
more time or automatically
after the [Display/Enter] key
is pressed.
Help System - These
computers are equipped with
a powerful context-sensitive
help system. Press the
[Help] key (bottom right)
twice to activate the help
displays. Cancel the help
screens by pressing the
[Prog] key.
1-2
Alpha Shift LED
This LED glows green to show that the next key only will be shifted. A red LED
indicates that the shift lock is on.
1.2.6.
Operator Keypad
Control of the flow computer is via the 34-button alphanumeric membrane

keypad, with tactile domes and audio feedback. Through the keypad you have
the capability to configure your system, access and modify calibration data online, and view or print process data. Configuration data can also be entered
remotely by serial port and is stored in battery backed-up CMOS SRAM
memory. Passwords and an internal program inhibit switch provide tamperproof security.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
DIAGNOSTIC LED
Glows green when in the
Diagnostic Mode. Glows
red when a valid
password is entered.
LCD DISPLAY
Is 4 lines by 20
characters. Backlight and
viewing angle are
adjustable via the keypad.
Flowrate
FT-101
Cumulative
FT-101
PROGRAM LED
Glows green when in the
Program Mode. Glows red
when a valid password is
entered.
BBL/Hr
1550.5
BBLS
234510
Total A
Total B
Total C
000682
009456
023975
DIAG/PROG KEY
Used to access
Diagnostic and Program
Modes.
Diagnostic
Alpha Shift
Diag
Prog
OPERATOR KEYPAD
Has 34 keys, domed
membrane with tactile
and audio feedback.
Alpha
Shift
Net
Gross
Press
Time
Counts
SPACE/CLEAR /
CANCEL/ACK KEY
Used to clear data and
insert spaces in the
Program Mode. It is also
used to cancel key press
sequences and, in the
Display Mode,
acknowledge alarms.
Fig. 1-1.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Prove
,
Cancel / Ack
Space
Clear
Status
0
Input
Setup
THREE-FUNCTION KEYS
These activate process
variable or alpha-numeric
character functions.
Product
Output
Analysis
Alarms
Batch
ALPHA SHIFT LED

Glows green for a single
character shift. Glows red
when the shift lock is on.
Meter
Preset
F
/
Orifice
Factor
Control
D.P.
Print
Density
SG/API
Energy
Temp
Mass
B
%
&
ACTIVE ALARM LED

Glows red when a new
alarm occurs. Glows
green when an
acknowledged alarm
exists.
Active Alarm
Program
ARROW KEYS
Used to move the cursor
and scroll displays. Also
used as software zero
and as span control
during calibration.
THREE 6-DIGIT,
ELECTROMECHANICAL
COUNTERS
These non-resetable
counters are assigned via
the keypad.
X
+
Help
Display
Enter
DISPLAY/ENTER / HELP
KEY
Used to enter a key press
sequence and to access
the Help System.
Features of the Operator Front Panel
1-3
1.3.
INFO - Passive backplane
simply means that no active
circuitry is contained on it.
The active circuitry is
contained on the modules
that plug into it.
Passive Backplane Mother Board
Mounted on the passive backplane are DIN standard connectors which are
bussed in two sections. The front section is a high performance, 16-bit bus
which accepts the Central Processor Module. The Omni 6000 computer has 3
other connectors available in this section to accept memory expansion and
future product enhancements.
The rear 8-bit I/O bus section comprises 10 connectors on the Omni 6000 and 4
on the Omni 3000, which can accept any type of optically isolated I/O module
manufactured by Omni. The rearmost connector on both computers accepts the
system AC/DC power supply module. Dual ribbon cable assemblies (Omni
6000) and a single ribbon cable (Omni 3000) connect the I/O connectors on the
backplane to the back panel terminals. (See Fig. 1-2 below and Fig. 1-3 on
facing page.)
CAUTION!
These units have an integral

cabinet latching mechanism
which first must be
disengaged by lifting the
bezel upwards, before
withdrawing the unit from the
case.
Fig. 1-2.
1-4
Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 3000
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
CAUTION!

cabinet latching mechanism
which first must be
disengaged by lifting the
bezel upwards, before
withdrawing the unit from the
case.
Fig. 1-3.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 6000
1-5
1.4.
Back Panel Terminal Module
The AC receptacle of the Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 back panel is a power line
filter with a separate AC fuse holder. The AC power is contained on a separate
four-conductor cable which plugs into the power supply. The power supply used
with this version is a Model 68-6118; no physical fuses (see 1.7. Operating
Power).
1.4.1.
Back Panel Terminations
The Omni 6000 terminal blocks are identified TB1 through TB10 with terminals
marked 1 through 12 for each block. These provide 120 circuit paths to the
passive backplane. The DC terminals are on TB11.
The Omni 3000 terminal blocks are identified as TB1 through TB4, with
terminals marked 1 through 12 for each block. These provide 48 circuit paths to
the passive backplane. The DC terminal is on TB5.
Back Panel Fuses - All DC

fuses are 3 amp fast-blow
manufactured by Littlefuse,
Model 225.003. All AC fuses
are amp slow-blow
Model 229.500.
Fig. 1-4.
1-6
Back Panel Terminations Omni 6000 and Omni 3000
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
1.4.2.
Extended Back Panel
Several flow computer mounting options are available with the extended back
panel. Screw type terminals are provided for AC and DC power. Extended 64conductor ribbon cables and the AC cables are provided with a standard length
of 5 feet.
For the Omni 6000 (dimensions: 3 x 18), this panel incorporates all the
terminal blocks TB1 through TB10, with terminals marked 1 through 12. In
addition to the terminal blocks, extra DC (fused), return and shield terminals are
provided for TB1 through TB8.
The Omni 3000 extended back panel (dimensions: 3 x 8) also incorporates
all the terminal blocks TB1 through TB4, with terminals marked 1 through 12. In
addition to the terminal blocks, extra DC (fused), return and shield terminals are
provided for TB1 and TB2.
Extended Back Panel

AC/DC Fuses - All DC fuses
are amp fast-blow
Model 225.250. The AC fuse
is amp slow-blow
Model 239.500. The fuse for
the back panels AC
receptacle is a 5x20mm,
amp slow-blow.
Fig. 1-5.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Extended Back Panel - Omni 6000 (left); Omni 3000 (right)
1-7
1.5.
Central Processor Module
This module contains the Motorola 16/32-bit microprocessor operating at 16

MHz, a maximum of 512 kbytes of SRAM memory, 1 Mbyte of EPROM
program memory, math coprocessor and time of day clock. Positions U3 and
U4 on the Central Processor Module contain the program EPROMs. The
hardware real-time clock will continue to operate even when power loss to the
computer occurs. Time of power failure is logged and printed when the power is
restored.
CAUTION!
POTENTIAL FOR DATA

LOSS!
RAM Battery Backup Omni flow computers leave
the factory with a fully
charged Ni-Cd battery as
RAM power backup. RAM
data, including user
configuration and I/O
calibration data, may be lost
if the flow computer is
disconnected from external
power for more than 30 days.
Observe caution when
storing the flow computer
without power being applied
for extended periods of time.
The RAM back-up battery is
rechargeable and will be fully
charged after power has
been applied for 24 hours.
Math
Processor
Program
EPROM
Program
RAM
Archive
RAM
Backup
Batttery
J1
J2
EPROM Size
1 OR 4 Meg Bit
Select 4 Meg
As Shown
J3
Fig. 1-6.
1-8
Central
Processor
System Watchdog
J3 In = Enabled
J3 Out = Disabled
(Always Enabled)
Central Processor Module - Jumper Settings
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
1.6.
Input/Output (I/O) Modules
Omni flow computers utilize an I/O bus system. All I/O is modular and plug-in
for easy field maintenance and replacement. I/O circuitry is also photo-optically
isolated from all field wiring which makes it relatively immune to electrical noise
and prevents damage to the electronics.
Your Omni Flow Computer has a combination of 3 types of I/O modules:
o Digital I/O Modules
o Serial I/O Modules
o Process I/O Combo Modules
A and B Type Combo Modules
E and E/D Type Combo Modules
H Type Combo Modules
Almost any combination of I/O mix can be accommodated in the flow computer.
The only limitations are the number of I/O connectors (4 on Omni 3000, 10 on
Omni 6000) and the number of wires connecting them to the back panel field
wiring terminals (48 for Omni 3000, 120 for Omni 6000).
Your Omni Flow Computer has a standard order in which the modules are
plugged-in (Fig. 1-7; also see Fig. 1-2 and Fig. 1-3). This provides a standard
termination layout.
TB6
TB7
TB8
TB9
TB10
24
Digital I/O 1-12

12
13
TB2
TB3
TB4
24
Fig. 1-7.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
TB1
Combo I/O # 2
Combo I/O # 6
Combo I/O # 1
TB5
Combo I/O # 5
Serial I/O 3 & 4
TB4
Combo I/O # 4
Serial I/O 1 & 2
TB3
Combo I/O # 3
Digital I/O 13-24
TB2
Combo I/O # 2
12
13
Digital I/O 1 - 12
TB1
Omni 3000
Serial I/O 1 & 2
Omni 6000
Combo I/O # 1
INFO - Mother board

connectors do not have a
specific address. These are
pre-established at the
factory. Each Omni Flow
Computer will be supplied
with a termination diagram
indicating these settings.
Matching the I/O Modules to the Back Panel Terminations
1-9
1.6.1.
Photo-Optical Isolation Transducer signals are
converted by the LED into
high frequency pulses of
light. These are sensed by
the photo-transistor which
passes the signal to the flow
computer.
Note that no electrical
connection exists between
the transducers and the
computer circuits.
Photo-Optical Isolation
The microprocessor circuitry is isolated via photo-optical devices from all field
wiring to prevent accidental damage to the electronics, including that caused by
static electricity. Photo-optical isolation also inhibits electrical noise from
inducing measurement errors. Independent isolation of each process input
provides high common-mode rejection, allowing the user greater freedom when
wiring transmitter loops. Furthermore, it minimizes ground loop effects and
isolates and protects your flow computer from pipeline EMI and transients.
Pipeline
Transducer
Signals That
May Pass On
Damaging
Transient
Noise
Fig. 1-8.
1-10
Opto Coupler IC
LED
Photo
Transistor
Isolated
Transducer
Signals
Passed On
To Sensitive
Computer
Circuits
Photo-optical Isolation - How It Works
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
1.6.2.
INFO - Only 1 digital I/O
module can be used on the
Omni 3000 and a maximum
of 2 on the Omni 6000.
Digital I/O Modules
Inputs and outputs are provided for control of prover functions, remote
totalizing, sampler operation, tube control or injection pump control. A digital I/O
module is used, providing a total of 12 digital I/O points. Each point can be
configured independently as an input or output. It is individually fused and
includes LEDs indicating that the point is active or if the fuse is blown.
Sequence and control is provided by assigning outputs to user programmable
Boolean variables using simple logic statements involving internal and external
events, including delay-on timers and delay-off timers. The digital I/O module
normally occupies I/O Slots 1 and 2 on the Omni 6000 backplane, and I/O Slot
1 on Omni 3000.
Module Address
Jumper
Interrupt Request
Select Jumpers for
Pipe Prover Detector
Select D1
I/O Point LEDs - Each digital

I/O point has 2 LEDs (green
and red) which indicate its
status. A solid glowing green
LED means that the digital
point is assigned as an input
and is receiving a signal. A
blinking green LED indicates
it is assigned as an output
and that it is actively
communicating. A solid
glowing red LED denotes that
the fuse for that I/O point is
blown.
JP1
JP2
JP3
JP4
A5
Select D2
A5
F3
F1
F6
F5
F4
F9
F8
F7
F12
F11
F10
I/O Point
#01
JP1 In = Dig. 1 Rising Edge Trigger
JP2 In = Dig. 1 Falling Edge Trigger
JP3 In = Dig. 2 Rising Edge Trigger
JP4 In = Dig. 2 Falling Edge Trigger
NOTE: If D2 remove all jumpers
Individual Fuses
for Each I/O Point
Fig. 1-9.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
F2
LEDs Indicate Point

Active and Fuse Blown
#12
Digital I/O Module Model # 6011 - Jumper Settings
1-11
1.6.3.
Serial Communication Modules
RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205

INFO - Up to 12 flow
computers and/or other
compatible serial devices can
be multi-dropped using
Omnis proprietary RS-232-C
serial port. Thirty-two
devices may be connected
when using the RS-485
mode. Typically, one serial
I/O module is used on the
Omni 3000, providing two
ports. A maximum of two
serial modules can be
installed in the Omni 6000,
providing four ports.
Multivariable Transmitting
Devices - In addition to the
Serial I/O Module # 68-6205,
the flow computer must also
have an SV Module to
communicate with
multivariable transmitters.
This serial module is
jumpered to IRQ 3 when
used in combination with an
SV Module. Without an SV
Module, the jumper is placed
at IRQ 2. The SV Module
can only be used with this
serial module (68-6205) and
is not compatible with the
Serial I/O Module # 68-6005.
For more information, see
Technical Bulletin # TB980303.
Serial I/O Module # 68-6205 is capable of handling two communications ports

Each serial communication port is individually optically isolated for maximum
common-mode and noise rejection. Although providing RS-232C signal levels,
the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share one serial link.
Communication parameters such as baud rate, stop bits and parity settings are
software selectable.
In addition to RS-232, jumper selections have been provided on each port to
allow selection of RS-485 format. With this option, a total of two RS-485 ports
are available on each module.
Address Selection
Jumpers
Address S1
Selected
Address S2
Selected
LED Indicators
IRQ 2 Selected
Port #2
Jumpers
Port #1
Jumpers
Fig. 1-10. RS-232/485 Module #68-6205 Showing Selection Jumpers and

LED Indicators
1-12
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1

The RS-232/485 Module has been designed so that RS-232 or RS-485
communications standards can be selected by placement of 16-pin resistor
networks into the correct blocks. The following diagrams show the locations of
blocks JB1, JB2, JB3 for Port #1, and JB4, JB5, JB6 for Port #2 for each
format.
RS-232
JB1 or JB4
JB2 or JB5
RS-485
RS-485 2-WIRE
JB3 or JB6
RS-485
TERMINATED
RS-485 2-WIRE TERMINATED

Terminated/Nonterminated RS-485 - The
RS-485 devices located at
each extreme end of an RS485 run should be
terminated. Note that the
device located at an extreme
end may or may not be an
Omni Flow Computer.
JB1 or JB4
JB2 or JB5
RS-485 2-WIRE NON-TERMINATED
JB3 or JB6
JB1 or JB4
JB2 or JB5
JB3 or JB6
RS-232/485
NON-TERMINATED
RS-232
RS-232/485 4-WIRE
RS-232

JB1 or JB4
JB2 or JB5
RS-232/485 4-WIRE
RS-485
TERMINATED
JB3 or JB6
JB1 or JB4
RS-232/485
RS-232
JB2 or JB5
JB3 or JB6
RS-485 2-WIRE
RS-232
RS-485
TERMINATED
Fig. 1-11. Layout of Jumper Blocks Showing RS-232/485 Formats
ALL.71+ w 04/98
1-13
Omni 6000
(Omni 3000)
Terminal
TB3 (TB2)
Note: Users of Micro

Motion RFT 9739 devices
connected the peer-to-peer
port (Port #2) of the Omni,
please note that the resistor
networks should be
positioned for 2-wire RS-485
and that Terminal (A) from
the RFT 9739 should be
wired to Omni 7 and (B) from
the RFT must be wired to
Terminal 11.
First
Serial
Port
Second
Serial
Port
RS-232-C
RS-485
2-Wire
RS-485
4-Wire
TX
TX-B
TERM
RX
RX-A
GND
GND
GND
RTS
TX-A
RDY
RX-B
TX
TX-B
TERM
RX
RX-A
10
GND
GND
GND
11
RTS
TX-A
12
RDY
RX-B
Fig. 1-12. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232/485 Module #68-6205
1-14
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1

Dual RS-232-Compatible Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005
computers can be multidropped to one RS-232C
serial device. Typically, one
serial I/O module is used on
the Omni 3000, providing two
Dual channel serial communication modules can be installed providing two RS232-C ports. Each serial communication port is individually optically isolated for
maximum common-mode and noise rejection. Although providing RS-232C
signal levels, the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share
one RS-232 device. Communication parameters such as baud rate, stop bits
and parity settings are software selectable.
S1
Serial Ports 1 & 2

Use the S1 Module
Setting
S0
Serial Ports 3 & 4

Use the S0 Module
Setting
RTS Out
TX Out
Chan. B
RTS Out
TX Out
Chan. A
LED Indicators
RX In
RDY In
RX In
Chan. A
Chan. B
RDY In
Fig. 1-13. Dual RS-232 Serial I/O Module Model - Jumper Settings
Serial Port Assignments

The first port can be configured as a Modbus protocol port. It can also be
configured as a printer port. The printer can be shared between multiple flow
computers. Reports can be printed on a daily, batch end, timed interval or on
demand basis. A reprint function provides backup should you experience printer
problems at any time. Customized report templates are input using the
OmniCom Configuration PC Software.
The second, third, and fourth ports are independent Modbus protocol channels.
The complete database of the flow computer is available for upload and
download. The OmniCom configuration program provided by Omni can use any
of these ports.
The fourth RS-232C can also be set up to communicate with Allen-Bradley PLC
devices.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
1-15
1.6.4.
Process I/O Combination Modules
Meter runs utilize plug-in modules which include all necessary analog/digital
(A/D) converters and control circuitry. User selection of process I/O is available
with combo cards that can be a mix of meter pulse, frequency densitometer,
4-20 mA, 4-wire 100 ohm RTD inputs, and 4-20 mA outputs.
All process measurements such as temperature, pressure, density, and flow are
input via these process I/O combo modules. Each module will handle 4 inputs
of a variety of signal types and provides one or two 4-20 mA analog outputs
(except the SV Module which has six 4-20 mA outputs).
Seven types of combo I/O modules are available: A, B, E, E/D, H, HV and SV.
All modules accept analog and pulse frequency type inputs, except for the H
and HV Modules which interface digitally with Honeywell Smart Transmitters,
and the SV Module which interfaces serially with RS-485 compatible
The A and B Types use identical I/O boards. Likewise, the E and E/D Modules
are also identical, except for the position of a configuration jumper which
selects the type and address of each module.
INFO - The flow computer
allocates the physical I/O
point numbers according to
the module IDs, not the
position occupied on the
backplane.
Each of the combo modules installed must have a different identity i.e., you
cannot have two or more modules of the same type and address. Valid IDs are:
A1 through A6, B1 through B6, E/D-1 through E/D-6, E1 through E6, H1 through
H6, and SV1 through SV2. Only one HV Module can be installed.
Modules are plugged into DIN type connectors on the passive backplane. Each
backplane connector has 12 circuits which connect to the back panel terminal
strips via ribbon cables. Combo I/O modules are plugged into the backplane
starting at I/O Position #5 (Omni 6000) or I/O Position #3 (Omni 3000) and
working towards Position #10 (Omni 6000) or Position #4 (Omni 3000). The
preferred order is lowest number A Type to highest number H Type, them SV
and HV Modules.
The following chapter deals in more detail with process I/O combo modules and
includes illustrations and jumper settings. (See Chapter 2 Process I/O Combo
Module Setup.)
1-16
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
1.7.
Operating Power - The
indicated power is maximum
and includes the power used
by transmitter loops, etc. It
will vary depending on the
number of modules installed,
the number of current loops
and any digital output loads
connected.
CAUTION!
POTENTIAL FOR DATA

LOSS!
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Operating Power
Omni flow computers can be AC or DC powered.

When AC powered, 120 VAC 50 Watts is applied to the AC plug. For powering
transmitter loops when AC powered, approximately 500 mA at 24 VDC is
available from the DC terminal block. The flow computer can be special ordered
for operation on 220-250 VAC supplies. This requires a modified power supply
unit and a different cord set. AC power to the unit is fused by a 0.5 Amp (5x20
mm) slow-blow fuse located in the AC power receptacle.
To DC power the flow computer, apply 18 to 30 VDC, 50 Watts to the DC
terminal block. DC power into or out of the back panel DC power terminals is
fused by a 3 Amp, 2 AG fast-blow fuse located on the back panel next to the
DC power terminals.
All analog and digital circuits within the flow computer are powered from a 5volt switching regulator located on the power supply module. This is located in
the rear most connector on the computer backplane. The DC power which
supplies the switching regulator either comes directly from the DC terminals on
the back panel of the flow computer (18-30 VDC) or by rectifying the output of
the integral 120 VAC (240 VAC) to 20 VAC transformer. Regulated 5-volt power
is monitored by a 3-4 second shutdown circuit located on the power supply
module. When power is applied to the computer there will be a delay of 3 to 4
seconds before the unit powers up.
A recommended maximum of 500 mA of transducer loop power is available
with a fully loaded Omni system of 6 combo I/O modules, 2 digital I/O modules
and 2 dual serial I/O modules. The Omni must be DC powered if this 500 mA
limit is to be exceeded.
The maximum system configuration of the Omni is 24 process inputs, 12
process outputs, 24 digital I/O points, and 4 serial I/O channels dissipates
approximately 24 Watts. This causes an internal temperature of 15F (8.33C)
over the ambient. The unit should not be mounted in a cabinet or panel where
the ambient inside the cabinet will exceed 110F (43.33C).
1-17
CAUTION
The Power Low and +5 v

Adjust are factory
adjustments that require the
use of special equipment.
DO NOT attempt to adjust.
AC Connector
Fig. 1-14. Power Supply Module Model # 68-6118
1-18
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
1.8.
Firmware and Software
Omni flow computers are supplied with pre-programmed firmware and PC

configuration software which permit a single unit to perform a great diversity of
combined flow measurement tasks, such as:
o Multiple Meter Run Totalizing, Batching, Proving, and Data Archiving
o Flow and Sampler Control
o Direct Interface to Gas Chromatographs and Smart/Multivariable
Transmitters
o Selectable Communications Protocols to Directly Interface to DCS, PLC
and SCADA Host Systems
The flow computer database numbers thousands of data points and provides
the tightest communications coupling yet between SCADA and the metering
system.
1.8.1.
Interrupt-Driven CPU
This is a very important aspect to firmware. It provides for a multi-tasking

environment in which priority tasks can be undertaken concurrently with
unrelated activity. This provides for high-speed digital signals to be output at the
same time as measurement computations and serial communications to a
printer or host computer, without degradation in speed or tasking.
All custody transfer measurement programs are stored in EPROM or Flash
Memory. This prevents damage due to electrical noise, or tampering with the
integrity of calculation specifications. SRAM programming can also be
accommodated.
1.8.2.
Cycle Time
All time-critical measurement functions are performed by the flow computer

every 500 msec. This provides greater accuracy of measurement calculations
and permits a faster response by pipeline operations in critical control functions,
such as opening or closing valves.
1.8.3.
On-line Diagnostics and Calibration
Extensive diagnostic software is built into the system which allows the
technician to locally or remotely debug a possible problem without interrupting
on-line measurement. Calibration of analog signals is performed through the
keypad and software. The system has only two potentiometers, both of which
are on the power supply and are factory set and need no adjustment.
1.8.4.
PC Communications Interface
The wide use of PCs and video display units makes it possible to provide
software for off-line/on-line access to measurement, configuration and
calibration data. Collection of historical reports, including alarms, interval
reports of any time sequence, liquid batch and prove reports, and full remote
technical intervention capabilities are also provided.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
1-19
1.8.5.
INFO - Full details about the
OmniCom configuration
program are documented in
Appendix C.
1-20
OmniCom Configuration PC Software
On-line or off-line configuration of your Omni Flow Computer is possible using

an IBM PC compatible running the OmniCom program supplied with your flow
computer. This powerful software allows you to copy, modify and save to disk
entire configurations. The program also allows you to print customized reports
by inputting report templates that are uploaded to the flow computer.
1.8.6.
INFO - The current firmware
has been fully tested and
assured to be in
conformance to Year 2000
requirements. For more
information, please contact
our technical support staff.
Year 2000 Compliance
Omni flow computer firmware has been tested in conformance to Year 2000
requirements. It will accurately process time- and date-related data after
December 31st, 1999. Software and hardware designed to be used before,
during and after the calendar year 2000 will operate appropriately relating to
date information. All calculating and logic of time-related data will produce the
expected results for all valid date values within the application.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
1.9.
CAUTION!
POTENTIAL FOR DATA

LOSS!
Initializing Your Flow Computer
A processor reset signal is automatically generated when:

1) Power is applied.
2) The processor reset switch at the rear of the front panel is toggled.
3) The watchdog timer fails to be reset by firmware every 100 milliseconds.
The flow computer will perform a diagnostic check of all program and randomaccess memory whenever any of the above events occur.
The program is stored with a checksum in Non-volatile Read-only Memory. The
program alarms if the calculated checksum differs from the stored checksum.
The most obvious cause of such a problem would be a bent pin on a program
memory chip. The validity of all data stored in RAM memory is checked next.
This data includes totalizers, configuration data and historical data. Any
problems here will cause the computer to initialize the RAM and display the
following message:
RAM Data Invalid
Reconfigure
System
Using OMNI as
Initial Password
If due to the RAM area in the computer not agreeing with the checksum area,
the computer will display the following message:
RAM & Calibrate Data
Invalid, Reconfigure
& Re-calibrate Using
OMNI as Password
Assuming that the EPROM memory and RAM memory are valid, the flow
computer then checks the software configuration against the installed I/O
modules and displays a screen similar to the following:
INFO - For information on

adjusting module
configuration settings, see
Volume 3.
Module S-Ware H-Ware

A-1
Y
Y
B-1
Y
N
D-1
Y
Y
S-1
N
Y
Revision No. 023.70
EPROM Checksum 1B36
A N in the hardware column indicates that a module has been removed since
the software was configured. A N in the software column indicates that a
module has been added. In either case you should make the columns agree by
adding or removing modules or re-configuring the software.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
1-21
Volume 1
2. Process Input/Output Combination Module

Setup
INFO - User selection of
process I/O is available with
combo cards that can be a
mix of meter pulse, frequency
densitometer, 4-20mA, 4wire 100 ohm RTD inputs,
and fused 4-20mA outputs.
Combo Module Input
Features - The input
characteristics of each
combo module are as follows
(see table on right):
A Type: Each input can be
1-5v; 4-20mA. Inputs #1
and #2 also accept RTD.
Inputs #3 and #4 also
accept flow pulse signals.
B Type: Inputs #1, #2 & #3
can be 1-5v; 4-20mA.
Inputs #1 and #2 also
accept RTD. Input #3 also
accepts flow pulses and
Input #4 is fixed as a
frequency density input.
E/D Type: Inputs #1 and #2
can be 1-5v; 4-20mA and
RTD. Inputs #3 and #4
are frequency density.
E Type: Inputs #1 and #2
can be 1-5v; 4-20mA and
RTD. Inputs #3 and #4
accept flow pulses.
H Type: All inputs are
Honeywell DE Protocol.
HV Type: All inputs are
Honeywell Multivariable
DE Protocol.
SV Type: Each port (#1 and
#2) is capable of RS-485
multi-drop to various
2.1.
Introduction
All process measurement signals are input via the process I/O combination (or
combo) modules plugged into the backplane of the computer. There currently
are 7 types of combo modules available: A, B, E, E/D, H, HV, and SV Types.
The 7 types of modules are actually manufactured using only 4 types of printed
circuit modules. The first can be configured as either an A or B Module; the
second is used for an E or E/D Module; the third printed circuit is used for an H
or HV Type Module; and the fourth for an SV Module.
2.2.
Features of the I/O Combo Modules
Each combo module (except the SV Module) will handle 4 inputs of a variety of
signal types and provides one or two 4-20 mA analog outputs. The SV Module
has two ports and six 4-20 mA analog outputs. Only the E Combo Module has
Level A pulse fidelity checking and double chronometry proving capabilities.
The input/output capabilities and some of the features of the combo modules
are expressed in the following table.
INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES AND FEATURES OF EACH I/O COMBO MODULE T YPE

TYPE
INPUT #1
INPUT #2
INPUT #4
LEVEL A
FIDELITY
DOUBLE
CHRONOMETRY
PROVING
A
1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD
1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD
E/D
1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD
1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD
Two
4-20mA
No
No
One
4-20mA
No
No
Frequency Density
Two
4-20mA
No
No
Flow Pulses
Two
4-20mA
Yes
Yes
1-5v; 4-20mA; Flow Pulses

1-5v; 4-20mA
Flow Pulse
Frequency
Density
Honeywell DE Protocol
Two
4-20mA
No
No
HV
Honeywell Multivariable DE Protocol
Two
4-20mA
No
No
Six
4-20mA
No
No
PORT #1
SV
ALL.71+ w 04/98
INPUT #3
ANALOG
OUTPUTS
PORT #2
RS-485 Multi-drop to Various Multivariable Transmitters
2-1
Chapter 2
Process Input/Output Combination Module Setup
2.2.1.
Setting the Address of the Combo Modules
Jumpers are provided on each combo module which allow the user to select the
address needed to access the module. Changing the software functions of the
module is also done by moving the appropriate jumper; i.e., A or B Type, E or
E/D Type.
2.2.2.
Hardware Analog Configuration Jumpers
Other jumpers are provided on each module which select the correct hardware
analog configuration for the type of signal that each input channel will accept.
This allows the same basic hardware module to accept signals such as 4-20
mA, 1-5 VDC, 100 ohm RTD probes and voltage or current pulses from a
turbine, PD meter or digital densitometer.
2.2.3.
IMPORTANT!
Combo I/O modules are

sorted alphabetically and by
low- to-high address. Adding
or removing cards may
change the existing sort if the
Check I/O function is
executed.
Process I/O Combo Module Addresses Versus

Physical I/O Points
A flow computer will usually have several combo modules installed depending
on the number of flowmeter runs to be measured. If for example, 2 A Type, 2 B
Type, 1 E/D Type and 1 E Type Modules were installed, they would normally be
numbered A1, A2, B1, B2, E/D1 and E1. Other address combinations are
acceptable (e.g.: A2, A3, B1, B4, E/D2 & E2 ) as long as each has a unique
identity. In the above example where 6 modules (A1, A2, B1, B2, E/D1 & E1)
are installed, the physical I/O points are mapped as follows. (Note that E/D
modules come before the E modules!)
To standardize, Omni recommends that combo modules should always be
installed starting with the lowest number A Type Module in I/O Slot #5 (Slot #3
in Omni 3000) as shown, with additional modules being installed in ascending
order towards Slot #10 (Slot #4 in Omni 3000).
PROCESS I/O COMBO MODULE ADDRESSES VERSUS PHYSICAL I/O POINTS
2-2
M ODULE IDENTITY
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
BACKPLANE POSITION
PHYSICAL TERMINALS
A1
1-4
1&2
Slot 5
TB5 1-12
A2
5-8
3&4
Slot 6
TB6 1-12
B1
9-12
Slot 7
TB7 1-12
B2
13-16
Slot 8
TB8 1-12
E/D1
17-20
7&8
Slot 9
TB9 1-12
E1
21-24
9 & 10
Slot 10
TB10 1-12
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
2.2.4.
Assigning Specific Signal Inputs
The Omni factory pre-assigns the physical I/O points of each flow computer
based on information supplied at time of order. This configuration information is
stored in battery backed-up static CMOS RAM. If you wish to change or add to
these assignments, refer to the section Program Setup in Volume 3, Chapter
2 Flow Computer Configuration and follow these basic rules:
1) Digital densitometer signals can only be assigned to the fourth channel of
each B Type Combo Module, or the third and fourth channel of each E/D
Module.
2) RTD signals can only be assigned to the first or second channel of each
A, B, E/D or E combo module. Whenever possible, avoid using the
second RTD excitation current source of an A Type Combo Module as
this makes the second 4-20 mA output on that module inaccessable.
rd
3) Pulse signals from flowmeters can be assigned only to the 3 channel of
th
each combo module and/or the 4 channel of each A Combo Module and
E Combo Module (E/D Combo Modules excepted).
4) Pulse signals to be used for Pulse Fidelity Checking must be connected

rd
th
to the 3 and 4 channel of an E Combo Module with the third channel
assigned as the flow input.
rd
th
5) Use the 3 and 4 input channels of an E Combo Module for double
chronometry proving.
INFO - The message I/O

Type Mismatch is
displayed if you try to assign
the same physical I/O point
to more than one type of
variable.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
6) Physical I/O points may be assigned to more than one variable (i.e.,
common temperature or pressure sensors) but variable types cannot be
mixed (i.e., the same physical point cannot be assigned to temperature
and pressure, for example).
2-3
Chapter 2
2.2.5.
Sample Omni Flow Computer Configuration

Charts
The charts (below and facing page) are examples of the configuration chart
supplied with your flow computer. It shows the type of combo modules installed,
the assigned process variables, the I/O point numbers and the jumper settings
for each input channel. To avoid confusion, we recommend that you plan any
changes to the physical I/O setup on such a chart before making any changes.
Fig. 2-1.
2-4
Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 3000
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
CUSTOMER________________________ P.O.#____________
S.O.#_______
SOFTWARE________________________ COMPUTER
S/N__________________
MODEL #_________________________
TAG#__________________________
Fig. 2-2.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 6000
2-5
Chapter 2
2.3.
The A and B Combo I/O Modules
All I/O signals of the combo module are converted to the form of high frequency
pulse trains (0 to 25 kHz). These pulse trains are passed through opto-couplers
providing electrical isolation.
All 4 process inputs can accept analog input voltages which are first buffered
with a 1 megohm input buffer and then converted to pulse frequencies using
precision voltage-to-frequency converters. With 2 averaged 500 millisecond
samples, analog conversion resolution is 14 binary bits. Linearity is typically
0.01% and the temperature coefficient is trimmed to better than 15 PPM/F.
Current inputs such as 4-20 mA are converted to 1-5 VDC by jumpering-in a
250 ohm shunt resistor.
The conversion gain of Input Channels 1 and 2 can also be increased by a
factor of 10, allowing low level RTD signals (0.20 - 0.55 VDC) to be accepted.
Input Channels 3 and 4 can also be jumpered to accept pulse signals (0-12
kHz). In this case, the input stage is configured as Schmitt Trigger, whose
threshold is 3.5 VDC and hysteresis 0.5 VDC. The voltage-to-frequency
converter is bypassed in this mode. Input Channel 4 can also be jumpered for
AC coupling and a 1-volt trigger threshold, making it suitable for interfacing to
Solartron type densitometers.
Analog Outputs #1 and #2 are obtained in the reverse fashion. A softwarecontrolled pulse train (100 Hz to 5.0 kHz) is passed through opto-couplers and
converted to a current using precision frequency-to-current converters.
Resolution of these outputs is approximately 12 binary bits. The second analog
output is not available when the module is jumpered as a B Type.
A/B Module Type

Select Jumper
AC / DC Coupling
Channel # 4 Input
Channel #4 Pulse
Input Threshold
Input Channel #4
Input Channel #3
Input Channel #2
Input Channel #1
Module Address
Jumpers
2nd. RTD Excitation Source
or
2nd Digital-Analog Output
Fig. 2-3.
2-6
Input Type Select

Jumpers
The A and B Combo I/O Module - Configuration Jumpers
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1

Two RTD excitation current sources (3.45 mA) are available on the combo
module. The second RTD excitation source will not be available if the second 420 mA analog output is in use (see setting of JP12). This is a function of the
number of circuits available from the back panel terminal to each combo
module. On a B Type module the second analog output is not available,
therefore this second RTD excitation source is always available.
2.3.1.
A and B Combo Module Non-Selectable or

Selectable Address
The Combo Type A or B Module can either have a non-selectable address or a

selectable Address.
The non-selectable address type is featured in older versions of the Omni Flow
Computer. The address is programmed into the Programmable Array Logic
(PAL) integrated circuit and is factory set. The module address can only be
changed by replacing the PAL chip.
The selectable type address is featured in current versions of the Omni.
Normally, it is preset at the factory, however it allows the user to change the
address simply by selecting the correct type and address on the selection
jumpers.
Non-Selectable Address
Selectable Address
TYPE B SELECT ONLY

COMBO ADDRESS SELECT
(A0 SHOWN)
Fig. 2-4.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
A and B Combo Module - Non-Selectable / Selectable Address
2-7
Chapter 2
2.3.2.
INFO - The second analog
output is not available in
cases where JP12 is used to
select the second RTD
excitation current source.
You may be able to avoid
using the second RTD
excitation source and save
losing an analog output by
using an unused excitation
source on another combo
module.
The A Type Combo I/O Module
The A Type Module is the most common configuration. It accepts 4 process

inputs and provides two 4-20 mA analog outputs. Each module is connected to
the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actual
terminal block used depends upon which backplane connector (?) the module is
plugged into.
A Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments
TB? Terminal 1
Input Channel #1 (1-5v, 4-20mA, RTD)
TB? Terminal 2
Input Channel #1 (Isolated Signal Return)
TB? Terminal 3
TB? Terminal 4
TB? Terminal 5
Input Channel #3 (1-5v, 4-20mA, Flowmeter Pulses)
TB? Terminal 6
TB? Terminal 7
Input Channel #4 (1-5v, 4-20mA, Flowmeter Pulses)
TB? Terminal 8
TB? Terminal 9
RTD Excitation Current Source #1
TB? Terminal 10
Signal Return Terminals 9, 11 & 12 (Internally connected to DC power return)
TB? Terminal 11
Analog Output #1 (4-20mA)
TB? Terminal 12
Analog Output #2 (4-20mA) or RTD Excitation Current Source #2 (See

JP12 Setting)
JP11
Select P
(Pulse Type
Input - Channel
3 or 4)
Chan 4 Threshold
JP11 In = 3.5 VDC
4-20mA Jumper Out
(Pulse Type Input)
JP11
Select Module Type

JPB Out = A Type
Address Select
(Address #2 Shown)
Module
A0
A1
A2
#1
Out Out Out
#2
In
Out Out
#3
Out
In
Out
#4
In
In
Out
#5
Out Out
In
#6
In
Out
In
Fig. 2-5.
2-8
JP12
RTD2
D/A2
JP12 In D/A2
Position
JP13 In DC
Coupled Position
A Type Combo Module - Flow Pulse Jumper Settings (Channel 3

or Channel 4)
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
JP11
Select A
(Analog Type)
Input
JP11
4-20 mA Jumper In
(Remove for
1-5VDC Input)
JP13 In DC Coupled
Position for Preamp
Turbine Meter Input
(Channel 4)
Fig. 2-6.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Configured for Configured for Configured for

4-20 mA Input 1-5 VDC Input
RTD Input
A Type Combo Module - Analog Input Jumper Settings
2-9
Chapter 2
2.3.3.
INFO - You will need either a
B Type Combo Module or
E/D Type Combo Module
when using digital
densitometers connected to
the flow computer.
With a B Type Combo
Module, Analog Output #2 is
never available because the
periodic time function uses
the internal timer counter that
is normally used to generate
the second analog output.
The B Type Combo I/O Module
The B Type Combo Module also handles 4 process inputs but Input Channel 4
is now used to measure the periodic time of a digital densitometer. The module
always has Input Channel 4 jumpered as a frequency input. Signal coupling can
be AC or DC with trigger threshold adjustable for 1.5 or 3.5 Vpp sensitivity.
Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the
ribbon cables. The actual terminal block used depends upon which backplane
connector (?) the module is plugged into.
B Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments
TB? Terminal 1
TB? Terminal 2
TB? Terminal 3
TB? Terminal 4
TB? Terminal 5
Input Channel #3 (1-5v, 4-20mA, DC Coupled Flowmeter Pulses)
TB? Terminal 6
TB? Terminal 7
Input Channel #4 (AC Coupled Densitometer Frequency)
TB? Terminal 8
TB? Terminal 9
TB? Terminal 10
Signal Return Terminals 9, 11 & 12 (Internally connected to DC power return)
TB? Terminal 11
Analog Output #1 (4-20mA)
TB? Terminal 12
JP11
Select P
(Pulse Type
Input)
Channel 4 Threshold
JP11 Out = Solartron
& Sarasota
JP11 In = UGC
JP11
Select Module Type

JPB Out = A Type
Address Select
(Address #2 Shown)
Module
A0
A1
A2
#1
Out Out Out
#2
In
Out Out
#3
Out
In
Out
#4
In
In
Out
#5
Out Out
In
#6
In
Out
In
Fig. 2-7.
2-10
JP12
RTD2
D/A2
JP12 In RTD2
Position
Pulse (Frequency) Type

Densitometer Requires AC
Coupling - Channel 4
B Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings - Frequency

Densitometer Setup
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
2.4.
The E/D and E Combo Modules
The hardware of E/D and E Combo Modules are similar to that of the A and B
Modules (discussed previously) except that these modules provide 2 analog
input channels which can be configured by jumpers for 1-5 volt, 4-20 mA or 4wire RTDs, and 2 pulse input channels which can be used to input flowmeter
pulses or densitometer frequency signals. Two 4-20 mA analog outputs are
always available on these modules. The module hardware can also be
configured by the application software to provide Level A Pulse Fidelity
Checking on the two pulse input channels.
2.4.1.
The E/D Type Combo I/O Module
The E/D Type Combo Module is simply an E Combo Module with the JPD
jumper in place. Input Channels 1 and 2 are analog input channels which can
be configured by jumpers for 1-5 volt, 4-20 mA, or 4-wire RTDs. Input Channels
3 and 4 are always configured to measure periodic time and accept pulse
signals from digital densitometers. Each module is connected to the back panel
terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers
used depend upon which backplane connector (?) the module is plugged into.
E/D Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments
TB? Terminal 1
TB? Terminal 2
TB? Terminal 3
TB? Terminal 4
TB? Terminal 5
Input Channel #3 (AC or DC Coupled Digital Densitometer Pulses) *
TB? Terminal 6
Input Channel #4 (AC or DC Coupled Digital Densitometer Pulses) *
TB? Terminal 7
Not Used
TB? Terminal 8
RTD Excitation Current Source #2 *
TB? Terminal 9
TB? Terminal 10
Signal Return for signals marked (*) (Internally connected to DC power return)
TB? Terminal 11
Analog Output #1 (4-20mA) *
TB? Terminal 12
Input Threshold Select

JP8 In = +1.2 Volt DC
JP* Out = +3.2 Volt DC
JP5
JP8 THRES
JP6
JP3
Select Module Type

JPD In = E/D Module
RTD 4-20
INPUT 1
JP5
JP8 THRES
JP2
JP7
AC DC AC
INPUT 3
Address Select
(Address #2 Shown)
Module
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
A0
Out
In
Out
In
Out
In
Fig. 2-8.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
A1
Out
Out
In
In
Out
Out
JP5
A2
Out
Out
Out
Out
In
In
JP2
JP7
AC DC AC
INPUT 4
AC Coupling
Select
AC DC AC
INPUT 3
JP6
RTD 4-20
INPUT 2
JP1 THRES
AC DC AC
INPUT 4
JP4
RTD 4-20
INPUT 1
JP6
RTD 4-20
INPUT 2
DC Coupling
Select
4-20 mA
Selected
E/D Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings
2-11
Chapter 2
2.4.2.
The E Type Combo I/O Module
The E Type Combo Module is simply an E/D Combo Module with the JPD
jumper out. Double chronometry timers are provided in this module
configuration, allowing either pulse train to be proved. Input Channels 1 and 2
are analog input channels which can be configured by jumpers for 1-5 volt, 4-20
mA, or 4-wire RTDs. Input Channels 3 and 4 are always configured to accept
flowmeter pulses. Both RTD excitation current sources are also always
available. Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12
wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers used depend upon
which backplane connector (?) the module is plugged into.
E COMBO MODULE BACK PANEL T ERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS

TB? Terminal 1
TB? Terminal 2
TB? Terminal 3
TB? Terminal 4
TB? Terminal 5
Input Channel #3 (AC or DC Coupled Flowmeter Pulses) *
TB? Terminal 6
Input Channel #4 (AC or DC Coupled Flowmeter Pulses) *
TB? Terminal 7
Double Chronometry Detector Switch In (Active Low) *
TB? Terminal 8
TB? Terminal 9
TB? Terminal 10
Signal Return for signals marked (*)

return)
TB? Terminal 11
TB? Terminal 12
Input Threshold Select

JP8 In = +1.2 Volt DC
JP* Out = +3.2 Volt DC
(Internally connected to DC power
JP5
JP8 THRES
JP6
JP3
Select Module Type

JPD Out = E Module
RTD 4-20
INPUT 1
JP5
JP8 THRES
JP2
JP7
AC DC AC
INPUT 3
Address Select
(Address #2 Shown)
Module
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
A0
Out
In
Out
In
Out
In
Fig. 2-9.
2-12
A1
Out
Out
In
In
Out
Out
JP5
A2
Out
Out
Out
Out
In
In
JP2
JP7
AC DC AC
INPUT 4
AC Coupling
Select
AC DC AC
INPUT 3
JP6
RTD 4-20
INPUT 2
JP1 THRES
AC DC AC
INPUT 4
JP4
RTD 4-20
INPUT 1
JP6
RTD 4-20
INPUT 2
DC Coupling
Select
4-20 mA
Selected
E Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
2.5.
The H Type Combo I/O Module
The H Type Combo Module is a special module which is used to communicate

using the Honeywell DE Protocol with 4 Honeywell Smart Transmitters. It
operates on a point-to-point basis. Honeywell Model ST3000 temperature,
pressure and differential pressure transmitters can be used. Transmitters
operating in the analog mode are automatically given a wake-up pulse and
switched into the DE Mode, as soon as they are connected and assigned a
meter run function. Two analog outputs are always available on this module.
Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the
ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers used depend upon which backplane
connector (?) the module is plugged into.
H Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments

TB? Terminal 1
Input Channel #1 (Transmitter Positive Terminal)
TB? Terminal 2
Input Channel #1 (Transmitter Negative Terminal)
TB? Terminal 3
TB? Terminal 4
TB? Terminal 5
TB? Terminal 6
TB? Terminal 7
TB? Terminal 8
TB? Terminal 9
Not Used
TB? Terminal 10

return)
TB? Terminal 11
TB? Terminal 12
Module Address
Jumpers
Green LED
Indicates Any
Activity
Red LED Indicates
OMNI is
Transmitting
Transmitter Loop
Status LEDs
Fig. 2-10. H Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings
ALL.71+ w 04/98
2-13
Chapter 2

Four sets of LED indicators show the status of each transmitter loop. The red
LED flashes when the flow computer is transmitting data to the transmitter, such
as a change of range, etc. The green LED shows that data is being received by
a channel. Note that each communication channel uses 2 wires and operates in
the half duplex/simplex mode which means that the green LED shows the flow
computers transmissions also. Each transducer is operated in the 6-byte
broadcast mode. In this mode, the process variable is updated approximately
every 300 msec. The database of the transducer is compared against the flow
computers database every 1 or 2 minutes, depending on the type of transducer.
Any changes to the transducer database which will affect the integrity of the
measured variable must be made via the flow computer.
These entries are:
o
o
o
o
Transducer Zero (Lower Range Value)

Transducer Full Scale (Upper Range Value)
Transducer Damping Code (Filter Time Constant)
Transducer Tag Name
The flow computer will not allow any other devices to alter these variables.
Should they be altered, by the Honeywell Smart Field Communicator (SFC) for
example, they will be restored to their original value as shown in the flow
computer (transducer tag name excepted).
2-14
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
2.6.
The HV Type Combo I/O Module
The HV Type Combo Module is simply an H Module with the JP1, JP2 and JP3
address jumpers in the right-most setting (Address 15). The HV Combo Module
is used to communicate with Honeywell SMV3000 multivariable transmitters
via the DE Protocol. Operation of the LEDs is similar to the normal H Module.
Since only one multivariable transmitter is needed per meter run and since
there are a maximum of four meter runs, there will never be a need for more
then one HV Combo I/O Module.
Two analog outputs are always available on this module. Each module is
connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables.
The actual terminal numbers used depend upon which backplane connector (?)
the module is plugged into.
HV Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments
TB? Terminal 1
TB? Terminal 2
TB? Terminal 3
TB? Terminal 4
TB? Terminal 5
TB? Terminal 6
TB? Terminal 7
TB? Terminal 8
TB? Terminal 9
Not Used
TB? Terminal 10

return)
TB? Terminal 11
TB? Terminal 12
Module Address
Jumpers
Green LED
Indicates Any
Activity
Red LED Indicates
OMNI is
Transmitting
Transmitter Loop
Status LEDs
Fig. 2-11. HV Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings
ALL.71+ w 04/98
2-15
Chapter 2
2.7.
The SV Type Combo I/O Module
The SV I/O Combo Module has two RS-485 serial ports which are used to
communicate with devices such as Rosemount 3095 multivariable
transmitters via the Modbus Protocol. Dual LEDs on each port provide status of
the communications. The module also has six 4-20 mA outputs.
SV Modules and Other
Combo Module Types The flow computer can
handle only two SV Modules
and three other A, B, E/D, E
or H I/O Combo Modules. An
HV module can also be
installed in lieu of one of
these I/O combo modules.
SV Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments

TB? Terminal 1
Port #1 B (RS-485)
TB? Terminal 2
Port #1 A (RS-485)
TB? Terminal 3
Port #2 B (RS-485)
TB? Terminal 4
Port #2 A (RS-485)
TB? Terminal 5
Signal Return for D/A Outputs signals marked (*)
TB? Terminal 6
Signal Return for D/A Outputs signals marked (*)
TB? Terminal 7
TB? Terminal 8
TB? Terminal 9
TB? Terminal 10
TB? Terminal 11
TB? Terminal 12
Jumper In = 1st MV Module

Jumper Out = 2 nd MV Module
MV Address
Selection Jumpers
IRQ 2 Always Selected
LED Indicators
PORT 1 (3)
PORT 2 (4)
RTS Always Selected
Transmitting (TX)/Ready-toSend (RTS) LEDs Red

Receiving LEDs Green
Both Jumpers In = Port Terminated

Both Jumpers Out = Port Unterminated
MV RS-485
Termination Jumpers
Fig. 2-12. Omni Multivariable Interface (SV Type Combo) Module Model
68-6203 - Jumper Settings
2-16
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
3. Mounting and Power Options

3.1.
Mechanical Installation
Omni offers a variety of enclosure options which can all be customized based
on customer specified requirements:
q Panel Mounting
q NEMA 4/4X
q NEMA 7
3.1.1.
Panel Mounting - Panels
less than 1/8 inch thick can
be used but will require that
the rear of the computer be
supported.
CAUTION!
Panel Mounting
A panel with the correct size cut out as dimensioned below is required. Panels
should be a minimum of 1/8 inch thick. Use the two keyed nuts and clamping
bars provided to mount the flow computer to the panel.

latching mechanism which
first must be disengaged by
lifting the bezel upwards
before withdrawing the unit
from the case.
IMPORTANT!
The maximum length of the

ribbon cable that connects
the keypad to the CPU
module is 18 inches. The
operation of the Central
Processor Module (CPU) will
be significantly affected if
this length is exceeded.
Fig. 3-1.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Panel Mounting - Omni 6000 (upper), Omni 3000 (lower)
3-1
Chapter 3
Mounting and Power Options
3.1.2.
Nema 4 / 4X Configurations
Both the NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X are weather-proof enclosures. The NEMA 4 is
a standard steel enclosure, whereas the NEMA 4X is a stainless steel
enclosure. Both Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 flow computers can be mounted
inside the NEMAs on a sturdy swing frame. The NEMAs also include a 5 x 3
viewing window with a lexan plate to allow easy viewing. Custom enclosures
are available.
NEMA 4 / 4X FOR OMNI 6000 / 3000
Dimensions
Weight
24 in x 24 in x 12 in
80 lbs
(610 mm x 610 mm x 305

mm)
(36 kg)
3.1.3.
Compliance
q NEMA 4, -12 & -13
q UL 50, Type 4
q CSA Enclosure 4
q IEC 529, IP66
Nema 7 Specification
The NEMA 7 is an explosion-proof enclosure which allows switch or pushbutton

options for manipulating the contained flow computer. The viewing window is
sustained by a 3 circular glass thick. Both the Omni 6000 and Omni 3000
flow computers can be mounted in the NEMA 7 with minimal specification
variances. Custom enclosures are available.
NEMA 7
Dimensions
FOR OMNI 6000
Weight
120 lbs
(54 kg)
12 in x 18 in x 9 in
(305 mm x 457 mm x 203
mm)
Compliance
q NEC
Division 1 & 2
Class I; Groups B, C & D
Class II; Groups E, F & G
Class III
q IEC
Zone 0 & 1
Groups IIC, IIB & IIA
NEMA 7
FOR OMNI 3000
Dimensions
Weight
12 in x 12 in x 8 in
(305 mm x 305 mm x 203
mm)
110 lbs
(50 kg)
Compliance
q NEC
Division 1 & 2
Class I; Groups B, C & D
Class II; Groups E, F & G
Class III
q IEC
Zone 0 & 1
Groups IIC, IIB & IIA
3-2
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
3.2.
INFO - A recommended
maximum of 500mA of
transducer loop power is
available with a fully loaded
system of 6 combo I/O
modules, 2 digital I/O
modules and 2 dual serial
I/O modules. The computer
must be DC powered if this
500 mA limit is to be
exceeded.
Input Power
The Omni Flow Computer can be AC or DC powered.
3.2.1.
AC Power
When AC powered, 120 VAC, 50 Watts is applied to the AC terminal block.

Approximately 500 mA at 24 VDC is always available from the DC terminal
block to drive transducer loops, pre-amplifiers, and digital I/O loads when the
unit is powered by AC.
The flow computer can be special ordered for operation on 220-250 VAC
supplies. This requires a modified power supply unit and a different cord set.
CAUTION!
POTENTIAL FOR DATA

LOSS!
3.2.2.
DC Power
When DC powered, 18 to 30 volts at 24 Watts is applied to the DC terminal

block (this wattage figure does not include power sourced from the digital output
terminals).
3.2.3.
Safety Considerations
To ensure continued protection against fire, the AC fuse must always be

replaced with a 0.5 amp (5x20 mm) slow blow fuse. The DC fuse must be
replaced by a 3 amp, 2 AG fast blow.
Power should be connected via a suitable power disconnect switch certified as
being safe for the area (for grounding requirements, see sidebar note on facing
page).
ENVIRONMENTAL - The
maximum system
configuration of 24 process
inputs, 12 process outputs,
24 digital I/O points and 4
serial I/O channels dissipates
approximately 24 Watts. This
causes an internal
temperature rise of 15F over
the ambient. The unit should
not be mounted in a cabinet
or panel where the ambient
inside the cabinet will exceed
110F.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
3-3
Chapter 3
3.3.
3.3.1.
Power Terminals
CE Equipment Power Terminals
In this current version of the Omni 3000 and Omni 6000 back panel the AC
receptacle is a power line filter with a separate AC fuse holder. The AC power is
connected via a separate 4-wire conductor cable which plugs into the power
supply. The DC terminal is on TB 11 (for Omni 6000) and on TB5 (for Omni
3000).
The power supply used with this version is a Model 68-6118; no fuses.
Back Panel Fuses - All DC

fuses are 3 amp, fast-blow
Model 225.003,
manufactured by Littlefuse.
All AC fuses are amp,
slow-blow Model 229.500,
manufactured by Littlefuse
Earth Ground
Requirements -To minimize
the effects of electrical
transients, the outer case of
the flow computer should be
connected to a high quality
earth ground using the
grounding stud located on
the back of the unit (see Fig.
3-2).
Connect the shields of all
wiring to the same grounding
stud. To eliminate earth loop
currents, shields should be
left unconnected and taped
back at the other end.
Fig. 3-2.
3-4
Input Power Terminals - Omni 3000 (upper), Omni 6000 (lower)
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
3.3.2.
Extended Back Panel Power Terminals
Several mounting options are now available with the Omni 6000 flow computer
by requesting the Extended Back Panel Termination option. This panel
incorporates all the terminal blocks of Versions 2 and 3, TB1 through TB10 with
terminals marked 1 through 12. Screw type terminals are provided for AC and
DC power. In addition to TB1 through TB10, extra DC (fused), return and shield
terminals are provided for TB1 through TB8. Extended 64-conductor ribbon
cables and the AC cables are provided with a standard length of 5 feet.
Amp
Extended Back Panel

Fuses - All DC fuses are
amp fast-blow manufactured
by Littlefuse, Model 225.250.
The main DC fuse is 3 amp.
The AC fuse is amp slowblow manufactured by
Littlefuse, Model 239.500.
The fuse for the back panels
AC receptacle is a 5x20mm,
amp slow-blow.
amp
3 Amp
Fig. 3-3.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Input Power Terminals - Extended Back Panel (Omni 6000 only)
3-5
Chapter 3
3-6
Fig. 3-4.
Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 6000)
Fig. 3-5.
Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 3000)
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
3.4.
Power Supply Module Switching

Regulator
All analog and digital circuits within the flow computer are powered from a 5volt switching regulator located on the power supply module. This is located in
the rear most connector on the computer backplane.
The DC power which supplies the switching regulator either comes directly from
the DC terminals on the back panel of the flow computer (18-30 VDC) or by
rectifying the output of the integral 120 VAC (240 VAC) to 20 VAC transformer.
DC power into or out of the back panel DC power terminals is fused by a 3
Amp, 2 AG fuse located on the back panel next to the DC power terminals.
Regulated 5-volt power is monitored by a 3 to 4 second shutdown circuit located
on the power supply module. When power is applied to the computer there will
be a delay of 3 to 4 seconds before the unit powers up.
CAUTION
The Power Low and +5 v

Adjust on the Power Supply
Module are factory
adjustments that require the
use of special equipment.
DO NOT attempt to adjust
Fig. 3-6.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Power Supply Module Model 68-6118
3-7
Volume 1
4. Connecting to Flowmeters
4.1.
Turbine Flowmeter (A or B Combo

Module)
Input Channels 3 and 4 can be independently jumpered to accept pulse signals.

Channel 3 on the A and B Combo Modules and Channel 4 on the A Combo
Module can be used to input turbine or positive displacement flowmeters. The
input threshold is 3.5 volts; hysteresis 1/2 volt.
Fig. 4-1.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Connecting to a Turbine Pre-amp (A or B Combo Modules)
4-1
Chapter 4
Connecting to Flowmeters
4.2.
Wiring Flowmeter Signals to E Type

Combo Modules
Input Channels 3 and 4 of each E Type Combo Module are used to input
signals from turbine or PD flowmeters. Both channels share a common signal
return at the Omni terminals. Input threshold can be jumpered for +1 or +3.5
volt. Input coupling can be AC or DC (see Chapter 2). Hysteresis is
approximately 0.5 volt.
Fig. 4-2.
4-2
Wiring to Turbine Pre-Amps (E Type Combo Modules Only)
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
4.3.
Faure Herman
Turbine Meters
(E Combo Module)
Faure Herman Turbine Meters are used in liquid applications only. For these
flowmeters, high threshold jumpers JP1 and JP8 on the E Type Combo Module
must be installed.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Fig. 4-3.
Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using Omni 24 VDC
Fig. 4-4.
Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using External 24 VDC
4-3
Chapter 4
Connecting to Flowmeters
4.4.
Pulse Fidelity and Integrity Checking

with E Type Combo Modules
A flowmeter with dual channel out-of-phase outputs can be connected as

shown. The flow computer can be configured to continuously compare the
signals for frequency and sequence on a pulse-to-pulse basis, and alarm and
log any differences. (See Volume 5, Technical Bulletin TB-970901 for more
information on Pulse Fidelity Checking.)
Fig. 4-5.
4-4
Connecting Dual Coil Turbines for Pulse Fidelity Checking
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
5.
Connecting to Transducers and

Transmitters
5.1.
Wiring the Input Transducers
Because of the high density of connections on the back panel terminal, it is

recommended that wiring to the terminals be made with 18-22 gauge wire
wherever possible. Transducers should be wired using twisted pairs of 18 gauge
shielded wire. The shields should be connected together and grounded at the
flow computer end. To prevent ground loops, shields should be taped back and
insulated at the transducer end.
Each of the 4-20 mA process input channels are individually optically isolated.
The transducer may be connected in series with either the power or return line
of the transducer current loop. The figure shown below shows a transducer
wired in the power leg of the loop.
Fig. 5-1.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Wiring the 4-20 mA Inputs (Input Channels 1 & 2 shown)
5-1
Chapter 5
Connecting to Transducers and Transmitters
5.2.
Wiring of a Dry C Type Contact
Certain types of flowmeter photo-pulsers produce a low frequency contact pulse

output (typical 1 pulse per barrel). To accommodate these low frequencies, they
can be wired to any pulse input on A or E Type Combo Modules, as shown
below.
Fig. 5-2.
5-2
Wiring for Dry C Type Contact
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
5.3.
INFO - Each A or B Type
Combo Module always has 1
RTD excitation current
source available at Terminal
9. A second source is always
available on B Types at
Terminal 12.
Wiring RTD Probes
Channels 1 and 2 of each combo I/O module can be jumpered to accept a

signal from a 100 ohm RTD probe. The flow computer can be configured for the
DIN 43-760 curve (= 0.00385) or the American curve (=0.00392). The probe
is wired in a 4-wire configuration as shown below.
TIP - The excitation current

source for an RTD need not
come from the same combo
module from which the signal
is input. You will need to
recalibrate the input channel
if you choose to use an
excitation source from
another combo module.
Fig. 5-3.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Wiring a 4-Wire RTD Temperature Probe
5-3
Chapter 5
5.4.
5.4.1.
INFO - Because the density
pulse signal can be a small
AC signal with a large DC
offset, you must select AC
coupling and low trigger
threshold for the combo
module channel used; i.e.: on
the B Type Combo Modules,
JP13 in the AC position and
JP11 out; on E/D Combo
Modules, JP2 and JP7 in the
AC positions and JP1 and
JP8 out.
Input impedance will be
10kohms; 1.5Vpp is required
from the densitometer to
reliably trigger the input.
Wiring Densitometers
Wiring Densitometer Signals to an E/D Type
Combo Module
Two independent densitometers with RTD probes can be wired directly to an

E/D type combo module. For example, Solartron and UGC densitometers
can be wired to the same E/D Type Module.
5.4.2.
Solartron
Densitometers
Connecting to a Solartron Digital Densitometer actually involves two devices:

the densitometer current pulse signal and the densitometer 4-wire RTD probe
attached to the vibrating tube. The pulse signal is connected to Channel 4 of a
B Type Combo Module. The RTD is connected to Channel 1 or Channel 2. The
device can be connected with or without safety barriers, depending on the
needs of the application.
INFO - When configuring the

flow computer, select the
DIN curve for this RTD
temperature point.
Fig. 5-4.
5-4
Wiring a Solartron Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a B

Type I/O Combo Module
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
NOTICE!
Diagrams shown are based

on published manufacturers,
data. Omni accepts no
responsibility for wiring or
installation of equipment in a
hazardous area. Equipment
must always be installed in
compliance with local and
national safety standards.
Fig. 5-5.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Wiring a Solartron Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a

B Type I/O Combo Module
5-5
Chapter 5
5.4.3.
pulse signal can be a small
AC signal with a large DC
offset, you must select AC
coupling and low trigger
threshold for the combo
module channel used; i.e.: on
the B Type Combo Modules,
JP13 in the AC position and
JP11 out; on E/D Combo
Modules, JP2 and JP7 in the
AC positions and JP1 and
JP8 out.
10kohms; 1.5Vpp is required
from the densitometer to
reliably trigger the input.
Sarasota
Densitometers
The Sarasota Densitometer provides a voltage pulse signal representing

density and also a 4-wire 100 ohm RTD probe monitoring the temperature of
the device. The pulse signal is connected to Channel 4 of a B Type Combo
Module. The RTD is connected to Channel 1 or Channel 2 of any module. The
device can be connected with or without safety barriers, depending on the
needs of the application.
Fig. 5-6.
Wiring a Sarasota Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a B

INFO - When configuring the

flow computer, select the
DIN curve for this RTD
temperature point.
5-6
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
NOTICE!

Fig. 5-7.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Wiring a Sarasota Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a

B Type I/O Combo Module
5-7
Chapter 5
5.4.4.
pulse signal is a large DC
pulse signal with little or no
DC offset, you must select
DC coupling with normal
trigger threshold for the
combo module channel used;
i.e.: on the B Type Combo
Modules, JP13 in the DC
position and JP11 in; on E/D
Combo Modules, JP2 and
JP7 in the DC positions and
JP1 and JP8 in.
1Mohms; <3.0Vfor low level
and >4V.0 for high level is
required from the
densitometer to reliably
trigger the input.
UGC
Densitometers
The UGC Densitometer output provides an open collector transistor that

requires an external pull-up resistor to 24 volts DC. The densitometer provides
a 24 volt DC pulse output in the range of 1 to 2 kHz. The pulse signal is
connected to Channel 4 of a B Type Combo Module and can be connected with
or without safety barriers, depending on the application requirements.
Fig. 5-8.
5-8
Wiring a UGC Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a B Type

I/O Combo Module
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
NOTICE!

Fig. 5-9.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Wiring a UGC Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a B

5-9
Chapter 5
5.5.
Wiring of Honeywell
ST3000
Transmitters
Up to four Honeywell Smart Transmitters can be wired to each H Type Combo

I/O Module. Loop power is provided by the combo module. No external power is
required.
Fig. 5-10. Wiring of a Honeywell Smart Transmitter
5-10
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
5.6.
5.6.1.
Wiring Micro Motion

Transmitters
Connecting Micro Motion
RFT9739 Transmitter
to A Type or E Type Process I/O Combination
Modules
The frequency/pulse output that represents the volume flow from the RFT9739
Transmitter can be wired directly into either Frequency Channel 3 or 4 on A
Type or E Type Combo Modules. (See Technical Bulletin TB-980401.)
Fig. 5-11. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter
ALL.71+ w 04/98
5-11
Chapter 5
5.6.2.

RFT 9739 via RS-485
Serial Communications
Serial communication via RS-485 can be accomplished using the Peer-to-Peer

Mode via Omni Serial Port #2 of the RS-232-C/485 Serial Module # 68-6205,
with selection jumpers in the RS-485 position. (See Technical Bulletin TB980401.)
OMNI BACK PANEL TERMINALS

SERIAL PORT #2 (PEER-TO-PEER)
RS-485 MODE SELECTED
7 (B)
8
9
10
11 (A)
Fig. 5-12. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof)

Transmitter Via Two-wire RS-485 Communications (Serial I/O Module #686205)
5-12
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
5.6.3.

RFT9739 via Serial
RS-232-C to 485 Converter
Serial communication via RS-485 can also be accomplished utilizing the Peerto-Peer Mode via RS-232-C. (See Technical Bulletin TB-980401.)
Fig. 5-13. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof)

Transmitter Via Serial RS-485 Converter
ALL.71+ w 04/98
5-13
Volume 1
6. Connecting Analog Outputs and

Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers
6.1.
Analog Outputs
Analog outputs are available for remote terminal units, flow controllers, and
recording devices. The analog outputs source 4-20 mA into a load wired to the
DC power return. Maximum load resistance is 1000 ohms at 25 VDC. Digital-toAnalog conversion is accomplished with a 12-bit binary resolution.
Two outputs are available on each A Type Combo Module. One output is
available on each B Type Combo Module.
To calibrate, each of the outputs is set to 4.00 and 20.00 mA and the software
zero and span adjusted while in the Diagnostic Mode (described later). Any
value between 2.5 and 23.0 mA may be output.
Each output is assigned via the keypad or serial link to one of the many
variables available (see Volume 3).
Fig. 6-1.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Wiring Devices to the Flow Computers Analog Outputs
6-1
Chapter 6
Connecting Analog Outputs and Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers
6.2.
6.2.1.
Digital Inputs/Outputs
Wiring a Digital Point as an Input or an Output
Digital I/O modules handle 12 digital points. Each point can be independently
configured as either an input or output via the keypad or via a serial port.
The power and returns for all digital I/O signals are common with the DC power
terminals. Digital output loads are connected between the I/O terminal and DC
power return. An approximate total load of 500 mA per module (per 12 points) is
allowed although an individual point can handle 200 mA. Voltages applied to
I/O points used as inputs must not exceed the DC supply voltage at the DC
terminal, or the protective fuse for that point on the digital I/O module may
blow.
Fig. 6-2.
6-2
Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Input
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
Fig. 6-3.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Output
6-3
Chapter 6
6.2.2.
Connecting Various Digital I/O Devices
On the Omni 6000, Digital I/O Module #1, handling points 1 through 12, is
plugged into the backplane connector marked I/O Module #1. This in turn is
connected to Terminal Strip TB1-1 through 12. Digital I/O Module #2, handling
points 13 through 24, is plugged into the backplane connector marked I/O
Module #2 which is connected to Terminal Strip TB2-1 through 12. The Omni
3000 has only one digital I/O module which is connected to Terminal TB1-1
through 12 on the back panel.
The diagram below shows the typical wiring required to interface to other
devices, such as: switches, relays, provers, programmable logic controllers,
among other devices.
Fig. 6-4.
6-4
Connecting Digital I/O Devices to the Flow Computer
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
6.3.
6.3.1.
INFO - The prover detector
switch signal activates an
interrupt request into the
computer. Jumpers JP1 and
JP2 on the digital I/O module
(Fig. 1-5) control which edge
of the signal will cause the
interrupt. Pulse counting
should start when the sphere
first activates the detector
switch. Install JP1 in cases
where the detector switchs
normally opened contacts are
used (Fig. 1-9). Install JP2 in
cases where the detector
switchs normally closed
contacts are used.
Note: When using double

chronometry proving, the
detector switch input is on
Terminal 7 of an E Type
Combo I/O Module.
Provers
Connecting Pipe Prover Detector Switches
Pipe prover detector switches are the only I/O signal that must be connected to
a specific I/O point. They must be wired as shown in Fig. 6-4 to Digital I/O
Point #1, and the point assigned to Boolean 1700 in the software configuration
(see Volume 3). This is because Digital I/O Point #1 is internally jumpered to
cause a high priority interrupt of the computer used to start and stop prover
counting. Digital I/O Point #1 can still be used as a normal I/O point if pipe
proving is not needed.
6.3.2.
Interfacing to a Brooks
Compact Prover
The Omni Flow Computer interfaces to the basic Brooks Compact Prover
Skid Electronics (the Brooks Control Box is not used). The control interface
involves one digital output to control the piston launch, a digital input point to
monitor the position of the piston, and a detector switch signal shared between
each meter run to be proved.
Compact provers use the Pulse Interpolation Method of measuring the
flowmeter counts between the detector switches. The interpolation method
requires that the detector switches activate high speed hardware timers on the
Omnis combo I/O module. The detector switch signals called first and final
pickoff by Brooks are connected to the Detector Switch input of each E Type
Combo Module installed in the flow computer.
The following diagram shows the complete installation, including 4-20 mA
signals representing the temperature and pressure of the prover tube as well as
the nitrogen plenum chamber. The 12-volt DC power supply is user supplied.
Fig. 6-5.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Wiring to a Brooks Compact Prover
6-5
Chapter 6
6.3.3.
Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooks
Compact Prover
The plenum chamber pressure is used as a spring to close the poppet valve of
the piston and cause the piston to be moved forward by the flowing liquid. The
pressure required to close the poppet valve varies with pipeline pressure. Too
high a plenum pressure causes the piston to be pushed downstream by this
excess pressure and can lead to inaccurate provings.
The Omni Flow Computer can monitor the plenum pressure and line pressure,
and automatically charge or vent nitrogen from the plenum chamber.
Before commencing a proving run, the Omni Flow Computer
plenum pressure versus the required pressure and activates either
or vent solenoid valve. The pressures will be matched within
entered deadband percent. The Omni activates the solenoids via
relays (not shown).
checks the
the charge
some user
low voltage
An additional enhancement shown is a pressure switch signaling low nitrogen

bottle pressure. In this case, the prove attempt would be aborted if it became
impossible to achieve the correct plenum pressure.
Fig. 6-6.
6-6
Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooks Compact Prover
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
7. Connecting to Serial Devices

7.1.
compatible serial devices can
be multi-dropped using
Omnis proprietary RS-232-C
serial port. Thirty-two
mode. Typically, one serial
I/O module is used on the
Omni 3000, providing two
RS-485 Communications
with an RS-232-C Serial I/O
Module #68-6005 - When
connecting to RS-485 serial
devices using Serial I/O
Module #68-6005, a RS-232to-485 Converter device must
be used.
Serial Port Connection Options
The total number of serial communication ports depends on the number of dual
port serial I/O modules installed. The Omni 6000 accepts 2 serial I/O modules;
the Omni 3000 accepts 1. Two optional serial communication I/O modules are
available with your flow computer (see Chapter 1): the RS-232-C (compatible)
Model #68-6005, and the RS-232-C/485 Model #68-6205. The older Model #686005 is only capable of RS-232 compatible serial communications. The newer
Model #68-6205 is capable of either RS-232 or RS-485 communications via a
selection jumper.
When jumpered for RS-232, the characteristics and functionality of this module
is identical to that of the older RS-232-C module, providing 2 optically isolated
RS-232-C serial ports which can operate from 0.3 to 38.4 kbps. These ports are
used for printers, personal computers, and SCADA devices. Although the output
voltage levels are compatible with the RS-232 standard, the output is actually
tristated when not sending data. This allows the transmit output from multiple
flow computers to be bussed. A terminating resistor is provided at the back
panel connections to pull down the transmitter signal to a mark (-9V). Hence, a
short jumper is required in many cases from TX (Out) to Term.
RS-485 communications allows interconnecting multiple flow computers,
programmable logic controllers, multivariable transmitters, and other serial
devices in either four-wire multi-drop mode or peer-to-peer two-wire multi-drop
mode.
Serial I/O Module # 68-6205,
the flow computer must also
have an SV Module to
communicate with RS-485
compatible multivariable
transmitters. This serial
module must be jumpered to
IRQ 3 when used in
combination with an SV
Module. Without an SV
Module, the jumper must be
placed at IRQ 2. The SV
Module can only be used with
this serial module (68-6205)
and is not compatible with
the Serial I/O Module # 686005. For more information,
see Technical Bulletin # TB980303.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
7-1
Chapter 7
Connecting to Serial Devices
7.2.
7.2.1.
INFO - The speed that data
can be accepted by the
printer depends on the size
of the input buffer (if any)
and the print mode (draft or
near letter quality). Typical
printers provide about 120
printed characters/second.
Connecting to Printers
Connecting to a Dedicated Printer (Port 1)
The following diagram shows the Omni Flow Computer connected to a

dedicated printer. The hardware handshake wire connected to Pin 20 of the
DB25 connector is optional, as the computer can be made to insert null
characters after each carriage return to match the computer data transmission
rate to the printer speed.
TIP - Most printers default to

the draft mode. Leave it there
for maximum performance.
Because of impact printer
limitations, no speed
improvement is obtained by
selecting baud rates over
2.4kbps.
Fig. 7-1.
7-2
Connecting a Printer to Serial Port #1 of the Flow Computer
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
7.2.2.
Connecting to a Shared Printer (Port 1)
Up to 12 Omni flow computers can share a printer. They are connected as

shown. One flow computer is assigned as the master and manages all traffic to
the printer. Each computer monitors the data transmitted to the printer by
having its TX terminal jumpered to its RX terminal. Resident firmware ensures
that only one computer will attempt to access the printer at any one time.
INFO - Note that only 1

terminating pull-down resistor
is jumpered in place.
Fig. 7-2.
7.2.3.
Note: Refer to Volume 3,
Chapter 2 for Printer
Settings.
Connecting Several Flow Computers to a Shared Printer
Print Sharing Problems
Most problems associated with printer sharing show up as garbled reports or

locked up printers. This is usually caused by one or more computers sending
data to the printer at the same time. Check your wiring to the figure above and
consult the following checklist if you experience problems:
1) Check that all computers are set to the same baud rate, stop bits, and
parity settings as the printer.
2) All computers must have the Transmitter Key Delay set to zero (0).
3) One and only one computer must have its Printer Priority Number set to
1. All computers must have a different priority number.
4) Some printers provide jumpers or switches which set the polarity of the
Printer Ready signal on Pin 20. This signal must be positive when the
printer is ready.
5) When not using the Printer Ready signal (Pin 20), ensure that you have
entered enough NULs to prevent overrunning the printer buffer.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
7-3
Chapter 7
7.3.
Note:
Depending upon whether

a printer or Allen-Bradley
PLC is used.
Connecting to a Personal Computer and

Modem
Ports #1 and #2 (Ports #3 and #4* of an Omni 6000) can provide access to the
computers database using a Modbus protocol interface. This port is usually
connected to a PC running the OmniCom configuration software. Up to 12
Omni flow computers can be connected to 1 PC. The Modbus protocol includes
an address field which ensures that only 1 unit will transmit at a time.

Fig. 7-3.
7-4
Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB25 Female

Connector (Using Port #2 as an example)
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1

ALL.71+ w 04/98
Fig. 7-4.
Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB9 Female

Connector
Fig. 7-5.
Connecting Port #2 to a Modem
7-5
Chapter 7
7.4.
Peer-to-Peer
Communications - The
peer-to-peer communication
feature allows you to multidrop up to 32 flow computers
and other devices in RS-485
serial communications mode,
and up to 12 using RS-232-C
communications.
Peer-to-Peer Redundancy
Schemes - Redundancy
schemes allows for
uninterrupted measurement
and control functionality by
interconnecting two
identically equipped and
configured flow computers
(see Technical Bulletin TB980402).
Peer-to-Peer Communications and Multidrop Modes
Serial Port #2 can also be configured by the application software to act as a

peer-to-peer Modbus master port. This is a half duplex/simplex link which
allows any Omni Flow Computer to communicate with any other flow computer
or Modbus slave device. That data link can operate at up to 38.4 kbps and uses
a proprietary token passing scheme. Interconnecting multiple flow computers
and or multiple serial devices can be accomplished via RS-232-Compatible or
RS-485 communications.
7.4.1.
Peer-to-Peer RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop Mode
The diagram below shows the wiring requirements for multi-dropping two or
more flow computers via RS-485 in two-wire mode. This option is available only
with the Omni Serial I/O Module #68-6205. (See Technical Bulletin #TB980401.)
UP TO 32 FLOW COMPUTERS
OmniCom and Peer-toPeer - The OmniCom

Configuration PC Software
package supplied with your
Omni Flow Computer cannot
be used on Serial Port #2
when it is being used as a
peer-to-peer link.
GND
RS-485 TWO-WIRE
TERMINATED
Fig. 7-6.
7-6
RS-485 TWO-WIRE
NON-TERMINATED
RS-485 TWO-WIRE
NON-TERMINATED
RS-485 TWO-WIRE
NON-TERMINATED
Wiring of Several Flow Computers using the Peer-to-Peer

Feature via RS-485 Communications in Two-wire Multi-drop
Mode
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
7.4.2.
Peer-to-Peer via RS-232-C Communications
more flow computers in RS-232 C (compatible) mode. When multi-dropping two
or more flow computers with other serial devices via the RS-232-C mode, an
RS-232-to-RS-485 standard converter may be required. (See Technical
Bulletin #TB-980401.)
Fig. 7-7.
7.4.3.
Note: Refer to Volume 3,
Chapter 2 Flow Computer
Configuration.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Wiring of Several Flow Computers in the Peer-to-Peer Mode

using RS-232-C Communications.
Keying the Modem or Radio Transmitter Carrier

in Multi-drop Applications
Use the RTS signal to key the modem or radio transmitter carrier in a multi-drop
application. A delay between activating the RTS signal and actually sending
data is provided to allow for carrier acquisition at the remote end. This delay
can be selected as 0.0 msec, 50 msec, 100 msec, or 150 msec.
7-7
Chapter 7
7.4.4.
RS-485 Four-wire Multi-drop Mode
more flow computers via RS-485 in four-wire mode to a third party PLC type
device. Note that in the wiring example shown below, the PLC acts as a master
and can communicate with either flow computer. A four-wire wiring system does
not allow communications between slaves; i.e., data can only be transferred
between master and slaves. The RS-485 option is available only with the Omni
Serial I/O Module #68-6205.
UP TO 32 RS-485 DEVICES
SLAVE
SLAVE
TX-B
MASTER
PLC DEVICE
A
RX
B
RX-A
A
GND
TX-A
RX-B
TX
B
RS-485
TERMINATED
RS-485 FOUR-WIRE RS-485 FOUR-WIRE

TERMINATED
NON-TERMINATED
Fig. 7-8.
7-8
Wiring of Multiple Flow Computers to a PLC Device Via RS-485

Communications in Four-wire Multi-drop Mode
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
7.5.
Connecting to a SCADA Device
When using an Omni 6000 with 2 serial I/O modules installed, a second
Modbus port (Physical Port #3 used as an example) can provide access to the
computers database. This port can also be connected to a PC or any SCADA
device either directly, via modem, or via radio link.
Fig. 7-9.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Typical Wiring of Port #3 to a SCADA Device via Modem
7-9
Chapter 7
7.6.
Interfacing the Fourth Serial Port to an

Allen-Bradley
KE Module
Port #4 is available on Omni flow computers with the second serial module
fitted. This port can be selected to communicate with Allen-Bradley devices
using DF1 full duplex or half duplex protocol, or set up for Modbus devices. The
example below assumes that the Allen-Bradley Protocol has been selected.
Fig. 7-10. Wiring Serial Port #4 to Allen-Bradley KE Communications

Module
7-10
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
8. Diagnostic and Calibration Features

8.1.
Introduction
In the diagnostic mode you can verify that the I/O modules and transducers are
working and are calibrated to specification.
The actual process transducers used may provide a variety of signal types,
ranging from voltage or current pulses of various levels, to linear analog signals
such as 4-20 mA., 1-5V, 0-1V or RTD elements. In the case of pulse inputs, the
input module provides amplification and/or level shifting, Schmitt triggering and
opto-isolation.
When analog signals are used the input module provides all signal conditioning,
opto-isolation, and converts the analog signal to a high frequency pulse train, in
the range of 0 - 20 kHz. By using a precision voltage to frequency converter,
typical linearity of +/-0.01 % is obtained.
Certain diagnostic displays are always available while in the Display Mode. For
example pressing [Input] then [Display] will display the raw frequency input
from each process input point. The up/down arrow keys can be used to scroll
through all inputs. A typical display shows:
INFO - When viewing an
analog input point, the
frequency displayed
approximates 1000Hz/mA.
When viewing a turbine or
photo pulsar signal, the
display is the actual input
frequency.
Input % Freq/Period
#1
2530
Input % /Freq/Period
#2
3021
Pressing [Output] [Status] [Display] shows the current percentage output for
each of the digital to analog 4-20 mA outputs.
INFO - 0.0% corresponds to

4mA. 100.0% corresponds to
20mA.
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Analog Output %
#1
55.79
Analog Output %
#2
34.10
8-1
Chapter 8
Diagnostic and Calibration Features

Important timing information is available by pressing [Time] then [Display] and
then scrolling down using the down arrow. The displays are as follows:
Power Applied
Time:
09:10:30
Date:
01/21/91
Power Last Lost
Time:
10:25:21
Date:
01/20/91
The previous two displays of power lost and power applied allow the user to
estimate the amount of product flow which may be unaccounted for in the event
of a power failure.
Scrolling down further displays:
Main Task Timing-Sec
20 mS Task
00.00
50 mS Task
00.00
100mS Task
00.01
500mS Task
00.04
Background
00.02
This timing information refers to various main application tasks that run within
the computer. The information may be useful to Omni in the event of a
problem.
8.2.
INFO - The Diagnostic LED
glows red after a valid
password has been asked for
and entered.
Calibrating in the Diagnostic Mode
In the Diagnostic Mode the user selects a specific process variable to calibrate
or view. The display shows the input channel and combo module used for the
variable. Calibration override values can be input and the input signals can be
viewed simultaneously as engineering values % span, input voltage and
current. Analog outputs and digital I/O points can also be viewed and
manipulated.
8.2.1.
Entering The Diagnostic Mode
To enter the diagnostic mode proceed as follows press the [Alpha Shift] key,
then the [Diag] key.
INFO - The Select
Input/Output screen must
be displayed when making a
new selection while in the
Diagnostic Mode. Return to
this screen by pressing the
[Diag] key once.
8-2
The front panel diagnostic LED will glow green and the following will be
displayed on the first three lines of the LCD Display:
Select Input/Output
to Calibrate,
Press "Diag" to Exit
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1

The fourth line of the display is used to show the users selection. The user can
choose to calibrate or view any analog input or output, or manipulate any set of
digital I/O points.
8.2.2.
INFO - Each input channel of
each combo module has had
its temperature coefficient
trimmed to 10 ppm/F. To
avoid temperature gradient
effects and for best results,
always allow the internal
temperature of the computer
to stabilize before making
your final calibration
adjustments.
Display Groups in the Diagnostic Mode
To display an input or output variable to calibrate, select from the following

display groups and associated key presses or select the I/O number if known,
(usually supplied on a separate sheet).
DISPLAY VARIABLES
VALID KEY PRESSES
All of the following key presses are valid in the Diagnostic Mode. To enter
the Diagnostic Mode, these key presses must be preceded by the [Alpha
Shift] [Diag] keys.
Input Channels
(n = 1 through 24)
Meter Temperature
Meter Pressure
Meter Density
(n = 1 through 4)
(n = 1 through 4)
(n = 1 through 4)
[Input] or [Input] [n]

[Temp] or [Temp] [Meter] [n]
[Press] or [Press] [Meter] [n]
[Density] or [Dens] [Meter] [n]
Meter Density Temp (n = 1 through 4)
[Density][Temp] or [Density][Temp][Meter][n]
Meter Dens Pressure (n = 1 through 4)
[Density][Press] or [Density][Press][Meter][n]
Prover Temperature (Left, Right)
[Prove} [Temp]
Prover Pressure (Left, Right)
[Prove} [Temp]
Output Channels
Digital I/O
8.2.3.
(n = 1 through 24)
(n = 1 or 2)
[Output] [n]
[Status] [n]
Leaving The Diagnostic Mode
Once you are done viewing and/or modifying the calibration settings, press
[Diag] to return to the selection screen below:
Select Input/Output
to Calibrate,
Press the [Diag] key again to return to the Display Mode (Diagnostic LED will
turn off).
ALL.71+ w 04/98
8-3
Chapter 8
8.3.
8.3.1.
Note: You can also calibrate
the input and output of your
choice by entering the
number of that input or
output; e.g.: Press [Input]
[1] [Enter]; press [Output]
[4] [Enter]. With this method
you can calibrate the inputs
and outputs to the computer
without having them
assigned to any I/O point
numbers.
Calibration Instructions
Calibrating A Voltage or Current Analog Input
While the above display is shown select the input variable to calibrate. For
example to calibrate Meter Run #1 Temperature, press [Meter] [1] [Temp] (or
the input # if known). The display shows:
Select Input/Output
to Calibrate,
Meter 1 Temp
Other key press combinations work. [Temp] [Meter] [1] means the same to the
computer as [Meter] [1] [Temp]. Pressing [Temp] without a meter number
allows all of the temperatures to be scrolled through and calibrated.
Now enter the selection by pressing [Display] and the following is displayed:
Temperature #1
Input# & Module 1-a1
Override
60.0
Calibrate Input ? _
INFO - Unless previously

entered, a request for a valid
password is made at this
point.
The calibrate override value
entered will be substituted for
all process variables
assigned to this physical I/O
point when the user answers
[Y] to Calibrate Input ?. It is
automatically removed when
the user presses the [Diag]
key to exit or make a new
selection.
8-4
The display shows the process variable name, the input channel number and
combo module used. This example shows Temperature Meter Run #1
connected to Channel 1 of Combo Module A1.
Before calibrating an input the user should enter a Cal Override value to be
used in all calculations in place of the live value.
Answer [Y] to the 'Calibrate Input ?' question and the following is displayed:
Meter 1
% Value
Input Volts
mA Value
27.5
50.00
3.000
12.00
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1

To calibrate the input channel follow these instructions:
INFO - Each input channel

of each combo module has
had its temperature
coefficient trimmed to 10
ppm/F. To avoid
temperature gradient effects
and for best results, always
allow the internal
temperature of the
computer to stabilize before
making your final calibration
adjustments.
1) Disconnect the transducer signal and replace it with a stable current or

voltage source capable of inputting 4.000 to 20.000 mA or 1.000 to 5.000
V signal.
INFO - The []/[] keys

are used as a software
Zero potentiometer.
Adjustments made when
the Shift LED is on are
approximately ten times
more sensitive.
Holding the arrow keys
longer than two seconds
speeds up the rate of
adjustment.
6) Recheck step 2) No further adjustment is normally needed if the Zero is

adjusted at exactly 4.0 mA.
2) Set the input signal to 4.000 mA or 1.000 V as applicable.

3) Using the Up/Down arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads
4.000 mA / 1.000 V.
4) Set the input signal to 20.000 mA or 5.000 V as applicable.
5) Using the Left/Right arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads
20.000 mA / 5.000 V.
7) Disconnect the calibrator signal and reconnect the transducer signal.

8) Press the [Diag] key to return to the selection screen.

TIP - The Span adjustment

has no effect at 4mA or 1v.
Always adjust the Zero first
at exactly 4mA or 1v.
8.3.2.
Leaving the Diagnostic

Mode - In the Select
Input/Output screen, press
the [Diag] key to return to
the Display Mode
(Diagnostic LED will turn
off).
While the above screen is being displayed select a process variable which is
assigned as an RTD probe input. For example, assuming a pulse type
densitometer is installed, pressing [Meter] [1] [Density] [Temp] (or the input # if
known), selects the input channel used to process Meter Run #1's Densitometer
integral RTD. Other key press combinations will work, and [Density] [Meter] [1]
[Temp] all mean the same. Pressing [Density] [Temp] allows the user to scroll
through all density temperature channels.
Calibrating an RTD Input Channel
Now enter the selection by pressing [Display] and the following is displayed:

!
"#$
%!
&'('

) *
ALL.71+ 04/98
8-5
Chapter 8

Enter the Calibrate Override value and answer [Y] to the 'Calibrate Input ?'
question and a screen similar to the following is displayed:
Dens#1 Deg.F
65.0
% Value
60.00
Resistance Value
Ohms
100.00
To Calibrate an RTD input channel proceed as follows :
INFO - Each input channel of

each combo module has had
its temperature coefficient
trimmed to 10 ppm/F. To
avoid temperature gradient
effects and for best results,
always allow the internal
temperature of the computer
to stabilize before making
your final calibration
adjustments.
1) Disconnect the RTD probe and connect precision decade resistance box.
capable of inputting 25.00 to 150.00 Ohms as shown below.
INFO - Installing the decade

box at the actual RTD probe
location provides maximum
accuracy, but can be
inconvenient. The errors
introduced by installing the
decade box at the back panel
terminals of the flow
computer are approximately
0.01% per 100 ohms of field
wiring resistance.
6) Recheck step 2). No further adjustment is normally needed if the Zero is

adjusted at exactly 25 Ohms.
2) Set the decade box to 25.00 Ohms.

3) Using the Up/Down arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads
25.00 Ohms.
4) Set the decade box to 150.00 Ohms.
5) Using the Left/Right arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads
150.00 Ohms.
7) Disconnect the decade box and reconnect the RTD probe.

Select Input/Output
to Calibrate,
TIP - The Span adjustment

has no effect at 4mA or 1v.
Always adjust the Zero first
at exactly 4mA or 1v.

the [Diag] key to return to the
Display Mode (Diagnostic
LED will turn off).
Fig. 8-1.
8-6
Figure Showing Calibration of RTD Input Channel
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
8.3.3.
Calibrating a 4 to 20 mA Digital to Analog Output
Each of the analog outputs can be calibrated by monitoring the loop current with
an accurate milliamp meter and setting the output current to 4.00 mA and 20.00
mA. For example to calibrate Analog Output #1 proceed as follows:
While the 'Select Input/Output' screen is displayed, press [Output] [1]
[Display]. The display shows:
Analog Output #1
0%=4mA, 100%=20mA
Override %
0.00
Calibrate Output ? _
CAUTION!
At this point, the analog

output reflects the value of
the currently displayed
override, not the assigned
variable. The user must
ensure that any equipment
using the output signal will
not cause an unsafe
condition to arise or cause
erroneous results to be
generated.
Answer [Y] to the 'Calibrate Output ?' question and the display shows:
Analog Output #1
0%=4mA, 100%=20mA
Override %
0.00
Override Now Active
To calibrate the output channel follow these steps:
1) Connect an accurate milliamp meter in series with the load.
2) Input 0.00 % (4.00 mA) as the output override.
3) Using the Up/Down arrow keys adjust the output current until the milliamp
meter indicates 4.00 mA.
4) Input 100.00 % (20.00 mA) as the output override.
5) Using the Left/Right arrow key adjust the output current until the milliamp
meter indicates 20.00 mA.
6) Repeat steps 2) through 5) until no further improvement can be obtained.
7) Remove the milliamp meter and reconnect the load.

'Display Mode' (Diagnostic
LED will turn off).
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Select Input/Output
to Calibrate,
8-7
Chapter 8
8.3.4.
Verifying the Operation of the Digital I/O Points
The digital I/O points can be manipulated as a group by pressing [Status] [1]
for digital points 1 through 12 or [Status] [2] for digital points 13 through 24.
Pressing [Status] will allow the user to scroll to either group. Press [Display]
and a screen similar to the following is displayed:
Digital#1 I/O Points
Input
001011001011
Overide 101010101010
Force To Output ? _
CAUTION!
After answering [Y], the

digital outputs will reflect the
value of the currently
displayed override, not the
assigned variable. The user
must ensure that any
equipment using the output
signal will not cause an
unsafe condition to arise or
cause erroneous results to
be generated.
INFO - To avoid a hardware

conflict, only points that have
been assigned as outputs will
accept an override of 1; i.e.,
entering a 1 at an input
position will be ignored and
displayed as a 0.
The second line shows the status of the I/O points frozen at the time that the
screen was displayed. The points are numbered left to right (1 to 12) with a '0'
indicating that a point is off and a '1' indicating that a point is on. The third line
shows the override bit values that will be forced to the output port when the user
answers [Y] to the 'Force To Output ?' question. A screen similar to the
following is displayed:
Digital#1 I/O Points
Input
101110001101
Overide 101010101010
Override Now Active
The override '1's and '0's can be changed at any time while the 'Override Now
Active' line is displayed. The input status displayed on the second line should
always agree with the green LEDs on the edge of the digital I/O module. Red
LEDs lit indicate blown fuses on the digital I/O module.
Outputs on this I/O module that are assigned as totalizer outputs will stop
counting while the 'Override Now Active' line is displayed. Pulses to be output
are accumulated and are output at the maximum allowed rate as soon as the
[Diag] key is pressed.
Press [Diag] to return to the selection screen below:

Display Mode (Diagnostic
LED will turn off).
8-8
Select Input/Output
to Calibrate,
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
9. Flow Computer Specifications

9.1.
Operating Temperature : q -15C to +65C
NOTICE!
Omni Flow Computers, Inc.,
pursuant to a policy of
product development and
improvement, may make any
necessary changes to these
specifications without notice.
Environmental
Storage Temperature : q -20C to +75C
Relative Humidity : q 80% non-condensing maximum
9.2.
Electrical
Supply Voltage : q 120 VAC, 50-500 Hz; or 18-30 VDC, 10-20
Watts (excluding transducer loops)
q Optional: 220-250 VAC, 50-500 Hz; or 1830 VDC, 10-20 Watts (excluding transducer
loops)
Transducer Output Power : q 24 VDC at 400 mA+ for
configurations (when AC powered)
most
Isolation : q All analog inputs and outputs are optically

isolated from computer logic supply
q Maximum common mode voltage on any
input or output is 250 VDC to chassis
ground.
9.3.
Microprocessor CPU
Type : q Motorola MC68HC000FN16
q Clock Speed: 16 MHz, 0 wait state;
Throughput 4,000,000 instructions/sec
Coprocessor : q Motorola MC68HC881/82FN16B
q Clock Speed: 16 MHz; Throughput 50,000
floating point operations/sec
EPROM Memory : q 1 Mbyte. expandable to 2 Mbytes max.
RAM Memory : q 512 bytes standard; Expandable to 1
Mbytes max.
Real Time Clock : q Battery
backed-up,
time
of
day;
programmable interval down to 1 msec
q Maintains time during power loss
q Reports downtime on power-up
Logic Voltage : q 5 VDC
Over-voltage Protection : q Crowbar on power supply fires at 6.25 VDC
approx.
Transient Protection : q Transorbs on power supply module
RAM Memory Battery Backup : q 3.6 VDC Ni-Cad; rechargeable
Typical Memory Backup Period : q 30-60 days (with power removed)

ALL.71+ w 04/98
9-1
Chapter 9
Flow Computer Specifications
9.4.
Backplane
Type : q Passive; configured
connectors
NOTICE!
with
plug-in
DIN
Number of I/O Module Slots : q Omni 3000: 4 slots

q Omni 6000: 10 slots
9.5.
TYPE
Process Input/Output Combo Modules

INPUT #1
INPUT #2
INPUT #3
INPUT #4
1-5v; 4-20mA; Flow Pulses
ANALOG
OUTPUTS
Two
4-20mA
Pipe Proving
One
4-20mA
Pipe Proving
1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD
1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD
E/D
1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD
Frequency Density
Two
4-20mA
1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD
Flow Pulses
Two
4-20mA
1-5v; 4-20mA
Flow Pulse
Frequency
Density
Honeywell DE Protocol
Two
4-20mA
HV
Honeywell Multivariable DE Protocol
Two
4-20mA
PORT #1
SV
9.6.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pipe Proving
Double Chron. Proving
Level A Pulse Fidelity
PORT #2
RS-485 Multi-drop to Various Multivariable Transmitters
Six
4-20mA
Flowmeter Pulse Inputs

Input Frequency : q DC to 15 kHz.
Positive Going Trigger Threshold : q +4.0 Volts

Negative Going Trigger Threshold : q +2.0 Volts
Input impedance : q 1 M Ohm
Configuration : q Differential input (E module inputs are
single ended referenced to DC ret.)
Common Mode Voltage : q 250 VDC to chassis ground
Pulse Fidelity Check : q Channels are continuously compared for
frequency and sequence.
E Module Only : q Complete failure of either A or B channel
will not effect totalizing
q Simultaneous noise pulses are rejected
with 85% certainty
9-2
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
9.7.
Detector Switch Inputs

(Non-Double Chronometry)
NOTICE!
Input Type : q Voltage

Gating Transition : q Application of voltage starts and stops

proves.
Minimum Time Pulse High : q 1 msec
Minimum Time Pulse Low : q 2 seconds
Input Impedance : q 4.7 k Ohms
Input On Voltage : q >10 V On, <4 VDC+ Off (referenced to DC
Power Return)
Debounce : q 2 sec in Software
9.8.
Detector Switch Inputs of E Combo

Module
(Double Chronometry)
q Driven by open collector transistor or Normally Open
switch.
q Debounce capacitor may be needed with switch type
detectors.
9.9.
Analog Inputs
Input Type : q 4 - 20 mA or 1-5 V
Input Impedance : q 1 MegOhm (250 Ohms) (4-20 mA range
selected by installing shunt resistor)
Resolution : q 14 Binary Bits, w/ 500 msec sample
Linearity : q 0.020% F.S. typical 1 Digit
Temperature Drift : q Less than 15 ppm/OF
9.10. RTD Inputs

RTD Configuration : q 4-wire Bridge
RTD Resistance : q 100 Ohm @ 32F
Excitation Current : q 3.45 mA Nominal
Maximum Field Wiring Resistance : q 1k Ohm per wire
Resolution : q 0.008 Ohms
Temperature Drift : q Less than 15 ppm/F
Linearity : q 0.020% F.S. typical 1 Digit
ALL.71+ w 04/98
9-3
Chapter 9
9.11. Analog Outputs

NOTICE!
Resolution : q 12 Binary Bits

Output : q Current source 4-20 mA (referenced to
transducer power return terminal)
Common Mode : q 250 Volts to chassis ground
Max./Min. Working Loop Voltage : q 30 VDC to 18 VDC
Loop Resistance : q 900 Ohm with 24 VDC Power
q 1.2 k Ohm with 30 VDC Power
Update Rate : q Each 500 milliseconds
9.12. Control Outputs/Status Inputs

(12 per module)
Configuration : q Open emitter Darlington transistor source
(Referenced to transducer power return
terminal)
Current Capacity : q 100 mA max., 500 mA per module
Output Voltage : q +DC - 1 V Nominal
Common Mode : q 250 Volts to chassis ground
Input Impedance : q 4.7 k Ohms in series with 2 LEDs
Input Voltage : q Input voltages > 8 to < DC voltage at back
panel DC terminal block, typically 24 VDC,
will be recognized as on
q Input voltages < +2 V will be recognized as
off
LEDs : q Operating and Fuse Indicators on each
channel
Scan Rate : q Outputs may be pulsed at 50Hz Maximum
9-4
ALL.71+ w 04/98
Volume 1
9.13. Multi-bus Serial I/O Interface

9.13.1. RS-232 Compatible
(2 per Module)
Serial Data Output Voltage : q 7.5 Volts typical
Recommended Load Impedance : q 1.5 k Ohm
Short Circuit Current : q 10 mA limited
Input Low Threshold : q Vl = -3.0 Volts
Input High Threshold : q Vh = +3.0 Volts
Baud Rate : q Software selectable
q Range 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 k bps
Common Mode Voltage : q 250 Volts to chassis ground
LEDs : q Indicator LEDs for each channel input,
output and handshaking signals
9.13.2. RS-485
(2 per Module)
Serial Data Output Voltage : q 5 Volts differential driver
Recommended Load Impedance : q 120 Ohm
Short Circuit Current : q 20 mA
Input Low Threshold : q 0.8 Volts
Baud Rate : q Software selectable
q Range 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 k bps
Common Mode Voltage : q 250 Volts to chassis ground
LEDs : q Indicator LEDs for each channel input,
output and handshaking signals
9.14. Operator Keypad

Keypad Characteristics : q 34-key, domed membrane, with tactile and
audio feedback
Material : q Autotex 2 Hard coat Polyester Film
Data Entry Lockout : q Internal switch and software passwords
Key Debounce : q Software controlled
9.15. LCD Display

Display : q 4 lines of 20 Characters
q 5 x 8 Dot Matrix
Character Height : q 4.75 mm
Display Data : q Alphanumeric, 80 characters
Backlight : q Green/Yellow LED
q Viewing angle, contrast and backlight
controlled from keypad
ALL.71+ w 04/98
9-5
Chapter 9
9.16. Electromechanical Counters

Quantity : q Three, with programmable function
NOTICE!
Display : q 6-digit, non-resetable

Character Height : q 5 mm
Maximum Count Rate : q 10 counts per second
9.17. Operating Mode Indicator LEDs

Quantity : q Four
Dual Color : q Red/Green
Indication : q Active Alarm LED
Green: to indicate acknowledged existing
alarm
Red: to indicate new, unacknowledged,
existing alarm
q Diagnostic LED
Green: to indicate Diagnostic
Calibration Mode is active
Red: to indicate password is active
q Program LED
or
Green:
to
indicate
Program
Configuration Mode is active
Red: to indicate password is active
q Alpha Shift LED
or
Green: to indicate Alpha Shift Lock

Mode is active
Red: to indicate alpha shift next key only
9.18. Security
Hardware : q Optional lock on housing and internal
keyboard program lockout
Software : q Multi-level password control
9-6
ALL.71+ w 04/98

Firmware Revisions 20.71/24.71
Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis
Liquid Flow Metering Systems
with K Factor Linearization
Volume 2a
Basic Operation
BASIC OPERATION
Figures of Volume 2 ........................................................................................................ iii
1. Basic Operating Features......................................................................................... 1-1
1.1. Overview of the Keypad Functions .......................................................................1-1
1.2. Operating Modes ....................................................................................................1-2
1.2.1. Display Mode ......................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2. Keypad Program Mode.......................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.3. Diagnostic and Calibration Mode ......................................................................... 1-2
1.2.4. Field Entry Mode ................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3. Special Keys ...........................................................................................................1-4

1.3.1. Display/Enter (Help) Key ....................................................................................... 1-4
1.3.2. Up/Down Arrow Keys [
]/[
] ............................................................................... 1-4
1.3.3. Left/Right Arrow Keys [
]/[
] ............................................................................. 1-4
1.3.4. Alpha Shift Key and LED....................................................................................... 1-4
1.3.5. Program/Diagnostic Key [Prog/Diag] ................................................................... 1-5
1.3.6. Space/Clear (Cancel/Ack) Key............................................................................... 1-5
1.4. Adjusting the Display..............................................................................................1-5

1.5. Clearing and Viewing Alarms .................................................................................1-6
1.5.1. Acknowledging (Clearing) Alarms........................................................................ 1-6
1.5.2. Viewing Active and Historical Alarms .................................................................. 1-6
1.5.3. Alarm Conditions Caused by Static Discharges.................................................. 1-6
1.6. Computer Totalizing ...............................................................................................1-6
20/24.71+ w 04/98
OMNI Flow Computer, Inc.
2. PID Control Functions .............................................................................................. 2-1

2.1. Overview of PID Control Functions....................................................................... 2-1
2.2. PID Control Displays .............................................................................................. 2-2
2.3. Changing the PID Control Operating Mode .......................................................... 2-3
2.3.1. Manual Valve Control.............................................................................................2-3
2.3.2. Automatic Valve Control........................................................................................2-3
2.3.3. Local Setpoint Select.............................................................................................2-4
2.3.4. Remote Setpoint Select .........................................................................................2-4
2.3.5. Changing the Secondary Variable Setpoint .........................................................2-4
2.4. PID Control Remote Setpoint ................................................................................ 2-4

2.5. Using the PID Startup and Shutdown Ramping Functions.................................. 2-5
2.6. Startup Ramp/Shutdown Ramp/Minimum Output Percent .................................. 2-5
2.7. PID Control Tuning................................................................................................. 2-6
2.7.1. Estimating The Required Controller Gain For Each Process Loop ....................2-6
2.7.2. Estimating The Repeats / Minutes And Fine Tuning The Gain ...........................2-7
3. Computer Batching Operations............................................................................... 3-1

3.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2. Batch Status ........................................................................................................... 3-1
3.3. Batch Schedule Stack............................................................................................ 3-2
3.3.1. Empty Batch Schedule Stacks ..............................................................................3-2
3.3.2. Manually Editing the Batch Schedule Stack.........................................................3-2
3.4. Ending a Batch ....................................................................................................... 3-3

3.4.1. Using the Product Change Strobes to End a Batch.............................................3-3
3.4.2. Manually Ending a Batch from the Keypad ..........................................................3-3
3.5. Recalculate and Reprint a Previous Batch Ticket ............................................... 3-4

3.6. Batch Preset Counters........................................................................................... 3-5
3.6.1. Batch Preset Flags.................................................................................................3-5
3.6.2. Batch Warning Flags .............................................................................................3-5
3.7. Adjusting the Size of a Batch ................................................................................ 3-5

3.8. Automatic Batch Changes Based on Product Interface Detection..................... 3-6
4. Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change................................................................ 4-1

4.1. Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change Alarm Flag........................................... 4-1
4.2. Delayed Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change Alarm Flag ............................ 4-1
4.3. Determining the Gravity Rate of Change Limits................................................... 4-2
ii
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Volume 2a
Basic Operation
5. Meter Factors............................................................................................................. 5-1

5.1. Changing Meter Factors.........................................................................................5-1
5.2. Changing Meter Factors for the Running Product ...............................................5-2
5.3. Previous Meter Factor Saved data ........................................................................5-2
6. Proving Functions ..................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1. Auto-Prove Mode ....................................................................................................6-1
6.1.1. Repeated Prove Aborts While in the Auto-Prove Mode....................................... 6-1
6.2. Full Sized Provers (Unidirectional and Bi-directional) .........................................6-2

6.3. Brooks Compact Prover.........................................................................................6-3
6.3.1. Proving Reports for Brooks Compact Provers ................................................... 6-4
6.4. Other Proving Reports ...........................................................................................6-4
7. Printed Reports ......................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1. Fixed Format Reports.............................................................................................7-1
7.2. Default Report Templates and Custom Reports...................................................7-2
7.3. Printing Reports......................................................................................................7-2
7.4. Audit Trail ................................................................................................................7-3
7.4.1. Audit Trail Report .................................................................................................. 7-3
7.4.2. Modbus
Port Passwords and the Audit Trail Report ........................................ 7-3
8. Index of Display Variables ........................................................................................ 8-1
Figures of Volume 2
Fig. 1-1. Flow Computer Front Panel Keypad ..................................................................................... 1-1
Fig. 1-2. Block Diagram Showing the Keypad and Display Modes....................................................... 1-3
Fig. 2-1. Typical PID Control Application - Single Loop....................................................................... 2-1
20/24.71+ w 04/98
iii
Volume 2a
Basic Operation
1. Basic Operating Features

1.1.
INFO - Within the document
the following convention is
used to describe various key
press sequences: Individual
keys are shown in bold
enclosed in brackets and
separated by a space.
Although not always
indicated, it is assumed for
the rest of this document that
the [Display/Enter] key is
used at the end of every key
press sequence to enter a
command.
Overview of the Keypad Functions
Thirty-four keys are available. Eight special function keys and twenty-six
dedicated to the alphanumeric characters A through Z, 0 through 9 and various
punctuation and math symbols.
The [Display/Enter] key, located at the bottom right, deserves special mention.
This key is always used to execute a sequence of key presses. It is not unlike
that the Enter key of a personal computer. Except when entering numbers in a
field, the maximum number of keys that can be used in a key press sequence is
four (not counting the [Display/Enter] key).
Fig. 1-1.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Flow Computer Front Panel Keypad
1-1
Chapter 1
Basic Operating Features

Key words such as Density, Mass and Temp appear over each of the
alphanumeric keys. These key words indicate what data will be accessed when
included in a key press sequence. Pressing [Net] [Meter] [1] for instance will
display net flow rates and total accumulations for Meter Run #1. Pressing the
[Net] key causes net flow rates and total accumulations for all active meter runs
to be displayed. In many instances, the computer attempts to recognize similar
key press sequences as meaning the same thing; i.e., [Net] [1], [Meter] [1]
[Net] and [Net] [Meter] [1] all cause the net volume data for Meter Run #1 to be
displayed. In most cases, more data is available on a subject then can be
displayed on four lines. The [ ]/[ ] (up/down) arrow keys allow you to scroll
through multiple screens.

1.2.
Operating Modes
Keyboard operation and data displayed in the LCD display depends on which of
the 3 major display and entry modes are selected.
1.2.1.
Display Mode
This is the normal mode of operation. Live meter run data is displayed and
updated every 200 msec. Data cannot be changed while in this mode.
1.2.2.
Keypad Program Mode
Configuration data needed by the flow computer can be viewed and changed via
the keypad while in this mode. When the Program Mode is entered by pressing
the [Prog] key, the Program LED glows green. This changes to red when a
valid password is requested and entered.
1.2.3.
Diagnostic and Calibration Mode
The diagnostic and calibration features of the computer are accessed by

pressing the [Diag] key ([Alpha Shift] then [Prog]. This mode allows you to
check and adjust the calibration of each input and output point. The Diagnostic
LED glows green until a valid password is requested and entered.
1.2.4.
Field Entry Mode
You are in this mode whenever the data entry cursor is visible, which is anytime
the user is entering a number or password while in the Program Mode or
Diagnostic Mode.
1-2
20/24.71+ 04/98
Volume 2a
Basic Operation
Fig. 1-2.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Block Diagram Showing the Keypad and Display Modes
1-3
Chapter 1
1.3.
1.3.1.
Special Keys
Display/Enter (Help) Key
This key is located bottom-right on the keypad.

Pressing once while in the Field Entry Mode will store the data entered in the
field to memory. Pressing twice within one second will cause the contextsensitive Help to be displayed. The Help displays contain useful information
regarding available variable assignments and selections.
When in other modes, use it at the end of a key press sequence to enter the
command.
1.3.2.
Up/Down Arrow Keys []/[]
These keys are located top-center on the keypad.

When in the Display Mode, the [ ]/[ ] keys are used to scroll through data
relevant to a particular selection.
When in the Program Mode, they are used to scroll through data and position the
cursor on data to be viewed or changed.
In the Diagnostic Mode, The up/down arrow keys are initially used to position the
cursor within the field of data being changed. Once you select an input or output
to calibrate or adjust, the up/down arrow keys are used as a software zero
potentiometer.
1.3.3.
Left/Right Arrow Keys []/[]
These keys are located top-center on the keypad; to the left and right
respectively of the Up/Down Arrow Keys.

The [ ]/[ ] keys have no effect while in the Display Mode. When in Program
Mode, they are used to position the cursor within a data field.
In the Diagnostic Mode, they are initially used to position the cursor within the
field of data to be changed. Once you select an input or output to calibrate or
adjust, the left/right arrow keys are used as software span potentiometer.
1.3.4.
Alpha Shift Key and LED
This key is located top-right on the keypad.

Pressing the [Alpha Shift] key while in the Field Entry Mode causes the Alpha
Shift LED above the key to glow green, indicating that the next valid key press
will be interpreted as its shifted value. The Alpha Shift LED is then turned off
automatically when the next valid key is pressed.
Pressing the [Alpha Shift] key twice causes the Alpha Shift LED to glow red
and the shift lock to be active. All valid keys are interpreted as their shifted value
until the [Alpha Shift] key is pressed or the [Display/Enter] key is pressed.
When in the Calibrate Mode, zero and span adjustments made via the arrow keys
are approximately ten times more sensitive when the Alpha Shift LED is on.
1-4
20/24.71+ 04/98
Volume 2a
Basic Operation
1.3.5.
Program/Diagnostic Key [Prog/Diag]
This key is located top-left on the keypad.

While in the Display Mode, pressing this key changes the operating mode to
either the Program or Diagnostic Mode, depending on whether the Alpha Shift
LED is on. When in other modes, it cancels the current entry and goes back
one menu level, eventually returning to the Display Mode.
1.3.6.
Space/Clear (Cancel/Ack) Key
This key is located bottom-left on the keypad.

Static Discharges - It has
been found that applications
of electrostatic discharges
may cause the Active Alarm
LED to glow red. Pressing
the [Space/Clear] key will
acknowledge the alarm and
turn off the red alarm light.
Pressing this key while in the Display Mode acknowledges any new alarms that
occur. The Active Alarm LED will also change from red to green indicating an
alarm condition exists but has been acknowledged.
When in the Field Entry Mode, unshifted, it causes the current variable field
being changed to be cleared, leaving the cursor at the beginning of the field
awaiting new data to be entered. With the Alpha Shift LED illuminated, it
causes the key to be interpreted as a space or blank.
When in all other modes, it cancels the current key press sequence by flushing
the key input buffer.
1.4.
Adjusting the Display
Once the computer is mounted in its panel you may need to adjust the viewing
angle and backlight intensity of the LCD display for optimum performance. You
may need to re-adjust the brightness setting of the display should the computer
be subjected to transient electrical interference.
While in the Display Mode (Program LED and Diagnostic LED off), press
[Setup] [Display] and follow the displayed instructions:
Use Up/Down Arrows
To Adjust Contrast;
Left, Right Arrows
To Adjust Backlight
20/24.71+ w 04/98
1-5
Chapter 1
TIP - Alarm flags are

latched while the red LED is
on. To avoid missing
intermittent alarms, always
press [Alarms] [Display] to
view alarms before pressing
[Cancel/Ack].
1.5.
Clearing and Viewing Alarms
1.5.1.
Acknowledging (Clearing) Alarms
New alarms cause the Active Alarm LED to glow red. Pressing the
[Cancel/Ack] key (bottom left), or setting Boolean Point 1712 via a digital I/O
point or via a Modbus command, will acknowledge the alarm and cause the
Active Alarm LED to change to green. The LED will go off when the alarm
condition clears.
1.5.2.
Viewing Active and Historical Alarms

To view all active alarms, press [Alarms] [Display] and use the [ ]/[ ] arrow
keys to scroll through all active alarms.

The last 500 time-tagged alarms that have occurred are always available for
printing (see Historical Alarm Snapshot Report in this chapter).
1.5.3.
Alarm Conditions Caused by Static Discharges
It has been found that applications of electrostatic discharges may cause the
Active Alarm LED to glow red. Pressing the [Space/Clear] key will acknowledge
the alarm and turn off the red alarm light.
1.6.
Computer Totalizing
Two types of totalizers are provided: 1) Three front panel electromechanical and
non-resetable; and 2) Software totalizers maintained in computer memory. The
electromechanical totalizers can be programmed to count in any units via the
Miscellaneous Setup Menu (Volume 3). The software totalizers provide batch
and daily based totals, and are automatically printed, saved and reset at the end
of each batch or the beginning of each contract day. Daily flow or time weighted
averages are also printed, saved and reset at the end of each day. Batch flow
weighted averages are also available in liquid application flow computers.
Software cumulative totalizers are also provided and can only be reset via the
Password Maintenance Menu (Volume 3). View the software totalizers by
pressing [Gross], [Net] or [Mass]. Pressing [Meter] [n] [Gross], [Net] or
[Mass] will display the software for Meter Run n.
1-6
20/24.71+ 04/98
Volume 2a
Basic Operation
2. PID Control Functions

2.1.
Overview of PID Control Functions
Four independent control loops are available. Each loop is capable of

controlling a primary variable (usually flow rate) with a secondary override
variable (usually meter back pressure or delivery pressure).
The primary and secondary set points can be adjusted locally via the keypad
and remotely via a communication link. In addition, the primary set point can be
adjusted via an analog input to the computer.
Contact closures can be used to initiate the startup and shutdown ramp function
which limits the control output slew rate during startup and shutdown conditions.
A high or low 'error select' function causes automatic override control by the
secondary variable in cases where it is necessary either to maintain a minimum
secondary process value or limit the secondary process maximum value.
Local manual control of the control output and bumpless transfer between
automatic and manual control is incorporated.
Fig. 2-1.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Typical PID Control Application - Single Loop
2-1
Chapter 2
PID Control Functions
2.2.
INFO - Select PID Loop 1
through 4 by entering n as
1, 2, 3 or 4.
PID Control Displays
While in the Display Mode press [Control] [n] [Display]. Press the Up/Down
arrow keys to display the following screens:
Screen #1
Indicates which parameter is

being controlled; primary or
secondary
PID #1 VALVE STATUS

Open
50.00
Auto/Manual
Auto
Primary Controlling
Screen #2
PID #1 PRIMARY
Measurement
20.00
Shows actual primary set
point being used in
engineering units
Setpoint
20.00
Screen #3
PID #1 SECONDARY
Measurement
20.00
Shows actual secondary set
point being used in
engineering units
Setpoint
20.00
Screen #4
INFO - Data such as set
points or operating mode
cannot be changed while in
the Display Mode.
2-2
PID #1 SET POINT

Source is
Local
Remote S.P.
Input
Value is
20.00
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Volume 2a
Basic Operation
2.3.
INFO - Select PID Loop 1
through 4 by entering n as
1, 2, 3 or 4.
To access the next two
screens you must enter the
[Y] to select Manual Valve or
Local Setpoint even if a Y is
already displayed.
To cancel the Manual Mode
or Local Setpoint Mode, enter
[N].
Changing the PID Control Operating

Mode
Press [Prog] [Control] [n] to display the following screen:

PID#1 OPERATING MODE
Manual Valve(Y/N) N
Local Set.Pt(Y/N) N
Sec Set.Pt
750.0
2.3.1.
Manual Valve Control
To change to manual valve control enter [Y] at the 'Manual Valve (Y/N)' prompt
and the following screen is displayed:
PID #1 MANUAL VALVE
Up/Down Arrow to Adj
Measurement
20.00
Open %
50.00
Primary Variable
(Measurement in engineering
units)
The switch from Auto to Manual is bumpless. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to
open or close the valve. Press [Prog] once to return to the previous screen.
Manual Valve (Y/N) Y
Local Set.Pt(Y/N) N
Sec Set.Pt
750.0
Notice you are now in Manual

Valve Control
2.3.2.
Automatic Valve Control
To change from manual to automatic valve control, enter [N] at the 'Manual
Valve (Y/N)' prompt. The switch to automatic is bumpless if local setpoint is
selected.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
2-3
Chapter 2
2.3.3.
Local Setpoint Select
Enter [Y] at the 'Local Set. Pt. (Y/N)' prompt and the following screen is
displayed:
PID#1 LOCAL SETPOINT
Up/Down Arrow to Adj
Measurement
20.00
Setpoint
20.00
Primary Variable
(Measurement in engineering
units)
The switch from Remote to Local is bumpless. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to
increase or decrease the setpoint. Press [Prog] once to return to the previous
screen.
Notice you are now in
Automatic with Local Valve
Control

Manual Valve(Y/N) N
Local Set.Pt(Y/N) Y
Sec Set.Pt
750.0
Change the setpoint of the

secondary variable here
2.3.4.
Remote Setpoint Select
To change from local setpoint to remote setpoint, enter [N] at the 'Local Set.
Pt.(Y/N)' prompt. The switch to remote setpoint may not be bumpless,
depending upon the remote set point source.
2.3.5.
Changing the Secondary Variable Setpoint
Move the cursor to the bottom line of the above display, press [Clear] and then
enter the new setpoint.
2.4.
IMPORTANT!
You must assign a remote

setpoint input even if one will
not be used. The 4-20mA
scaling of this input
determines the scaling of the
primary controlled variable.
2-4
PID Control Remote Setpoint
As described above, the PID control loop can be configured to accept either a
local setpoint or a remote setpoint value for the primary variable. The remote
setpoint is derived from an analog input (usually 4-20 mA). This input is scaled
in engineering units and would usually come from another device such as an
RTU. High/Low limits are applied to the remote setpoint signal to eliminate
possible problems of over or under speeding a turbine meter (see Volume 1,
Chapter 8 for more details).
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Volume 2a
Basic Operation
2.5.
Using the PID Startup and Shutdown

Ramping Functions
These functions are enabled when a startup and/or shutdown ramp rate
between 0 and 99 percent is entered (see section PID Setup in Volume 3).
Commands are provided to Start the valve ramping open, Shutdown to the
minimum percent open valve or Stop the flow by closing the valve
immediately once it has been ramped to the minimum percent open.
These commands are accessed using the keypad by pressing [Prog] [Batch]
[Meter] [n], which will display the following:
Mtr1 Batch Start Y ?
Shutdown to Min% ?
Batch Stop ?
Print & Reset ?
2.6.
Startup Ramp/Shutdown Ramp/Minimum

Output Percent
Inputs are provided for startup/shutdown ramp rates and minimum output %
settings. When these startup/shutdown ramp rates are applied the control
output, movements will be limited to the stated % movement per second (see
Volume 3). On receipt of a shutdown signal, the output will ramp to the
minimum output % for topoff purposes.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
2-5
Chapter 2
2.7.
IMPORTANT!
PID Control Tuning - The

primary variable must be
tuned first. When tuning the
primary variable loop, you
must set the secondary
setpoint high or low enough
to the point where it will not
take control. Otherwise, the
PID loop will become very
unstable and virtually
impossible to tune. Adjust the
primary gain and integral
repeats per minute until you
achieve stable control.
Likewise, when tuning the
secondary setpoint, the
primary must be set so it
cannot interfere. Once you
have achieved stable control
of both loops, you can then
enter the setpoints
established for each loop at
normal operating conditions.
PID Control Tuning
Individual control of gain and integral action are provided for both the primary
and secondary control loops. Tune the primary variable loop first by setting the
secondary setpoint high or low enough to stop the secondary control loop from
taking control. Adjust the primary gain and integral repeats per minutes for
stable control. Reset the primary and secondary set points to allow control on
the secondary variable without interference from the primary variable. Adjust
the secondary gain and integral repeats per minute for stable control of the
secondary variable.
2.7.1.
Estimating The Required Controller Gain For

Each Process Loop
Each process loop will exhibit a gain function. A change in control valve output
will produce a corresponding change in each of the process variables. The ratio
of these changes represents the gain of the loop (For example: If a 10 %
change in control output causes a 10% change in the process variable, the loop
gain is 1.0. If a 10 % change in control output causes a 20 % change in process
variable, the loop gain is 2.0). To provide stable control the gain of each loop
with the controller included must be less than 1.0. In practice the controller gain
is usually adjusted so that the total loop gain is between 0.6 and 0.9.
Unfortunately the gain of each loop can vary with operating conditions. For
example: A butterfly control valve may have a higher gain when almost closed
to when it is almost fully open. This means that in many cases the controller
gain must be set low so that stable control is achieved over the required range
of control.
To estimate the gain of each loop proceed as follows for the required range of
operating conditions:
(1) In manual, adjust the control output for required flowing conditions and
note process variable values.
(2) Make a known percentage step change of output (i.e., from 20% to 22%
equals a 10% change).
(3) Note the percentage change of each process variable (i.e., 100 m3/hr to
110 m3/hr equals a 10% change).
INFO - The primary gain

interacts with the secondary
gain. The actual secondary
gain factor is the product of
the primary gain and
secondary gain factors.
2-6
(4) Primary Gain Estimate = 0.75 / (Primary Loop Gain).

(5) Secondary Gain =
Estimate).
0.75 / (Secondary Loop Gain x Primary Gain
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Volume 2a
Basic Operation
2.7.2.
Estimating The Repeats / Minutes And Fine

Tuning The Gain
(1) Set the 'repeats / minute' to 40 for both primary and secondary loops.
(2) Adjust set points so that only the primary (sec) loop is trying to control.
(3) While controlling the primary (sec) variable, increase the primary (sec)
gain until some controlled oscillation is observed.
(4) Set the primary (sec) 'repeats/minute' to equal 0.75 / (Period of the
oscillation in minutes).
(5) Set the primary (sec) gain to 75% of the value needed to make the loop
oscillate.
(6) Repeat (2) through (5) for the secondary variable loop.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
2-7
Volume 2a
Basic Operation
3. Computer Batching Operations

3.1.
Introduction
A complete set of software batch totalizers and flow weighted averages are also
provided in addition to the daily and cumulative totalizers. These totalizers and
averages can be printed, saved and reset automatically, based on the number
of barrels or cubic meters delivered, change of product or on demand. The
Omni flow computer can keep track of 4 independent meter runs running any
combination of 16 different products. Flowmeter runs can be combined and
treated as a station. The batch totalizers and batch flow weighted averages are
printed, saved and reset at the end of each batch. The next batch starts
automatically when the pulses from the flowmeter exceed the meter active
threshold frequency. Pulses received up to that point which do not exceed the
threshold frequency are still included in the new batch, but the batch start time
and date are not captured until the threshold is exceeded.
3.2.
Batch Status
The batch status appears on the Status Report and is defined as either:
o In Progress ------- Batch is in progress with the meter active.
o Suspended ------- Batch is in progress with the meter not active.
o Batch Ended ----- Batch End has been received, meter not active.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
3-1
Chapter 3
Computer Batching Operations
3.3.
Batch Schedule Stack
When running independent products on each meter run, each flowmeter run has
a batch schedule stack which stores the setup information for up to 5 future
batches. The setup information is popped off the appropriate stack by the
computer at the beginning of each batch. When all meter runs are running the
same product, the individual meter run batch schedule stacks are combined and
organized to store up to the next 23 future station batches.
3.3.1.
TIP - When ending a batch
with flow occurring,
remember that the next batch
will start immediately after
you end the current one. You
should check that the batch
schedule contains the correct
setup information for that
batch.
Empty Batch Schedule Stacks
The flow computer will use the batch setup data for the batch last completed if
the meters batch schedule stack is empty at the beginning of a new next batch.
3.3.2.
Manually Editing the Batch Schedule Stack
Pressing [Prog] [Batch] [Setup] or [Prog] [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Setup]

displays the screen similar to that shown below. The screen shows information
regarding the current running batch. The 16 character batch ID number appears
on all reports and can be edited at any time during a batch. The starting size of
the batch in net barrels is used to determine the value of the batch preset
counter. It can be changed at any time during a batch and the batch preset
counter will be adjusted accordingly.
MTR #1 CURRENT BATCH
ID: Butane 5010
Running Product
1
Size BBl
100
By using the [
]/[
] keys you can scroll through and modify any one of the 6
batch setups (in Independent Batch Stack) and 24 (in Common Batch Stack) in
the Batch Schedule Stack.
M1:1 I=Ins D=Del ?
ID: EP-001-021-BUT
Product to Run?
0
Size BBl
0
The number on the left on Line 1 is the flowmeter run number and stack
position; i.e., M2:1 will be the next batch setup run for Meter #2, M2:2 the next
and so on. Batch setups can be inserted before the displayed position or the
displayed setup and can be deleted by entering I or D on Line 1. Press
[Prog] twice to return to the Display Mode.
3-2
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Volume 2a
Basic Operation
3.4.
Ending a Batch
A batch in progress is ended by setting the appropriate End Batch Flag in the
computers database. This can be done manually from the keypad, on a timed
basis, through a digital I/O point or via a Modbus command.
3.4.1.
Using the Product Change Strobes to End a

Batch
Batches can be ended and products changed by using the Product Change
Strobes (Boolean 1707 and 1747 through 1750). Setting any of these Boolean
commands, either through a digital input or writing it through a Modbus port,
will cause the flow computer to:
(1) End the batch in progress and print a batch report.
(2) Determine what the next product to run will be by decoding the binary
coded Product Select Input flags (Booleans 1743 through 1746).
(3) Write the number of the selected product into the next batch stack
position.
(4) Pop the batch setup off the stack and start a new batch.
3.4.2.
Manually Ending a Batch from the Keypad
Press the [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n] or [Prog] [Meter] [n] [Batch] keys and a
screen similar to the following will be displayed:
METER #1 BATCH
Print & Reset ?
Pressing [Prog] [Batch] and [Enter] (i.e., not specifying a meter run) will
display the following:
STATION BATCH
Print & Reset ?
Enter [Y] to the Print & Reset ? question and enter your password when
requested. The batch will be ended immediately and a Batch Report printed out.
The above displays will vary if the PID ramping functions are enabled (see the
following section).
20/24.71+ w 04/98
3-3
Chapter 3
3.5.
Recalculating a Previous
Batch - For more information
on this topic, see Technical
Bulletin TB-980202
Recalculating a Previous
Batch within the Flow
Computer included in
Volume 5.
Recalculate and Reprint a Previous

Batch Ticket
To recalculate and reprint a previous batch, you must do the following:

(1) Press [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n] [Enter] (n = meter run number).
The Omni LCD screen will display:
METER #1 BATCH
Print & Reset ?
Select Prev# Batch 1
Enter API60
.0
Enter SG60
.0000
Enter %S&W
.00
Recalculate&Print?
(2) Select which previous batch you wish to recalculate. The Omni stores
the last 4 completed batches numbered as:
1 = last batch completed
to
4 = oldest batch completed.
(3) Press [
] to scroll down to Select Prev # Batch and enter a number
between 1 and 4, depending upon which batch is to be recalculated. The
flow computer moves the selected previous batch data to the previous
batch data points within the database (see explanation in Technical
Bulletin TB-980202)
(4) Enter Password when requested. Scroll to either Enter API60 or
Enter SG60. Type in a valid value and press [Enter].
(5) Scroll to Recalculate & Print?. Press [Y] and then [Enter].
At this time the flow computer will recalculate the batch data and send the
report to the printer and the Historical Batch Report Buffer in RAM memory.
The default batch report shows the batch number as XXXXXX-XX where the
number ahead of the - is the batch number and the number after the - is the
number of times that the batch has been recalculated.
3-4
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Volume 2a
Basic Operation
3.6.
INFO - In order to activate
the batch preset counter you
must have entered a batch
size other than zero before
the batch started (i.e.,
starting with a batch size of
zero disables the preset
counter feature). Batch
presets can be selected for
gross, net or mass units (see
Volume 3; 2.7. Configuring
the Meter Station).
Batch Preset Counters
Independent batch preset counters are provided for each meter run when in the
Independent Batch Stack Mode. Each batch preset counter is pre-loaded with
the batch size taken from the appropriate batch schedule stack. The counter is
automatically reduced by the meter runs net flow. Press [Batch] [Preset]
[Meter] [n] or [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Preset] to see the current value of the
counter for a particular meter run:
Meter#1 Batch Preset
barrels
49978
Mtr#1 Preset Warning
barrels
100
3.6.1.
Batch Preset Flags
The batch preset flags are Boolean variables within the database which are
automatically set whenever the appropriate batch preset counter reaches zero.
They are available for use in programmable Boolean equations and digital I/O
functions.
3.6.2.
Batch Warning Flags
The batch warning flags are Boolean variables within the database which is
automatically set whenever the appropriate batch preset counter is equal or less
than the programmed batch warning value. It is available for use in
programmable Boolean equations and digital I/O functions.
3.7.
INFO - The batch preset
counter can be selected for
gross, net or mass units (see
Volume 3; 2.7. Configuring
the Meter Station).
Adjusting the Size of a Batch
The size of a running batch may change several times during the progress of
the batch. This is usually due to product take-off or injection upstream of the
metering station. While in the Display Mode, press [Prog] and then [Batch]
[Preset] [Meter] [n] or [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Preset]. This will show the
following screen.
ADJUST #1 BATCH SIZE
Enter Amount to
Adjust
0
Size Now
100000
Press [Clear] and enter the number of barrels/cubic meters (lbs or kgs) that you
wish to add to the size of the batch. Enter a minus number to reduce the size of
the batch.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
3-5
Chapter 3
3.8.
Automatic Batch Changes Based on

Product Interface Detection
Automatic batch changes can be made by the computer by monitoring the rate
of change of the products specific gravity/density during the final moments of a
batch. For example, a Boolean point can be programmed to be active whenever
the specific gravity rate of change flag is set and the batch warning flag is set.
A digital output can then be assigned to this interface detected Boolean flag
and can be used to cause a batch end command. Specific gravity disturbances
which may occur during the batch will be alarmed but will not be used to end a
batch unless the batch warning flag has been reached.
3-6
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Volume 2a
Basic Operation
4. Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change

4.1.
SG & Dens - Delta
Specific Gravity (SG) refers
to U.S. customary units and
is measured per barrel. Delta
Density (Dens) refers to
metric units and is measured
in kilograms per cubic meter.
The SG (or Dens) function
is the smallest difference in
specific gravity (or density)
between two products that
will form the product
interface.
Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change

Alarm Flag
The specific gravity/density rate of change alarm flag is a flag within the
database which is set whenever the rate of change of the station gravity/density
with respect to flow (SG or Dens see sidebar) exceeds the preset limit. It is
used to detect a change in flowing product and is available for use in
programmable Boolean equations and digital I/O functions.
4.2.
Delayed Specific Gravity/Density Rate of

Change Alarm Flag
In many cases the densitometer or gravitometer used to detect the product

interface is mounted many Bbls (m3 or liter3) ahead of the valve manifold used
to cut the product and end the batch. A second gravity/density rate of change
flag which is delayed by the amount of line pack Bbls or m3 provides an
accurate indication of when the interface reaches the actual valve manifold.
Next Interface Due
Barrels
156
The 'Next Interface Due' counter shows the number of Bbls or m3 of line pack
remaining before the leading edge of the product interface reaches the valve
manifold. A minus number indicates that the leading edge has passed. Up to
three interfaces can be tracked between the interface detector and the valve
manifold.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
4-1
Chapter 4
Specific Gravity Rate of Change
4.3.
SG & Dens - Delta
Specific Gravity (SG) refers
to U.S. customary units and
is measured per barrel. Delta
Density (Dens) refers to
metric units and is measured
per cubic meter. The SG
(or Dens) function is the
smallest difference in
specific gravity (or density)
between two products that
will form the product
interface.
Determining the Gravity Rate of Change

Limits
To accurately detect the product interface it is important to set the gravity rate
of change limits correctly. This limit is expressed as change in Specific Gravity
per Net Bbl or m3 (SG/Bbl or Dens/m3 see sidebar) and as such is flow rate
independent. Too small a limit will cause minor disturbances to be detected and
too large will cause the interface to be missed.
For example: A pipeline runs ISO-Butane (0.565), N-Butane (0.585) and
Propane (0.507). The smallest SG in this case is 0.585 minus 0.565, which
equals 0.020 SG units. It was observed that once an interface was detected, 33
Bbls passed before the specific gravity stabilized at the new gravity. The actual
gravity rate of change limit for this example is calculated as:
0.20 / 33 = 0.0006
(
SG/Bbl)
To ensure that we reliably detect the gravity rate of change, we set the rate of
change limits to one third of the actual expected rate of change (i.e., 0.0006/2)
which is 0.0002. To enter this value, press [Prog] [Meter] [Enter]. Scroll down
to 'Grav Change' and enter 0.0006.
Meter Station
Grav Change
Line Pack
4-2
.0006
250
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Volume 2a
Basic Operation
5. Meter Factors
5.1.
Changing Meter Factors
To do this you must edit the product file information by pressing [Prog]. Then
press [Product] [Enter] to scroll through all 16 sets of product data. Pressing
[Product] [n] [Enter], where n is 1-16, will allow you to go directly to data for a
specific product number. A display similar to the following can be scrolled
through:
PRODUCT #5
Name
PROPANE
Table Select
2
Override API
150.9
Override Dens
5010
M.F. #1
1.0099
M.F. #2
1.0034
M.F. #3
1.0023
M.F. #4
.9995
Move the cursor to the appropriate meter factor, press [Clear] and re-enter the
required meter factor. Note that only numbers greater than 0.8000 and less than
1.2001 are allowed. The Retroactive Barrels question will not be prompted
unless the meter factor you want to modify is being used at the time.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
5-1
Chapter 5
Meter Factors
5.2.
Changing Meter Factors for the Running

Product
Enter the Program Mode by pressing [Prog]. Then press [Factor] [Enter]; this
will allow you to scroll through all meter factors; or press [Meter] [n] [Factor]
[Enter] to go directly to the meter factor for Flowmeter n (n = 1, 2, 3 or 4).
Flowmeter #1
Meter Factor
1.0000
Press [Clear] and then enter the required meter factor. You will be prompted to
enter the number of retroactive gross barrels (or cubic meters) that the new
meter factor will be applied to.
Flow Meter #1
Meter Factor 1.0050
Retro Bbls ?
1000
Note that only numbers greater than 0.8000 and less then 1.2001 are allowed
as meter factors. The meter factor will automatically replace the previous meter
factor in the appropriate product information file.
5.3.
Previous Meter Factor Saved data
Whenever a flowmeter is proved, the new meter factor is compared against the
current meter factor. Additional data such as the flow rate and a time tag is
needed in order for this data to be meaningful. This Previous Meter Factor
data is saved with the meter factor automatically whenever a meter factor is
implemented after a prove or entered manually while it is being used.
5-2
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Volume 2a
Basic Operation
6. Proving Functions
6.1.
Auto-Prove Mode
The auto prove mode requires that a prover is available on a continuous basis
with motorized actuators on the appropriate valves. Flowmeters can be
automatically proved whenever the flow rate varies more than a certain amount
from the flow rate that existed when the flowmeter was last proved or when the
meter factor was manually entered. Flowmeters can also be proved whenever a
certain amount of flow has been measured without a proving, or after a meter
has been shut-in for more than a certain period of time and flow has been
started.
Entries are provided in the [Prog] [Prove] [Setup] menu to:
q Enter the percentage change in flow rate which will trigger an auto-prove
request.
q Enter a minimum number of Bbls (or m3)/hr flow rate change to trigger an
auto-prove request (needed at the lower flow rates where the percentage
change would be a very small volume change).
q Specify the period of time that the flow must remain at the new changed
rate before a prove sequence is started.
q Specify the period of time that a meter must be shut in before the need
for a prove sequence is flagged.
q Specify the maximum amount of flow between proves.
An additional entry in the [Prog] [Meter] [n] menu is required to activate or put
a meter run into the Auto-prove Mode.
6.1.1.
Repeated Prove Aborts While in the Auto-Prove

Mode
If 10 consecutive prove aborts occur when trying to auto-prove a specific

meter, auto-prove for that meter will be disabled (each prove abort reason will
also be logged into the historical alarm stack). If during the Auto-prove Mode, a
prove is completed and the meter factor is not implemented because of an
unexpected meter factor shift. The computer will wait the allowed time
(Inactive Timer under Prove Setup) before trying another prove run. If the
second completed run cannot implement the meter factor, then the Auto-prove
Mode for that meter will be disabled.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
6-1
Chapter 6
Proving Functions
6.2.
Full Sized Provers (Unidirectional and

Bi-directional)
Proving functions are accessed via the Program Mode. Press [Prog] [Prove]
[Enter] and the following selection menu is displayed:
* Prover Operation *
Trial Report (Y/N)
Trial Prove Mtr"n" _
Prove Meter "n"
Abort Prove ? (Y)
For a single 'Trial Prove', enter the meter number to be proved on the 2nd line.
To disable a trial prove report, enter [Y] on line one. For a prove sequence
enter the number of the meter to be proved on the 3rd line. To abort a prove in
progress enter [Y] on the 4th line. After making your entry the flow computer will
automatically return you to the Display Mode and select the 'Prove Counts
Display':
Counts
0
Prove Run
1
Meter Selected
2
Check Temp Stability
The bottom line of this display shows the current status of the prover. As the
prove sequence proceeds the 4th line is updated with the current status:
Ball Launched Fwd.
1st Detector Switch
In Flight Forward
2nd Detector Switch
Over Travel Forward
Ball Launched
Reverse
1st Detector Switch
In Flight Reverse
2nd Detector Switch
Over Travel Reverse
The 'Prove Run' number on line 2 increments as each run is completed.

Assuming a successful prove the 4th line indicates:
Prove Completed
6-2
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Volume 2a
Basic Operation
When the required number of consecutive runs within the run deviation limits
are accumulated. The run data are averaged and the prove calculations are
performed. The resultant meter factor is compared against the current meter
factor and if it is within acceptable limits can be automatically stored in the
appropriate product file and implemented retroactively for the current batch.
6.3.
Brooks Compact Prover
Proving functions are accessed the same as with full sized provers; via the
Program Mode. Press [Prog] [Prove] [Enter] and the following selection menu
is displayed:
*PROVER OPERATION*
Invar Rod Deg.F 75.5
Trial Report (Y/N)
Trial Prove Mtr"n"
Prove Meter "n"
Abort Prove ? (Y)
An additional entry is included for a Brooks prover (Invar Rod temperature). The
invar rod is part of the detector switch mechanism of the prover and is usually
close to ambient temperature. Enter the correct temperature to enable the
computer to correct for any thermal expansion.
For a single 'Trial Prove' enter the meter number to be proved on the 3rd line.
For a prove sequence enter the number of the meter to be proved on the 4th
line. To abort a prove in progress press the down arrow and enter [Y] on the 5th
line.
After making your entry the flow computer will automatically return you to the
Display Mode and select the 'Prove Counts Display' :
Counts
0
Prove Run
1
Meter Selected
2
Check Temp Stability
As with the full sized prover the bottom line of this display shows the current
status of the prover. Two additional status states will appear.
Check Plenum Press
While the computer is checking for temperature stability it is also checking and
adjusting the plenum chamber pressure. The status line above will only show if
the plenum pressure is still not within the selected dead band by the time the
temperature is stable.
Piston Downstream
20/24.71+ w 04/98
6-3
Chapter 6
Proving Functions
This status display occurs while the prover is returning the piston to the
upstream position ready to launch.
Use the arrow keys to scroll down the display. A second screen is relevant to
the pulse interpolation method of accumulating prove pulse counts.
Prove Counts
1034
Tdvol
2.234122
Tdfmp
2.202312
Piston Downstream
The 1st line shows the integer counts. Tdvol is the time between detectors and
Tdfmp is the time between the 1st flowmeter pulse after each of the detectors.
A pass report is printed at the end of each set of passes.
6.3.1.
Proving Reports for Brooks Compact Provers
As the compact prove sequence progresses the flow computer will print the
Pass Summary Report. This report is printed for each sequence of passes that
comprise a prove run. The number of passes made per run is selectable from 1
to 25 (see Prover Setup in Volume 3. Note: an entry of 1 will disable this
report).
On completion of a successful prove a Meter Proving Report will be printed.
This report is user configurable via the OmniCom configuration program.
6.4.
Other Proving Reports
The following reports are also available with this application:

o Prove Abort Report
o Meter Proving Report For Master Meter Method
o Mass Proving Report
6-4
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Volume 2a
Basic Operation
7. Printed Reports
-
7.1.
Fixed Format Reports
Several reports use a fixed format (i.e., cannot be changed by the user). These
are described below:
20/24.71+ w 04/98
q Status Report
Shows general information on current active

flowmeters, batch status (In progress /
Suspended / Ended), current running
products, batch ID string, current alarms and
future batch information.
q Historical Alarm Report
Date and time tags of the last 500 alarms,

when they occurred and are cleared. Meter
run specific alarms also snapshot the gross
volume and mass totalizers. Meter factor
changes are also recorded here.
q Audit Trail Report
Date and time tags of up to the last 150

changes to the flow computer database made
via the local keypad. Changes made via
either Modbus port will also be recorded if the
password feature is being used on that port.
q Product File Report
Shows information related to the product

setup of the flow computer. For turbine/PD
liquid flow computers, this data includes
product name, meter factors, override
gravities/densities and the equation or
standard to be used for each product. Gas
flow computers print product name, fluid type,
calculations standard, component analysis,
viscosity and isentropic overrides, SG and
heating value overrides for each product.
q Config Data Report
Lists most configuration settings currently in

the flow computer.
7-1
Chapter 7
Printed Reports
7.2.
Default Report Templates and Custom

Reports
The following reports are user-configurable via the OmniCom configuration

program.
q
q
q
q
7.3.
INFO - Entering a number
between 1 and 500 at the
Hist Alarm ? line will cause
many previous alarms to be
printed. When requesting
reports, such as previous
daily, batch or prover reports,
you must enter a number
between 1 and 8; 1 refers to
the last report generated and
8 refers to the oldest report.
Up to 150 previous data entry
changes can be printed when
the Audit Trail is
requested.
Note: ** These entries only
show up when the archive
ram is installed.
Snapshot Report
Batch Report
Daily Report
Prove Report
Printing Reports
A Snapshot Report can be printed by pressing [Print] [Enter] and can also be
printed automatically on timed intervals (see 9. Print Setup in Chapter 9).
Other printed reports are accessed from the Program Mode. Press [Prog]
[Print] [Enter] and the following selection menu will be displayed:
*PRINT REPORT MENU*
Snapshot Report ?
Previous Snapshot?
Status Report ?(Y)
Prev. Batch (1-8)
Prev. Ticket ?
Prev. Daily (1-8)
Prev. Prove (1-8)
Hist Alarm ?
Audit Trail ? (Y) **
Arch Starts **
# of Arc Days
Product File ?(Y)
Config Report ?(Y)
Move the cursor to the report required and enter [Y] or the number of the
historical report you wish to print ([1] refers to the latest, [2] refers to the next to
latest etc). Press [Prog] twice to return to the Display Mode.
7-2
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Volume 2a
Basic Operation
7.4.
Audit Trail
7.4.1.
Audit Trail Report
A fixed format report provides an audit trail of changes made to the flow
computer database. The number of changes that can be reported depends on
the type of changes made. The last 150 items are recorded. Each record
consists of a unique event number, time & date tag, database index number for
the variable changed and the new and old value of the variable, The starting
index number and the number of points changed is recorded when changes are
made remotely via a Modbus port, using OmniCom for instance.
Note1: Password entries are
recorded in this field. A threedigit code signifies the
password source and level of
the password entered. These
codes are as follows:
PIPELINE COMPANY NAME
Date: xx/xx/xx
Event
No.
xxx
7.4.2.
Audit Trail Report

Time: xx:xx:xx
Time
Date
xx:xx:xx
xx/xx/xx
Index
Number1
xxxxx
Page:
1
Computer ID: REV2271
Old Value/
# of Points
x.xxxxxxxxxxx
New Value/
Serial Port
x.xxxxxxxxxxx
Modbus
Port Passwords and the Audit Trail
Report
The Audit Trail Report is stored within the flow computer and is used to
document and time and date stamp changes made to the flow computer
database, either via the local keypad or via password protected serial port
access. The report is formatted in columns as shown above:
PASSWORD CODES
100
101
102
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Privileged Level Password entered at the

keypad
Level 1 Password entered at local keypad
Level 2 Password entered at local keypad
300
Level A Password entered via Serial Port

#3
301
Level B Password entered via Serial Port

#3
302
Level C Password entered via Serial Port

#3
103
Serial Port #2 Level A Password entered

at local keypad
400

#4
104

at local keypad
401

#4
105

at local keypad
402

#4
108
Level 1A Password entered at local

keypad
500

#1
200

#2
501

#1
201

#2
502

#1
202

#2
503

at local keypad
7-3
Volume 2a
Basic Operation
8. Index of Display Variables

Index of Display Variables
-These lists contain variable
groups and corresponding
key press sequences needed
to display them. In most
cases, the sequence can be
reversed (i.e.: [Temp]
[Meter] [n] is the same as
[Meter] [n] [Temp]). In all
cases, the [Display/Enter]
key (keypad bottom right)
must be pressed to enter the
command. Some variables
may not be displayed based
on the application or the
physical I/O assignments.
DISPLAY VARIABLES
VALID KEY PRESSES
Flow Rates and Totalizers

Batch Totalizers are displayed by including the [Batch] key before the key presses
shown below:
Daily & Cumulative Uncorrected Gross (IV)
[Gross] or [Gross] [Meter] [n]
Batch Uncorrected Gross (IV)
[Batch] [Gross] or [Batch] [Gross] [Meter] [n]
Daily & Cumulative Corrected Net (GSV)
[Net] or [Net] [Meter] [n]
Daily & Cumul. S&W Corrected Net (NSV)
[Net] [Net] [Meter] [n] or [Meter] [n] [Net] [Net]
Batch Corrected Net
[Batch] [Net] or [Batch] [Net] [Meter] [n]
Batch S&W Corrected Net (NSV)
[Net] [Net] [Batch] or [Batch] [Net] [Net]
Daily & Cumulative Mass
[Mass] or [Mass] [Meter] [n]
Batch Mass
[Batch] [Mass] or [Batch] [Mass] [Meter] [n]
Daily & Cumulative Energy
[Energy] or [Energy] [Meter] [n]
Total @ Second Reference Temperature
[Net] or [Net] [Meter] [n]
Current Instantaneous Values

shown below:
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Meter Temperatures
[Temp] or [Temp] [Meter] [n]
Meter Pressures
[Press] or [Press] [Meter] [n]
Density
[Density] or [Density] [Meter] [n]
Unfactored Density
[Density] [Meter] [n]
API Gravity & API @ Reference
[SG/API] or [SG/API] [Meter] [n]
Specific Gravity & SG @ Reference
[SG/API] or [SG/API] [Meter] [n]
Densitometer Temperatures
[Density] [Temp] or [Density] [Temp] [Meter] [n]
Densitometer Pressures
[Density] [Press] or [Density] [Press] [Meter] [n]
Prover Temperatures
[Prove] [Temp]
Prove Pressures & Plenum Pressure
[Prove] [Press]
Prover Density
[Prove] [Density]
Prover Density Temperature
[Prove] [Density] [Temp]
Prover Density Pressure
[Prove] [Density] [Press]
Auxiliary Inputs 1-4
[Analysis] [Input]
8-1
Chapter 8
Index of Display Variables
DISPLAY VARIABLES
VALID KEY PRESSES
Calculation Factors
shown below.
Volume Correction Factors (VCF)
[Temp] [Factor] or [Temp] [Factor] [Meter] [n]
Pressure Correction Factors (Cpl)
[Press] [Factor] or [Press] [Factor] [Meter] [n]
Batch FWA Meter Factors
[Batch] [Meter] [n] [Factor]
Other Factors and Intermediate Calculation factors

Meter Factors & K Factors
[Factor] or [Meter] [n] [Factor]
Pycnometer Factors
[Density] [Factor] or [Density][Factor] [Meter] [n]
Solartron / Sarasota / UGC Factors
[Density] [Factor] or [Density][Factor] [Meter] [n]
Equilibrium Pressure / A, B & F Factors
[Press] [Factor] [Meter] [n]
Linearizing Factor / Daily FWA LCF
[Factor]
Alarm Information
Active Alarms
[Alarms]
Transducer High/Low Alarm Limits
[Meter] or [Meter] [n]
Product Information
Product Number and Name
Override API & SG Gravity
Meter Factors Calculation Mode
[Product] or [Product] [n]

Note: n = 1-16
Prover Sequence Information

Prove Counts & Run Number
Meter Selected to Prove
Current Prover Status
Tdvol & Tdfmp Timers
[Counts] or [Prove] [Counts]
Batch Schedule Stack & Presets

Batch ID Character String
Running Product Number
[Batch] [Setup] or [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Setup]
Batch Preset Counters &

Interface Due Line Pack Counter
[Batch] [Preset] or [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Preset]
Miscellaneous Displays
8-2
Current Time & Date

Power Last Applied Time & Date
Power Last Lost Time & Date
Task Timing Display
[Time]
Display of Raw Input Signals
[Input]
Display of Raw Output Signals
[Output] [Status]
Hardware Inventory / Software Version
[Status]
Honeywell Module Status
[Input] [Status]
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Volume 2a
Basic Operation
DISPLAY VARIABLES
VALID KEY PRESSES
PID Control Displays

Primary Setpoint Source Local/Remote
Remote Setpoint Value
Primary Measurement & Setpoint
Secondary Measurement & Setpoint
Valve Open % & Auto/Manual Status
[Control] [n]
User Displays
Up to eight additional displays can be programmed by the user (See Volume 3 for
more details).
20/24.71+ w 04/98
8-3

Volume 3
Configuration and Advanced Operation
CONFIGURATION AND ADVANCED

OPERATION
Figures of Volume 3 ....................................................................................................... ix
1. Overview of Firmware Revisions 20.71/24.71 ......................................................... 1-1
1.1. Number of Meter Runs - Type of Flowmeters .......................................................1-1
1.2. Product Configuration............................................................................................1-1
1.3. Configurable Sensors per Meter Run....................................................................1-2
1.4. Configurable Sensors per Prover..........................................................................1-2
1.5. Temperature............................................................................................................1-2
1.6. Densitometers.........................................................................................................1-2
1.7. Station Capability....................................................................................................1-2
1.8. Auxiliary Inputs .......................................................................................................1-2
1.9. Number of products - Information Stored/Product...............................................1-2
1.10. Type of Products Measured.................................................................................1-2
1.11. Batching and Interface Detection ........................................................................1-3
1.12. Auto Proving Features..........................................................................................1-3
1.13. Retroactive Meter Factors and Override Gravity ................................................1-3
1.14. Retroactive Density Correction Factor................................................................1-3
1.15. Flow Rate/Viscosity Linearizing...........................................................................1-3
1.16. PID Control Functions ..........................................................................................1-4
1.17. Flow Weighted Averages......................................................................................1-4
20/24.71 w 04/98
1.18. User-Programmable Digital I/O............................................................................ 1-4

1.19. User-Programmable Logic Functions ................................................................. 1-4
1.20. User-Programmable Alarm Functions................................................................. 1-4
1.21. User-Programmable Variables ............................................................................ 1-4
1.22. User Display Setups............................................................................................. 1-4
1.23. User Report Templates ........................................................................................ 1-5
1.24. Serial Communication Links................................................................................ 1-5
1.25. Peer-to-Peer Communications ............................................................................ 1-5
1.26. Archive Data ......................................................................................................... 1-5
1.27. OmniCom
Software Communications Package .............................................. 1-5
1.28. OmniView
Software Communications Package .............................................. 1-5
2. Flow Computer Configuration................................................................................... 2-1

2.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2. Configuring with the Keypad in Program Mode ................................................... 2-1
2.2.1. Entering the Program Mode ..................................................................................2-1
2.2.2. Changing Data........................................................................................................2-1
2.2.3. Menu Selection Method .........................................................................................2-2
2.2.4. Random Access Method........................................................................................2-2
Example:....................................................................................................................2-2
2.2.5. Passwords..............................................................................................................2-3
Local Keypad Access .................................................................................................2-3
Changing Passwords at the Keypad............................................................................2-4
2.3. Getting Help ............................................................................................................ 2-4

2.4. Program Inhibit Switch........................................................................................... 2-4
2.5. Configuring the Physical Inputs / Outputs ........................................................... 2-6
2.5.1. Miscellaneous Configuration (Misc. Setup Menu) ...............................................2-6
2.5.2. Physical I/O Points not Available for Configuration ............................................2-7
2.5.3. Password Maintenance Settings...........................................................................2-7
2.5.4. Entries Requiring a Valid Privileged Password ...................................................2-8
2.5.5. Module Settings .....................................................................................................2-8
2.5.6. Meter Station Settings ...........................................................................................2-9
Auxiliary Input Assignment ....................................................................................... 2-10
2.5.7. Meter Run Settings .............................................................................................. 2-10
2.5.8. Prover Settings .................................................................................................... 2-12
ii
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

2.5.9. PID Control Settings............................................................................................ 2-14
2.5.10. Digital / Analog Output Settings....................................................................... 2-16
2.5.11. Front Panel Counter Settings ........................................................................... 2-17
2.5.12. Programmable Boolean Statements................................................................. 2-18
2.5.13. Programmable Variable Statements ................................................................. 2-20
2.5.14. User Display Settings ........................................................................................ 2-22
User Display #1........................................................................................................ 2-22
User Display #2........................................................................................................ 2-22
User Display #3........................................................................................................ 2-22
User Display #4........................................................................................................ 2-23
User Display #5........................................................................................................ 2-23
User Display #6........................................................................................................ 2-23
User Display #7........................................................................................................ 2-23
User Display #8........................................................................................................ 2-23
2.5.15. Digital I/O Point Settings ...................................................................................... 2-24
2.5.16. Serial Input / Output Settings .......................................................................... 2-26
2.5.17. Peer-to- Peer Communications Settings .......................................................... 2-27
2.5.18. Custom Modbus
Data Packet Settings .......................................................... 2-31
Custom Modbus Data Packet #1 (Addressed at 001)................................................ 2-31
2.5.19. Programmable Logic Controller Setup............................................................. 2-32
2.5.20. Archive File Setup ............................................................................................. 2-32
2.6. Setting Up the Time and Date ..............................................................................2-33

2.6.1. Accessing the Time/Date Setup Submenu......................................................... 2-33
2.6.2. Time and Date Settings ....................................................................................... 2-33
2.7. Configuring the Meter Station..............................................................................2-34

2.7.1. Accessing the Station Setup Submenu.............................................................. 2-34
2.7.2. Meter Station Settings......................................................................................... 2-34
Auxiliary Inputs ........................................................................................................ 2-36
2.8. Configuring Meter Runs .......................................................................................2-37

2.8.1. Accessing the Meter Run Setup Submenu ........................................................ 2-37
2.8.2. Meter Run Settings.............................................................................................. 2-37
Flow Rate/Viscosity Linearization Settings ............................................................... 2-38
K-Factor Linearization Settings ................................................................................ 2-39
More Meter Run Settings ......................................................................................... 2-40
2.9. Configuring Meter / Prover Temperature ............................................................2-41

2.9.1. Accessing the Temperature Setup Submenu .................................................... 2-41
20/24.71 w 04/98
iii
2.9.2. Meter Temperature Settings ................................................................................ 2-41

2.9.3. Meter Density Temperature Settings .................................................................. 2-42
2.9.4. Prover Temperature Settings .............................................................................. 2-42
2.9.5. Prover Density Temperature Settings................................................................. 2-43
2.10. Configuring Meter Pressure .............................................................................. 2-44

2.10.1. Accessing the Pressure Setup Submenu ......................................................... 2-44
2.10.2. Meter Pressure Settings .................................................................................... 2-44
2.10.3. Meter Density Pressure Settings....................................................................... 2-45
2.10.4. Prover Pressure Settings................................................................................... 2-45
2.10.5. Prover Density Pressure Settings ..................................................................... 2-47
2.11. Configuring Meter Specific Gravity / API Density ............................................ 2-48

2.11.1. Accessing the Gravity/Density Setup Submenu .............................................. 2-48
2.11.2. Meter Specific Gravity / Density Settings ......................................................... 2-48
Specific Gravity, API or Density ............................................................................... 2-48
Digital Densitometers ............................................................................................... 2-49
2.12. Configuring PID Control Outputs ...................................................................... 2-51

2.12.1. Accessing the PID Control Setup Submenu..................................................... 2-51
2.12.2. PID Control Output Settings.............................................................................. 2-51
Operating Mode........................................................................................................ 2-51
Tuning Adjustments.................................................................................................. 2-51
Remote Setpoint ...................................................................................................... 2-52
Secondary Variable .................................................................................................. 2-53
2.13. Configuring Provers........................................................................................... 2-54

2.13.1. Accessing the Prover Setup Submenu ............................................................. 2-54
2.13.2. Prover Settings................................................................................................... 2-54
2.14. Configuring Products......................................................................................... 2-58

2.14.1. Accessing the Product Setup Submenu........................................................... 2-58
2.14.2. Product Settings ................................................................................................ 2-58
Product #1................................................................................................................ 2-58
Product #2................................................................................................................ 2-60
Product #3................................................................................................................ 2-60
Product #4................................................................................................................ 2-61
Product #5................................................................................................................ 2-61
Product #6................................................................................................................ 2-62
Product #7................................................................................................................ 2-62
Product #8................................................................................................................ 2-63
Product #9................................................................................................................ 2-63
Product #10.............................................................................................................. 2-64
iv
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

Product #11 ............................................................................................................. 2-64
Product #12 ............................................................................................................. 2-65
Product #13 ............................................................................................................. 2-65
Product #14 ............................................................................................................. 2-66
Product #15 ............................................................................................................. 2-66
Product #16 ............................................................................................................. 2-67
2.15. Configuring Batches...........................................................................................2-67

2.16. Configuring Miscellaneous Factors...................................................................2-68
2.16.1. Accessing the Factor Setup Submenu............................................................. 2-68
2.16.2. Factor Settings .................................................................................................. 2-68
Totalizer Decimal Place Resolution.......................................................................... 2-69
Decimal Places for Correction Factors Appearing on Batch and Prove Reports ....... 2-69
2.17. Configuring Printers...........................................................................................2-70

2.17.1. Accessing the Printer Setup Submenu ............................................................ 2-70
2.17.2. Printer Settings.................................................................................................. 2-70
3. User-Programmable Functions ................................................................................ 3-1

3.1. Introduction.............................................................................................................3-1
3.2. User Programmable Boolean Flags and Statements ...........................................3-1
3.2.1. What is a Boolean? ............................................................................................... 3-1
Physical Digital I/O Points (1001 1024).................................................................. 3-2
Programmable Boolean Points (1025 1088)........................................................... 3-2
Programmable Accumulator Points (1089 1099).................................................... 3-2
One-Shot Boolean Points (1501 1650)................................................................... 3-3
Scratch Pad Boolean Points (1650 1699)............................................................... 3-3
3.2.2. Sign (+, -) of Analog or Calculated Variables (6001 8999).............................. 3-3
3.2.3. Boolean Statements and Functions ..................................................................... 3-3
Example 1: Meter Failure Alarm for Two-Meter Run Application ................................ 3-5
Example 2: Automatic Run Switching for 4-Meter Run Application'............................. 3-6
3.2.4. How the Digital I/O Assignments are Configured................................................ 3-8
3.2.5. Meter Run Boolean Points (1100 through 1499) ................................................ 3-10
Meter Run Status and Alarm Points ......................................................................... 3-10
Micro Motion Alarm Status Points.......................................................................... 3-13
More Meter Run Status and Alarm Points ................................................................ 3-13
3.2.6. Command and Status Boolean Points (1700 through 1799) .......................... 3-14
3.2.7. Station Boolean Flags (1800 through 1899)....................................................... 3-18
3.2.8. Prover Boolean Points (1900 through 1999) ...................................................... 3-21
3.2.9. Meter Totalizer Roll-over Flags........................................................................... 3-24
20/24.71 w 04/98
3.2.10. Miscellaneous Meter Station Alarm and Status Points.................................... 3-25

3.2.11. Commands Which Cause Custom Data Packets to be Transmitted Without
a Poll ................................................................................................................... 3-25
3.2.12. Commands Needed To Accomplish a Redundant Flow Computer System ... 3-26
3.2.13. Commands to Recalculate and Print Selected Batch ...................................... 3-26
3.2.14. Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags....................................................................... 3-26
3.2.15. Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags ..................................................... 3-27
3.2.16. Status Booleans Relating to Redundant Flow Computer Systems................. 3-29
3.2.17. More Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags ............................................ 3-29
3.3. User Programmable Variables and Statements ................................................. 3-30

3.3.1. Variable Statements and Mathematical Operators Allowed............................... 3-30
Example 1: ............................................................................................................... 3-31
Example 2: ............................................................................................................... 3-31
Example 3: ............................................................................................................... 3-31
Example 4: ............................................................................................................... 3-32
3.3.2. Using Boolean Variables in Variable Statements............................................... 3-32
Example:.................................................................................................................. 3-32
3.3.3. Entering Values Directly into the User Variables ............................................... 3-33
3.3.4. Using the Variable Expression as a Prompt....................................................... 3-33
3.3.5. Password Level Needed to Change the Value of a User Variable ..................... 3-33
3.3.6. Using Variables in Boolean Expressions ........................................................... 3-34
Example:.................................................................................................................. 3-34
3.4. User Configurable Display Screens .................................................................... 3-35

Example:.................................................................................................................. 3-37
4. Modbus
Protocol Implementation......................................................................... 4-1
4.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................ 4-1
4.2. Modes of Transmission.......................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1. ASCII Framing and Message Format ....................................................................4-2
4.2.2. Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) Framing and Message Format...............................4-2
4.3. Message Fields....................................................................................................... 4-2

4.3.1. Address Field .........................................................................................................4-2
4.3.2. Function Code Field ..............................................................................................4-3
4.3.3. Data Field................................................................................................................4-3
4.3.4. Error Check Field ...................................................................................................4-3
The LRC Mode ...........................................................................................................4-3
The CRC Mode ..........................................................................................................4-4
vi
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
4.4. Exception Response ..............................................................................................4-4

4.5. Function Codes.......................................................................................................4-5
4.5.1. Function Code 01 (Read Boolean Status) ............................................................ 4-5
4.5.2. Function Code 03 (Read 16-Bit Register Sets)..................................................... 4-7
4.5.3. Function Code 05 (Write Single Boolean)........................................................... 4-8
4.5.4. Function Code 06 (Write Single 16-Bit Integer) .................................................. 4-9
4.5.5. Function Code 15 (Write Multiple Boolean ) ...................................................... 4-10
4.5.6. Function Code 16 (Write 16-Bit Register Sets) ................................................. 4-11
4.5.7. Function Code 65 (Read ASCII Text Buffer)....................................................... 4-12
4.5.8. Function Code 66 (Write ASCII Text Buffer)....................................................... 4-13
4.6. Custom Data Packets ...........................................................................................4-14

4.7. Peer-to-Peer on the Modbus
Link .....................................................................4-15
4.8. Half Duplex Wiring Configuration Required........................................................4-15
4.9. Active Master.........................................................................................................4-15
4.10. Error Recovery....................................................................................................4-15
5. Flow Equations and Algorithms............................................................................... 5-1

5.1. Flow Equations and Algorithms for Revision 20 (U.S. Units)...............................5-1
5.1.1. Flow Rate At Flowing Conditions: Bbls/Hr .......................................................... 5-1
When Linearization Correction Factor is Selected:..................................................... 5-1
5.1.2. Net Flowrate At Base Conditions: Bbls/hr (Except Propylene)........................... 5-1
5.1.3. Mass Flowrate: KLbs/hr (Except Propylene)....................................................... 5-1
5.1.4. Equivalencies ........................................................................................................ 5-2
Table 6A, 23A Product Type: Crude Oil ..................................................................... 5-2
Table 6B, 23B Product Type: Fuel Oil........................................................................ 5-2
Table 6B, 23B Product Type: Jet Group..................................................................... 5-2
Table 6B, 23B Product Type: Gasolines..................................................................... 5-2
Table 6B, 23B Product Type: Between Jet and Gasoline............................................ 5-3
For Propylene ............................................................................................................ 5-3
Density of Ethane/Propane C3+ Mixes....................................................................... 5-3
Density and other physical properties of Ethylene (IUPAC) ........................................ 5-3
Density of Ethylene (NIST)......................................................................................... 5-3
Density of Ethylene (API)........................................................................................... 5-4
5.1.5. Prove Gross Flowrate (Uni- and Bi-Directional) .................................................. 5-4
5.1.6. Prove Gross Flowrate (Compact) .......................................................................... 5-4
5.1.7. Prove Meter Factor ................................................................................................ 5-4
20/24.71 w 04/98
vii
5.1.8. Equivalencies .........................................................................................................5-4

For Uni- or Bi-Directional Prover ................................................................................5-4
For Compact Prover...................................................................................................5-4
When Using Pulse Interpolation Method .....................................................................5-5
When Proving Propylene Product...............................................................................5-5
When Proving Ethylene Product.................................................................................5-5
5.1.9. PID Control .............................................................................................................5-5
5.1.10. Solartron
Density gm/cc ...................................................................................5-6
Uncompensated Density.............................................................................................5-6
Temperature Compensated Density ...........................................................................5-6
Temperature & Pressure Compensated Density .........................................................5-6
Additional Equation for Velocity of Sound Effects (Solartron Only)...........................5-6
5.1.11. Sarasota Density gm/cc .......................................................................................5-7
5.1.12. UGC Density gm/cc ..............................................................................................5-8
5.1.13. Densitometer Calibration Constants...................................................................5-8
5.1.14. Linearzing Coefficients........................................................................................5-8
5.2. Flow Equations and Algorithms for Revision 24 (Metric Units)........................... 5-9
5.2.1. Flowrate At Flowing Conditions: m3/hr ................................................................5-9
5.2.2. Net Flowrate At Base Conditions: Nm3/hr (Except Propylene)............................5-9
5.2.3. Mass Flowrate: ton/hr (Except Propylene) ...........................................................5-9
5.2.4. Equivalencies .........................................................................................................5-9
5.2.5. Calculations For Liquid Flows When Mass Pulses is Selected ........................ 5-10
Table 54A Product Type: Crude Oil .......................................................................... 5-10
Table 54B, Product Type: Fuel Oil............................................................................ 5-10
Table 54B Product Type: Jet Group.......................................................................... 5-10
Table 54B Product Type: Gasolines ......................................................................... 5-10
Table 54B Product Type: Between Jet and Gasoline ................................................ 5-10
For Propylene:.......................................................................................................... 5-11
5.2.6. Density of Ethane/Propane C3+ Mixes................................................................ 5-11
5.2.7. Density and other physical properties of Ethylene (IUPAC).............................. 5-11
Density of Ethylene (NIST) ....................................................................................... 5-11
Density of Ethylene (API) ......................................................................................... 5-11
5.2.8. Prove Gross Flowrate (Uni- and Bi-Directional) ................................................. 5-12
5.2.9. Prove Gross Flowrate (Compact)......................................................................... 5-12
5.2.10. Prove Meter Factor............................................................................................. 5-12
viii
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

5.2.11. Equivalencies..................................................................................................... 5-12
For Uni- or Bi-Directional Prover .............................................................................. 5-12
For Compact Prover ................................................................................................ 5-12
When Using Pulse Interpolation Method .................................................................. 5-13
When Proving Propylene Product ............................................................................ 5-13
When Proving Ethylene Product .............................................................................. 5-13
5.2.12. Proving with Mass Pulses................................................................................. 5-13
5.2.13. If no Prover Densitometer is used:................................................................... 5-13
5.2.14. PID Control......................................................................................................... 5-13
5.2.15. Solartron
Density kg/m3.................................................................................. 5-15
Uncompensated Density .......................................................................................... 5-15
Temperature Compensated Density......................................................................... 5-15
Temperature & Pressure Compensated Density....................................................... 5-15
Additional Equation for Velocity of Sound Effects (Solartron
Only) ........................ 5-15
3
5.2.16. Sarasota Density kg/m ..................................................................................... 5-16
5.2.17. UGC Density kg/m3 ............................................................................................ 5-17

5.2.18. Densitometer Calibration Constants ................................................................ 5-17
Figures of Volume 3
Fig. 1-1. Typical Configuration Using Helical Turbine, Positive Displacement and Coriolis Flowmeters1-1
Fig. 2-1. Figure Showing Program Inhibit Switch ................................................................................ 2-5
Fig. 3-1. Figure Showing Automatic Four-Meter Flow Zone Thresholds .............................................. 3-6
Fig. 3-2. Figure Showing Four-Meter Run Valve Switching ................................................................. 3-7
Fig. 3-3. Keypad Layout - A through Z Keys ..................................................................................... 3-36
20/24.71 w 04/98
ix
Volume 3
1. Overview of Firmware Revisions 20.71/24.71

Turbine / Positive Displacement / Coriolis
1.1.
Number of Meter Runs - Type of

Flowmeters
Minimum 1 run, Maximum 4 runs - Turbine, Positive Displacement Flow Meters

or Mass Flow Meters. 'Level A' dual channel 'Pulse Fidelity' checking can be
performed on all 4 meter runs.
1.2.
Product Configuration
Parallel runs measuring the same product or independent runs with different
products.
Fig. 1-1.
20/24.71 w 04/98
Typical Configuration Using Helical Turbine, Positive

Displacement and Coriolis Flowmeters
1-1
Chapter 1
Overview of Firmware Revision 20.71/24.71
1.3.
Configurable Sensors per Meter Run
Meter Pulses, meter temperature and pressure, meter density, density

temperature and pressure.
1.4.
Configurable Sensors per Prover
Prover inlet and outlet temperature and pressure, prover densitometer any type
(analog or digital pulse type such as Solartron, Sarasota or UGC ).
1.5.
Temperature
Each temperature sensor can be individually selected to be a 4-20mA, 4-wire

DIN curve RTD or 4-wire American curve RTD.
1.6.
Densitometers
Can be configured for any combination or mix of individual or shared

densitometers of any type (analog or digital pulse type such as Solartron,
Sarasota or UGC ) the maximum number that can be connected is five. Each
analog density can be specified as flowing or reference conditions. For mass
proving a densitometer can be configured on the prover.
1.7.
Station Capability
Meter runs may be combined or subtracted in any mode to provide station flow
rates and totalizers.
1.8.
Auxiliary Inputs
Four auxiliary inputs are provided for miscellaneous sensors (for example:
BS&W, Viscosity monitors, etc.) and can be individually selected to be a 420mA, 4-wire DIN curve RTD or 4-wire American curve RTD.
1.9.
Number of products - Information

Stored/Product
Sixteen. - Product name, factors for each meter, gravity/density override,

calculation mode to be used when running the product.
1.10. Type of Products Measured

Crude oil, refined products, NGLs using API 2540, LPGs using GPA TP16 and
propylene using API 11.3.3.2. Ethylene using NIST 1045, API 2565, or IUPAC
equations. Mass measurement mode is also standard. ASTM D1550,D1555,
1952 Table 23,24 are also provided.
1-2
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
1.11. Batching and Interface Detection

Six batch setups per meter run can be programmed with alphanumeric batch ID
tag, product number to run and expected size of batch.
Individual meter run batch preset down counters provide 'batch end warning'
and 'batch end reached' alarms.
Batches can be ended manually or automatically on size of batch, change of
product, beginning of new day, day of the week or day of the month.
Product interface detection is achieved using a station interface detector
densitometer mounted ahead of the meter runs. Line pack count down counters
allow up to three product interfaces to be tracked between the interface detector
gravitometer and the valve manifold allowing pre-emptive product cuts.
1.12. Auto Proving Features

Fully automated proving to API chapter 12. User configured for Uni-, Bidirectional and compact provers with optional inlet and outlet temperature and
pressure sensors. Both up-stream and downstream water draw volume inputs
are available. Plenum chamber pressure on a Brooks prover is also input as an
analog and controlled by the computer. Master meter proving is also featured.
Provings can be triggered on change of flow rate versus last known prove for
each meter or on the amount of flow which has occurred since the last prove.
Proves can also be triggered by a meter being shut in for more than a specified
amount of time.
1.13. Retroactive Meter Factors and Override

Gravity
Meter factors and override product gravity can be applied retroactively for a
selectable number of barrels at any time during a batch. Meter factors
determined by a prove can be automatically implemented from that point or
retroactively to the beginning of the batch.
1.14. Retroactive Density Correction Factor

Density correction factors can be applied retroactively for a selectable number
of barrels at any time during a batch.
1.15. Flow Rate/Viscosity Linearizing

Viscosity/Flow Rate Linearizing of Helical Turbine/Positive Displacement
meters can be accomplished by apply a linearization correction factor (LCF) to
the incoming flowmeter pulses. The LCF is calculated in real time by monitoring
a live viscosity input signal which is input via the auxiliary inputs.
20/24.71 w 04/98
1-3
Chapter 1
Overview of Firmware Revision 20.71/24.71
1.16. PID Control Functions

Four independent control loops are provided for control of a primary variable
with either high or low override control by a secondary variable. Contact closure
inputs are activated to provide a startup and shutdown ramp function for each
control loop if needed. Primary setpoint can be adjusted via an analog input, a
keypad entry or communication link. Control loops are not dedicated and may
be cascaded. Data is processed every 500 msec.
1.17. Flow Weighted Averages

Flow weighted averages are calculated for all input variables and correction
factors based on hourly, daily totals and running batch totals.
1.18. User-Programmable Digital I/O

Each I/O point is individually configurable as either an input or output with
variable 'Delay On' and 'Delay Off'. Pulse widths are adjustable when used as
auxiliary totalizer outputs or sampler outputs.
1.19. User-Programmable Logic Functions

Sixty-four logic statements can be user programmed to control meter run
switching, prover loop and provide user auxiliary control functions.
1.20. User-Programmable Alarm Functions

Sixteen of the programmable logic statements described above can be used to
contain custom text messages which can be displayed, logged and printed.
1.21. User-Programmable Variables

Sixty-four user variables can be programmed to manipulate data for display and
printing or remote access via a communication port. Typical uses include,
special units conversions, customer averaging algorithms for leak detection,
special limit checking and control functions. The programmable variable
statements can also be used to type cast data of one type to another (i.e.,
change a floating point variable to an integer type so that a PLC or DCS system
can make use of it).
1.22. User Display Setups

The user may specify eight key press combinations which recall display
screens. Each user display screen can show four variables each with a
descriptive tag defined by the user.
1-4
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
1.23. User Report Templates

Using OmniCom the user can generate custom report templates or edit existing
templates. These are uploaded into the flow computer. Custom templates for
the snapshot, batch end, daily and prove reports can be defined.
1.24. Serial Communication Links

Up to four serial data links are available for communications with other devices
such as printers, SCADA systems, PLCs and other Omni Flow Computers.
Ports communicate using a superset of the Modbus protocol (ASCII or RTU).
Printer data is ASCII data.
1.25. Peer-to-Peer Communications

Omni flow computers can be user configured to communicate with each other
as equal peers. Groups of data variables can be exchanged or broadcast
between other flow computers. Multiple flow computers can share resources
such as a PLC.
1.26. Archive Data

Two types of data archiving are possible in the flow computer. 1) Formatted
ASCII text using custom report templates, 2) Raw Data using archive records
and files.
1.27. OmniCom
Software Communications
Package
OmniCom software is provided with each flow computer, and allows the user
to configure the computer on-line or off-line using a personal computer.
1.28. OmniView
Software Communications
Package
A Man-Machine Interface package for the Omni Flow Computer is also
available as an option.
20/24.71 w 04/98
1-5
Volume 3
2. Flow Computer Configuration

2.1.
Introduction
Configuration data is stored in the computer's battery backed-up RAM memory

which will retain its data for at least 1 to 2 months with no power applied.
Configuration data can be entered using one of three methods:
1) Configure off-line using the OmniCom PC configuration program and
then uploading all data at once.
2) Configure on-line using the OmniCom PC configuration program which
uploads each change as it is entered.
3) Enter configuration data via the front panel keypad using the Program
Mode.
Methods 1) and 2) require an IBM compatible PC running the OmniCom
Configuration Software and are described in Volume 5 and in OmniCom Help.
Method 3) is described here.
2.2.
2.2.1.
INFO - Key presses are
denoted in bold face between
brackets; e.g.: the enter key
appears in this manual as
[Enter].
Configuring with the Keypad in Program

Mode
Entering the Program Mode
While in the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The front panel Program LED
above the key will glow green and the following selection menu will be
displayed on the first three lines of the LCD display.
Press Keys to Select
Group Entry, or
Press "Prog" to Exit
th
The 4 line of the display is

used to show the user key
presses.
2.2.2.
Changing Data
Data can be accessed using a sequential list of menu prompts or in a random

access manner by going directly to a specific group of entries.
20/24.71 w 04/98
2-1
Chapter 2
Flow Computer Configuration
2.2.3.
Menu Selection Method
INFO - Characters in [ ]
refer to key presses.

!

"
#$
#$ %
&

TIP - It is best to use the

menu selection method
when programming an
application for the first time
as every possible option
and variable will be
prompted. Once a computer
is in operation and you
become familiar with the
application you can decide
to use the faster Random
Access Method described
on the facing page.
While in the Program Mode
(program LED on) press
[Setup] [Enter]. A menu
similar to the following will
be displayed.

Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to the appropriate
entry and press [Enter] to access a particular submenu. The first menu, 'Misc
Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the
number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer;
i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for
configuration data unless a transducer has been defined.
2.2.4.
Random Access Method
In addition to the Setup Menu, the data is also presented in related groups such
as Temperature, Pressure, Meter, etc. You press the group key of your choice to
get to a data area. By specifying a meter run before or after a group you go
directly to the data for that group and that group only.
Once a group is selected use the 'Up/Down' arrow keys to step to a specific data
entry within the group. You can view data and, assuming a valid password has
been entered, change its value as required. If an error is made, press [Clear],
re-enter the correct data and press [Enter] to enter the new value. The cursor
will automatically step to the next data item in that group unless that would cause
a total change of screen (i.e., you can always verify your entry). A list of data
groups and associated key presses is listed later in this chapter.
Example:
Pressing [Temp] will allow you access to temperature data for all meter runs.
Pressing [Meter] [1] [Temp] or [Temp] [Meter] [1] will allow access to only
Meter Run #1 temperature data. For example, pressing [Meter] [1] [Temp] will
display the following until the [Enter] key is pressed.
th
The 4 line of the display is

used to show the user key
presses.
2-2

'
20/24.71 04/98
Volume 3

Pressing the [Enter] key will display a screen similar to this:

2.2.5.
INFO - Most entry groups
occupy multiple screens so
be sure to use the []/[]
to scroll and see all data.
Passwords
Except when changing transducer high/low alarm limits, a password is usually

asked for when changing the configuration data within the computer.
The flow computer has independent password protection of the following:
Local Keypad Access / Modbus Port #1 (selectable)
(Physical Serial Port #1)
Modbus Port #2 - (Physical Serial Port #2)
Local Keypad Access

Three password levels are provided:
Privileged Level
Allows complete access to all entries within the flow

computer including keypad passwords 1, 1A and 2
below. The initial privileged password for each Modbus
port is selected via this password level.
Level 1
This level allows technician access to most entries

within the flow computer with the exception of I/O
Points assignments, programmable variables and
Boolean statements and passwords other than
Keypad Level 1.
Level 1A
This level allows technician access to the following

entries only:
Meter Factors
K Factors
Densitometer
Correction
Factors
(Pycnometer
Factor)
Level 2
Allows access to the operator type entries. These

entries include:
20/24.71 04/98
Transducer Manual Overrides

Product Gravity Overrides
Prover Operations
Batching Operations
2-3
Chapter 2

Changing Passwords at the Keypad
1) At the keypad press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter].

2) With the cursor blinking on 'Misc Configuration', press [Enter].
3) With the cursor blinking on 'Password Main?', press [Enter].
4) Enter the Privileged Level Password (up to 6 Characters) and press
[Enter].
5) The Level 1, 1A and Level 2 passwords can now be viewed and changed
if required.
INFO - See Technical

Bulletin TB-960701 in
Volume 5 for setting Level B
and Level C passwords using
OmniCom.
Note: Level B and Level C

passwords for each Modbus
port cannot be viewed or
changed from the keypad.
INFO - The Help System is

not limited to just the
Program Mode. Context
sensitive help is available in
all modes of operation.
6) Scroll down to access each of the Modbus serial port 'Level A'
passwords. These are labeled Serial 1 (if Modbus Protocol is selected),
'Serial 2', Serial 3', and 'Serial 4' corresponding to the physical port
numbering for Modbus Ports 1, 2, 3 and 4.
2.3.
Getting Help
Context sensitive help is available for most data entries. Help is summoned by
pressing the [Display/Enter] key twice ([Help] key) with the cursor on the data
field in question. Help screens are frequently more than 1 full screen so always
use the [
]/[
] keys to scroll in case there is more. Press [Prog] or [Enter]
once to exit the help system and return to your original screen.
2.4.
Program Inhibit Switch
A 'Program Inhibit Switch' mounted behind the front panel prevents

unauthorized changing of data when in the 'Inhibit' position. Most data can be
viewed while the switch is in the program inhibit position, but any attempt to
alter data will be ignored and cause 'PROGRAM LOCKOUT' to be displayed on
the bottom line of the LCD display.
The inner enclosure of the flow computer can be locked or sealed within the
outer enclosure blocking access to the 'Program Inhibit Switch'.
2-4
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
CAUTION!

latching mechanism which
first must be disengaged by
lifting the bezel upwards
before withdrawing the unit
from the case.
Fig. 2-1.
20/24.71 w 04/98
Figure Showing Program Inhibit Switch
2-5
Chapter 2
2.5.
Tip - It is best to use the
Menu Selection Method (see
9.2.3) when programming an
as every possible option and
variable will be prompted.
Once a computer is in
operation and you become
familiar with the application
you can decide to use the
faster Random Access
Method (see 9.2.4).
INFO - The first menu, 'Misc

Configuration', should always
be completed first as these
entries specify the number
and type of input and output
devices connected to the flow
computer. You are advise to
complete all entries under
this menu before proceeding.
Only transducers that have
been assigned to physical
I/O points will be available for
further configuration (i.e., the
menus following the 'Misc
Configuration' menu do not
ask for or accept
configuration data unless a
transducer has been
defined). (See 9.5.2.)
2-6
Configuring the Physical Inputs /

Outputs
The Omni Flow Computer can accept many I/O modules and be configured to
match just about any combination of measurement transmitters. Configuring the
physical I/O means setting up the number of meter runs, what types of
transducers are to be used and to which physical I/O points they are connected.
2.5.1.
Miscellaneous Configuration (Misc. Setup Menu)
The physical I/O configuration of the flow computer is changed by entering the
Misc. Setup menu while the 'Select Group Entry' screen is displayed (see
9.2.1. Entering the Program Mode).
Press Keys to Select
Group Entry, or
Press "Prog" to Exit
Setup
Press [Setup] then [Enter] and the following selection menu will be displayed:
*** SETUP MENU ***
Misc Configuration _
Time/Date Setup
Station Setup
The cursor automatically appears at the Misc Configuration option. Press
[Enter] and the following selection menu will be displayed:
*** Misc. Setup ***
Password Maint?(Y)
Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)
Config Meter n
Config Prove ? (Y)
Config PID ? n
Config D/A Outn
Front Pnl Counters
Program Booleans ?
Program Variables?
User Display ? n
Config Digitaln
Serial I/O n
Peer/Peer Comm(Y)?
Custom Packet n
Archive File n
PLC Group n
SCROLL UP FOR MORE
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
2.5.2.
Physical I/O Points not Available for

Configuration
Configuration parameter groups are only prompted as needed. Meter runs and
transducers which are not assigned to a physical I/O point will not be available
for configuration. In these cases the following message will be displayed:
Variable Selected is
Not Assigned to a
Physical I/O Point
If this message is displayed

check the I/O point
assignment for the variable.
2.5.3.
INFO - Characters in { }
refer to password levels.
Characters in [ ] refer to key
presses.
TIP - Use the blank lines
provided next to each
configuration option to write
down the corresponding
settings you entered in the
flow computer.
Some of these entries may
not appear on the display or
in OmniCom. Depending on
the various configuration
settings of your specific
metering system, only those
configuration options which
are applicable will be
displayed.
Password Maintenance Settings
Enter [Y] at Password Maint ? of the Misc Setup menu to open the
following entries:
{PL} Privileged
Enter the privileged password to allow you to view and change all configuration data including
other passwords.
{PL} Level 1
_______________
Enter the Level 1 password to allow entry of all configuration data except entries which determine
the physical I/O personality of the computer.
{PL} Level 1A
_______________
Enter the Level 1A password to allow entry of Meter factors K Factors and Density Correction
Factors only.
{PL} Level 2
_______________
Enter the Level 2 password which is required for operator type entries such as gravity overrides
and meter factors.
{PL} Ser1 Passwd

Note: In the privileged
password area all passwords
are legible upon entering the
correct privileged password.
In all other cases when
requested for a password,
upon entering the password,
the Omni will display all
entered characters as
asterisk.
_______________
_______________
Enter the Serial Port password. All data in the Modbus database except passwords can be read
via the serial ports. These passwords allow writes to the Modbus database. Password protection
can be disabled by entering a blank field as a password.
{PL} Lockout SW Active? N
_______________
Enter [N] for the lockout switch to be inactive for this serial port.
Enter [Y] for the lockout switch to be active for this serial port.
{PL} Ser2 Passwd
_______________
Enter the Serial Port #2 Password.
20/24.71 w 04/98
_______________
{PL} Ser3 Passwd
_______________
_______________
{PL} Ser4 Passwd
_______________
_______________
2-7
Chapter 2
2.5.4.
presses.
flow computer.
displayed.
Entries Requiring a Valid Privileged Password
The following entries display only when a Valid Privileged Password is entered:
{PL} Model # (0=3000, 1=6000)
{PL} Re-configure Archive
CAUTION!
If you change the number or

type of installed I/O modules,
you must perform the Check
Modules Function to inform
the computer that you wish to
use the new hardware
configuration.
_______________
Enter [Y] to re-configure archive records definition. Enter [N] when finished.
{PL} Archive Run (Y/N)
_______________
Enter [Y] to start the archive running.
{PL} Reset All Totalizers ? (Y/N)
_______________
Reset All Ram and Reset Totalizers will only display after the privileged password has been
entered. will clear to zero all internal totalizers. You can change totalizer decimal place settings
after entering [Y]. The three electromechanical totalizers on the front of the computer cannot be
zeroed.
{PL} Reset All Ram ? (Y/N)
_______________
This entry is used by the OmniCom configuration software to determine the maximum I/O
capability of the computer.
_______________
Resetting all Ram will clear all configuration data, calibration data and totalizers. This means that
all configuration data will have to be re-entered.
{PL} Input Calibrate Default ?
_______________
Entering a [Y] here will set all the analog input calibration constants used to scale zero and span
settings to the default value. This will require you to re calibrate all the inputs. You can also do
this on a channel by channel basis by entering the input channel number.
{PL} D/A Calibrate Default ?
_______________
Entering a [Y] here will set all the analog output calibration constants used to scale zero and span
settings to the default value. This will require you to re-calibrate all the outputs. You can also do
this on a channel by channel basis by entering the output channel number.
2.5.5.
Module Settings
Enter [Y] at Check Modules ? of the Misc Setup menu and a screen similar
to the following will display:
MODULE S-WARE H-WARE
A-1
Y
Y
B-1
Y
Y
E/D-1
Y
Y
E-1
Y
Y
H-1
Y
Y
D-2
Y
Y
S-2
Y
Y
Update S-Ware ?
{PL} Update S-Ware ? (Y)
_______________
A table is displayed showing all of the physically installed I/O modules verses the I/O modules
recognized by the software (see display example above). You must answer the 'Update Software'
question entering [Y] whenever you change the number or type of installed modules. The available
I/O point numbers are allocated to each module at this time according to the type and number of
each module (see Chapter 2 for more information).
2-8
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
2.5.6.
INFO - The number of
process variable I/O points
available depends on the
number of combo modules
installed (see Chapter 2 in
Volume 1 for more
information). Point numbers
range from 01 through 24.
Assign [0] to invalidate the
assigning of a variable.
Meter Station Settings
Enter [Y] at Config Station ? of the Misc Setup menu to open the following
entries:
{PL} Station Configured As:
_______________
Station Totals and Flows Defined As: Define which meter runs will be included in the station flow
rates and totalizers. Meter data can be added or subtracted.
Example: Entering [1] [+] [2] [-] [3] [-] [4] defines the station flows and totals as the result of
Meter Runs #1 and #2 added together, subtracted by the flows of Meters #3 and #4.
Enter [0] for no station totalizers.
I/O Type Mismatch - The

computer will not let you
assign the same I/O point #
to incompatible transducer
types; i.e., an I/O point
cannot be assigned as a
temperature input for Meter
Run #1 and a pressure input
for Meter Run #2. If the I/O
Type Mismatch message is
displayed, recheck the I/O.
{PL} Density I/O Point
_______________
Enter the I/O point number that corresponds to the station density or gravity input used as the
product interface detector. Digital densitometers can be corrected for temperature and pressure
effects using the station pressure and temperature points. Digital pulse densitometers can only be
th
assigned I/O point numbers corresponding to the 4 input channel of a B Type Combo Module, or
Channels 3 or 4 of an E/D Type Combo Module.
Density Tag
_______________
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density transducer on the LCD display.
Enter Density Type

Shared Transducers Enter the same I/O point to
share transducers between
meter runs.
Correcting a Mistake Enter an I/O point # of [0] to
cancel an incorrectly entered
I/O point #, then enter the
correct number.
_______________
Enter the densitometer type: 1=4-20 API linear, 2=4-20 SG linear, 3=4-20 density linear,
4=Solartron pulse, 5=Sarasota pulse, 6=UGC pulse.
{PL} Temp I/O Point
_______________
Enter the I/O point number to which the temperature sensor used to compensate the station
densitometer is connected.
When a digital densitometer is used as the station transducer, it can be corrected for temperature
effects by assigning a temperature I/O point.
For the station product interface densitometer, enter a meter run temperature sensor in cases
where a separate temperature transmitter is not available.
st
Assigning I/O Point #99 This indicates that the

associated variable will be
available for display and be
used in all calculations, but
will not be obtained via a live
input. The variable value is
usually downloaded into the
flow computer database via a
communication port or via a
user variable statement.
RTD probes should be assigned to the 1 channel on any type of combo module. RTD probes can
nd
also be assigned to the 2 channel of B Type combo modules.
Density T Tag
_______________
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density temperature transducer on the LCD
display.
0=DIN,1=AM,2=4-20
_______________
Enter the densitometer temperature transmitter type: 0=DIN RTD, 1=American RTD, Honeywell
Smart Transmitter or 2=4-20mA linear output.
{PL} Press I/O Point
_______________
Enter the I/O point number to which the pressure transmitter used to compensate the station
digital densitometers is connected.
When a digital densitometer is used as the product interface detector, it can be corrected for
pressure effects by assigning a station pressure point.
If a separate pressure transmitter is not available, enter a meter pressure transmitter I/O point.
Dens P Tag
_______________
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density pressure transducer on the LCD
display.
20/24.71 w 04/98
2-9
Chapter 2

Auxiliary Input Assignment
presses.
flow computer.
displayed.

installed (see Chapter 2 in
Volume 1 for more
meter runs.
correct number.
{PL} Auxiliary Input #1 I/O
_______________
Enter the physical I/O point number to which this auxiliary input is connected. Auxiliary Inputs can
be used to enter S&W, viscosity and other miscellaneous variables.
Aux #1 Tag
_______________
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this transducer on the LCD display.
0=DIN,1=AM,2=4-20
_______________
Enter the Auxiliary Input Type: 0=DIN RTD, 1=American RTD, 2=Honeywell Smart Transmitter or
4-20mA.
_______________
Aux #2 Tag
_______________
0=DIN,1=AM,2=4-20
_______________
_______________
Aux #3 Tag
_______________
0=DIN,1=AM,2=4-20
_______________
_______________
Aux #4 Tag
_______________
0=DIN,1=AM,2=4-20
_______________
2.5.7.
Meter Run Settings
Enter [1], [2], [3] or [4] at Config Meter "n" of the Misc Setup menu to open
the following entries:
{PL} Flow I/O Point
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the number of the I/O point used to input the flow signal for each meter run. Flowmeter
rd
th
pulse inputs can only be assigned to the 3 input channel of any combo module and 4 input
channel of A Type combo modules. When working with compact provers using pulse interpolation,
rd
th
you must assign each of the flowmeter pulse signals to the 3 or 4 channel of an E Type combo
module.
Flow Tag
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this flowmeter on the LCD display.
{PL} Dual Pulse ? (Y/N)
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter [Y] to enable 'Level A' pulse fidelity and security checking for this meter run (API MPMS
rd
Chapter 5, Section 5). The 'Flow I/O Point' entered above must correspond to the 3 input channel
of an E Combo Module. The flowmeter pulses are physically wired to Input Channels 3 and 4 of
the E Combo Module.
{PL} Select Mass Pulse?
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter [Y] if the flowmeter used for this meter run produces mass pulses (i.e., pulses per mass
unit). A coriolis mass meter usually provides this type of output signal.
{PL} Temp I/O Point
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the I/O point number used to input the temperature signal for each meter run. Duplicate I/O
assignments are allowed when a sensor is shared by more than one meter run.
2-10
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

Temp Tag
Config Meter Runs Physical I/O information for

up to 4 meter runs can be
entered. Transducers that
are not assigned an I/O point
will not be available for
display or further
configuration.
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this temperature transducer on the LCD display.
0=DIN,1=AM,2=4-20
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the Temperature Transmitter Type: 0=DIN RTD, 1=AMER RTD, 2=4-20mA.
{PL} Press I/O Point
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the I/O point number used to input the pressure signal for each meter run. Duplicate I/O
assignments are allowed when a sensor is shared by more than one meter run.
Press Tag
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this pressure transducer on the LCD display.
{PL} Density I/O Point #
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the I/O point number used to input the density signal for each meter run. Duplicate I/O
assignments are allowed when a densitometer is shared by more than one meter run. Digital pulse
th
densitometers can only be assigned I/O point numbers corresponding to the 4 input channel of a
rd
th
'B' Type Combo Module or the 3 and 4 input channels of an E/D Combo Module.
Density Tag
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter Density Type
_______
_______
_______
Enter the Densitometer Type: 1=4-20 API linear, 2=4-20 SG linear,

0=Flowing, 1=Ref
_______
_______
_______
3=4-20 Density linear,
_______
_______
This entry is applies only if you selected a 4-20mA type densitometer in the previous entry Specify
if the density transducer signal represents density at: 0=flowing temperature and pressure,
1=reference temperature and pressure.
{PL} Dens T I/O Point
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the I/O point number used to input the signal applied to compensate for temperature effects
at the densitometer for each meter run.
If the densitometer has no temperature sensor fitted, enter the same I/O point assignment as the
meter run temperature sensor.
Density T Tag
_______
_______
_______
_______
display.
0=DIN, 1=AM, 2-4-20
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the Densitometer Temperature Transmitter Type: 0=DIN RTD, 1=AMER RTD, 2=4-20mA.
{PL} Dens P I/O Point
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the I/O point number used to input the signal applied to compensate for pressure effects at
the densitometer for each meter run.
If the densitometer has no pressure sensor fitted, enter the same I/O point assignment as the
meter run pressure sensor.
Dens P Tag
_______
_______
_______
_______
display.
20/24.71 w 04/98
2-11
Chapter 2
2.5.8.
Prover Settings
presses.
Enter [Y] at Config Prove ? of the Misc Setup menu to open the following
entries:

flow computer.
displayed.
{PL} Prover Temperature I/O Point
Configuring the Prover When an input and output

transducer signal is available,
the computer uses the
average of both signals.
Otherwise, it uses the signal
from the available transducer.
The pressure or temperature
of the meter run being proved
will be used to compensate
the prover if neither left or
right transducer is assigned
to an I/O point #.
Inlet
Outlet
__________
__________
Enter the I/O point number used to input the prover inlet/outlet temperature signal. Inlet and outlet
temperature sensor readings are averaged to determine the actual prover temperature.
To use the meter run temperature, enter [0] for both inlet and outlet.
If there is only one temperature sensor, enter [0] for outlet or enter the same number for both
prover inlet and outlet.
Inlet/Outlet T Tag
__________
__________
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this temperature transducer on the LCD display.
0=DIN, 1=AM, 2-4-20
__________
__________
Enter the Prover Temperature Transmitter Type: 0=DIN RTD, 1=AMER RTD, 2=4-20mA.
{PL} Prover Pressure I/O Point
__________
__________
Enter the I/O point number used to input the prover inlet/outlet pressure signal. Inlet and outlet
pressure sensor readings are averaged to determine the actual prover pressure.
To use the meter run pressure, enter [0] for both inlet and outlet.
If there is only one pressure sensor, enter [0] for outlet or enter the same number for both prover
inlet and outlet.
Inlet/Outlet P Tag
__________
__________
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this pressure transducer on the LCD display.
{PL} Prover Plenum I/O Point
_______________
Applies only when a Brooks compact prover is specified. Enter the I/O point number used to input
the compact prover plenum pressure sensor input.
Plenum Tag
_______________
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this plenum pressure transducer on the LCD
display.
{PL} Prover Density I/O Point
_______________
Enter the I/O point number used to input the density signal for the prover. The prover density I/O
point is used to calculate the mass of liquid in the prover during a mass proving run (i.e., coriolis
meter proving). Digital pulse densitometers can be corrected for temperature and pressure effects
using the station pressure and temperature points. Digital pulse densitometers must be assigned
th
rd
th
to the 4 channel of a 'B' type module or the 3 or 4 channel of an E/D module.
Density Tag
_______________
Enter Density Type
_______________
Enter the Prover Densitometer Type: 1=4-20 API linear, 2=4-20 SG linear, 3=4-20 density linear,
2-12
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

{PL} Prover Dens T I/O Point

installed (see Volume I;
Chapter 2 for more
meter runs.
_______________
Enter the I/O point number to which the temperature sensor used to compensate the prover
When a digital densitometer is used as the prover transducer, it can be corrected for temperature
effects by assigning a temperature I/O point.
For the prover densitometer, enter the same I/O points as the prover inlet/outlet temperature
sensor in cases where a separate temperature transmitter is not part of the densitometer.
st
RTD probes should be assigned to the 1 channel on any type of combo module. RTD probes can
nd
also be assigned to the 2 channel of B Type combo modules.
Dens T Tag
_______________
display.
0=DIN, 1=AM, 2=2-40
_______________
Enter the Prover Temperature Transmitter Type: 0=DIN RTD, 1=AMER RTD, 2=4-20mA.
{PL} Prover Dens P I/O Point
_______________
Enter the I/O point number to which the pressure transmitter used to compensate the prover digital
Enter the same I/O point as the prover inlet pressure sensor in cases where a separate pressure
transmitter is not available.
Dens P Tag
_______________
display.

correct number.
20/24.71 w 04/98
2-13
Chapter 2
2.5.9.
Proportional Integral
Derivative (PID) -- For
practical reasons we refer to
PID Control Loops in this
manual. However, your flow
computer actually performs
the Proportional Integral (PI)
function and does not apply
the derivative term. The
addition of the derivative term
would greatly complicate
tuning of the control loop and
besides is not normally
applicable to the types of flow
and pressure control used in
pipelines.
PID Control Settings
Enter [1], [2], [3] or [4] at Config PID ? "n" of the Misc Setup menu to open
the following entries:
{PL} Assign Pri.
Loop #1
Loop #2
Loop #3
Loop #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the database index number of the primary variable in the PID loop (see the sidebar).
Rmk
____________ ____________ ____________ ____________
Enter a remark in this 16-character field which identifies and documents the function of each
variable assignment.
{PL} Pri. Action (F/R)
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter [F] (forward action) if the value of the primary variable increases as the controller output %
increases.
Enter [R] (reverse action) if the value of the primary variable decreases as the controller output %
increases.
Valid Assignments - Any

32-bit integer or floating point
variable within the database
can be assigned to be the
primary or secondary
controlled variable (see
Volume 4 for a complete
listing of database addresses
and index numbers).
{PL} Remote S.P. Pt#
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the I/O point number that the remote set point analog signal is connected to (01-24).
Assign this point to 99 in cases where the set point will be downloaded via a communication port.
Enter [0] if you will not be using a remote setpoint.
{PL} Assign Sec.
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the database index number of the secondary variable in the PID loop (see the sidebar).
Rmk
____________ ____________ ____________ ____________
variable assignment.
{PL} Sec. Action (F/R)
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter [F] (forward action) if the value of the primary variable increases as the controller output %
increases.
Enter [R] (reverse action) if the value of the primary variable decreases as the controller output %
increases.
2-14
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
{PL} Error Select (L/H)

Characters in [ ] refer to
key presses.
flow computer.
displayed.
Loop #1
Loop #2
Loop #3
Loop #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
This entry is used to determine under what circumstances the primary or secondary variable
is to be controlled. There are two modes of low/high error select:
Mode #1:
The controller will attempt to control the primary variable but will switch to
controlling the secondary variable, should the controller be trying to drive the
secondary variable ABOVE its setpoint. An example of this mode would be
controlling flow rate (primary) while not exceeding a MAXIMUM delivery
pressure (secondary).
Mode #2:
The controller will attempt to control primary variable but will switch to
controlling the secondary variable, should the controller be trying to drive the
secondary variable BELOW its setpoint. An example of this mode would be
controlling flow rate (primary) while not dropping below a MINIMUM pressure
value (secondary).
Considering these modes, select your entry according to the following flow diagram.
MODE #1
MODE #2
Are both primary and

secondary actions
forward?
Are both primary and

secondary actions
forward?
yes
yes
Enter [L]
(Low Error
Select)
no
yes
Is secondary
action forward?
Enter [H]
(High Error
Select)
no
yes
Is secondary
action forward?
no
no
Enter [H]
(High Error
Select)
{PL} Startup Mode (L/M)
Enter [L]
(Low Error
Select)
_______
_______
_______
_______
This entry determines how the computer handles a system reset such as a momentary loss of
power.
Enter [L] (Last) to cause the PID loop to stay in the operating mode it was last in before the
system reset.
Enter [M] (Manual) to cause the PID loop to startup with the PID loop in manual control mode
and with the valve open % as it was before the system reset.
{PL} PID Tag
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter an 8-character tag name used to identify the PID controller output % signal on the LCD
display.
20/24.71 04/98
2-15
Chapter 2
2.5.10. Digital / Analog Output Settings

presses.
Press [n] [Enter] at Config D/A Out "n" of the Misc Setup menu to open the
following entries (n = D/A Output #):

flow computer.
displayed.
{L1} Analog Output #1
at 4mA
at 20mA
__________
__________
__________
Under Assign, enter the database index number of the variable that will be assigned to the
digital-to-analog output points.
Under at 4mA and at 20mA, enter the required scaling parameters in engineering units at 4mA
and 20mA (e.g.: For Meter #1 Net Flow Rate assign 7102. Typical scaling might be 4mA=0.0
bbls/hr and 20mA=1000.0 bbls/hr).
Rmk
_______________
digital-to-analog output.

Rmk
Rmk
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
_______________

Rmk
__________
__________
__________
_______________

Rmk
__________
__________
__________
_______________

Rmk
__________
__________
__________
_______________

Rmk
__________
__________
__________
_______________

Rmk
__________
__________
__________
_______________

Rmk
__________
__________
__________
_______________

Rmk
__________
__________
__________
_______________

Rmk
__________
__________
__________
_______________

Rmk
__________
_______________
2-16
Assign
__________
__________
__________
_______________
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
2.5.11. Front Panel Counter Settings

Enter [Y] at Front Pnl Counters of the Misc Setup menu to open the
following entries:
{L1} Front Panel Counter
Counter A
Counter B
Counter C
__________
__________
__________
Enter the database index number of the accumulator variable that will be output to this
electromechanical counter.
3
The unit of measure is the same as that shown on the LCD for the totalizer (i.e., barrels, klbs, m ,
etc.) The maximum count rate is limited to 10 counts per second. Count rates higher than 10
pulses per second will cause the computer to remember how many counts did not get output and
continue to output after the flow stops until all buffered counts are output.
Rmk
____________ ____________ ____________
Enter a remark in this 16-character field which identifies and documents the function of each front
panel counter.
Pulses/Unit
__________
__________
__________
Enter the number of pulses per unit (volume, mass, energy).
20/24.71 w 04/98
2-17
Chapter 2
2.5.12. Programmable Boolean Statements

Program Booleans - These
64 Boolean statements are
evaluated every 100 msec
starting at Point 1025
continuing through 1088.
Each statement can contain
up to 3 Boolean variables,
optionally preceded by the
slash (/) denoting the NOT
Function and separated by a
valid Boolean operator:
Operator Symbol
NOT
/
AND
&
OR
+
EXOR
*
EQUAL
=
IF
)
GOTO
G
MOVE
:
COMPARE
%
INDIRECT
E.g.: 1025:1002&/1003
Boolean 1025 is true when
point 1002 is true AND point
1003 is NOT true.
Note: Points 1002 and 1003
in this example reflect the
status of Physical I/O Points
2 and 3.
There are no limitations as to
what Boolean points can be
used in a statement.
Statements can contain the
results from other
statements.
E.g.: 1026: /1025+1105
Boolean 1025 is NOT true
OR Point 1105 is true.
Using the = operator, the
result of a statement can
initiate a command.
E.g.: 1027: 1719=1026
Request a Snapshot Report
when Boolean 1026 is true.
Note: See Volume 4 for
detailed list of Booleans and
Status Commands.
2-18
Enter [Y] at Program Booleans ? of the Misc Setup menu to open the
following entries:
Boolean Point 10xx
Equation or Statement
Rmk (Comment or Remark)
25:
_______________________ _______________________
26:
_______________________ _______________________
27:
_______________________ _______________________
28:
_______________________ _______________________
29:
_______________________ _______________________
30:
_______________________ _______________________
31:
_______________________ _______________________
32:
_______________________ _______________________
33:
_______________________ _______________________
34:
_______________________ _______________________
35:
_______________________ _______________________
36:
_______________________ _______________________
37:
_______________________ _______________________
38:
_______________________ _______________________
39:
_______________________ _______________________
40:
_______________________ _______________________
41:
_______________________ _______________________
42:
_______________________ _______________________
43:
_______________________ _______________________
44:
_______________________ _______________________
45:
_______________________ _______________________
46:
_______________________ _______________________
47:
_______________________ _______________________
48:
_______________________ _______________________
49:
_______________________ _______________________
50:
_______________________ _______________________
51:
_______________________ _______________________
52:
_______________________ _______________________
53:
_______________________ _______________________
54:
_______________________ _______________________
55:
_______________________ _______________________
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

Boolean Point 10xx
Comment or Remark

flow computer.
56:
_______________________ _______________________
57:
_______________________ _______________________
58:
_______________________ _______________________
59:
_______________________ _______________________
Program Booleans - These

64 Boolean statements are
evaluated every 100 msec
starting at Point 1025
continuing through 1088.
Each statement can contain
up to 3 Boolean variables,
optionally preceded by the
slash (/) denoting the NOT
Function and separated by a
valid Boolean operator:
Operator
Symbol
NOT
/
AND
&
OR
+
EXOR
*
EQUAL
=
IF
)
GOTO
G
MOVE
:
COMPARE
%
INDIRECT
E.g.: 1025:1002&/1003
point 1002 is true AND point
1003 is NOT true.
Note: Points 1002 and 1003
in this example reflect the
status of Physical I/O Points
2 and 3.
There are no limitations as to
what Boolean points can be
used in a statement.
Statements can contain the
results from other
statements.
E.g.: 1026: /1025+1105
Boolean 1025 is NOT true
OR Point 1105 is true.
Using the = operator, the
result of a statement can
initiate a command.
E.g.: 1027: 1719=1026
Request a Snapshot Report
when Boolean 1026 is true.
60:
_______________________ _______________________
61:
_______________________ _______________________
62:
_______________________ _______________________
63:
_______________________ _______________________
64:
_______________________ _______________________
65:
_______________________ _______________________
66:
_______________________ _______________________
67:
_______________________ _______________________
68:
_______________________ _______________________
69:
_______________________ _______________________
70:
_______________________ _______________________
71:
_______________________ _______________________
72:
_______________________ _______________________
73:
_______________________ _______________________
74:
_______________________ _______________________
75:
_______________________ _______________________
76:
_______________________ _______________________
77:
_______________________ _______________________
78:
_______________________ _______________________
79:
_______________________ _______________________
80:
_______________________ _______________________
81:
_______________________ _______________________
82:
_______________________ _______________________
83:
_______________________ _______________________
84:
_______________________ _______________________
85:
_______________________ _______________________
86:
_______________________ _______________________
87:
_______________________ _______________________
88:
_______________________ _______________________
20/24.71 w 04/98
2-19
Chapter 2
2.5.13.
Programmable Variables These 64 variable statements
are evaluated every 500
msec starting at the
statement that determines
the value of Points 7025
through 7088. Each
statement can contain up to 3
variables or constants.
Variables can be optionally
preceded by the $ symbol
denoting the ABSOLUTE
value of the variable is to be
used. Constants are
identified by placing a #
symbol ahead of the number.
These and other operators
are:
Operator
Symbol
ABSOLUTE
$
CONSTANT
#
POWER
&
MULTIPLY
*
DIVIDE
/
ADD
+
SUBTRACT
EQUAL
=
IF
)
GOTO
G
MOVE
:
COMPARE
%
INDIRECT
The order of precedence is:

1) ABSOLUTE
2) POWER
3) MULTIPLY/DIVIDE
4) ADD/SUBTRACT
In cases where operators
have the same precedence,
statements are evaluated left
to right.
E.g.: The value of floating
point variable 7035 is defined
as:
35:7027&#5*7026
The power operator is
evaluated first (the value of
Point 7035 is set equal to the
square root of the number
contained in Point 7027) and
the result is multiplied by the
number stored in variable
7026. Note that statements
can contain the results of
other statements. (See
OmniCom Help for more
information by pressing [F1]
on your PC keyboard in the
Configure Variable
Statement menu.)
2-20
Programmable Variable Statements
Enter [Y] at Program Variables ? of the Misc Setup menu to open the
following entries:
Prog Variable 70xx
Comment or Remark
25:
_______________________ _______________________
26:
_______________________ _______________________
27:
_______________________ _______________________
28:
_______________________ _______________________
29:
_______________________ _______________________
30:
_______________________ _______________________
31:
_______________________ _______________________
32:
_______________________ _______________________
33:
_______________________ _______________________
34:
_______________________ _______________________
35:
_______________________ _______________________
36:
_______________________ _______________________
37:
_______________________ _______________________
38:
_______________________ _______________________
39:
_______________________ _______________________
40:
_______________________ _______________________
41:
_______________________ _______________________
42:
_______________________ _______________________
43:
_______________________ _______________________
44:
_______________________ _______________________
45:
_______________________ _______________________
46:
_______________________ _______________________
47:
_______________________ _______________________
48:
_______________________ _______________________
49:
_______________________ _______________________
50:
_______________________ _______________________
51:
_______________________ _______________________
52:
_______________________ _______________________
53:
_______________________ _______________________
54:
_______________________ _______________________
55:
_______________________ _______________________
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

Prog Variable 70xx

settings you enter in the flow
computer.

detailed list of Booleans and
Status Commands
Valid Numeric Variables These are any long integer or

floating point number within
the database (Points 50008999), including Boolean
variables. For the purpose
of evaluation, Boolean
variables have the value of
1.0 if they are True and 0.0 if
they are False.
20/24.71 w 04/98
Comment or Remark
56:
_______________________ _______________________
57:
_______________________ _______________________
58:
_______________________ _______________________
59:
_______________________ _______________________
60:
_______________________ _______________________
61:
_______________________ _______________________
62:
_______________________ _______________________
63:
_______________________ _______________________
64:
_______________________ _______________________
65:
_______________________ _______________________
66:
_______________________ _______________________
67:
_______________________ _______________________
68:
_______________________ _______________________
69:
_______________________ _______________________
70:
_______________________ _______________________
71:
_______________________ _______________________
72:
_______________________ _______________________
73:
_______________________ _______________________
74:
_______________________ _______________________
75:
_______________________ _______________________
76:
_______________________ _______________________
77:
_______________________ _______________________
78:
_______________________ _______________________
79:
_______________________ _______________________
80:
_______________________ _______________________
81:
_______________________ _______________________
82:
_______________________ _______________________
83:
_______________________ _______________________
84:
_______________________ _______________________
85:
_______________________ _______________________
86:
_______________________ _______________________
87:
_______________________ _______________________
88:
_______________________ _______________________
2-21
Chapter 2
2.5.14. User Display Settings

Valid Index Number
Assignments - Any 32-bit
integer or floating point
can be assigned to be viewed
via a user display (see
listing).
Valid Key Press
Sequences - You may select
a sequence of up to 4 key
presses to recall each
display. This does not count
the [Display/Enter] key
press which must be used to
signal the end of the
sequence. Each key is
identified by the red A
through Z character on each
valid key.
Valid keys are listed below
[A] - also labeled [Gross]
[B] - also labeled [Net]
[C] - also labeled [Mass]
[D] - also labeled [Energy]
[E] - also labeled [S.G./API]
[F] - also labeled [Control]
[G] - also labeled [Temp]
[H] - also labeled [Press]
[I] - also labeled [Density]
[J] - also labeled [D.P.]
[K] - also labeled [Orifice]
[L] - also labeled [Meter]
[M] - also labeled [Time]
[N] - also labeled [Counts]
[O] - also labeled [Factor]
[P] - also labeled [Preset]
[Q] - also labeled [Batch]
[R] - also labeled [Analysis]
[S] - also labeled [Print]
[T] - also labeled [Prove]
[U] - also labeled [Status]
[V] - also labeled [Alarms]
[W] - also labeled [Product]
[X] - also labeled [Setup]
[Y] - also labeled [Input]
[Z] - also labeled [Output]
The [
]/[
]/[
]/[
] (Up/
Down/Left/Right arrow) keys
and the [Prog], [Alpha
Shift] and [Clear] keys
cannot be used in a key
press sequence.
2-22
Enter 1 through 8 for the selected user display at User Display ? n of the
Misc Setup menu to open the following entries:
User Display #1
Key Press
_______________
Using the keys marked A through Z, enter the sequence of key presses needed to recall the
selected user display (see the side bar for details). A maximum of 4 keys are allowed. User key
press sequences take priority over any existing resident key press sequences.
Var #1 Tag
_______________
Enter an 8-character tag name used to identify the display variable on the LCD display.
Var #1 Index
_______________
Enter the database index number of the variable that you want to appear on the LCD display. Each
variable within the flow computer database is assigned an index number or address. Any Boolean
integer or floating point variable within the database can be displayed.
Var #1 Dec.
_______________
Enter the number of digits to the right of the decimal point for the variable. Valid entries are 0
though 7. The computer will display each variable using the display resolution that you have
selected, except in cases where the number is too large or too small. In either case, the flow
computer will adjust the decimal position or default to scientific display mode.
Tag
Index #
Decimal Pos.
Var #2
____________
________
____________
Var #3
____________
________
____________
Var #4
____________
________
____________
User Display #2
Key Press
_______________
Tag
Index #
Decimal Pos.
Var #1
____________
________
____________
Var #2
____________
________
____________
Var #3
____________
________
____________
Var #4
____________
________
____________
User Display #3
Key Press
_______________
Tag
Index #
Decimal Pos.
Var #1
____________
________
____________
Var #2
____________
________
____________
Var #3
____________
________
____________
Var #4
____________
________
____________
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

User Display #4
Valid Index Number

Assignments - Any 32-bit
integer or floating point
can be assigned to be viewed
via a user display (see
listing).
Valid Key Press
Sequences - You may select
a sequence of up to 4 key
presses to recall each
display. This does not count
the [Display/Enter] key
press which must be used to
signal the end of the
sequence. Each key is
identified by the red A
through Z character on each
valid key.
Valid keys are listed below
[A] - also labeled [Gross]
[B] - also labeled [Net]
[C] - also labeled [Mass]
[D] - also labeled [Energy]
[E] - also labeled [S.G./API]
[F] - also labeled [Control]
[G] - also labeled [Temp]
[H] - also labeled [Press]
[I] - also labeled [Density]
[J] - also labeled [D.P.]
[K] - also labeled [Orifice]
[L] - also labeled [Meter]
[M] - also labeled [Time]
[N] - also labeled [Counts]
[O] - also labeled [Factor]
[P] - also labeled [Preset]
[Q] - also labeled [Batch]
[R] - also labeled [Analysis]
[S] - also labeled [Print]
[T] - also labeled [Prove]
[U] - also labeled [Status]
[V] - also labeled [Alarms]
[W] - also labeled [Product]
[X] - also labeled [Setup]
[Y] - also labeled [Input]
[Z] - also labeled [Output]
The [
]/[
]/[
]/[
] (Up/
Down/Left/Right arrow) keys
and the [Prog], [Alpha
Shift] and [Clear] keys
cannot be used in a key
press sequence.
20/24.71 w 04/98
Key Press
_______________
Tag
Index #
Decimal Pos.
Var #1
____________
________
____________
Var #2
____________
________
____________
Var #3
____________
________
____________
Var #4
____________
________
____________
Tag
Index #
Decimal Pos.
Var #1
____________
________
____________
Var #2
____________
________
____________
Var #3
____________
________
____________
Var #4
____________
________
____________
User Display #5
Key Press
_______________
User Display #6
Key Press
_______________
Tag
Index #
Decimal Pos.
Var #1
____________
________
____________
Var #2
____________
________
____________
Var #3
____________
________
____________
Var #4
____________
________
____________
User Display #7
Key Press
_______________
Tag
Index #
Decimal Pos.
Var #1
____________
________
____________
Var #2
____________
________
____________
Var #3
____________
________
____________
Var #4
____________
________
____________
Tag
Index #
Decimal Pos.
Var #1
____________
________
____________
Var #2
____________
________
____________
Var #3
____________
________
____________
Var #4
____________
________
____________
User Display #8
Key Press
_______________
2-23
Chapter 2
2.5.15. Digital I/O Point Settings

flow computer.
displayed.
Enter 1 through 24 for the selected digital I/O Point at Config Digital n of
the Misc Setup menu to open the following entries:
Assign
Digital #1
________
Rmk
Assigning as Pulse
Outputs - Meter and Station
Accumulators may be output
in the form of pulses.
Pulse Width - Pulse width is
measured using 10msec
ticks; i.e., 100 = 1 second.
Pulse per Unit - Pulse per
unit entry can be used to
provide unit conversion (e.g.:
entering 4.2 pulses per barrel
will give 1 pulse every 10
gallons as there are 42
gallons in a barrel). The units
of volume, mass and energy
flow are the same as is
displayed on the LCD.
Digital #2
________
Rmk
Digital #3
________
________
Rmk
________ ________
________ ________
________ ________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
Digital #5
________
Rmk
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
Digital #6
________
Rmk
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
Digital #7
________
Rmk
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
Digital #8
________
Rmk
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
Digital #9
________
Rmk
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
Digital #10
Rmk
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
Rmk
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
Digital #12
2-24
________ ________
_______________
Digital #4
Rmk
________ ________
_______________
Digital #11
Assigning as Control
Output - Any internal alarm
or Boolean can be output.
________ ________
Delay Off
_______________
Rmk
Config Digital n - Assign
each physical I/O point to a
Modbus address of a
Boolean variable. There are
no limitations as to what
Boolean points can be
assigned to physical I/O
points. Enter [0] (zero) for
Modbus control.
Pulse Width Pulse/Unit or Delay On
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

Assign
Delay On/Off - Used to delay

or stretch a control output.
The delay is measured using
100msec ticks; i.e., 10 = 1
second.
Assigning as Status or
Command Inputs Switches, etc., can be used
to trigger events within the
flow computer, such as end a
batch or start a prove
sequence (see the facing
page for more details).
Digital #13
Rmk
Digital #14
Rmk
Digital #15
Rmk
________ ________
________ ________
________
________ ________
________ ________
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
Digital #17
Rmk
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
Digital #18
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
Digital #19
Rmk
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
Digital #20
Rmk
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
Digital #21
Rmk
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
Digital #22
Rmk
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
Digital #23
Rmk
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
Digital #24
20/24.71 w 04/98
________
_______________
Digital #16
Rmk
________ ________
_______________
Rmk
valid assignments.
________ ________
Delay Off
_______________
Rmk
1700 Dummy Boolean Assign all physical I/O points
which will be used only in
Boolean statements for
sequencing or control to
1700. This sets up the points
as an input only.
________
Pulse Width Pulse/Unit or Delay On
________
________ ________
________ ________
_______________
2-25
Chapter 2
2.5.16. Serial Input / Output Settings

presses.
Enter [1], [2], [3] or [4] at Serial I/O n of the Misc Setup menu to open the
following entries:

flow computer.
displayed.
Port #1
Port #2
Port #3
Port #4
{L1} Baud Rate
_______
_______
_______
_______
{L1} Number of Data Bit
_______
_______
_______
_______
{L1} Number of Stop Bit
_______
_______
_______
_______
{L1} Parity Bit (E/O/N)
_______
_______
_______
_______
{L1} Xmit Key Delay
_______
_______
_______
_______
You must enter [0] for Transmitter Key Delay for any port that will be used with a shared printer.
{L1} Printer = 0, Modbus = 1
_______
This entry corresponds to Serial Port #1 only.
{L1} Protocol Type

Baud Rates Available 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200, 38400.
_______
This entry corresponds to Serial Port #4 only. Enter the type of protocol to be used on this port:
0=Modbus RTU, 1=Modbus ASCII, 2=Modbus RTU (modem), 3=Allen Bradley Full Duplex,
4=Allen Bradley Half Duplex.
{L1} Modbus ID
Data Bits - 7 or 8 - 7 for
ASCII Modbus, 8 for RTU
Modbus.
_______
{L1} Modbus Type

Stop Bits - 0, 1 or 2.
Parity Bit - Odd, Even,
None.
Transmitter Carrier Key
Delay - Delays are
approximate only. 0=msec,
1=50msec, 2=100msec,
3=150msec.
Modbus Type - Select the
protocol type which matches
the Modbus master device. If
the master can support either
ASCII or RTU, choose RTU
protocol as it is approximately
twice as efficient as the
ASCII protocol.
Modicon
Compatible OmniCom will not operate if
downloading configuration
with this entry set to Y.
2-26
_______
_______
_______
Enter the Modbus slave ID number that this serial port will respond to (1 through 247 acceptable).
This entry will be disabled for Serial Port #1 if a printer is selected as the port type.
_______
_______
_______
This entry does not apply to Serial Port #4. Enter the Modbus Protocol Type: 0=Modbus RTU
binary protocol, 1=Modbus ASCII protocol, 2=Modbus RTU (Modem). Make sure that you have
entered the correct number of Data Bits; 8 for RTU or 7 for ASCII.
{L1} Modicon Compatible (Y/N)
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter [Y] to configure these Modbus ports to be compatible with Modicon PLC equipment (e.g.:
984 series fitted with the Enhanced Executive Cartridge) and DCS systems (e.g.: Honeywell
TDC3000 systems using the Advanced Process Manager APM-SI). This entry will be disabled for
Serial Port #1 if a printer is selected as the port type.
In this mode the point number indexes requested and transmitted while using the Modbus RTU
modes are actually one less than the index number documented in this manual. ASCII mode
transmissions use the address documented in this manual. Data is counted in numbers of 16 bit
registers rather than points. i.e., To request two 4 byte IEEE floating point variables, index
numbers 7101 and 7102, would require the host to ask for 4 registers starting at index 7100.
IEEE Floating Point data bytes are transmitted in swapped format:
NORMAL IEEE FLOAT FORMAT

Byte #1
Byte #2
Biased
Exponent
MS
Mantissa
Byte #3
Byte #4
Mantissa
LS
Mantissa
ORDER TRANSMITTED
Byte #1
Byte #2
Byte #3
Byte #4
Mantissa
LS
Mantissa
Biased
Exponent
MS
Mantissa
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

{L1} CRC Enabled
Skip CRC/LCR Check - If

you have disabled the error
checking on incoming
messages, you must
substitute dummy bytes in
the message string.
Outgoing messages will
always include the error
checking bytes.
_______
_______
_______
_______
Many protocols use either a CRC, LCR or BCC error check to ensure that data received is not
corrupted. The flow computer can be configured to ignore the eror checking on incomimg
messages. This allows software developers an easy means of debugging communications
software. Error checking should only be disabled temporarily when debugging the master
slave communication link.
Enter [Y] to perform error checking on incoming messages. For maximum data integrity always
enter [Y] during normal running conditions.
Enter [N] to disable error checking on incoming messages.
This entry will be disabled for Serial Port #1 if a printer is selected as the port type.
2.5.17. Peer-to- Peer Communications Settings

Serial Port #2 of the flow computer can be configured to act as a simple
Modbus slave port or as a peer-to-peer communication link. Using the peer-topeer link allows multiple flow computers to be interconnected and share data.
Enter [Y] at Peer / Peer Comm (Y) ? of the Misc Setup menu to open the
following submenu:
{L1} Activate Redundancy
_______________
The active redundancy feature allows two flow computers to operate as a pair. Each flow computer
receives the same process signals and performs the same calculations; i.e., in redundancy.
Enter [Y] to allow both flow computers to manage the peer-to-peer link between them and
automatically switch between being the master or slave computer. Important data such as meter
factors and PID control settings can be continually exchanged between flow computers ensuring
that at any time, should a failure occur to one, the other unit would be able to assume control of the
PID and ticketing functions.
The redundancy mode requires that four digital I/O ports be cross-connected to sense watchdog
failure modes using the following points 2714=Input master status, 2864=Output Master status,
2713 Input watchdog status, 2863 = Output of watchdog status. (See Technical Bulletin TB980402 in Volume 5.)
{L1} Next Master

TIP - For maximum
efficiency, always start
Modbus ID numbers from 1.
_______________
Enter the slave number of the next flow computer in sequence in the peer-to-peer communication
sequence to pass over control. After the flow computer completes all of it's transactions it will
attempt to pass over master control of the Modbus link to this Modbus ID.
Enter the Modbus ID of this flow computer if there are no other peers in sequence on the
communication link.
Enter [0] to disable the peer-to-peer feature and use Serial Port #2 as a standard Modbus
slave port.
{L1} Last ID # Master in Sequence
_______________
Enter the slave number of the last Omni (the highest Modbus ID number) in the peer-to-peer
communication sequence. This is required for error recovery. Should this flow computer be unable
to hand over control to the 'next master in sequence' (see previous entry), it will attempt to
establish communications with a Modbus slave with a higher Modbus ID. It will keep trying until
the ID number exceeds this entry. At that point the flow computer will start at Modbus ID #1.
Enter the Modbus ID of this flow computer if it is the only master on the link.
{L1} Retry Timer
_______________
Should any slave device fail to respond to a communication request, the master device will retry to
establish communications several times. Enter the number of 50 millisecond ticks that the flow
computer should wait for a response from the slave device. To ensure fast recovery from
communication failures, set this entry to as low a number as possible. Enter [3] for peer-to-peer
links involving only Omni flow computers. Other Modbus devices may require more time to
respond.
20/24.71 w 04/98
2-27
Chapter 2

{L1} #1 Slave ID
presses.
_______________
Each transfer of data is called a transaction. Enter the Modbus ID # of the other slave involved in
the transaction. Modbus ID 0 can be used to broadcast write to all Modbus slave devices
connected to the peer-to-peer link. Other valid IDs range from 1-247.
Read/Write
_______________
Enter [R] if data will be read from the slave. Enter [W] if data will be written to the slave.
INFO - The Omni Flow
Computer determines what
Modbus function code and
what data type is involved by
the Modbus index number of
the data within the Omnis
database. The Source Index
determines the data type for
a write. The Destination
Index determines the data
type for a read.
Function codes used are:
01=Read Multiple Booleans
15=Write Multiple Booleans
03=Read Multiple Variables
16=Write Multiple Variables
Source
_______________
Enter the database index number or address of the Modbus point where the data is to be obtained,
corresponding to the first data point of the transaction. This is the slaves database index number
when the transaction is a read, and the masters database index number when the transaction is
a write. Refer to Volume 4 for a list of available database addresses or index numbers.
Points
_______________
Enter the number of contiguous points to transfer. Each transaction can transfer multiple data
points that can be any valid data type recognized by the Omni. The maximum number of points
that can be transferred depends on the type of data. IEEE floats (4bytes each)=63 max; 32-bit
Integers (4 bytes each)=63 max; 16-bit integers (2 bytes each)=127 max; packed coils or status (8
to a byte)=2040 max.
The Omni automatically knows what Modbus function to use and what data types are involved by
the Modbus index number of the data within the flow computer database. The destination index
number determines the data type when the transactions is a read. The source index number
determines the data type when the transaction is a write.
Dest Indx
_______________
Enter the database index number or address of where the data is to be stored (destination index or
address). If the transaction is a read, this will be the index number within the master Omnis
database. If the transaction is a write, this will be the register number within the remote slaves
database.
{L1} #2-Slave ID
_______________
Read/Write
_______________
Source
_______________
Points
_______________
Dest Indx
_______________
{L1} #3 Slave ID
_______________
Read/Write
_______________
Source
_______________
Points
_______________
Dest Indx
_______________
{L1} #4 Slave ID
2-28
_______________
Read/Write
_______________
Source
_______________
Points
_______________
Dest Indx
_______________
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

{L1} #5 Slave ID

flow computer.
displayed.
_______________
Read/Write
_______________
Source
_______________
Points
_______________
Dest Indx
_______________
{L1} #6 Slave ID
_______________
Read/Write
_______________
Source
_______________
Points
_______________
Dest Indx
_______________
{L1} #7 Slave ID
_______________
Read/Write
_______________
Source
_______________
Points
_______________
Dest Indx
_______________
{L1} #8 Slave ID
_______________
Read/Write
_______________
Source
_______________
Points
_______________
Dest Indx
_______________
{L1} #9 Slave ID
_______________
Read/Write
_______________
Source
_______________
Points
_______________
Dest Indx
_______________
{L1} #10- Slave ID
20/24.71 w 04/98
_______________
Read/Write
_______________
Source
_______________
Points
_______________
Dest Indx
_______________
2-29
Chapter 2

{L1} #11 Slave ID
presses.
flow computer.
displayed.

Computer determines what
Modbus function code and
what data type is involved by
the Modbus index number of
the data within the Omnis
database. The Source Index
determines the data type for
a write. The Destination
Index determines the data
type for a read.
Function codes used are:
01=Read Multiple Booleans
15=Write Multiple Booleans
03=Read Multiple Variables
16=Write Multiple Variables
_______________
Read/Write
_______________
Source
_______________
Points
_______________
Dest Indx
_______________
{L1} #12 Slave ID
_______________
Read/Write
_______________
Source
_______________
Points
_______________
Dest Indx
_______________
{L1} #13 Slave ID
_______________
Read/Write
_______________
Source
_______________
Points
_______________
Dest Indx
_______________
{L1} #14 Slave ID
_______________
Read/Write
_______________
Source
_______________
Points
_______________
Dest Indx
_______________
{L1} #15 Slave ID
_______________
Read/Write
_______________
Source
_______________
Points
_______________
Dest Indx
_______________
{L1} #16 Slave ID
2-30
_______________
Read/Write
_______________
Source
_______________
Points
_______________
Dest Indx
_______________
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
2.5.18. Custom Modbus

Data Packet Settings
INFO - Packets defined are
usually read-only and must
always be retrieved as a
packet. When Modicon 984
is selected these packet
setup entries are used to
define a logical array of
variables which can be read
or written in any grouping.
The number of data points is
always input in terms of
Omni logical elements; i.e.,
an IEEE floating piont
number comprises two 16-bit
words but is considered one
logical element.
Custom Modbus Data Packets are provided to reduce the number of polls
needed to read multiple variables which may be in different areas of the
database. Groups of data points of any type of data can be concatenated into
one packet by entering each data group starting index numbers 001, 201 and
401. The number of data bytes in a custom packet in non-Modicon compatible
mode cannot exceed 250 (RTU mode) or 500 (ASCII mode). When Modicon
compatible is selected, the number of data bytes in a custom packet cannot
exceed 400 (RTU mode) or 800 (ASCII mode).
Enter [1], [2] or [3] to select a data packet at Custom Packet n of the Misc
Setup menu to open the entries below. Under Index #, enter the database
address or Modbus index number for each data point of each group. Under
Points, emter the number of consecutive data points to include in each data
group.
Custom Modbus Data Packet #1 (Addressed at 001)

Index # / Points
Index # / Points
Index # / Points
Index # / Points
#1_______/_____ #2_______/_____ #3_______/_____ #4_______/_____

#5_______/_____ #6_______/_____ #7_______/_____ #8_______/_____
#9_______/_____ #10_______/_____ #11_______/_____ #12_______/_____
#13_______/_____ #14_______/_____ #15_______/_____ #16_______/_____
#17_______/_____ #18_______/_____ #19_______/_____ #20_______/_____

Index # / Points
Index # / Points
Index # / Points
Index # / Points
#1_______/_____ #2_______/_____ #3_______/_____ #4_______/_____

#5_______/_____ #6_______/_____ #7_______/_____ #8_______/_____

Index # / Points
Index # / Points
Index # / Points
Index # / Points
#1_______/_____ #2_______/_____ #3_______/_____ #4_______/_____

#5_______/_____ #6_______/_____ #7_______/_____ #8_______/_____
#9_______/_____ #10_______/_____ #11_______/_____ #12_______/_____
#13_______/_____ #14_______/_____ #15_______/_____ #16_______/_____
#17_______/_____ #18_______/_____ #19_______/_____ #20_______/_____
20/24.71 w 04/98
2-31
Chapter 2
2.5.19. Programmable Logic Controller Setup

presses.
Note: See Technical Bulletin TB-960702 Communicating with AllenBradley

Programmable Logic Controllers in Volume 5 for
information on the PLC Group n submenu.

flow computer.
displayed.
2.5.20. Archive File Setup
2-32
Note: See Technical Bulletin TB-960703 Storing Archive Data within the
Flow Computer in Volume 5 for information on the Archive File n
submenu.
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
2.6.
Configuration', should
always be completed first
as these entries specify the
number and type of input
and output devices
connected to the flow
computer; i.e., the menus
following the 'Misc
ask for configuration data
unless a transducer has
been defined.
Flow Computer
Configuration via the
Menu Selection Method It is best to use this method
when programming an
prompted. Once a
computer is in operation
and you become familiar
with the application you can
decide to use the faster
described below.
Once you have finished
entering data in a setup
submenu, press the [Prog]
key to return to the Select
Group Entry screen.
Proceed as described in
this manual for each setup
option.
Setting Up the Time and Date
2.6.1.
Accessing the Time/Date Setup Submenu
Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the Select Group Entry
screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the
following will be displayed:

Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Time/Date Setup
and press [Enter] to access the submenu.
2.6.2.
Time and Date Settings
{L1} Time :
____:____:____
Enter Current Time using the correct method 'hh:mm:ss'. To change only the hour, minutes or
seconds, move cursor to the respective position and enter the new setting.
{L1} Date :
____/____/____
Enter Current Date using the correct method 'mm/dd/yy' ordd/mm/yy. To change only the
month, day or year, move cursor to the respective position and enter the new setting.
{L1} Select mm/dd/yy ?
_____________
Select date format required by entering [Y] or [N]: Y= Month/day/year, N=Day/Month/Year).
Time and Date Setup via

the Random Access
Method - Setup entries
require that you be in the
Program Mode. In the
Display Mode press the
[Prog] key. The Program
LED will glow green and the
Select Group Entry
screen will appear. Then
press [Time] [Enter] and
use [] / [] keys to scroll.
20/24.71 04/98
2-33
Chapter 2
2.7.
Meter Station Setup via
the Random Access
LED will glow green and
Select Group Entry
press [Meter] [Enter] and
use [] / [] keys to scroll.
Meter Station Run
Switching Flow Rate
Thresholds - The Omni
flow computer has 3
Boolean flags which are set
or reset depending on the
station flow rate:
Run Switching Flag #1 at
Modbus database point
1824.
1825.
1826.
Each of these flags has a
low threshold and high
threshold flow rate. Each
flag is set when the station
flow rate exceeds the
corresponding high
threshold value. These flags
reset when the station flow
rate falls below the
respective low threshold
limit.
See Chapter 3 for more
information on how to
include these flags in
Boolean statements to
automatically switch meter
runs depending on flow
rates.
Configuring the Meter Station
2.7.1.
Accessing the Station Setup Submenu

Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Station Setup and
press [Enter] to access the submenu.
2.7.2.
Meter Station Settings
{L1} Station ID
_______________
Enter 8 alphanumeric characters maximum. This string variable usually appears in user
custom reports (Modbus database point 4815).
Flow Low
_______________
Enter the flow rate below which the Station Low Flow Alarm activates (Modbus database point
1810). Flow rates 5% below this value activate the Low Low Alarm (Modbus database point
1809).
Flow High
_______________
Enter the flow rate above which the Station High Flow Alarm activates (Modbus database
point 1811). Flow rates 5% above this value activate the High High Alarm (Modbus database
point 1812).
{L1} G FullScal
_______________
Enter the gross flow rate at full-scale for the meter station. Sixteen-bit integer variables
representing station gross and net flow rate are included in the database at 3802 and 3804.
These variables are scaled using this entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a
resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 999 = 0% to 99.9%)
{L1} M FullScal
_______________
Enter the mass flow rate at full-scale for the meter station. A 16-bit integer variable
representing station mass flow rate is included in the database at 3806. This variable is
scaled using this entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0
to 1000 = 0% to 100.0%)
Flag #1
{L1} Thre Lo
Flag #2
Flag #3
____________ ____________ ____________
Enter the flow rate Low Threshold value which resets each Station Run Switching Flag when
the station gross flow rate falls below this limit (see sidebar).
{L1} Thre Hi
____________ ____________ ____________
Enter the flow rate High Threshold value which sets each Station Run Switching Flag when
the station gross flow rate exceeds this limit (see sidebar).
2-34
20/24.71 04/98
Volume 3

{L1} Common Batch Stack
presses.
_______________
Enter [Y] to set up the flow computer to use a common product on all four meter runs; i.e., to run
the same product at the same time on all 4 meter runs.
Enter [N] to run different products at the same time on each meter run.
{L1} Batch Warning

flow computer.
displayed.
_______________
Enter the quantity of barrels for the Batch Preset Warning. This entry displays only when Common
Batch Stack is selected. The Batch preset counters are activated when a non-zero number is
entered for batch size on the batch sequence stack (see previous chapter on Batching
Operations). The batch preset reached flag (database point 1819) will be activated whenever the
batch preset counter counts down to zero. The batch warning flag (database point 1818) will be
activated when the batch preset counter is equal or less than this entry.
{L1} Batch Preset Unit
_______________
Enter the selected Batch Preset Counter Units: 0=Net (standard) volume units, 1=Gross (actual)
volume units, 2=Mass units.
{L1} Grv Change
_______________
This entry represents the Specific Gravity Rate of Change and displays only when a Station
Density I/O Point has been assigned. It is used to detect product changes in the pipeline (product
interface).
3
INFO - See the previous

chapter for a description of
batching features of the
Omni flow computer.
Enter the Gravity Rate of Change in specific gravity units per barrel or m for this limit. The Gravity
Rate of Change Flag (database point 1813) is activated if the flowing gravity measured by the
station densitometer exceeds this preset rate of change.
{L1} Line Pack
_______________
This entry represents the Line Pack Delay and displays only when a Station Density I/O Point has
been assigned. In many cases, the station densitometer that detects the product interfaces is
3
installed many net barrels (or net m ) in advance of the metering skid to provide prior warning of a
product change.
3
Enter the Line Pack Delay as the quantity of net barrels or net m between the product interface
detector densitometer or gravitometer and the valve manifold used to end the batch. A Delayed
3
Gravity Rate of Change Flag (database point 1814) is set when this number of barrels or m has
been measured after the Product Interface Flag (database point 1813) is activated; i.e., a line pack
delay is counted down to zero when a product interface is detected.
{L1} Grav Sample Sec
_______________
This entry represents the Gravity Sample Time and displays only when a Station Density I/O Point
has been assigned. It is used with the previous entry to determine the gravity rate of change.
Estimate the minimum amount of time (in seconds) it takes for a product change to be complete
and set this timer by entering approximately 1/4 to 1/3 of that time. False triggering of the product
interface detection flag can be eliminated by ensuring that any density change must exist for at
least this many seconds.
20/24.71 w 04/98
2-35
Chapter 2

Auxiliary Inputs
Characters in [ ] refer to
key presses.
flow computer.
displayed.
Auxiliary Input Setup via

the Random Access
LED will glow green and
Select Group Entry
press [Analysis] [Input]
[Enter] or [Analysis]
[Input] [n] [Enter] (n =
Auxiliary Input # 1, 2, 3 or
4). Use [] / [] keys to
scroll.
Low Limit
Input #1
Input #2
Input #3
Input#4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter thhe auxiliary input signal value below which the Low Alarm activates. The Transducer
Failed Low Alarm activates when the auxiliary input signal falls 5% below this limit.
High Limit
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the auxiliary input signal value above which the High Alarm activates. The Transducer
Failed High Alarm activates when the auxiliary input signal rises 5% above this limit.
{L2} Override
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the value (in engineering units) which will be substituted for the transducer value
depending, on the override code selected. An * displayed along side of the value indicates
that the override value is substituted.
{L2} Override Code
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the Override Code which represents the strategy used regarding each auxiliary input
override value: 0=Never use override code, 1=Always use override code, 2=Use override code
on transmitter failure, 3=On transmitter failures use last hour's average.
{L1} at 4mA*
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the value (in engineering units) that produces a transmitter output of 4mA or 1vol, or
LRV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters t.
{L1} at 20mA*
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the value (in engineering units) that produces a transmitter output of 20mA or 5 Volts, or
URV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
{L1} Damping Code
_______
_______
_______
_______
This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo
module. The process variable (I.e., temperature/pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before
being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.
For Differential Pressure/Pressure Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0=0 sec,
1=0.16 sec, 2= 0.32 sec, 3=0.48 sec, 4=1.00 sec, 5=2.00 sec, 6=4.00 sec, 7=8.00 sec,
8=16.00 sec, 9=32.00 sec.
For Temperature Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0=0 sec, 1=0.3 sec, 2=0.7
sec, 3=1.5 sec, 4=3.1 sec, 5=6.3 sec, 6=12.7 sec, 7-25.5 sec, 8=51.5 sec, 9=102.5 sec.
Note:
* Not Valid when a RTD

Probe is specified.
2-36
20/24.71 04/98
Volume 3
2.8.
and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Flow Computer
when programming an
prompted. Once a
described below.
Group Entry screen.
option.
Meter Run Setup via the
Random Access Method Setup entries require that
you be in the Program
Mode. In the Display Mode
press the [Prog] key. The
Program LED will glow
green and the Select
Group Entry screen will
appear. Then press
[Meter] [n] [Enter] (n =
Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4).
Use [] / [] keys to scroll.
Alternate Access to Meter
Run Settings from Meter
Station Setup - After
entering the Meter Station
Settings, without exiting,
press the [] key and you
will scroll down through
each Meter Run setup
entry.
20/24.71 04/98
Configuring Meter Runs
2.8.1.
Accessing the Meter Run Setup Submenu

Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Meter Run Setup
2.8.2.
Meter Run Settings

Meter #1
{L1} Meter ID
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the ID of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters) for each meter run. This ID
usually appears on reports.
Flow Low
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the flow rate for each meter run below which the Flow Low Alarm (database point 1n21)
activates. The Low Low Alarm (database point 1n20) activates when the flow rate falls 5%
below this limit.
Flow High
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the flow rate for each meter run above which the Flow High Alarm (database point
1n22) activates. The High High Alarm (database point 1n23) activates when the flow rate
rises 5% below this limit.
{L1} G Fullscal
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the gross flow rate at full-scale for each meter run. Sixteen-bit integer variables
representing meter run gross and net flow rate are included in the database at 3n42 and 3n40
respectively. These variables are scaled using this entry and stored as percentage of full
scale with a resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 1000 = 0% to 100.0%)
{L1} M Fullscal
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the mass flow rate at full-scale for each meter run. A 16-bit integer variable representing
meter run mass flow rate is included in the database at 3n44. This variable is scaled using
this entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 1000 = 0%
to 100.0%)
{L1} Active Freq.
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the Active Frequency Threshold for each meter run. Flow meter pulse frequencies equal
or greater than this threshold will cause the Meter Active Flag (1n05) to be set.
By using any Boolean statement you can use this flag bit to enable and disable totalizing by
controlling the Disable Meter Run Flags (Modbus database points 1736, 1737, 1738 & 1739).
Example: 1030:1736=/1105 Turn off Meter #1 flow if not greater than Active Frequency.
2-37
Chapter 2

Meter #1
presses.
flow computer.
displayed.
{L1} ErrThreshold
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
________ ________ ________ ________
This entry will display only when Dual Pulse is selected under Config Meter Runs (Misc Setup).
It applies only when a 'E' combo module is fitted and 'Pulse Fidelity Checking' is enabled.
Enter the Pulse Fidelity Error Check Threshold (in Hz) for each meter run. To eliminate bogus
alarms and error count accumulations, the dual pulse error checking functions are disabled until
the sum of both pulse trains exceeds the pulses per seconds entered for this setting.
Example: Entering 50 for this threshold means that the dual pulse error checking will be disabled
until both A and B channels of the flowmeter pick-offs are providing 25 pulses per second each.
{L1} ErrCounts
________ ________ ________ ________
This entry will display only when Dual Pulse is selected under Config Meter Runs (Misc Setup).
It applies only when a 'E' combo module is fitted and 'Pulse Fidelity Checking' is enabled.
Enter the maximum number of error pulses allowed in one transaction for each meter run. The
alarm points are:
q
q
q
q
1n48
1n49
1n50
1n51
A/B Comparitor Error Detected

A Channel Failed
B Channel Failed
A and B Channels not equal
The dual pulse A/B Comparitor Error Alarm (1n48) is activated when the accumulated error
counts between the flowmeter channels exceeds this count threshold. Accumulated error counts
are cleared for every batch.
K-Factor Linearization
Settings - Turbine and
positive displacement
flowmeters produce pulses
proportional to the flow. The
K factor is the quantity of
pulses per unit volume
3
(barrels or m ) or mass (lb or
kg) that each meter
produces. These settings are
used to calculate the gross
flow rate and volume.
Flow Rate/Viscosity Linearization Settings

{L1A} K-Factor
________ ________ ________ ________
This entry applies when Flow Rate/Viscosity Linearization is selected (see sidebar and Viscosity
Linear entry below). Enter the K Factor for each meter run. In this case, only one K Factor is
entered per flow meter. Linearization is accomplished by applying a Linearization Correction Factor
(LCF) to incoming flow pulses. The LCF is calculated in real-time by monitoring a live viscosity
signal.
The coefficient entries below are used to calculate the LCF for helical turbine or positive
displacement (PD) flowmeters with the following equations:
2
LCF(HELICAL) = a + b/x + c/x + d/x + e/x + f/x + g/x

TIP - Enter the viscosity
linearization setting first and
then return to configure the K
Factor linearization.
2-38
LCF(PD) = a + [(x )/b]

Enter the corresponding polynomial or equation coefficients of the linearizing algorithms used to
calculate the LCF for each meter run:
Coeff. a
________ ________ ________ ________
Coeff. b
________ ________ ________ ________
Coeff. c
________ ________ ________ ________
Coeff. d
________ ________ ________ ________
Coeff. e
________ ________ ________ ________
Coeff. f
________ ________ ________ ________
Coeff. g
________ ________ ________ ________
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

K-Factor Linearization Settings
Meter Run Setup via the

appear. Then press
[Meter] [n] [Enter] (n =
Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4).
Meter #1
{L1A} K-Factor #1
Meter #3
Meter #4
________ ________ ________ ________
This entry applies for simple flow-based linearization of K Factor; i.e., when none is selected
for Flow Rate/Viscosity Linearization (see sidebar and Viscosity Linear entry below). Enter
the K Factors for each meter run. In this case, up to 12 K Factors and the associated
flowmeter pulse frequencies are entered per meter run to define the K Factor Curve. The flow
computer will continuously monitor the flowmeter pulse frequency and calculate gross flow
based on and interpolated K Factor derived from the entered data points. Use only K Factor
#1 in cases where flowmeter linearizing is not required.
Freq Point 1
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the flowmeter pulse frequency associated with the corresponding K Factor. The
frequency points must be entered lowest to highest (Hz).
K-Factor #2
Freq Point 2
K-Factor #3
Freq Point 3
K-Factor #4
Freq Point 4
K-Factor #5
Freq Point 5
K-Factor #6
Freq Point 6
K-Factor #7
Freq Point 7
K-Factor #8
Freq Point 8
K-Factor #9
Freq Point 9
K-Factor #10
Freq Point 10
K-Factor #11
Freq Point 11
K-Factor #12
Freq Point 12
20/24.71 04/98
Meter #2
________ ________ ________ ________

________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
________ ________ ________ ________
2-39
Chapter 2

More Meter Run Settings
presses.
flow computer.
displayed.
Meter #1
{L1} Auto Prove ? (Y)
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter [Y] to enable the auto-proving feature. Enter [N] to disable auto-proving. Enabling the autoprove function will cause the flowmeter to be automatically proved on flow rate changes and after a
meter has been out of service. The auto-prove enable is cancelled whenever a meter fails an
automatic prove on 10 consecutive attempts.
{L1} Use MF in Net ? (Y)
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter [Y] to apply the meter factor in the net and mass flow equations. Enter [N] to ignore the
meter factor in flow calculations; nonetheless, it will still appear on all reports.
{L1} Use LCF in Gross ?
________ ________ ________ ________
This entry applies when Flow Rate/Viscosity Linearization is selected (see Viscosity Linear entry
below). Enter [Y] to apply the Linearization Correction Factor (LCF) to gross flow rate and gross
totals. Enter [N] if the LCF is not to be applied. The calculation of the gross indicated volume for
each option is as follows:
q If Yes is selected Gross = (Flowmeter Pulses/ Flowmeter K Factor) x LCF
q If No is selected Gross = Flowmeter Pulses/ Flowmeter K Factor
{L1} Temp Compensated ?
________ ________ ________ ________
In some cases, the flowmeter may be fitted with a mechanical or electronic temperature
compensator. Enter [Y] for the Omni Flow Computer to set the temperature correction (VCF) to
1.0000 in all equations. Enter [N] if the meter provides gross uncompensated pulses.
{L1} S&W as Aux n
________ ________ ________ ________
Select the auxiliary input or other source to be used to input the S&W % for each meter run:
0=None, 1=Use Auxiliary Input #1, 2= Use Auxiliary Input #2, 3= Use Auxiliary Input #3, 4= Use
Auxiliary Input #1; 5=Modbus Direct. The flow computer will use this input to determine Net
Standard Volume (S&W corrected volume).
TIP - Enter the viscosity
linearization setting first and
then return to configure the K
Factor linearization.
{L1} Viscosity Linear
________ ________ ________ ________
Select the source of the viscosity value for the LCF for each meter run: 0=None, 1=Use Auxiliary
Input #1, 2= Use Auxiliary Input #2, 3= Use Auxiliary Input #3, 4= Use Auxiliary Input #1;
5=Modbus Direct.
{L1} Select Helical ?
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter [Y] to select a Helical Turbine Flowmeter. Enter [N] to select a Positive Displacement (PD)
Flowmeter. The algorithm used to linearize the flowmeter for flow and viscosity effects is different
depending on whether the flowmeter is a helical turbine type or a PD type.
{L1} Meter Model
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the model number of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters). This entry usually
appears on the prove report.
{L1} Meter Size
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the size of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters). This entry usually appears on
the prove report.
{L1} Serial No.
________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the serial number of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters). This entry usually
appears on the prove report.
2-40
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
2.9.
and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Flow Computer
when programming an
prompted. Once a
described below.
Group Entry screen.
option.
Meter Temperature Setup
via the Random Access
Select Group Entry
press [Temp] [Enter], or
[Temp] [Meter] [n] [Enter]
or [Meter] [n] [Temp]
[Enter] (n = Meter Run # 1,
2, 3 or 4). Use [] / []
keys to scroll.
Note:
Configuring Meter / Prover Temperature
2.9.1.
Accessing the Temperature Setup Submenu

Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Temperature
Setup and press [Enter] to access the submenu.
2.9.2.
Meter Temperature Settings

Station
Low Limit
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature below which the flowmeter low alarm activates. Transducer values 5%
below this entry fail to low.
High Limit
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature above which the flowmeter high alarm activates. Transducer values 5%
above this entry fail to high.
{L2} Override
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the
override code. An * displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is
substituted.
{L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the Override Code strategy: 0=Never use override code, 1=Always use override code,
2=Use override code on transmitter failure, 3=On transmitter failures use last hour's average.
{L1} at 4mA*
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or LRV
of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
{L1} at 20mA*
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5 Volts, or
{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________

module. The process variable (I.e., temperature) is filtered by the transmitter before being
sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.
Probe is specified.
20/24.71 04/98
2-41
Chapter 2
2.9.3.
Meter Density
Temperature Setup via the
Random Access Method To access these settings, in
the Program Mode press
[Density] [Temp] [Enter].
INFO - The Density
Temperature sensor is used
to compensate for
temperature expansion
effects which effect the
periodic time of oscillation
of the densitometer. It is
also used when desired to
calculate the density of the
liquid to reference
temperature using API
2540; Table 23, 23A or 23B.
Note:

Probe is specified.
Meter Density Temperature Settings

Station
Low Limit
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature below which the densitometer low alarm activates. Transducer values
5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.
High Limit
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature above which the densitometer high alarm activates. Transducer values
5% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.
{L2} Override
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
substituted.
{L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

{L1} at 4mA*
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or LRV of
Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
{L1} at 20mA*
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volt, or URV
{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________

module. The process variable (I.e., temperature) is filtered by the transmitter before being
sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.
2.9.4.
Prover Temperature Setup
Select Group Entry
press [Prove] [Temp]
[Enter] or [Temp] [Prove]
[Enter]. Use [] / [] keys
to scroll.
Prover Temperature Settings
Low Limit
Inlet
Outlet
___________
___________
Enter the temperature below which the prover low alarm activates. Transducer values 5%
below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.
High Limit
___________
___________
Enter the temperature above which the prover high alarm activates Transducer values 5%
above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.
{L2} Override
___________
___________
substituted.
{L2} Override Code
___________
___________
2-42
20/24.71 04/98
Volume 3
flow computer.
{L1} @ 4mA*
Inlet
Outlet
___________
___________
{L1} @ 20mA*
___________
___________
Enter the temperature engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volt, or URV of
{L1} Damping Code
___________
___________
This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module.
The process variable (I.e., temperature) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flow
computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.
For Temperature Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0=0 sec, 1=0.3 sec, 2=0.7 sec,
3=1.5 sec, 4=3.1 sec, 5=6.3 sec, 6=12.7 sec, 7-25.5 sec, 8=51.5 sec, 9=102.5 sec.
2.9.5.
Prover Density Temperature Settings
Low Limit
___________
___________
Enter the temperature below which the prover low alarm activates. Transducer values 5% below
this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.
High Limit
___________
___________
Enter the temperature above which the prover high alarm activates. Transducer values 5% above
this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.
{L2} Override
___________
___________
substituted.
{L2} Override Code
___________
___________
{L1} at 4mA*
___________
___________
{L1} at 20mA*
___________
___________
Enter the temperature engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volt, or URV of
{L1} Damping Code
___________
___________
For Temperature Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0=0 sec, 1=0.3 sec, 2=0.7 sec,
3=1.5 sec, 4=3.1 sec, 5=6.3 sec, 6=12.7 sec, 7-25.5 sec, 8=51.5 sec, 9=102.5 sec.
20/24.71 w 04/98
2-43
Chapter 2
2.10. Configuring Meter Pressure

and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Flow Computer
when programming an
prompted. Once a
described below.
Group Entry screen.
option.
Meter Pressure Setup via
the Random Access
Select Group Entry
press [Press] [Enter], or
[Press] [Meter] [n] [Enter]
or [Meter] [n] [Press]
[Enter] (n = Meter Run # 1,
2, 3 or 4). Use [] / []
keys to scroll.
2.10.1. Accessing the Pressure Setup Submenu


Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Pressure Setup
2.10.2. Meter Pressure Settings

Station
Low Limit
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure below which the flowmeter low alarm activates. Transducer values 5%
below this entry fail to low.
High Limit
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure above which the flowmeter high alarm activates. Transducer values 5%
above this entry fail to high.
{L2} Override
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the
substituted.
{L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

{L1} at 4mA*
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or LRV of
{L1} at 20mA*
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5 Volts, or URV
{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________

module. The process variable (I.e., pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to
the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.
1=0.16 sec, 2= 0.32 sec, 3=0.48 sec, 4=1.00 sec, 5=2.00 sec, 6=4.00 sec, 7=8.00 sec,
8=16.00 sec, 9=32.00 sec.
2-44
20/24.71 04/98
Volume 3
2.10.3. Meter Density Pressure Settings

Station
Low Limit
flow computer.
Meter Density Pressure

Setup via the Random
Access Method - To access
these settings, in the
Program Mode press
[Density] [Press] [Enter].
INFO - The Density Pressure
sensor is used to
compensate for pressure
periodic time of oscillation of
the densitometer. It is also
used when desired to
liquid at the densitometer to
equilibrium pressure using
API 2540 MPMS 11.2.1 or
11.2.2.
Note:
Not Valid when a RTD

Probe is specified.
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure below which the densitometer low alarm activates. Transducer values 5%
below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.
High Limit
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure above which the densitometer high alarm activates. Transducer values 5%
above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.
{L2} Override
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the override
code. An * displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is substituted.
{L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

{L1} at 4mA*
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or LRV of
{L1} at 20mA*
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volt, or URV of
{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________

1=0.16 sec, 2= 0.32 sec, 3=0.48 sec, 4=1.00 sec, 5=2.00 sec, 6=4.00 sec, 7=8.00 sec, 8=16.00
sec, 9=32.00 sec.
2.10.4. Prover Pressure Settings

Prover Pressure Setup via
the Random Access
Select Group Entry screen
will appear. Then press
[Prove] [Press] [Enter] or
[Press] [Prove] [Enter].
Low Limit
Inlet
Outlet
___________
___________
Enter the pressure below which the prover low alarm activates. Transducer values 5% below this
entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.
High Limit
___________
___________
Enter the pressure above which the prover high alarm activates Transducer values 5% above this
entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.
{L2} Override
___________
___________
{L2} Override Code
___________
___________
20/24.71 w 04/98
2-45
Chapter 2

{L1} at 4mA
___________
___________
Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or LRV of
{L1} at 20mA*
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volt, or URV of
{L1} Damping Code
___________
___________
The process variable (I.e., pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flow
sec, 9=32.00 sec.
{L1} Plenum Pressure at 4mA
___________
Engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt or LRV of Honeywell Smart
Transmitters. The plenum pressure applies only to Brooks compact provers.
{L1} Plenum Pressure at 20mA
___________
Engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5 Volts or URV of Honeywell Smart
Transmitters. The plenum pressure applies only to Brooks compact provers.
{L1} Damping Code
___________
sec, 9=32.00 sec.
2-46
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
2.10.5. Prover Density Pressure Settings

Low Limit
flow computer.
Prover Density Pressure

Setup via the Random
Access Method - To access
these settings, in the
Program Mode press
[Prove] [Density] [Press]
[Enter].
INFO - The Density Pressure
sensor is used to
compensate for pressure
periodic time of oscillation of
the densitometer. It is also
used when desired to
liquid at the densitometer to
equilibrium pressure using
API 2540 MPMS 11.2.1 or
11.2.2.
Note:
Not Valid when a RTD

Probe is specified.
20/24.71 w 04/98
Inlet
Outlet
___________
___________
Enter the pressure below which the prover densitometer low alarm activates. Transducer values
5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.
High Limit
___________
___________
Enter the pressure above which the prover densitometer high alarm activates. Transducer values
5% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.
{L2} Override
___________
___________
{L2} Override Code
___________
___________
{L1} at 4mA*
___________
___________
Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt or LRV of
{L1} at 20mA*
___________
___________
Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volt or URV of
{L1} Damping Code
___________
___________
sec, 9=32.00 sec.
2-47
Chapter 2
2.11. Configuring Meter Specific Gravity / API

Density
and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Flow Computer
when programming an
prompted. Once a
described below.
Group Entry screen.
option.
2.11.1. Accessing the Gravity/Density Setup Submenu


Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Grav/Density
2.11.2. Meter Specific Gravity / Density Settings

Specific Gravity, API or Density
Station
{L1A} Cor Factor
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
These entries apply if an analog gravitometer or densitometer is specified during the 'Config
Meter Run' in 'Misc. Setup'. They are not available when using API or Specific Gravity
gravitometers. Enter the Pycnometer Density correction factor (Limit: 0.8 to 1.2). (Usually very
close to 1.0000).
Low Limit
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the gravity/density below which the prover densitometer low alarm activates. Transducer
values 5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.
High Limit
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the gravity/density above which the prover densitometer high alarm activates.
Transducer values 5% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.
{L2} Override
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the gravity/density value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on
the override code. An * displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is
substituted.
{L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

2=Use override code on transmitter failure, 3=On transmitter failures use last hour's average,
4=On transmitter failure use Station transducer value, 5=On transmitter failure use absolute
value of override SG/API of the running product.
{L1} at 4 mA
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Meter Run' in 'Misc. Setup'. Engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or
LRV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
2-48
20/24.71 04/98
Volume 3

{L1} at 20 mA
Meter Specific
Gravity/Density Setup via
the Random Access
Select Group Entry screen
will appear. Then enter the
key press sequence that
corresponds to the options
you want to configure:
Specific Gravity/API:
To access these settings,
press [S.G./API] [Enter] or
[S.G./API] [Meter] [n]
[Enter] or [Meter] [n]
[S.G./API] [Enter].
Density:
press [Density] [Enter] or
[Enter] or [Meter] [n]
[Density] [Enter].
Digital Densitometers:
press [Factor] [Density]
[Meter] [n] [Enter] or
[Density] [Factor] [Meter]
[n] [Enter].
(n represents the meter run
# 1, 2, 3 or 4).
Note: Digital densitometers
can only be configured via
the Random Access Method.
INFO - Densitometer
constants are usually on a
calibration certificate
supplied by the densitometer
manufacturer. Usually they
are based on SI or metric
units. For US customary
applications you must ensure
that the constants entered
are based on gr/cc, F and
PSIG. Constants are always
displayed using scientific
notation; e.g.:
K0=-1.490205E+00 (gr/cc)
To enter K0, press [Clear]
and press [-1.490205]
[Alpha Shift] [E] [+00]
[Enter].
20/24.71 w 04/98
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Meter Run' in 'Misc. Setup'. Engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5 Volts, or
Digital Densitometers
The following entries are required if a digital densitometer is specified during
the 'Config Meter Run' in the 'Misc. Setup' menu. There are three selections
which refer to digital densitometers: 4 = Solartron, 5 = Sarasota, 6 = UGC. ({L1}
Password Level required, except for the Correction Factor.)
Solartron
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
Station
Correction Factor A________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Pycnometer Density correction factor (usually very close to 1.0000). An A and B factor are
provided to cover differing products (limit: 0.8 to 1.2). Meter Station only applies Factor A.
Correction Factor B________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K0
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
K1
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
K2
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
K18
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
K19
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
K20A
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
K20B
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
K21A
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
K21B
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
KR
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
KJ
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Sarasota
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
Station

provided to cover differing products (limit: 0.8 to 1.2).

D0
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
T0
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
T coef
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
T cal
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Pcoef
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Pcal
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
2-49
Chapter 2

UGC
flow computer.
Digital Densitometer Setup
Method - To access these
settings, in the Program
Mode press [Factor]
[Enter] or [Density]
[Factor] [Meter] [n] [Enter]
(n = Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or
4).
2-50
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
Station

provided to cover differing products (limit: 0.8 to 1.2).

K0
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
K1
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
K2
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
TC
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Kt1
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Kt2
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Kt3
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Pc
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Kp1
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Kp2
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Kp3
________ ________ ________ ________ ________
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
2.12. Configuring PID Control Outputs

and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Flow Computer
when programming an
prompted. Once a
described below.
Group Entry screen.
option.
PID Control Output Setup
Select Group Entry
press [Control] [n] [Enter]
(n = PID Control Loop # 1,
2, 3 or 4). Use [] / []
keys to scroll.
2.12.1. Accessing the PID Control Setup Submenu


Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to PID Control
2.12.2. PID Control Output Settings

Loop #1
Loop #2
Loop #3
Loop #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Operating Mode
Manual Valve (Y/N)
Enter [Y] to adjust the valve open % and adjust using the []/[] keys. Enter [N] to change
to AUTO mode.
Local Set.Pt (Y/N)
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter [Y] to use a local set point and adjust using the []/[] keys. Enter [N] for REMOTE
set point mode.
Sec Set.Pt
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the value in engineering units for the set point of the secondary variable. The primary
variable will be the controlled variable until the secondary variable reaches this set point. The
secondary variable will not be allowed to drop below or rise above this set point, depending on
the "Error Select" entry in the Config PID menu.
Tuning Adjustments
{L1} Primary Gain
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter a value between 0.01 to 99.99 for the Primary Gain Factor (Gain=1/Proportional Band).
{L1} Pri. Rpts/Min
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter a value between 0.0 and 40.00 for the Primary Integral Factor (Rpts/Min=1/Integral
Factor the reciprocal of the reset period).
{L1} Sec. Gain
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter a value between 0.01 to 99.99 for the Secondary Gain Factor (Gain=1/Proportional
Band).
The actual controller gain factor used when controlling the secondary variable is the product
of this entry and the 'Primary Gain Factor'. Tune the primary control variable first and then use
this entry to adjust for stable control of the secondary variable.
20/24.71 04/98
2-51
Chapter 2
flow computer.
{L1} Sec. Rpts/Min
Loop #2
Loop #3
Loop #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter a value between 0.0 and 40.00 for the Secondary Integral Factor (Rpts/Min=1/Integral
Factor the reciprocal of the reset period).
{L1} Deadband %
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the dead band percent range. PID Control will only compensate for setpoint deviations out of
this range. The control output will not change as long as the process input and the setpoint error
(deviation) is within this dead band percentage limit range.
{L1} Start Up Ramp

PID Startup, Stop and
Shutdown Ramp
Command Points - These
have been added to eliminate
the need to manipulate the
PID permissives directly.
Using these command points
greatly simplifies operation of
the PID ramping functions.
(See database points 17271730, 1788-1791, 1792-1795
respectively.)
Loop #1
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the maximum percentage to which the valve movement is limited per 500 msec at start-up.
st
The control output is clamped at 0% until the 1 PID Permissive (PID #1-#4 database points
1722-1725) is set true. The control output % is then allowed to increase at the start-up ramp rate.
{L1} Shutdown Ramp
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the maximum percentage to which the valve movement is limited per 500 msec at shutdown.
st
When the 1 PID Permissive is lost, the control output will ramp-down towards 0% at the
shutdown ramp rate.
nd
During the ramp-down phase, a 2 PID Permissive (PID #1-#4 database points 1752-1755) is
nd
used to provide a ramp hold function. If this 2 permissive is true, 100 msec before entering the
ramp-down phase, the control output % will ramp-down and be held at the minimum ramp-down
limit % (see the following entry) until it goes false. The control output will then immediately go to
0% (see sidebar).
{L1} Min Output %
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the minimum percentage that the control output will be allowed to ramp down to. In many
cases, it is important to deliver a precise amount of product. This requires that the control output
be ramped to some minimum % and held there until the required delivery is complete. The control
output is then immediately set to 0%.
Remote Setpoint
{L1} Low Limit
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the engineering unit value below which the primary setpoint variable is not allowed to drop
while in the remote setpoint mode.
{L1} High Limit
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the engineering unit value above which the primary setpoint variable is not allowed to rise
while in the remote setpoint mode.
{L1} S.P. at 4mA
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the engineering unit value of the remote setpoint at 4 mA (1 volt) input. You must set this
and the following entry even if you do not intend to use a remote setpoint. They are used to
determine the scaling of the primary controlled variable.
{L1} S.P. at 20mA
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the engineering unit value of the remote setpoint at 20mA (5 volt) input. You must set this
and the previous entry even if you do not intend to use a remote setpoint. They are used to
determine the scaling of the primary controlled variable, which is usually 2 times the normal
operating setpoint setting.
2-52
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

Secondary Variable
{L1} Zero Value
_______
_______
_______
_______
If a secondary controlled variable is used, enter the value in engineering units of the variable which
will represent zero.
{L1} F.S. Value
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the value in engineering units of the secondary variable at controller full scale, which is
usually 2 times the normal operating setpoint setting.
20/24.71 w 04/98
2-53
Chapter 2
2.13. Configuring Provers

and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Flow Computer
when programming an
prompted. Once a
described below.
Group Entry screen.
option.
Prover Setup via the
appear. Then press [Prove]
[Setup] [Enter] and use
[] / [] keys to scroll.
2.13.1. Accessing the Prover Setup Submenu


Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Prover Setup and
2.13.2. Prover Settings

{L2} # of Runs to Average
_______________
Enter the number of consecutive runs required to be considered a complete prove sequence
This number must be between 2 and 10.
{L2} Maximum # Runs
_______________
Enter the maximum number of runs that will be attempted to achieve a complete prove
sequence. This number must be between 2 and 99.
{L1} Prover Type
_______________
Enter the type of prover in use: 0=Unidirectional Pipe Prover, 1=Bi-directional Pipe Prover,
2=Unidirectional Compact Prover, 3=Bi-directional Small Volume Prover, 4=Master Meter,
5=2 Series Bi-directional Pipe Prover.
Select the Unidirectional Compact [2] if you are using a Brooks Compact Prover.
Select the Master Meter Method to compare meter 1, 2 or 3 against the master meter. Meter
#4 is always the master meter.
For Double Chronometry Proving use type 2 or 3.
{L2} Pv Volume
_______________
This entry does not apply when the prover type selected is a Uni-Compact. Enter the water
draw volume of the prover at base temperature and pressure.
Certain models of compact provers have different water draws, depending on whether the
meters are upstream or downstream. This entry represents the round-trip volume for bidirectional provers and the downstream volume for compact provers. When using the Master
Meter Method, enter the minimum volume that must flow through the master meter (Meter #4)
for each prove run.
# Passes to Avg
_______________
This entry applies to Unidirectional and Bi-directional compact provers only. Enter the number
of single passes that will be averaged to make each run when using the pulse interpolation
method. Valid entries are 1 through 25. A pass is round trip when using a bi-directional prover.
2-54
20/24.71 04/98
Volume 3

Exp. Coeff
flow computer.
_______________
This entry applies to unidirectional compact provers only (except Brooks SVP see following
setting). Enter the squared coefficient of thermal expansion for any switch rod components which
may affect the water draw volume of the compact prover. This Thermal Expansion Coefficient is
used to calculate the CTSP factor for the compact prover:
q For US Units: Carbon Steel = 0.0000124; Stainless Steel = 0.0000177.
q For Metric Units: Carbon Steel = 0.0000223; Stainless Steel = 0.0000319.
Coef Invar
_______________
This entry applies to Brooks Compact Provers only. This prover uses an invar rod to separate the
optical detector switches. The rod has a coefficient of 0.0000008 per F (US units) or 0.0000014
per C (metric units).
Plenum Con
_______________
This entry applies to Brooks Compact Provers only. Enter the Nitrogen Spring Plenum Pressure
Constant for used to calculate the plenum pressure needed to operate a the Brooks Compact
Prover. This pressure is related to the prover line pressure at the time of proving:
Plenum Pressure = (Line Pressure / Plenum Constant) + 60 Psig
The plenum constant depends on the size of the Brooks Compact Prover. Valid values are:
SIZE
PLENUM CONSTANT
SIZE
PLENUM CONSTANT
8-inch
3.50
18-inch
5.00
12-inch Mini
3.20
24-inch
5.88
12-inch Standard
3.20
Larger
Refer to Brooks
Deadband %
_______________
This entry applies to Brooks Compact Provers only. Enter the Plenum Pressure Deadband %. The
Brooks Compact Prover requires that the plenum pressure be maintained within certain limits. The
flow computer calculates the correct plenum pressure at the beginning of each prove sequence
and will charge or vent nitrogen until the measured plenum pressure is within the specified
deadband %.
{L1} Up Volume
_______________
This entry applies to compact provers only. Enter the upstream water draw volume at base
temperature and pressure, if applicable.
Down Vol
_______________
This entry applies to compact provers only. Enter the downstream water draw volume at base
temperature and pressure, if applicable.
OverTravel
_______________
This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the estimated amount of flow that the
sphere or piston displaces after activating the first detector switch, multiplied by 1.25.
{L2} Inactive Sec
_______________
Enter the time in seconds before the prove is aborted due to prover inactivity. Make sure you allow
enough time for the sphere or piston to travel between detector switches at the lowest flow rate
expected. When using the Master Meter Method, allow enough time for the amount of flow to pass
through the master meter at the lowest expected flow rate.
{L1} Dia. Inch/mm
_______________
This entry is not applicable to Master Meter proving. Enter the internal diameter of the prover tube
in inches or mm.
{L1} Wall Inch/mm
_______________
This entry is not applicable to Master Meter proving. Enter the wall thickness of the prover tube,
which is used to calculate the CPSP factor
20/24.71 w 04/98
2-55
Chapter 2

{L1} Elast
Prover Setup via the

appear. Then press Prove]
_______________
This entry is not applicable to Master Meter proving. Enter the Prover Tube Modulus of
Elasticity used to calculate the CPSP factor.
For US Units: Mild Steel = 3.0E7; Stainless Steel = 2.8E7 to 2.9E7.
For Metric Units: 2.07E8 or 1.93E8 to 2.0E8.
{L1} Cubic Exp
_______________
This entry is not applicable to Compact Provers and Master Meter proving. Enter the Prover
Tube Cubical Coefficient of Thermal Expansion for full sized pipe provers, used to calculate
the CTSP factor.
For US Units: Mild Steel = 0.0000186; Stainless Steel = 0.0000265.
For Metric Units: Mild Steel = 0.0000335; Stainless Steel = 0.00000477.
{L1} Base PSIG
_______________
This entry is not applicable to Master Meter proving. Enter the atmospheric pressure in Psig
or kPag at which the prover was water drawn.
{L1} Base Deg.F/C
_______________
This entry is not applicable to Master Meter proving. Enter the Base Temperature in F or C
at which the prover was water drawn. This entry is used to calculate CTSP.
{L2} Stability Sc
_______________
Enter the Stability Check Sample Time in seconds, used to calculate the rate of change of
temperature and flow rate at the prover or master meter. The prove sequence will not start
until the temperature and flow rate are stable.
{L2} Sample Dev
_______________
Enter the temperature change allowed during the stability sample time (see previous entry).
The change in temperature per sample period must be less than this value for the
temperature to be considered stable enough to start a prove.
{L2} Delt Flow
_______________
Enter the flow rate change allowed during the stability sample time (see previous two entries).
The change in flow rate per sample period must be less than this value before the flow rate is
considered to be stable enough to start a prove.
{L2} Temp Devia
_______________
Enter the prover-to-meter temperature range allowable after the temperature and flow rate
have stabilized. The temperature at the meter and the prover must be within this limit or the
prove sequence attempt will be aborted.
{L2} MF Repeatability ?
_______________
Enter for the run repeatability calculation based on: 0= run counts, 1= run calculated meter
factor. Run counts repeatability is a more stringent test but may be difficult to achieve due to
changing temperature and pressure during the prove sequence. Calculating repeatability
based upon the calculated meter factor takes into account variations in temperature and
pressure, and may be easier to achieve.
{L2} Run Devia %
_______________
Enter the maximum allowable percentage deviation between run counts or run meter factors
(depending on selection of previous entry). The deviation is calculated by comparing the
high/low meter counts or meter factors based on their low point, as follows:
Deviation = 100 (High - Low) / Low Point
This deviation is always calculated using the meter factor when the Master Meter Method of
proving is selected.
2-56
20/24.71 04/98
Volume 3

{L2} MF Devia %
flow computer.
_______________
The prove meter factor (just calculated) is compared against the current meter factor and must be
within this percentage range to be accepted as a valid meter factor.
{L2} Auto Implement MF?
_______________
Enter [Y] to automatically implement the new meter factor and store in the appropriate product file.
Enter [N] to select not to automatically implement the meter factor determined from the prove.
{L2} Retroactive MF ?
_______________
If you selected to auto-implement the meter factor for the previous entry, enter [Y] to retroactively
apply the Meter Factor from the beginning of the batch. The old meter factor will be back
calculated out of the current batch and daily totals. The batch and daily totals will be recalculated
using the new meter factor. Enter [N] to have the Meter Factor applied from this point on.
Flow Change %
_______________
This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the Auto-Prove Flow Rate Change
Percent Threshold. The Flow Rate Percent Change Flag will be set if the current flow rate differs
from the last meter proving flow rate by more than this percent (i.e., a request for an auto-prove
sequence will be flagged if the net/mass flow rate differs from the last proved rate by more than
this percent, and remains outside this limit for the flow rate change period). A request for an
automatic prove will only be made if both the Percent Change Flag and the Minimum Flow Change
Flag are set (see following entry).
Flow Change
_______________
This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the Minimum Flow Rate Change
Threshold for automatic proving. The Minimum Flow Change Flag will be set if the current flow
rate differs from the last meter proving flow rate by more than this amount. A request for an
automatic prove will be made if both the Percent Change Flag and the Minimum Flow Change Flag
are set (see previous entry). This entry eliminates unnecessary proves that would occur at low flow
rates where the percentage change threshold would be a very small flow rate change.
F Stable Min
_______________
This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the Flow Rate Stable Period in minutes,
for auto-proving. A change in flow rate must be sustained for at least this period of time before an
auto-prove sequence will be attempted.
Mtr Down Hr
_______________
This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the Meter Shut-in Period in hours, for
auto-proving. The need for an auto-prove will be flagged if a flowmeter is shut-in for more than this
period of time.
Startup Pv
_______________
This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the startup flow for auto-proving. This is
the amount of flow which must occur after startup before an auto-prove is attempted, after a meter
has been shut-in for more than the Meter Shut-in Period (see previous entry).
Max. Flow
_______________
This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the Maximum Flow between Proves. This
entry represents the maximum amount of flow that can occur before a meter will be flagged for an
auto-prove sequence, if the flow remains stable and the meter is not shut-in
20/24.71 w 04/98
2-57
Chapter 2
2.14. Configuring Products

and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Flow Computer
when programming an
prompted. Once a
described below.
Group Entry screen.
option.
Product Setup via the
appear. Then press
[Product] [Enter] or
[Product] [n] [Enter] (n =
Product # 1 through 16).
2.14.1. Accessing the Product Setup Submenu


Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Product Setup
2.14.2.
Product Settings
Product #1
{L1} Name
_______________
Enter the name of the product (up to 8 alphanumeric characters), right justified.
{L1} Table Select
_______________
Enter the number that corresponds to the API or GPA table to use for the product:
0 = API 2540 Table 24A (US units) / Table 54A (metric units).
1 = API 2540 Table 24B (US units) / Table 54B (metric units).
2 = Table 24C (US units) / Table 54C (metric units).
3 = GPA TP16 (US units) / TP16M (metric units).
4 = Mass Calculation
5 = Propylene API 11.3.3.2 9US units) / 11.3.3.2M (metric units).
6 = E/P Mix.
7 = P/P Mix.
8 = Ethylene IUPAC
9 = Ethylene NIST 1045
10 = Ethylene API 2565/11.3.2.
11 = Carbon Dioxide CO2PAC
12 = Table 24 - 1952 Edition (US units) / Table 54 - 1952 Edition (metric units)
13 = ASTM D1550/1551
14 = ASTM D1555
{L2} Override API
_______________
This entry applies only to US units (Revision 20). It will appear depending on which table is
selected above. Enter the API Gravity at reference conditions. It is used to calculate the
Volume Correction Factor (VCF) and the Pressure Correction Factor (Cpl). The flow computer
will accept any positive override value and use it as the API in calculations. The override
gravity can also be entered as specific gravity (see next entry).
To use the live measured density or gravity value (obtained from a densitometer/gravitometer)
in the equations, enter any minus number. The flow computer will then correct the signal form
the densitometer or gravitometer to 60F, if required (this may be flowing at flowing or
reference conditions - see Meter Run I/O Point Configuration).
Should the gravitometer fail, the flow computer can be made to use the absolute value of the
API Gravity Override. If the override code in Grav/Density Setup is set to 5=On transmitter
failure, use absolute value of override SG/API for this product.
2-58
20/24.71 04/98
Volume 3

{L2} Override SG
flow computer.
INFO - The following data,
rounded to 4 digits, is from
GPA 2145-92 and TP16:
Product
Ethane
Propane
HD5
S.G.
.3562
.5070
.5010
.5050
.5100
Propylene .5228*
Iso Butane .5629
.5650
n-Butane
.5840
.5850
Iso Pentane .6247
n-Pentane .6311
n-Hexane
.6638
Natural Gasolines
.6650
n-Heptane .6882
n-Octane
.7070
n-Nonane
.7219
n-Decane
.7342
To use the live measured density or gravity value (obtained from a densitometer/gravitometer) in
the equations, enter any minus number. The flow computer will then correct the signal form the
densitometer or gravitometer to 60F, if required (this may be flowing at flowing or reference
conditions - see Meter Run I/O Point Configuration).
Should the gravitometer fail, the flow computer can be made to use the absolute value of the API
Gravity Override. If the override code in Grav/Density Setup is set to 5=On transmitter failure, use
absolute value of override SG/API for this product.
{L2} Override Ref Dens

3
kg/m
355.85
506.90
500.50
504.50
509.50
522.28*
562.34
564.44
583.42
584.42
624.08
630.48
663.14
664.34
687.52
706.30
721.19
733.48
* Propylene figures are

derived from API 11.3.3.2.
INFO - API 2540; Tables
23A or 23B (US), or 53A or
53B (metric); are also
automatically used when
applicable.
Tables 24A and 53A apply to
Generalized Crude Oils (SG
range: 1.076-.6110; Dens
range: 1075-610.4).
Tables 24B and 53B apply to
Generalized Products (SG
range: 1.076-.6535; Dens
range: 1075-652.8).
GPA TP16 and TP16M apply
to LPG/NGL Products (SG
range: .637-.495 on Version
20, and 636.4-494.5 on
Version 24 of the Omni.
These calculation methods
use API Chapter 11.2.1 or
11.2.2, and 11.2.1M or
11.2.2M to calculate the
pressure correction factor
Cpl.
20/24.71 w 04/98
_______________
This entry applies only to US units (Revision 20). It will appear depending on which table is
selected above. You may enter an override gravity as either API or SG units when measuring
crude oil or generalized refined products. The Computer will accept any positive override value and
use it in the calculations.
_______________
This entry applies only to metric units (Revision 24) depending on which table is selected above.
3
This is the density at reference conditions (kg/m at reference temperature). It is used to calculate
the volume correction factor VCF and the pressure correction factor Cpl.
Using a Live Densitometer Signal - Entering a value with a minus sign ahead of it causes the
flow computer to use the live density signal to calculate the density at reference temperature.
Using the Product Override if the Densitometer Fails - Selecting 'fail code 5' at the
densitometer setup menu will cause the flow computer to stop using the live density signal should
it fail, and substitute the absolute value of the density override entry as the reference density. E.g.:
Entering -750 causes the computer to ignore the override and use the live densitometer signal as
3
long as the transducer is OK. A reference density of 750 kg/m will be used if the densitometer
should fail.
{L2} Ref Temperature
_______________
This entry applies only to metric units (Revision 24 - Table 54C). Enter the base or reference
temperature at which net corrected volumes represent equivalent volumes of liquid.
Alpha
Alpha Coefficient. This entry applies depending on which table is selected above. API 2540,
Tables 24C/54C equations require you to enter a value for 'alpha'. This alpha value is used to
calculate the volume correction factor 'VCF'. Enter the thermal expansion coefficient at reference
temperature as 0.000xxxx.
F Fact
_______________
F Factor Override. This entry applies depending on which table is selected above. Enter 0.0 if
you wish the flow computer to use API 11.2.1 or 11.2.2 to calculate the compressibility factor 'F'
used in the Cpl equation. Enter the compressibility factor 'F' if you wish to override the API
calculated value.
Vapor Pressure
_______________
Vapour Pressure Psia (abs) @ 100F (37.8C). This entry applies only when GPA TP16 is
entered for table select. The GPA TP16 standard specifies that the equilibrium pressure of the
flowing fluid be calculated according to GPA TP15. Two equations are specified. The first
designed for mainly pure products such as propanes, butanes and natural gasolines requires no
input data other than the temperature at flowing conditions and the specific gravity at reference
conditions. The second improved correlation is suitable for use with more varied NGL mixes where
different product mixes could have the same specific gravity but different equilibrium pressures. If
you wish to use the improved second method enter the vapor pressure at 100F or 37.8C. Enter a
minus number to use the normal TP15 method for propanes, butanes and natural gasolines.
2-59
Chapter 2
Meter Factors
M.F. #1
M.F. #2
M.F. #3
M.F. #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Enter the meter factor to be used by this flowmeter whenever this product is flowing. This
factor will be automatically updated whenever a meter factor is changed due to a manual
entry or an automatic implementation after a successful prove sequence.
Density Factor A/B
_______________
Density correction factor. Enter [0] to select Density Factor A to correct the densitometer.
Enter [1] to select Density Factor B to correct the densitometer.
Product #2
appear. Then press
Product # 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
or 8). Use [] / [] keys to
scroll.
Name
_______________
Table Select
_______________
Override API (Rev 20)
_______________
Override SG (Rev 20)
_______________
Override Ref Dens (Rev 24)
_______________
Ref Temperature (Rev 24)
_______________
Alpha
F Factor
Vapor PSIA (ABS)
Meter Factors
_______________
M.F. #1
M.F. #2
M.F. #3
M.F. #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Density factor A/B
_______________
Product #3
Name
_______________
Table Select
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
Alpha
F Factor
Vapor PSIA (ABS)
Meter Factors
_______________
M.F. #1
M.F. #2
M.F. #3
M.F. #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Density factor A/B
2-60
_______________
20/24.71 04/98
Volume 3

Product #4

flow computer.
Name
_______________
Table Select
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
Alpha
F Factor
Vapor PSIA (ABS)
Meter Factors
_______________
M.F. #1
M.F. #2
M.F. #3
M.F. #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Density factor A/B
_______________
Product #5
Name
_______________
Table Select
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
Alpha
F Factor
Vapor PSIA (ABS)
Meter Factors
_______________
M.F. #1
M.F. #2
M.F. #3
M.F. #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Density factor A/B
20/24.71 w 04/98
_______________
2-61
Chapter 2

Product #6

appear. Then press
Product # 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
or 8). Use [] / [] keys to
scroll.
Name
_______________
Table Select
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
Alpha
F Factor
Vapor PSIA (ABS)
Meter Factors
_______________
M.F. #1
M.F. #2
M.F. #3
M.F. #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Density factor A/B
_______________
Product #7
Name
_______________
Table Select
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
Alpha
F Factor
Vapor PSIA (ABS)
Meter Factors
_______________
M.F. #1
M.F. #2
M.F. #3
M.F. #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Density factor A/B
2-62
_______________
20/24.71 04/98
Volume 3

Product #8

flow computer.
Name
_______________
Table Select
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
Alpha
F Factor
Vapor PSIA (ABS)
Meter Factors
_______________
M.F. #1
M.F. #2
M.F. #3
M.F. #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Density factor A/B
_______________
Product #9
Name
_______________
Table Select
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
Alpha
F Factor
Vapor PSIA (ABS)
Meter Factors
_______________
M.F. #1
M.F. #2
M.F. #3
M.F. #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Density factor A/B
20/24.71 w 04/98
_______________
2-63
Chapter 2

Product #10
Name
_______________
Table Select
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
Alpha
F Factor
Vapor PSIA (ABS)
Meter Factors
_______________
M.F. #1
M.F. #2
M.F. #3
M.F. #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Density factor A/B
_______________
Product #11
Name
_______________
Table Select
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
Alpha
F Factor
Vapor PSIA (ABS)
Meter Factors
_______________
M.F. #1
M.F. #2
M.F. #3
M.F. #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Density factor A/B
2-64
_______________
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

Product #12
Name
_______________
Table Select
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
Alpha
F Factor
Vapor PSIA (ABS)
Meter Factors
_______________
M.F. #1
M.F. #2
M.F. #3
M.F. #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Density factor A/B
_______________
Product #13
Name
_______________
Table Select
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
Alpha
F Factor
Vapor PSIA (ABS)
Meter Factors
_______________
M.F. #1
M.F. #2
M.F. #3
M.F. #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Density factor A/B
20/24.71 w 04/98
_______________
2-65
Chapter 2

Product #14
Name
_______________
Table Select
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
Alpha
F Factor
Vapor PSIA (ABS)
Meter Factors
_______________
M.F. #1
M.F. #2
M.F. #3
M.F. #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Density factor A/B
_______________
Product #15
Name
_______________
Table Select
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
Alpha
F Factor
Vapor PSIA (ABS)
Meter Factors
_______________
M.F. #1
M.F. #2
M.F. #3
M.F. #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Density factor A/B
2-66
_______________
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

Product #16
Name
_______________
Table Select
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
Alpha
F Factor
Vapor PSIA (ABS)
Meter Factors
_______________
M.F. #1
M.F. #2
M.F. #3
M.F. #4
_______
_______
_______
_______
Density factor A/B
_______________
2.15. Configuring Batches

Note: See Chapter 3 Computer Batching Operations in Volume 2 for
information on configuring your flow computer for batches.
20/24.71 w 04/98
2-67
Chapter 2
2.16. Configuring Miscellaneous Factors

and output devices
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Flow Computer
when programming an
prompted. Once a
described below.
Group Entry screen.
option.
Factor Setup via the
appear. Then press
[[Factor] [Enter], or
[Factor] [Meter] [n]
[Enter], or [Meter] [n]
[Factor](n = Meter Run # 1,
2, 3, or 4). Use [] / []
keys to scroll.
2.16.1. Accessing the Factor Setup Submenu


!

Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Factor Setup and
2.16.2. Factor Settings

{L1} Weight H2O
_______________
Weight of Water. Also known as absolute density of water. Weight of a barrel of water @
60F or 15C, and 14.696 PSIA or 101.325 kPa(a). Used to convert from specific gravity units
to mass. (From GPA 2145-92 = 8.3372 lbm/Gal. = 350.162 lbs/BBL). Note: This is the true
weight of water, NOT the conversion factor used to convert gr/cc to lb/bbl sometimes given as
3
350.507. For metric versions (Revision 24), the default value is 999.012 kg/m .
{L1} Flow Avg Factor
_______________
The flow averaging factor is the number of calculation cycles used to smooth the displayed
flow rate. A number 1-99 will be accepted. (A calculation cycle is 500msec).
Alarm Deadband %
_______________
Nuisance alarms can occur when input variables spend any amount of time near the high or
low alarm set points. These nuisance alarms can swamp the alarm log with useless alarms
leaving no room for real alarms. This entry sets a percentage limit based on the 'high alarm'
entry. A variable must return within the high/low alarm limits by more than this amount before
the alarm is cleared. E.g.: High limit is 100F, Low limit is 20F, Alarm deadband is set to 2
percent. A transducer input which exceeded 100F will set the 'high alarm'. The transducer
signal must drop 2 percent below the high alarm setpoint (98F) before the alarm will clear.
{L1} Atmos PSIA (ABS)
_______________
Atmospheric Pressure in PSIA (ABS). This is used to convert flowing pressure readings in
Psig to absolute pressure units Psia for US Units, and for the metric version in absolute units
in conformance to pressure (metric) units selected.
Select Pressure Units

This entry is a global selection for all pressure variables within the flow computer:
2
1 Bar = 100 kPA, 1 kg/cm = 98.0665 kPA

Display resolution is as follows:
XX.X kPA,
X.XXX Bar,
{L1} # Digits, 0=9, 1=8
X.XXX kg/cm
_______________
Roll All Totalizers. Totalizers within the computer can be rolled at 8 or 9 significant digits.
Default value is 9 (0). This is a read-only entry. This entry can only be changed at the keypad
of the flow computer.
2-68
20/24.71 04/98
Volume 3

Totalizer Decimal Place Resolution
The following are read-only entries that cannot be changed via OmniCom. To
change totalizer resolution you must first 'Clear All Totals' in the 'Password
Maintenance' menu from the front panel keypad of the flow computer. You will
then be given the opportunity to set the totalizing resolution. Valid decimal
place settings are: XX; X.X; X.XX; and X.XXX.
Dec Places Gross & Net
_______________
Decimal Places for Gross and Net Totalizer Resolution.
Decimal Places Mass
_______________
Decimal Places for Mass Totalizer Resolution.
Decimal Places for Correction Factors Appearing on Batch and

Prove Reports
The following two entries determine the number of decimal places for the
following factors: Ctlm, Ctlp, Cplm, Cplp, Ctsp, Cpsp, CCF. Meter Factor and
Density Pycnometer factor remain fixed at 4. For STRICT adherence to API
MPMS 12.2 (default) select 4 decimal places. This is the recommend selection.
Selecting 5 decimal places causes the flow computer to perform the normal API
internal rounding and truncating rules with the exception of the last round which
is to 5 places. Selecting 6 decimal places causes the flow computer to perform
no internal rounding and truncating and round the final result to 6 decimal
places.
Dec Factor Batch Report
_______________
Enter the number of decimal places required for factors to be displayed on the batch report.
MF Decimal Batch Report
_______________
Enter the number of decimal placesrequired for the meter factor appearing on the batch report.
Dec Factor Prove Report
_______________
Enter the number of decimal places required for factors to be displayed on the prove report.
MF Decimal Prove Report
_______________
Enter the number of decimal places required for the meter factor appearing on the prove report.
20/24.71 w 04/98
2-69
Chapter 2
2.17. Configuring Printers

flow computer.
Printer Setup via the
appear. Then press [Print]
2.17.1. Accessing the Printer Setup Submenu


Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Printer Setup and
2.17.2. Printer Settings

{L1} Computer ID
_______________
Appears on all reports. Enter up to 8 alphanumeric characters to identify the flow computer.
{L1} Interval Min
_______________
Print Interval in Minutes. Enter the number of minutes between each interval report.
Entering [0] will disable interval reports. The maximum allowed is 1440 minutes which will
provide one interval report per 24-hour period.
{L1} Interval Start
_______________
Print Interval Start Time. Enter the start time from which the interval report timer is based
(e.g.: Entering 01:00 with a Print Interval of 120 minutes will provide an interval report every
odd hour only).
{L1} Daily RPT Time
_______________
Daily Report Time. Enter the hour at which the daily report will print at the beginning of the
contract day (e.g.: 07:00).
{L1} Disable Daily RPT?
_______________
Enter [Y] to disable the Daily Report (default is 'N'). This simply blocks the report from
printing. Data will still be sent to the historical buffers (last 8) and archive if archive is setup.
{L1} Daylight Start
_______________
Daylight Savings Time Start. Enter the Day/Month/Year that daylight savings time begins.
{L1} Daylight End
_______________
Daylight Savings Time End. Enter the Day/Month/Year that daylight savings time ends.
{L1} Clr Daily at Batch
_______________
Clear Daily at Batch. Enter [N] to provide 24 hour totals of all flow through the flowmeter
regardless of what product is run. Select [Y] to clear the totalizers at the end of each batch.
This would mean that the daily totalizers would not necessarily represent 24 hours of flow but
the amount of flow since the last batch end or the daily report
2-70
20/24.71 04/98
Volume 3

{L1} Auto Hourly Batch ?

flow computer.
_______________
Automatic Hourly Batch Select. Enter [Y] to automatically cause a batch end every hour on the
hour. If customized reports are selected a batch end report will be printed. If default reports are
selected no batch end report will be printed.
{L1} Weekly Batch ?
_______________
Automatic Weekly Batch Select. Enter a number 1 through 7 to automatically print a batch end
report in addition to a daily report on a specific day of the week (0=No batch end, 1=Monday,
2=Tuesday, etc.).
{L1} Month Batch ?
_______________
Automatic Monthly Batch Select. Enter a number 1 through 31 to automatically print a batch
end report in place of a daily report on a specific day of the month (0=No batch end).
{L1} Print Priority
_______________
Enter [0] when the computer is connected to a dedicated printer. If several computers are sharing
a common printer, one computer must be designated as the master and must be assigned the
number 1. The remaining computers must each be assigned a different Print Priority number
between 2 and 12.
{L1} Number Nulls
_______________
For slow printers without an input buffer, a number of null characterss can be sent after each
carriage return or line feed. A number between 0-255 will be accepted. Set this to 0 if your printer
supports hardware handshaking and you have connected pin 20 of the printer connector to
terminal 6 of the flow computer (see Chapter 3).
{L1} Default Template ?
_______________
Use Default Report Templates? Y/N. Entering [Y] instructs the flow computer to use the default
report formats for Daily Batch End, Snapshot and Prover Reports. Enter [N] if you have
downloaded your own custom report templates using the OmniCom program.
Common Printer Control
Codes Epson, IBM & Compatible:
Condensed Mode= OF
Cancel Condensed= 12
OKI Data Models:
Condensed Mode= ID
Cancel Condensed= IE
HP Laser Jet II &
Compatible:
Condensed= 1B266B3253
Cancel Cond= 1B266B3053
{L1} Condensed
_______________
Condensed Print Mode Control String. Certain default report templates exceed 80 columns
when the computer is configured for 4 meter runs and a station. Enter the hexadecimal character
string which will put the printer into the condensed print mode. Data must be in sets of 2
characters (i.e., 05 not 5). Maximum 5 control characters.
{L1} Uncondens
_______________
Cancel Condensed (Normal) Print Mode Control String. Enter the hexadecimal character
string which when sent to the printer will cancel the condensed print mode. Data must be in sets
of 2 characters (i.e., 05 not 5) Maximum 5 control characters
{L1} Company Name
_______________
Two lines of the display allow entry of the Company Name. On each line enter a maximum of 19
characters and press [Enter]. Both lines are concatenated and appear on all reports.
{L1} Location
_______________
Two lines of the display allow entry of the station location Name. On each line enter a maximum of
19 characters and press [Enter]. Both lines are concatenated and appear on all reports.
20/24.71 w 04/98
2-71
Volume 3
3. User-Programmable Functions
3.1.
Introduction
The computer performs many functions, displays and prints large amounts of
data, but there are always some application-specific control functions,
calculations or displays that cannot be anticipated.
The Omni Flow Computer incorporates several programmable features that
enable the user to easily customize the computer to fit a specific application.
o
o
o
o
User Programmable Boolean Flags and Statements

User Programmable Variables and Statements
User Configurable Display Screens
User Customized Report Templates
The first three Items are explained here. The last item requires the use of the
OmniCom PC configuration software that comes with the flow computer.
3.2.
3.2.1.
User Programmable Boolean Flags and

Statements
What is a Boolean?
A Boolean point is simply a single bit register within the computer (sometimes
called a flag) which has only two states, On or Off (True or False, 1 or 0). These
Boolean flags or points are controlled and/or monitored by the flow computer
and represent alarms, commands and status points. Each Boolean point is
given an identifying number within the data base of the computer allowing the
state (On or Off) to be monitored or modified by assigning that Boolean point to
a physical digital I/O point or accessing it via a communication port. A
maximum of 24 physical digital I/O points are available for monitoring limit
switches, status signals or controlling relays or lamps.
20/24.71 w 04/98
3-1
Chapter 3
User-Programmable Functions
Boolean points are numbered as follows:
INFO - The 4-digit point

numbers referred to in this
chapter are Modbus index
numbers used to identify
each variable (Boolean or
other) within the Modbus
database.
1001 through 1024

1025 through 1088
1089 through 1099
1100 through 1199
1200 through 1299
1300 through 1399
1400 through 1499
1500 through 1699
1700 through 1799
1800 through 1899
1900 through 1999*
2100 through 2199
2200 through 2299
2300 through 2399
2400 through 2499
2100 through 2199
2600 through 2623
2700 through 2759
2800 through 2899
Physical Digital I/O Points 1 through 24

Programmable Boolean Points (64 total)
Programmable Pulse outputs (11 total)
Meter Run #1 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.)
Scratchpad Storage for Results of Boolean Statements
Command or Status Inputs
Station Boolean Flags (Alarms, Status etc.)
Prover Boolean Flags (Alarms, Status etc.)
Meter Run #1 Totalizer Roll-over Flags
Miscellaneous Station Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.)
Miscellaneous Boolean Command Points
Station Totalizer Flags
Physical Digital I/O Points (1001 1024)

Each of the physical digital I/O points is assigned to a valid Boolean point
number as detailed above. Points 1700 through 1799 are command inputs
which are described later, all other point assignments indicate that the I/O point
is to be set up as an output point. Output points which are dedicated as flow
accumulator outputs can be set up for pulse widths ranging from 10 msec to
100 sec in 10 msec increments. All other output point assignments have
associated 'time ON delay' and 'time OFF delay' timers which are adjustable
from 0.0 to 1000 sec in 100 msec increments.
Programmable Boolean Points (1025 1088)

There are 64 user flags or Boolean points are available and are controlled by 64
Boolean statements or equations. These are provided to perform sequencing
and control functions. Each statement or equation is evaluated every 100 msec.
starting at point 1025 and ending at point 1088. The results of these Boolean
statements can then assigned to physical digital I/O points. There are no
restrictions as to what Boolean points can be used in a Boolean statement
including the results of other Boolean statements or the status of physical I/O
points.
Programmable Accumulator Points (1089 1099)

There are 11 Programmable points that are used with Variable Points 7089
through 7099 for programming pulse outputs for Digital I/O or Front Panel
Counters.
3-2
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

One-Shot Boolean Points (1501 1650)
The 149 Boolean flags located between 1501 and 1650 are used to store
temporary data that has been received via the Modbus link or put there by a
Boolean statement. These Boolean variables can be sent to a digital output or
used in the Boolean statements described above.
Scratch Pad Boolean Points (1650 1699)

The 49 Boolean flags located between 1650 and 1699 can be use as
momentary commands. When set true they remain on for two seconds.
3.2.2.
Sign (+, -) of Analog or Calculated Variables

(6001 8999)
The sign of analog or calculated variables can also be used in a Boolean

statements by simply specifying the point number. The Boolean value of the
variable is 'true ' if it is positive and 'false' if it has a negative value.
3.2.3.
Boolean Statements and Functions
Each Boolean statement consists of up to 7 variables optionally preceded by

the Boolean 'NOT' function and separated by one of the Boolean functions
'AND', 'OR', 'Exclusive OR' or 'EQUAL' . The following symbols are used to
represent the functions:
Function
Symbol
NOT
AND
OR
EX OR
EQUAL
IF
GOTO
MOVE
COMPARE
/
&
+
*
=
)
'G'
:
%
The '=' function allows a statement to be used to change the state of the
Boolean point on the left of the equal sign (usually a command point).
Evaluation precedence is left to right.
20/24.71 w 04/98
3-3
Chapter 3
To program the Boolean points proceed as follows:
From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] and the following menu
will be displayed:
*** Misc. Setup ***
Password Maint?(Y)_
Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station ?
(Y)
Config Meter "n"
Config Prove ? (Y)
Config PID ? (Y)
Config D/A Out "n"
Front Panel Counters
Program Booleans ?
Program Variables ?
User Display ? "n"
Scroll down to 'Set Boolean ? (Y)' and enter [Y]. Assuming that no Booleans
are as yet programmed, the display shows:
Boolean Point #10xx
25: _
26:
27:
Note that the cursor is on the line labeled 25: At this point enter the Boolean
equation that will cause Boolean point 1025 to be ON (TRUE).
INFO - Points 1005 and 1006

reflect the current status of
physical I/O Points 05 and 06
which could be inputs
connected to the outside
world or outputs controlling
relays, etc.
For example, to turn Boolean 1025 ON whenever Boolean 1005 is OFF, OR

whenever 1006 is ON, enter [/1005+1006] (note the use of the '/' to indicate the
'NOT' function).
Boolean Point #10XX
25: /1005+1006
26: _
27
Boolean 1025 could then be used in the statement following which defines
Boolean 1026. For example, by including Boolean 1106 which indicates that
meter #1 is being proved (see following page), Boolean 1026 will be ON
whenever 'Meter 1 is being proved' AND (1005 is NOT ON OR 1006 is ON).
TIP - Leave plenty of empty

statements between
programmed ones. This will
allow you to modify the
execution order of your
program if you need to later.
Boolean Point #10xx

25: /1005+1006
26: 1106&1025
27: _
Use the 'Up/Down' arrow keys to scroll though all 64 programmable Boolean
points.
3-4
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

Remember that the Boolean statements are evaluated in order starting from
1025 proceeding to 1088 . For maximum speed always ensure that statements
used in other statements are evaluated ahead of time by placing them in the
correct order.
Example 1:
INFO - Use the Exclusive OR
function * to compare 2
points. The result of an
Exclusive OR of 2 points is
true only if both points are
different states.
Meter Failure Alarm for Two-Meter Run Application
Object: Using signals from 'flow sensing switches' inserted into the pipeline,
provide an alarm output which activates whenever the signals from the flow
switches and flow meter signals differ, also provide a snapshot report by setting
command point 1719.
How the hardware is configured:
INFO - Booleans 1025, 1026

and 1027 are only used as an
example here. Any unused
programmable Booleans can
be used for this function.
Physical I/O points 02 and 03 are setup as inputs by assigning them to 1700
(see the Command and Status Booleans on a later page). They are connected
to flow sensing switches on meter runs 1 and 2 respectively. The switches
activate with flow.
Physical I/O point 03 is connected to a 'meter fail alarm bell'. The output is
assigned to Programmable Boolean 1027. A 'delay ON' of 5 seconds is selected
to eliminate spurious alarms which would occur during startup and shutdown. A
'delay OFF' of 5 seconds is selected to ensures that the alarm bell remains on
for at least 5 seconds.
The Booleans are programmed as follows:
True if Meter #1 fails.

True if Meter #2 fails.
Request snapshot if either
meter fails.
Boolean Point #10xx

25: 1105*1002
26: 1205*1003
27: 1719=1025+1026
28:
Notes:
q Boolean Point 1025 is true
(Meter 1 failed) whenever
'Meter 1 Active' (Point
1105) differs from 'Flow
Detected' Flow Switch 1
(Point 02).
(Meter 2 failed) whenever
'Meter 2 Active' (Point
1205) differs from 'Flow
Detected' Flow Switch 2
(Point 03).
(Meter 1 OR 2 failed)
whenever point 1025 OR
0126 are true. The
Boolean Command Bit
1719 is set when Boolean
Point 1027 is true.
20/24.71 w 04/98
3-5
Chapter 3
Example 2: Automatic Run Switching for 4-Meter Run Application'
Object: To improve metering accuracy by automatically selecting the correct
flow meter run to be active in a multi run application. Small turbines need to be
protected from over-speeding while for best accuracy larger turbines should be
valved off when the flow drops below their minimum rate. In the example
shown, except when switching from one flow meter to the other, only one flow
meter run is active at one time. This is one example only. The number of runs
open for a given application at any flow rate obviously depends on the size of
the flow meters used.
Fig. 3-1.
Figure Showing Automatic Four-Meter Flow Zone Thresholds
Switching is based on the station flow gross flow rate which is compared to
preset switching thresholds entered by the user (See 'Meter Station Settings'
in Chapter 2). Threshold Flags 1, 2 and 3 are set and reset according to the
actual station flow rate.
The first task is identify the 4 zones and assign programmable Boolean points
to them. This allows us to include them in further Boolean statements.
Zone 1 = NOT Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3
Zone 2 = Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3
Zone 3 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND NOT Flag3
Zone 4 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND Flag 3
3-6
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

As each statement can have only 3 terms in it we must pre-process some part
of the equations. The term 'NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3' appears in Zone 1
and 2 equations.
Now we assign valid point numbers to our statements and rewrite them the way
they will be input.
First one term needs to be pre-processed to simplify:
1025 = NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3
25: /1825&/1826
Next the flow Zones are defined:

Zone 1 = NOT Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3
26: /1824&1025
Zone 2 = Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3
27: 1824&1025
Zone 3 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3
28: 1824&1825&/1826
Zone 4 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND Flag 3
29: 1824&1825&1826
The program thus far looks like:

/ Flag 2 & / Flag 3
Boolean Point #10xx

25: /1825&/1826
26: /1824&1025
27: 1824&1025
28: 1824&1825&/1826
29: 1824&1825&1826
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
In our example each meter run valve (V1, V2, V3 and V4) fails closed,
energizes to open. A limit switch mounted on each valve indicates the fully
open position (SW1, SW2, SW3 and SW4).
Fig. 3-2.
20/24.71 w 04/98
Figure Showing Four-Meter Run Valve Switching
3-7
Chapter 3
3.2.4.
How the Digital I/O Assignments are Configured
We will use Physical I/O Points 11, 12, 13 and 14 to connect to valve limit
switches SW1, SW2, SW3 and SW4 respectively. The switches activate when
the appropriate valve is fully open. The points are designated as inputs by
assigning them to the dummy input Boolean Point 1700 (see the Command and
Status Booleans on a later page). Their data base point numbers are simply
their I/O point number preceded by 10 (e.g.: I/O Point 11 = 1011).
Physical I/O points 15, 16, 17 and 18 are wired so as to open the meter run
valves V1, V2, V3 and V4. They will be assigned to the Boolean Flags 32 (Point
1032) through 35 (Point 1035) which represent the required state of V1 through
V4 as explained below.
The Boolean equations are as follows:
V1 = (NOT SW2 AND NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 1
Valve #1 is opened when the flow is in Zone 1 and will remain open until at least
1 of the other 3 valves is fully open.
Valves V2, V3 and V4 are programmed in a similar fashion.
To simplify we pre-process the common terms. The term 'NOT SW3 AND NOT
SW4' is used to determine V1 and V2. The term 'NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2' is
used to determine V3 and V4.
Assigning the next valid point numbers to our statements and re-write them the
way they will be input.
1030 = NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4
30: /1013&/1014
1031 = NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2
31: /1011&/1012
The final Equations to determined the state of V1, V2, V3 and V4 are as follows:
V1= NOT SW2 AND (NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 1 32: /1012&1030+1026
V2 =NOT SW1 AND (NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 2 33: /1011&1030+1027
V3= (NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2) AND NOT SW4 OR Zone 3 34: 1031&/1014+1028
V4 =(NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2) AND NOT SW3 OR Zone 4 35: 1031&/1013+1029
The computer evaluates each expression from left to right, so the order of the
variables in the above statements is critical. The logic requires that the OR
variable comes last.
3-8
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

The final program consists of 11 statements:
Zone 1
Boolean Point #10xx

25: /1825&/1826
26: /1824&1025
27: 1824&1025
28: 1824&1825&/1826
29: 1824&1825&1826
30: /1013&/1014
31: /1011&/1012
32: /1012&1030+1026
33: /1011&1030+1027
34: 1031&/1014+1028
35: 1031&/1013+1029
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
V1
V2
V3
V4
The only thing left to do now is assign Booleans 1032, 1033, 1034 and 1035 to
the appropriate digital I/O points which control V1, V2, V3 and V4. Here is a
summary of all of the digital I/O as assigned:
PHYSICAL I/O
POINT
ASSIGNED TO
BOOLEAN
WIRED T O
SYMBOL
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1700
1700
1700
1700
1032
1033
1034
1035
Valve 1 Fully Open Switch

Valve 1 Actuator
Valve 2 Actuator
Valve 3 Actuator
Valve 4 Actuator
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
V1
V2
V3
V4
INFO - A summary list of

common Boolean flags and
alarms is included on the
following pages.
20/24.71 w 04/98
3-9
Chapter 3
3.2.5.
Notes:
q For meter run Boolean
points, n=meter run #1,
#2, #3, #4.
q Meter Active (Point
1n05) is set whenever the
pulses from the flow
meter equal or exceed the
'Active Frequency'
threshold.
q Meter Being Proved
(Point 1n06) is set
whenever the meter has
been selected as the
meter to be proved, and
remains set for the
duration of the prove.
q Batch End Ack (1n08)
toggles state at the end of
each batch.
q Batch Preset Warning
Flag (1n09) is set
whenever the batch preset
counter counts down to
less than the warning
barrel count.
q Calculation Out of
Limits Flag (1n13) is set
whenever the operating
temperature, pressure or
density are outside of the
chosen calculation
algorithm limits of
operation.
Meter Run Boolean Points (1100 through 1499)
Each meter run has an identical set of Boolean points. The only numbering
difference is the second digit which indicates the number of the meter run; i.e.,
11XX indicates a Meter Run # 1 Boolean, 12XX indicates a Meter Run # 2
Boolean.
Meter Run Status and Alarm Points

The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For
example: Point 1105 is the Meter Active Flag for Meter Run #1. Point 1405
would be the Meter Active Flag for Meter Run #4.
*
1n01
Pulses - Gross Indicated Volume
1n02
Pulses - Net Volume (GSV)
1n03
Pulses - Mass
1n04
Pulses - Net Standard Volume

S&W corrected GSV.
1n05
Meter Run Active Flag

Flow pulses above threshold frequency.
1n06
Meter Being Proved

Activates during proving of this meter.
1n07
Any Meter Run Specific Alarm This Meter

Clears if acknowledged.
1n08
Batch End Acknowledge

Toggle ON/OFF.
1n09
Auto Prove Problem

Ten consecutive attempts to auto-prove have failed.
1n10
Batch Preset Reached

Batch total equal or exceeds the batch preset.
Note:
* Used to assign an
accumulator to the front
panel counters or digital
I/O points)
1n11
Batch Preset Warning Flag

Batch total is within X volume or mass units of the batch preset (X is stored at 5n38).
1n12

500 msec pulse.
1n13
Calculation Alarm
Usually temperature, pressure or density is outside of the range of the algorithm selected.
INFO - Boolean data is

accessed using Modbus
function codes 01 for reads,
05 for single point writes and
15 for multiple bit writes.
Boolean data is packed 8
points to a byte when
reading.
INFO - Transducer and flow

rate alarms remain set while
the alarm condition exists.
3-10
1n14
Override In Use - Density Pressure

Override in use for any reason.
1n15
Auto Prove Flag

Indicates that flowmeter n will be automatically proved based on changes in flow rate or
meter run time, etc. Cleared if prove sequence is completed or prove is aborted.
1n16
Override In Use - Temperature
1n17
Override In Use - Pressure
1n18
Override In Use - Gravity/Density Transducer
1n19
Override In Use - Density Temperature
1n20
Flowrate - Low Low Alarm

For points 1n20-1n23, flow rate units are gross volume or mass units for all products.
1n21
Flowrate - Low Alarm
1n22
Flowrate - High Alarm
1n23
Flowrate - High High Alarm
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

1n24
Meter Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
1n25
Meter Temperature - Low Alarm
1n26
Meter Temperature - High Alarm
1n27
Meter Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n28
Meter Pressure - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
1n29
Meter Pressure - Low Alarm
1n30
Meter Pressure - High Alarm
1n31
Meter Pressure - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n32
Gravity/Density - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
1n33
Gravity/Density - Low alarm
1n34
Gravity/Density - High Alarm
1n35
Gravity/Density - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n36
Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
1n37
Density Temperature - Low Alarm
1n38
Density Temperature - High Alarm
1n39
Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n40
Spare
to
1n43
Spare
1n44
Density Pressure - Transducer Failed Low
1n45
Density Pressure - Low Alarm
1n46
Density Pressure - High Alarm
1n47
1n48
Density Pressure - Transducer Failed High

Turbine - Meter Comparitor Alarm
Only when dual pulse fidelity check enabled.
1n49
Turbine - Channel A Failed

Total absence of pulses on Channel A.
1n50
Turbine - Channel B Failed

Total absence of pulses on Channel B.
1n51
Turbine - Difference Detected Between A & B Channel

Missing or added pulses.
1n52
Spare
1n53
Spare
1n54

Clears only if acknowledged and alarm condition is cleared.
1n55
Meter Off-line Flag
1n56
Batch in Progress Flag
Pulses for 500 msec when Meter Active (1n05) goes false.
Set when flow occurs at start of batch. Reset at batch end command.
1n57
Batch Start Acknowledge

Pulses for 500 msec when 1727-1730 command is received.
1n58
Meter Not Active / Batch Suspended

True when batch is in progress but Meter Active (1n05) is false.
1n59
20/24.71 w 04/98
Spare
3-11
Volume 3

Micro Motion
Alarm Status Points
Micro Motion
- Data
obtained via RS-485 link with
Micro Motion device.
INFO - The second digit of

the index number defines the
number of the meter run.
The following Micro Motion Alarm points can be accessed from the RFT via
Modbus and placed in the Micro Motion Alarm Word as the destination address
3n18 in the flow computer, to log the alarm points. The alarms will be logged
into the computer alarm log and will be displayed on the LCD when they occur.
1n60
Micro Motion - EPROM Checksum Failure
1n61
Micro Motion - Transmitter Configuration Change Made
1n62
Micro Motion - Sensor Failure
1n63
Micro Motion - Temperature Sensor Failure
1n64
Micro Motion - Input Over-ranged
1n65
Micro Motion - Frequency Output Over-ranged
1n66
Micro Motion - Transmitter Not Configured
1n67
Micro Motion - Real Time Interrupt Failure
1n68
Micro Motion - mA Output Saturated
1n69
Micro Motion - mA Output Fixed
1n70
Micro Motion - Density Out of Limits
1n71
Micro Motion - Zeroing Operation Failure
1n72
Micro Motion - Transmitter Electronics Failure
1n73
Micro Motion - Slug Flow Detected
1n74
Micro Motion - Self-calibration In Progress
1n75
Micro Motion - Power Reset Occurred
More Meter Run Status and Alarm Points

Note: See 2n00 area for
even more meter run alarms
and status points.
1n76
Batch Re-calculation Acknowledge Flag

Pulses for 500 msec when 1756 command received.
1n77
Correctable Totalizer Error Occurred

Primary totalizer checksum error secondary totalizer checksum OK.
1n78
Non-correctable Totalizer Error

Primary and secondary totalizers reset to zero because both checksums incorrect.
1n79
Spare
to
1n99
20/24.71 w 04/98
Spare
3-13
Chapter 3
3.2.6.
INFO - Unless indicated as
being Level Sensitive, most
commands are 'edge
triggered'. To activate a
command simply write a '1'
or 'True' to that point. It is not
necessary to write a '0' or
'False' after the command is
given. The status of a
command may also be read
or used as input in a Boolean
or variable statement.
Hardware Interaction Unreliable operation will

result if a command which
has been assigned to a
digital I/O point directly also
needs to be activated via a
Modbus write. This is
because the On/Off state of
the digital I/O point overwrites
the command point every 100
msec and most command
point actions are only
triggered every 500 msec.
Command and Status Boolean Points (1700

through 1799)
Boolean points numbered 17XX are used as command or status points within
the computer. These Boolean points can be altered by manipulating them via
the Modbus ports or by assigning them to a physical digital I/O point. The
various Boolean command and status flags are monitored for change of state
by the appropriate software tasks running within the computer. For example,
Point 1701 (Prover Ready) would be checked by the computer during a prove
run to ensure that the 4-way valve did not move. Each physical I/O point
configured as an input is scanned by the computer every 50 msec and the
Boolean assigned to each point would be set On or Off depending on the state
of the physical I/O point. Edge changes are also stored to ensure that a
momentary signal would not be missed. Physical digital I/O points that will be
used only in Boolean statements should be assigned to Point 1700 (dummy
Boolean).
Unless indicated as being Level Sensitive, most commands are 'edge
triggered'. To activate a command simply write a '1' (1 = True) to that point. It is
not necessary to write a '0' (0 = False) after the command. The status of a
command may also be read or used as input in a Boolean or variable
statement.
1700
Dummy
Used only to reserve a digital I/O point to be used as an input. Point 1700 can be
assigned to as many I/O points as needed.
1701
Prover Seal is OK
Must be true when sphere is between detectors.
1702
End Batch - Station

End batch on all meter runs defined in station.
1703
End Batch - Meter #1

Points 1703-1706 individual end batch commands always work.
1704
1705
1706
1707
Station - Change Product Strobe

Rising edge triggers batch end and change to product selected by 1743-1745. Used with
Station Product ID Bit 0-3 (1820-1823).
1708
Prove - Meter #1 Request

Edge triggered.
1709
1710
1711
1712
Station Alarm Acknowledge

Acknowledges all alarms.
1713
Reset Power Failed Flag

See power fail Flag 1829.
1714
Trial Prove - Meter #1 Request

Edge triggered.
3-14
1715
1716
1717
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
Notes:
q Inputs are scanned every
50 msec so signals must
be present for at least 50
msec in order to be
recognized. Points
marked with * are
positive edge triggered
commands.
q Prover Start Permissive
if configured (Point 1726)
must be true before a
prove sequence will start.
q Prover Seal OK if
configured (Point 1701)
must be true while the
prover sphere is between
the detector switches or
the prove in progress will
be shorted.
q Compact Prover Piston
Downstream if
configured (Point 1731)
must be false before the
Compact Prover Run
signal (Point 1927) will be
set active low.
q Product Select Inputs
(Points 1743-1746) must
be set up with next
product to run before any
of the Product Change
Strobes (Points 1707 and
1747-1750) are activated.
q PID Start Permissive if
configured (Points 17221725) must be true before
the control outputs will be
allowed to ramp open.
They will ramp closed
when it is negated.
Notes:
These points are

defaulted to active and
need not be manipulated
unless the application
requires it.
These points also affect
station totalizing (see also
point 1761). Level
sensitive.
20/24.71 w 04/98

1718
Abort the Prove in Progress
1719
Request Local Snapshot Report

Printed on local printer connected to flow computer.
1720
Snapshot Report to Modbus Buffer
1721
Alarm Report to Modbus Buffer
Move Snapshot Report to buffer located at 9402.

Move Alarm Report to buffer located at 9402.
1722
1st PID Permissive - Loop #1

Points 1722-1725 enable PID startup and shutdown ramping for the respective meter
(see 1752-1755). Level sensitive.
1723
1724
1725
1726
Prover Start Permissive

Checked after temperature and flow are stable. Indicates that the meter divert valves are
lined up. Enables prover sequencing when set.
1727
Start Ramp-up PID - Loop #1

st
nd
Initiates PID start up sequence by activating 1 and 2 PID Permissive (see 1n57 for
acknowledge pulse). These commands are edge triggered, simply turn on.
1728
1729
1730
1731
Compact Prover Piston Downstream

Applies only to Brooks SVP, must be false before the piston can be re-launched.
1732
Alarm Acknowledge - Meter Run #1

Points 1732-1735 are meter run specific alarms only.
1733
1734
1735
1736
Disable Flow Totalizing - Meter Run #1
1737
1738
1739
1740
Spare
1741
Remote Up Arrow Key

Duplicates the keypad function. Level sensitive.
1742
Remote Down Arrow Key

1743
Product Select - Bit 0

Points 1743-1746 represent the product number to change to as offset binary; i.e., 0000 =
product #1. 1111=product #16 (see 1707, 1747-1750).
1744
1745
1746
3-15
Chapter 3
1747
INFO- Notice that all write

commands have indexes /
point addresses with a 7 in
rd
the 3 digit from the right.
Change Product Strobe - Meter #1

For points 1747-1750, rising edge triggers a batch end and a change to the product
specified by points 1743-1746.
1748
1749
1750
1751
Freeze Analog Inputs

Used when calibrating analog inputs. Freezes ALL analogs. Level sensitive.
1752
2nd PID Permissive - Meter #1

Points 1752-1755 limit the PID ramp-down to the minimum output % setting (see 17221725). Level sensitive.
1753
1754
1755
1756
Spare
to
1759
Spare
1760
Leak Detection Freeze Command

Stores totalizers, temperatures, pressures and density variables to temporary storage (see
5n66 and 7634). This command is usually broadcast to all RTUs simultaneously.
1761
Disable Flow Totalizing Station

This command has no effect in individual meter run totalizing (see also points 17361739). Level sensitive.
1762
Remote Print - Previous Batch Report #1

At local printer.
to
1769
1770
Remote Print - Previous Daily Report #1

At local printer.
to
1777
1778
Remote Print - Previous Prove Report #1

At local printer.
to
1785
1786
Remote Print - Alarm Report

At local printer.
1787
Implement Last Prove Meter Factor

Causes the meter factor determined at the last complete prove to be implemented and
saved. Edge triggered.
3-16
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

1788
Shutdown PID - Loop #1

st
Note: More Command

Boolean Points are located
at address 2701.

commands are 'edge
CAUTION
Stored archive data may be

lost! See chapter on Raw
Data Archive before
manipulating these data
points. These functions are
duplicated using integers at
13920 and 13921.
20/24.71 w 04/98
Points 1788-1791 start ramp-down to top off valve setting by deactivating the 1 PID
permissive. These commands are edge triggered; simply turn on.
1789
1790
1791
1792
Stop Flow PID - Loop #1

st
nd
Points 1792-1795 deactivate the 1 and 2 PID permissive, causing the valve to ramp to
the top off setting, and then immediately closes the valve. If the valve is already at the
top off setting, the valve immediately closes.
1793
1794
1795
1796
Raw Data Archive Run

Level sensitive.
1797
Reconfigure Archive
Level sensitive.
1798
Recalculate and Print Selected Batch - Station

The previous batch selected by registered 3879 is recalculated. Edge triggered.
3-17
Chapter 3
3.2.7.
Notes:
q The station is defined as a
set of meter runs whose
flows are added or
subtracted.
q Batch End
Acknowledge (Point
1817) is toggled at the
end of each batch; i.e.,
True for every other
batch.
q Run Switching Flags
(Points 1824-1826) are
controlled by the station
gross flow rate and the
'Meter Station Threshold
Limits'.
q Power Failed Flag (Point
1829) is set automatically
when power or reset is
applied. It is cleared by
momentarily activating the
1713 command point.
Note:
The station also has a set of Boolean points. Data points not specifically
connected to a particular meter run are grouped here. These include flow
computer general system alarms and metering group alarms and status points.
*
1801
Positive - Gross Volume Pulses (IV)
1802
Positive - Net Volume Pulses (GSV)
1803
Positive - Mass Pulses
1804
Positive - S&W Corrected Net Volume Pulses (NSV)
1805
Negative - Gross Volume Pulses (IV)
1806
Negative - Net Volume Pulses (GSV)
1807
Negative - Mass Pulses
1808
Negative - S&W Corrected Net Volume Pulses (NSV)
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
Gravity Rate of Change Flag
1814
Delayed Gravity Rate of Change
Points 1805-1808 refer to flow which occurs in the reverse direction.
For points 1809-1812, flow rate units are gross volume or mass units for all products.
Set when rate of change of flowing SG exceeds the setting in 7889.
* Used to assign
accumulators to the front
panel electromechanical
counters and digital I/O
points.
Station Boolean Flags (1800 through 1899)
Point 1813 delayed by volume specified in 7890.
1815
Any System Alarm

Includes acknowledged alarms also.
1816
Any New System Alarm

Does not include acknowledged alarms.
1817
1818
Toggle state at batch end (see 1835).

Station batch total is within X volume or mass units of the batch preset. X is defined in
5815.
1819
Batch Preset Reached Flag

Station batch total equal or exceeds the batch preset size.
1820
Station - Current Product ID Bit 0

Points 1820-1823 are the offset binary representation of the current running product for
the station (0000=Product #1; 1111=Product #16).
1821
1822
1823
1824
Run Switching - Threshold Flag 1

Flags 1824-1826 activate/deactivate depending on the run switching threshold settings
and are based on current station flow rates.
1825
1826
1827
Leak Detection Freeze Command was received

See point 1760.
3-18
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

#
1828
Day Start Flag

True at specified day start hour (e.g.: 07:00:00).
Note:
# These points pulse high
1829
Power Fail Flag
1830
Print Buffer Full Flag
True after power up (see 1713 for reset).
for one 500 msec cycle

time.
Reports may be lost if 32K spooling buffer overflows due to the printer being off-line or
jammed with paper.
1831
Hour Start Flag
1832
Week Start Flag
1833
1834
True at specified day start hour Monday.
Month Start Flag

True at specified day start hour on 1st day of month.
Year Start Flag

True at specified day start hour on 1st January.
1835

Pulses at batch end (see 1817).
1836
Snapshot Printed
Indicates snapshot report printed.
1837
reading.
EPROM error Flag

Invalid checksum detected in EPROM memory.
1838
Peer-to-Peer Master Flag

Momentarily true when this computer is peer-to-peer master.
1839
Zero Value
Always false.
~ 1840
Boolean Statement Alarm

Tried to execute more than 100 Boolean statements.
~ 1841
Variable Statement Alarm

Tried to execute more than 100 variable statements.
1842
Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #1 - Communication Error

Points 1842-1857 refer to an error occurred while communicating with the slave in the
appropriate transaction. If a slave is involved in multiple transactions which fail, only the
first will be flagged.
to
Notes:
1857
1858
Calendar Day Start Flag

Format: 00:00:00.
~ The system limits the

maximum number of
statement evaluations to
100 to protected against
possible lock-ups due to
recursive loops. Any
additional statement
evaluations are ignored.

for one 500 msec. cycle
time.
* These flags are usually

used to conditionally print
appropriate information
messages on the batch
and daily reports.
20/24.71 w 04/98
1859
1860
1861
Calendar Week Start Flag

Format: 00:00:00 Monday.
Calendar Month Start Flag

Format: 00:00:00 1st day of month.
Calendar Year Start Flag

st
Format: 00:00:00 Jan 1 .
1862
Station Density - Transducer Failed Low
1863
Station Density - Low Alarm
1864
Station Density - High Alarm
1865
Station Density - Transducer Failed High
3-19
Chapter 3
1866
Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low
to
1869
Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High
1870
to
1873
1874
Viscosity Appearing on Report Flag
1875
Net Standard Volumes (NSV) Appearing on Report Flag
1876
Batch Recalculation Acknowledge Flag

Pulses for 500 msec when the 1798 command is received.
1877
Spare
1878
Previous Batch - Station Alarm Flag
1879
1880
Set if any station alarm during the previous batch.
Previous Batch - Station Totalizer Roll-over Flag

Set if any station totalizer rolled during the previous batch.
Previous Daily - Station Totalizer Roll-over Flag

Set if any station totalizer rolled during the previous day.
Note:
>
Applies only to Revision

24 for metric units.
*> 1881
Liter Units Selected Flag

Set when Liter is the selected volume unit.
*> 1882
Cubic Meter Units Selected Flag

3
Set when m is the selected volume unit.
1883
Auxiliary Input #1 - Transducer Failed Low
1884
Auxiliary Input #1 - Low Alarm
1885
Auxiliary Input #1 - High Alarm
1886
Auxiliary Input #1 - Transducer Failed High
1887
to
1890
1891
to
1894
1895
to
1898
Note: See 2600 area and
2800 area for more station
alarms and status points.
3-20
1899

Net Volume @ 2
nd
Reference Temperature Appears on Reports Flag
Set when 7699 is assigned a non-zero value. Prints on reports.
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

Any pulse signal can be latched by using a small program similar to the
following:
Boolean #10xx
25: /1834&/1026
26: /1835&/1025
1026 is set by 1834 and

cleared by 1835
3.2.8.
Notes:
q Point numbers marked
with '*' are updated at the
end of a prove and are not
reset until the beginning
of the next prove.
q Point numbers marked 'm'
are momentary lasting 2
seconds.
q Run Compact Prove
(Point 1927) is normally
high and goes low to
activate a run.
Prover Boolean Points (1900 through 1999)
Boolean points numbered 19XX are dedicated to the prover alarms and status.
point numbers. The second digit 9 defines a prover. See the 1700 area for
command points associated with the prover.
1901
Inlet (Left) Pressure - Transducer Low Alarm
1902
Inlet (Left) Pressure - Transducer High Alarm
1903
Outlet (Right) Pressure - Transducer Low Alarm
1904
Outlet (Right) Pressure - Transducer High Alarm
1905
Inlet (Left) Temperature - Transducer Low Alarm
1906
Inlet (Left) Temperature - Transducer High Alarm
1907
Outlet (Right) Temperature - Transducer Low Alarm
1908
Outlet (Right) Temperature - Transducer High Alarm
Note:
1909
Prove Aborted - Temperature Unstable
# These alarms are active
1910
Prove Aborted - Meter-to-Prover Temperature Deviation Exceeded
until the next prove

sequence is started.
1911
Prove Sequence - Successfully Completed
1912
Prove Sequence Aborted - Did Not Complete
1913
1st Detector Sensed - Sphere in Flight Forward Direction
1914
3rd Detector Sensed - Sphere in Flight Reverse Direction
1915
2nd Detector Sensed - In Over-travel Forward Direction
1916
4th Detector Sensed - In Over-travel Reverse Direction
1917
Launch Sphere - Forward Direction

Two second pulse.
1918
Launch Sphere - Reverse Direction

Two second pulse.
1919
Prove Aborted - Run Repeatability Deviation Limit Exceeded
1920
Prove Aborted - Prover Seal Not OK - Sphere Between Detectors
1921
Prove Aborted - Flowrate was Unstable
1922
Prove Aborted - No Prover Permissive Received
See 1701.
See 1726.
1923
Meter Factor Obtained was Not Implemented
1924
Prove Aborted - Meter Selected was not Flowing

See 1n05.
1925
Plenum - Charge Required

Points 1925 and 1926 refer to Brooks small volume provers only. Plenum pressure can be
automatically adjusted by adding or venting nitrogen.
1926
Plenum - Vent Required
1927
Brooks Small Volume Prover - Run Command Output

Active low output to launch piston.
20/24.71 w 04/98
3-21
Volume 3

1928
Prove Sequence - Successfully Completed Flag

500 msec pulse at end of prove.
1929
Using Fixed Override - Prover Inlet (Left) Temperature
1930
Using Fixed Override - Prover Outlet (Right) temperature
1931
Using Fixed Override - Prover Inlet (Left) Pressure
1932
Using Fixed Override - Prover Outlet (Right) Pressure
1933
Mass Prove Flag
1934
Net Prove Flag
1935
Mass Prove Report Flag
1936
Net Prove Report Flag
1937
Mass Calculation in Use Flag
1938
Meter Factor Repeatability in Use Flag
1939
Set when run deviation is based on meter factor.

Note:
Count Repeatability in Use Flag

Set when run deviation is based on meter counts.
* These flags are used to

cause data to be
conditionally printed on
the prover report.
1940
Prover Density - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
1941
Prover Density - Low Alarm
1942
Prover Density - High Alarm
1943
Prover Density - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1944
Prover Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
to
1947
Prover Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1948
Prover Density Pressure - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
to
1951
Prover Density Pressure - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1952
Spare
to
1954
Spare
1955
Viscosity Linearization - Proving Mode Selected
1956
Viscosity Linearization - Mode NOT Selected
1957
Spare
1958
Spare
1959
Prove Report - Print 4 Decimal Places for Correction Factors
1960
1961
1962
Prove Report - Print 4 Decimal Places for Meter Factors
1963
1964
1965
Prove Report - Print 5 Decimal Places for Intermediate Meter Factors
1966
1967
1968
Spare
to
1999
20/24.71 w 04/98
Spare
3-23
Chapter 3
3.2.9.
Meter Totalizer Roll-over Flags
The following Boolean points are flags indicating that a totalizer has rolled-over
(i.e., reached maximum count and restarted from zero). These flags are used to
conditionally print characters (usually **) in front of the totalizer which has
rolled on the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni Custom Report
Template will show how this is accomplished. The second digit of the index
number defines the number of the meter run. See also points at 2801 for station
versions of these flags.
Note: The In Progress flags
are those which the flow
computer uses when printing
the reports on the connected
printer.
Use the Previous flags if the
report is being printed by
another device such as a
SCADA or MMI. This is
necessary because the flow
computer clears the In
Progress data immediately
after it prints the local report.
Application Revision
20/24.71+ - This database
corresponds to Application
Revision 20/24.71+ for
Turbine/Positive
Displacement/Coriolis Liquid
Flow Metering Systems, with
K Factor Linearization. Both
US and metric unit versions
are considered.

3-24
2n01
Batch In Progress - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n02
Batch In Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n03
Batch In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n04
Batch In Progress - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n05
Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n06
Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n07
Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n08
Batch In Progress - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n09
Daily In Progress - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n10
Daily In Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n11
Daily In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n12
Daily In Progress - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n13
Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n14
Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n15
Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n16
Daily In Progress - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n17
Previous Batch n - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n18
Previous Batch n - Net GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n19
Previous Batch n - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n20
Previous Batch n - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n21
Previous Batch n - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n22
Previous Batch n - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n23
Previous Batch n - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n24
Previous Batch n - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n25
Previous Daily - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n26
Previous Daily - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n27
Previous Daily - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n28
Previous Daily - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n29
Previous Daily - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n30
Previous Daily - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n31
Previous Daily - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n32
Previous Daily - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n33
Batch In Progress - 2nd Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n34
Daily In Progress - 2nd Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n35
Previous Batch n - 2
2n36
nd
Previous Daily - 2
nd
Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

2n37
Meter n - Product in Use - Binary Code Decimal Bit 0
2n37
2n37
2n37
3.2.10. Miscellaneous Meter Station Alarm and Status

Points
INFO - To differentiate
between normal message
responses and unsolicited
transmissions, Modbus
function code 67 appears in
the transmitted message
rather than function code 03.
2601
Auxiliary Input #1 - Override in Use
to
2604
2605
Inlet Temperature - Override in Use
2606
Outlet Temperature - Override in Use
2607
Inlet Pressure - Override in Use
2608
Outlet Pressure - Override in Use
2620
Calibration Data Checksum Error

Correctable as secondary copy was OK.
2621
System Initialized Flag
2622
Day Light Savings Time
True after power up or system reset, clears when reset power fail command is set (1713).
On means that spring adjustment was made. Off means autumn adjustment was made.
2623
Archive Memory Alarm

0 = Ok; 1 = Fail.
3.2.11. Commands Which Cause Custom Data Packets

to be Transmitted Without a Poll
reading.
Note: Notice that all write

rd
20/24.71 w 04/98
Activating any of the edge triggered command points below causes the
appropriate Custom Data Packet to be transmitted out of the selected serial
port without the serial port being polled for data. This function can be useful
when communicating via VSAT satellite systems where operating cost is
directly proportional to RF bandwidth used.
2701
Data Packet #1 to Serial Port #1
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
3-25
Chapter 3
3.2.12. Commands Needed To Accomplish a Redundant

Flow Computer System
Accomplishing a redundant flow computer system requires two identically
configured flow computers to share input and output signals. In addition four
digital I/O points are cross connected to enable each flow computer to monitor
the other.
2713
Others - Watchdog Status
2714
Others - Master Status
Assigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers watchdog (see 2863).
Assigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers master status (see 2864).
2715
Assume Master Status Command

Set to take mastership. Edge triggered.
2716
Assume Slave Status Command

Set to relinquish mastership. Edge triggered.
3.2.13. Commands to Recalculate and Print Selected

Batch
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
2756
Recalculate and Print Selected Batch - Meter #1

When one of the commands 2756-2759 is given, the previous batch selected by 3n51 is
recalculated. Edge triggered.
2757
2758
2759
3.2.14. Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags

INFO - Remember that the
station is defined as a group
of individual meter runs.
In Progress Flags - The In

Progress flags are the flags
which the flow computer
uses when printing the
reports on the connected
printer.
another device such as an
3-26
conditionally print characters (usually ** ) in front of the totalizer which has
Template will show how this is accomplished. See also points at 2n01 for meter
run versions of flags.
2801
2802
Batch In Progress - Net (GSV)) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
2811
2812
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

reading.

2813
2814
Daily In Progress - Cumulative - (GSV) Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2815
2816
2817
2818
Previous Batch n - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2819
2820
2821
Previous - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2822
Previous - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2823
Previous - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2824
Previous - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag
2825
2826
2827
2828
2829
2830
2831
2832

2833
Batch In Progress - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag
2834
Daily In Progress - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag
2835
Previous Batch n - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag
2836
Previous Daily - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag
2837
Spare
to
2851
Spare
3.2.15. Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags

Note: It is unlikely that the

user would have any use for
these variables.
20/24.71 w 04/98
All totalizers within the flow computer are long integer types. This data type
uses an implied decimal position. The computer uses these flags internally to
determine how to format all totalizers of the same type for printing purposes.
2852
Batch Report - Print 4 Decimal Places for Correction Factors
2853
2854
2855
Batch Report - Print 4 Decimal Places for Meter Factors
2856
2857
2858
Print 0 Decimal Place for Gross & Net Totalizer
2859
2860
Print 2 Decimal Places for Gross & Net Totalizer
2861
2862
Spare
3-27
Volume 3
3.2.16. Status Booleans Relating to Redundant Flow

Computer Systems
2863
Watchdog Status Out

Normally High Watchdog. Monitored by other flow computer in a redundant system (see
2713).
2864
Master Status
Indicates mastership. Monitored by other flow computer in a redundant system (see
2714).
3.2.17. More Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags

Turbine/Positive
are considered.
2865
Print 0 Decimal Place for Mass Totalizer
2866
2867
Print 2 Decimal Places for Mass Totalizer
2868
2869
Spare
to
2999
20/24.71 w 04/98
Spare
3-29
Chapter 3
3.3.
User Programmable Variables and

Statements
There are 64 user-programmable floating point variables within the flow

computer numbered 7025 through 7088. The value stored in each of these
variables depends on an associated equation or statement. These statements
are evaluated every 500 msec and the resultant variable values can be
displayed on the LCD display, printed on a report, output to a D-A output, or
accessed via one of the communication ports. Typical uses for the variables
and statements include providing measurement units conversions, special
averaging functions, limit checking and comparisons.
3.3.1.
Variable Statements and Mathematical Operators

Allowed
Each statement can contain up to 3 variables or constants. The following

symbols are used to represent the functions:
Operator
TIP - The order of
precedence is: ABSOLUTE,
POWER, MULTIPLY &
DIVIDE, ADD &
SUBTRACT. Where
operators have the same
precedence the order is left
to right.
ADD
SUBTRACT
MULTIPLY
DIVIDE
CONSTANT
constant
POWER
ABSOLUTE
EQUAL
IF STATEMENT
GOTO STATEMENT
MOVE
COMPARE
INDIRECT
variable
Symbol
Description
+
*
/
#
Add the two variables or constants

Subtract the RH variable or constant from LH
Multiply the two variables or constants
Divide the two variables or constants
The number following is interpreted as a
&
$
=
)
G
:
%
Raise the LH variable to the power of the RH

Use the abs. unsigned value of variable following
Make the variable on left equal to the expression
Compares the variable to another (What if?)
Go to a different variable
Move statement or result to another variable.
Compare a value with or equal to
Variable contains point address of target
To program the user variables proceed as follows: From the Display Mode
press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the following menu will be displayed:
*** Misc. Setup ***
Password Maint?(Y)_
Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station ?
(Y)
Config Meter "n"
Config Prove ? (Y)
Config PID ? "n"
Config D/A Out "n"
Program Booleans ?
Program Variables ?
3-30
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

Scroll down to 'Program Variables ? (Y)' and enter [Y]. Assuming that no
variables are as yet programmed, the display shows:
PROG. VARIABLE #70xx
25:
_
26:
27:
Note that the cursor is on the line labeled 25:. At this point enter the variable
equation that will calculate the value of variable 7025.
Example 1:
To provide a variable (7025) which represents Meter Run #1 gross flow rate in
barrels per day' in place of the usual barrels per hour, multiply the 'barrels/hour'
variable (7101) by the constant 24.
25: 7101*#24
26: _
27:
bbls/hr x 24 = bbls/day
Example 2:
To provide a variable that represents 'gallons per minute' (7026) we can convert
the 'barrels per hour'variable (7101) to gallons by multiplying by 0.7 (0.7 =
42/60 which is the number of gallons in a barrel / divided by the number of
minutes in an hour).
25: 7101*#24
26: 7101*#.7_
27:
bbls/hr x0.7 = gal/min
Example 3:
To provide a variable (7028) that represents meter run #1 temperature in
'degrees Celsius' we subtract 32 from the 'degrees Fahrenheit' variable (7105)
and divide the result (7027) by 1.8.
bbls/hr x 0.7 = gal/min
F - 32.0

25: 7101*#24
26: 7101*#.7_
27: 7105-#32
28: 7027/#1.8
(F - 32.0) / 1.8 = C
20/24.71 w 04/98
3-31
Chapter 3
Example 4:
Gross barrels within the flow computer are simply flow meter counts divided by
the flow meter 'K-Factor' (pulses per barrel); i.e., gross barrels are not meter
factored. To provide a variable (7029) which represents Meter Run #1 gross
meter factored barrels, multiply the batch gross barrel totalizer (5101) by the
batch flow weighted average meter factor (5114).

25: 7101*#24
26: 7101*#.7_
27: 7105-#32
28: 7027/#1.8
29: 5101*5114
bbls/hr x 0.7 = gal/min

F - 32.0
(F - 32.0) / 1.8 = C
Gross bbls x Meter Factor
3.3.2.
Using Boolean Variables in Variable Statements
Boolean points used in a programmable variable statement are assigned the

value 1.0 when the Boolean value is TRUE and 0.0 when the Boolean value is
FALSE. By multiplying by a Boolean the user can set a variable to 0.0 when the
Boolean point has a value FALSE.
Example:
Provide a variable (7025) which functions as a 'Report Number'. The report
number which will appear on each 'batch end report' must increment
automatically after each batch and reset to zero at the contract day start hour
on January 1 of each year.
Add 1.0 at Batch End
Clear batch report number on
Jan 1 Contract Hour

25: 7025+1835
26: 1834)7025=#0
Boolean 1835 is true one calculation cycle at the end of a batch. Boolean point
1834 is equal to 1.0 for one calculation cycle on the contract day start hour on
January 1. If statement 1834 is true we reset counter 7025.
3-32
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
3.3.3.
Entering Values Directly into the User Variables
In some cases it may be necessary to enter data directly into a user variable
(not the expression, just the variable). For example, to preset the 'Report
Number' Variable 7025 in the example above we proceed as follows. While in
the Display Mode press [Prog] [Input] [Enter], the following will display:
USER VARIABLE #7025
Value
1234
7025 + 1835
Current value - you can

change this.
Expression for this variable you cannot change from this
entry.
3.3.4.
Using the Variable Expression as a Prompt
Entering plain text into the expression associated with the variable causes the
computer no problems. It ignores the text and leaves the variable unchanged.
For example:
USER VARIABLE 7025
Value ?
.00018
Enter Lbs to SCF ?
3.3.5.
Password Level Needed to Change the Value of a

User Variable
The first four variables, 7025, 7026, 7027 and 7028 require Level 2 password.
the remaining variables require Level 1.
20/24.71 w 04/98
3-33
Chapter 3
3.3.6.
Using Variables in Boolean Expressions
In some cases it is also necessary to trigger some type of an event based on

the value of a calculated variable. Boolean variables used in the Boolean
expressions and described in the previous text can have only one of two values,
ON or OFF (TRUE or FALSE). How can the floating point numbers described in
this chapter be used in a Boolean expression? Simply using the fact that a
variable can be either positive (TRUE) or negative (FALSE). Any variable or
floating point can be used in a Boolean expression.
Example:
Provide an alarm and snapshot report which will occur when the absolute
difference in net flow rate between Meter Runs #1 and #2 exceeds 10 bbls/hr,
but only when Meter Run #1 flow rate is greater than 1000 bbls/hr.
Result can be positive or
negative.
Absolute flow difference
minus 10.

30: 7102- 7202
31: $7030-#10
32: 7102-#1000
Positive if flow rate is >1000
Variable 7031 will be positive (TRUE) if Meter Runs #1 and #2 flow rates differ
by more than 10 bbls/hr. Variable 7032 will be positive (TRUE) when Meter Run
#1 flow rate exceeds 1000 bbls/hr.
User variables 7031 and 7032 shown above must both be positive for the alarm
to be set. In addition, we will require that the condition must exist for 5 minutes
to minimize spurious alarms. The alarm will be activated by Physical I/O Point
#02 and we will use Boolean statements 1025 and 1026.
Enter the following Boolean statements (1025 and 1026 used as example only):
True when both are positive.
Snapshot report when alarm
active.
Note: See the beginning of

this chapter on how to
program a Boolean
expression if necessary:
3-34
BOOLEAN POINT #70xx

25: 7031&7032
26: 1719 = 1002
To complete the example we assign Digital I/O Point #02 (Point # 1002) to 1025
and select a 'delay on' of 3000 to provide a 5 minute delay on activate (3000
ticks = 3000 x 100 msec = 300 seconds). Set the delay off to 0.
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
3.4.
User Configurable Display Screens
The user can specify up to eight display screen setups. Each display screen can
be programmed to show four variables, each with a descriptive tag. Any
variable within the data base can be selected for display.
Steps needed to configure a display screen are:
INFO - The computer checks
for the user display key
presses first so you may
override an existing display
screen by selecting the same
key press sequence.
1) Specify a sequence of up to four key presses that will be used to recall

the display. Key presses are identified by the A through Z character on
each key. For each variable (four maximum):
2) Specify the eight character string to be used to identify the variable. Any
valid characters on the keypad can be used.
3) Specify the database index or point number.
4) Specify the display resolution of the variable (i.e., how many digits to the
right of the decimal point).
Should the number exceed the display capacity, the decimal will be
automatically shifted right to counter the overflow. The computer will shift to
scientific display mode if the integer part of the number exceeds +/- 9,999,999.
To configure the user display screens proceed as follows:
From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the following
menu will be displayed:
*** Misc. Setup ***
Password Maint?(Y)_
Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station ?
(Y)
Config Meter "n"
Config Prove ? (Y)
Config PID ? "n"
Config D/A Out "n"
Program Booleans ?
Program Variables ?
User Display ? "n"
Config Digital "n"
Serial I/O "n"
Custom Packet ? (Y)
Scroll down to 'User Display ? "n" and enter 1 through 8 to specify which
screen you wish to configure.
20/24.71 w 04/98
3-35
Chapter 3
The screen for Display #1 shows:
USER DISPLAY #1
Key Press
_
Var #1 Tag
Var #1 Index
Var #1 Dec.
Var #2 Tag
Var #2 Index
Var #2 Dec.
Var #3 Tag
Var #3 Index
Var #3 Dec.
Var #4 Tag
Var #4 Index
Var #4 Dec.
Use the 'UP/DOWN' arrows to scroll through the screen. For 'Key Press' enter
the key press sequence (up to 4 keys) that will be used to recall this display.
The keys are identified by the letters A through Z.
Fig. 3-3.
3-36
Keypad Layout - A through Z Keys
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

Example:
You wish to recall 'User Display #1' by pressing [Gross] [Meter] [1], select the
key sequence [A] [L] [O] as shown below.
USER DISPLAY #1
Key Press A L O
Var #1 Tag
Var #1 Index
Var #1 Dec.
Continue configuring User Display #1 by entering the description tag, index
number and decimal position required for each variable.
Press [Gross] [Meter] [1]

Description Tag
Index # for Meter #1 Flow
Rate
Display XXXX.XX
Description Tag
Index # for Meter #1 Batch
Barrels
Display XXXXXXXXX
Description Tag
Index # for Meter #1 Preset
Count
Display XXXXXXXXX
Description Tag
USER DISPLAY #1
Key Press
A L O
Var #1 Tag
M1 MSCF
Var #1 Index
7101
Var #1 Dec.
2
Var #2 Tag M1 MMSCF
Var #2 Index
5101
Var #2 Dec.
0
Var #3 Tag M1 PRSET
Var #3 Index
5116
Var #3 Dec.
0
Var #4 Tag M1 MFACT
Var #4 Index
5114
Var #4 Dec.
4
Var #4 Tag _
Index # for Meter #1 Batch

F.W.A.M/F
Display X.XXXX
Description Tag
20/24.71 w 04/98
3-37
Chapter 3
In the preceding example, User Display #1 is used to display Meter Run #1:
Variable #1
Flow rate in MSCF per Hour
Variable #2
Accumulated Batch MSCF
Variable #3
Batch Preset MSCF To Deliver
Variable #4
Meter Factor for the Batch
The screen is recalled by pressing [Gross] [Meter] [1] [Enter] and displays:
USER DISPLAY # 1
M1 MSCF
1234.56
M1 MMSCF
123456789
M1 PRSET
1234567
M1 MFACT
1.0000
3-38
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
4. Modbus
Protocol Implementation
4.1.
Introduction
Omni Flow Computers implement a superset of the Gould Modbus Protocol

on Serial Ports #1 (selectable), #2, #3 and #4 (selectable), thus allowing
simultaneous communications with two totally independent Modbus systems.
Maximum transmission baud rate is 38.4 kbps with an average answer
response time of 70 msec plus any modem warm-up time.
The Modbus Protocol specifies one master and up to 247 slaves on a
common communication line. Each slave is assigned a fixed unique device
address in the range of 1 to 247. The Master always initiates the transaction.
Transactions are either a query/response type (only one slave is accessed at a
time) or a broadcast / no response type (all slaves are accessed at the same
time). A transaction comprises a single query and single response frame or a
single broadcast frame.
4.2.
Modes of Transmission
Two basic modes of transmission are available: ASCII or Remote Terminal Unit
(RTU). The mode selected depends on the equipment being used.
AVAILABLE T RANSMISSION MODES

T RANSMISSION MODE
ASCII
RTU
Hexadecimal
8-bit binary
Start Bits
Data Bits
Odd, Even, None (1 or

0)
Odd, Even, None (1 or

0)
1 or 2
1 or 2
LRC
CRC
1.1 - 38.4 kbps
1.1 - 38.4 kbps
Coding System
NUMBER OF BITS:
Parity (Optional)
Stop Bits
Error Checking
Baud Rate
20/24.71 w 04/98
4-1
Modbus
Chapter 4
4.2.1.
ASCII Framing and Message Format
Framing in ASCII Transmission Mode is accomplished by the use of the colon

(:) character indicating the beginning of a frame and a carriage return (CR) line
feed (LF) to delineate end of frame. The line feed character also serves as a
synchronizing character which indicates that the transmitting station is ready to
receive an immediate reply.
ASCII MESSAGE FORMAT

BEGINNING
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
FRAME
READY TO
RECEIVE
RESPONSE
2 Char
2 Char
Nx2
Char
2 Char
CR
LF
7 Bits
14 Bits
14Bits
N x 14
Bits
14 Bits
7 Bits
7 Bits
OF
FRAME
Assuming 7 bits per

transmitted character.
4.2.2.
DATA
ERROR
CHECK
END
OF
Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) Framing and

Message Format
Frame synchronization can be maintained in RTU Transmission Mode only by

simulating a synchronous message. The 'OMNI' monitors the elapsed time
between receipt of characters. If 3.5 character times elapse without a new
character or completion of the frame, then the frame is reset and the next bytes
will be processed looking for a valid address.
RTU MESSAGE FORMAT
4.3.
4.3.1.
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
DATA
ERROR CHECK
8 Bits
8 Bits
N x 8 Bits
16 Bits
Message Fields
Address Field
The address field immediately follows the beginning of the frame and consists
of 2 characters (ASCII) or 8 bits (RTU). These bits indicate the user assigned
address of the slave device that is to receive the message sent by the master.
Each slave must be assigned a unique address and only the addressed slave
will respond to a query that contains its address. When the slave sends a
response, the slave address informs the master which slave is communicating.
In broadcast mode, an address of zero (0) is used. All slaves interpret this as an
instruction to read and take action, but do not issue a response message.
4-2
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
4.3.2.
Note: See 4.5 for
descriptions and examples of
these function codes. See
4.4 for a description of
exception responses.
Function Code Field
The function code field tells the addressed slave what function to perform. The
high order bit of the function code field is set by the slave device to indicate that
other than a normal response is being transmitted to the Master device. This bit
remains 0 if the message is a query or a normal response message.
FUNCTION CODE
01
03
05
READ MULTIPLE BOOLEAN POINTS

READ STRINGS OR MULTIPLE 16 OR 32 BIT
VARIABLES
WRITE SINGLE BOOLEAN POINT
06
15
WRITE SINGLE 16 BIT INTEGER

WRITE MULTIPLE BOOLEAN POINTS
16
WRITE STRINGS OR MULTIPLE 16

VARIABLES
READ ASCII TEXT BUFFER
WRITE ASCII TEXT BUFFER
65
66
4.3.3.
ACTION
OR 32 BIT
Data Field
The data field contains the information needed by the slave to perform the
specific function or it contains data collected by the slave in response to a
query. This information may be text strings, values, exception code or text
buffers.
4.3.4.
Error Check Field
This field allows the master and slave devices to check a message for errors in
transmission. A transmitted message may be altered slightly due to electrical
noise or other interference while it is on its way from one unit to another. The
error checking assures that the master and the slave do not react to messages
that have been changed during transmission. The error check field uses a
longitudinal redundancy check (LRC) in the ASCII Mode and a CRC-16 check in
the RTU Mode. The bytes checked include the slave address and all bytes up to
the error checking bytes. Checking is done with the data in the binary mode or
RTU mode.
The LRC Mode

The error check is an 8-bit binary number represented and transmitted as two
ASCII hexadecimal (hex) characters. The error check is produced by first
stripping the Colon, CR and LF and then converting the hex ASCII characters to
binary. Add the binary bytes (including slave address) discarding any carries,
and then two's complement the result. At the received end the LRC is
recalculated and compared to the LRC as sent. The colon, CR, LF, and any
imbedded non ASCII hex characters are ignored in calculating the LRC (see
page 1-7 of the Gould Modbus
Reference Guide for more details).
20/24.71 w 04/98
4-3
Modbus
Chapter 4
The CRC Mode
The message is considered as one continuous binary number whose most

significant bit (MSB) is transmitted first. The message is pre-multiplied by x 16
(shifted left 16-bits), then divided by (x16+x15+x2+1) expressed as the binary
number (11000000000000101).The integer quotient digits are ignored and the
16-bit remainder (initialized to all ones at the start to avoid the case of all zeros
being an accepted message) is appended to the message (MSB first) as the two
CRC check bytes. The resulting message including CRC, when divided by the
same polynomial (x16 + x15 + x2 + 1) at the receiver will give a zero remainder
if no errors have occurred (see pages1-4 through 1-6 of the Gould Modbus
Reference Guide for more details).
4.4.
Exception Response
Programming or operation errors are those involving illegal data in a message,

no response or difficulty in communicating with a slave. These errors result in
an exception response from the slave, depending on the type of error. When
such a message is received from the master the slave sends a response to the
master echoing the slave address, function code (with high bit set), exception
code and error check fields. To indicate that the response is a notification of an
error, the high order bit of the function code is set to 1.
EXCEPTION CODE
01
02
03
04
05
4-4
DESCRIPTION
ILLEGAL FUNCTION
ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS
ILLEGAL DATA VALUE
DATA CANNOT BE WRITTEN
PASSWORD NEEDED
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
4.5.
Function Codes
4.5.1.
Function Code 01 (Read Boolean Status)
This function allows the user to obtain the ON/OFF status of Booleans used to
control discrete outputs from the addressed slaves only. Broadcast mode is not
supported with this function code. In addition to the slave address and function
field, the message requires that the information field contain the initial point
number to be read (Starting point) and the number of points that will be read to
obtain the Boolean data.
Boolean points are numbered as from 1001; (Boolean number 1= 1001). The
data is packed one bit for each Boolean flag variable. The response includes
the slave address, function code, quantity of data characters, the data
characters and error checking. Data will be packed with one bit for each
Boolean flag (1 = ON, 0 = OFF). The low order bit of the first character contains
the addressed flag, and the remainder follow. For Boolean quantities that are
not even multiples of eight, the last characters will be filled in with zeros at high
order end.
Example: Read Booleans 1120 to 1131 from Slave Device #01.
POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : ASCII TRANSMISSION MODE
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
: 3031
3031
DATA STARTING POINT #
NUMBER OF POINTS
HI
LO
HI
LO
LCR CHECK
8-BIT
3034
3630
3030
3043
3845 CR LF
POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : RTU TRANSMISSION MODE

ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
01
01
NUMBER OF POINTS
HI
LO
HI
LO
CRC CHECK
16-BIT
04
60
00
0C
nn nn
SLAVE RESPONSE : ASCII Transmission Mode

DATA
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
BYTE
COUNT
HI
LO
LCR CHECK
8-BIT
: 3031
3031
3032
3038
3030
4634 CR LF
SLAVE RESPONSE : RTU Transmission Mode

DATA
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
BYTE
COUNT
HI
LO
LCR CHECK
8-BIT
01
01
02
08
00
nn nn
The status of Booleans 1120 through 1127 is shown as 08 (hex) = 0000 1000
(binary). Reading right to left, this shows that status 1123 is on. The other data
flags are decoded similarly. Due to the quantity of Boolean status requested, the
last data field, which is shown as 00 (hex) = 0000 0000 (binary), contains the
20/24.71 w 04/98
4-5
Chapter 4
Modbus
status of only 4 flags. The 4 left most bits are provided as zeros to fill the 8-bit
format.
4-6
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
4.5.2.
Function Code 03 (Read 16-Bit Register Sets)
Function Code 03 allows the master to obtain the binary contents of holding
registers in the addressed slave. The protocol allows for a maximum of 125
sixteen-bit registers to be obtained at each request. Broadcast mode is not
allowed for function 03.
These 16-bit registers are also grouped in sets of registers and accessed as one
variable. The numeric range of the point number defines the variable type and
indicates how many 16-bit registers make up that variable.
REGISTER GROUPS FOR T YPES OF VARIABLES

16-BIT REGS. / NO OF BYTES / M AX POINTS /
POINT
POINT
M ESSAGE
POINT #
RANGE
VARIABLE
TYPE
3XXX or 13XXX
Short Integer
1 Register
2 Bytes
125
4XXX
8-Char. ASCII String
4 Registers
8 Bytes
31
5XXX or 15XXX
Long Integer
2 Registers
4 Bytes
62
7XXX or 18XXX
IEEE Floating Point
2 Registers
4 Bytes
62
14XXX
8 Registers
16 Bytes
15
The addressed slave responds with its address and the function code, followed
by the information field. The information field contains a single byte indicating
the number of data bytes returned followed by the actual data bytes. The data is
returned in multiples of two bytes, with the binary content right justified. The
data is sent MS Byte first.
Example: Read Short Integer Message 3012 through 3013 from Slave #2.

ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
02
03
QUANTITY OF POINTS
HI
LO
HI
LO
CRC CHECK
16-BIT
0B
C4
00
02
nn nn

DATA
DATA
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
BYTE
COUNT
HI
LO
HI
LO
CRC CHECK
16-BIT
02
03
04
1F
40
1F
3E
nn nn
The slave responds with its address and the function code, byte count of the
data field followed by the actual data field. In the above example the data field
contains 4 bytes representing the value of the requested data.
20/24.71 w 04/98
4-7
Modbus
Chapter 4
4.5.3.
Function Code 05 (Write Single Boolean)
This message forces a single Boolean variable either ON or OFF. Boolean

variables are points numbered 1XXX or 2XXX. Writing the 16-bit value 65,280
(FF00 HEX) will set the Boolean ON, writing the value zero will turn it OFF; all
other values are illegal and will not effect the Boolean. Using a slave address
00 (Broadcast Mode) will force all slaves to modify the desired Boolean.
Example: Turn Single Boolean Point 1711 ON Slave #2.

ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
02
05
BOOLEAN POINT #
DATA
HI
LO
HI
LO
CRC
CHECK
06
AF
FF
00
nn nn

ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
02
05
BOOLEAN POINT #
DATA
HI
LO
HI
LO
CRC
CHECK
06
AF
FF
00
nn nn
The normal response to the command request is to retransmit the message as

received after the Boolean state has been altered.
4-8
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
4.5.4.
Function Code 06 (Write Single 16-Bit Integer)
Any numeric variable that has been defined on the 16-bit integer index table
can have its contents changed by this message. The 16-bit integer points are
numbered from 3XXX or 13XXX.
When used with slave address zero (Broadcast Mode) all slaves will load the
specified points with the contents specified. The following example sets one 16bit integer at address 3106 (0C22 HEX) of Slave #2 (i.e., Load address 3106
with data 0003).
Example: Set Single 16-Bit Integer Slave #2.

POINT #
DATA
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
HI
LO
HI
LO
CRC
CHECK
02
06
0C
22
00
03
nn nn

POINT #
DATA
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
HI
LO
HI
LO
CRC
CHECK
02
06
0C
22
00
03
nn nn
The normal response to a Function 06 query is to retransmit the message as

received after the 16-bit integer has been altered.
20/24.71 w 04/98
4-9
Modbus
Chapter 4
4.5.5.
Function Code 15 (Write Multiple Boolean )
Function code 0FHEX writes to each Boolean variable in a consecutive block of

Boolean variables to a desired ON or OFF state. Each Boolean is packed in the
data field, one bit for each Boolean flag (1 = ON 0 = OFF). The data field
consists of increments of 2 bytes and can be up to 250 bytes (2000 points).
Boolean points are packed right-to-left, 8 to a byte with unused bits set to '0'.
The use of slave address 00 (Broadcast Mode)will force all slaves to modify
the desired Boolean bits. The following example writes to 14 Boolean variables
starting at address 1703. The data field value 05 1703 through 1710, and data
field value 20 represents the status of points 1711 through 1716. These data
values are transmitted as 0000 0101 and 0010 0000, indicating that Booleans
points 1703, 1705, 1716 are to be forced ON and 1704 and 1706 through 1715
are to be forced OFF (the 2 most significant positions of the second byte are
unused and set to 0).
Example: Turn on Boolean points 1703, 1705, 1716 ON Slave #3.

ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
03
0F
STARTING
ADDRESS
QUANTITY
OF POINTS
06
00
A7
0E
DATA
BYTE
COUNT
HI
LO
02
05
20
CRC
CHECK
nn
nn

ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
03
0F
STARTING
ADDRESS
OF POINTS
06
00
A7
QUANTITY
0E
CRC
CHECK
'nn'
'nn'
The normal response to a Function 15 query is to echo the slave address,

function code, starting address and quantity of points written.
4-10
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
4.5.6.
Function Code 16 (Write 16-Bit Register Sets)
Function code 10HEX allows the master to change the binary contents of holding
registers in the addressed slave. The protocol allows for a maximum of 125 16bit registers to be changed at each download. Using a slave address of zero
(00) allows the master to change registers in all slaves simultaneously
(Broadcast mode).
These 16-bit registers are also grouped as sets of registers and accessed as
one variable. The numeric range of the point number defines the variable type
and indicates how many 16-bit registers make up that variable.
REGISTER GROUPS FOR T YPES OF VARIABLES

16-BIT REGS. / NO OF BYTES / M AX POINTS /
POINT
POINT
M ESSAGE
POINT #
RANGE
VARIABLE
TYPE
3XXX or 13XXX
Short Integer
1 Register
2 Bytes
125
4XXX
4 Registers
8 Bytes
31
5XXX or 15XXX
Long Integer
2 Registers
4 Bytes
62
7XXX or 17XXX
IEEE Floating Point
2 Registers
4 Bytes
62
14XXX
8 Registers
16 Bytes
15
The addressed slave responds with its address and the function code, followed
by the information field. The information field contains a single byte indicating
the number of data bytes returned and the actual data bytes. The data is sent
as multiples of two bytes, with the binary content right justified. The data is sent
MS Byte first.
Example: Write Short Integers 3012 through 3013 to Slave #2.
Byte Count: The Byte Count
will be increments of 2, 4, 8
or 16 bytes depending on the
address range of the points
downloaded.

FUNC
ADDR CODE
02
10
STARTING
POINT #
OF POINTS
0B
00
C4
QUANTITY
02
DATA
DATA
BYTE
COUNT
HI
LO
HI
LO
04
1F
40
1F
3E
CRC
CHECK
nn
nn

ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
02
10
STARTING
ADDRESS
OF POINTS
0B
00
C4
QUANTITY
02
CRC
CHECK
'nn'
'nn'
The slave responds with its address and the function code, starting point
number and quantity of points.
20/24.71 w 04/98
4-11
Modbus
Chapter 4
Example: Write a Long Integer 5101 to Slave #4

FUNC
ADDR CODE
04
10
STARTING
POINT #
OF POINTS
QUANTITY
13
00
ED
01
DATA
DATA
BYTE
COUNT
HI
LO
HI
LO
04
00
4F
20
4E
CRC
CHECK
nn
nn

ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
04
10
STARTING
ADDRESS
OF POINTS
QUANTITY
13
00
ED
01
CRC
CHECK
nn
nn
The slave responds with its address and the function code, starting point
number and quantity of points.
4.5.7.
Function Code 65 (Read ASCII Text Buffer)
Function Code 41HEX allows the master to read the contents of an ASCII text
buffer within an addressed slave. Data is always sent and received in packets
containing 128 characters. Packets are numbered from 0 to 255. The size of the
text buffer is always an exact multiple of 128 bytes. The last buffer will contain
an ASCII ^2 (end of file character).
Example: Read 2nd packet of an ASCII Text Buffer Point 9001 from Slave # 5.
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
HI
POINT #
LO
PACKET #
HI
LO
05
41
23
29
00
01
CRC
CHECK
nn
nn
4-12
POINT #
PACKET #
ADDR
FUNC
CODE
HI
LO
HI
05
41
23
29
00
Lo
DATA
Byte 0
01
30
Data
B
YTE
128
41
CRC
CHECK
nn
nn
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
4.5.8.
Function Code 66 (Write ASCII Text Buffer)
Function code 42HEX is used by the master to download an ASCII text buffer to
an addressed slave. Data is always sent and received in packets containing 128
characters. Packets are numbered from 0 to 255. The size of the text buffer is
always an exact multiple of 128 bytes. The last buffer will contain an ASCII ^2
(end of file character).
Example: Write 1st packet of an ASCII Text Buffer Point 9002 to Slave # 2.
POINT #
PACKET #
FUNC
CODE
HI
LO
HI
Lo
DATA
BYTE 0
ADDR
DATA
BYTE 128
02
42
23
2A
00
00
39
2F
CRC
CHECK
nn
nn
20/24.71 w 04/98
ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
POINT #
HI
LO
PACKET #
HI
LO
02
42
23
2A
00
00
CRC
CHECK
nn
nn
4-13
Modbus
Chapter 4
4.6.
Custom Data Packets
Many point numbers were left unused when numbering the variables within the
database. This allows for future growth and different application data. Without
custom data packets many polls would be required to retrieve data distributed
throughout the database. The custom data packets allows you to concatenate or
join different groups or sets of data in any order and of any data type into 1
message response. These custom packets are a type 03 read and are located
at points 1, 201 and 401 in the database.
Example: Read Custom Data Packet #1 at Point 0001 from Slave #2.

ADDRESS
FUNCTION
CODE
02
03
STARTING POINT #
QUANTITY OF POINTS
HI
LO
HI
LO
CRC CHECK
16-BIT
00
01
00
00
nn nn
Dummy number
of points

DATA
FUNCTION
CODE
BYTE
COUNT
HI
LO
HI
LO
CRC CHECK
16-BIT
02
03
??
??
??
??
??
nn
Depends on the size

of packet configured
4-14
DATA
ADDRESS
nn
Depends on the number

and type of data points included
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
4.7.
Peer-to-Peer on the Modbus

Link
Serial Port #2 (Modbus Port #1) can be configured to allow peer-to-peer

communications. In this mode any Omni flow computer can act as a Modbus
master and communicate with any other Modbus device on the communication
link (see technical Bulletin TB-980401 Peer-to-Peer Basics).
4.8.
Half Duplex Wiring Configuration

Required
The physical wiring of a Modbus link is usually full duplex, although the Modbus
communication protocol is a half duplex protocol (i.e., both devices never
transmit at the same time). For peer-to-peer communications the physical link
must be wired for half duplex operation with all transmit and receive terminals
wired in parallel (see Chapter 3). This allows all devices to hear all
transmissions; even their own.
4.9.
Active Master
Control of the communication link is passed from the current master to the next
master in the sequence by broadcasting the ID number of the next master in
sequence. When that flow computer has completed its transaction list (see
Chapter 5 'Peer-To-Peer') it will in turn hand over control to the next master in
the sequence.
4.10. Error Recovery

Should the next master in the sequence fail to take control of the link the
current master will search for an active master. To ensure best performance and
fastest recovery in the event of an error, always number Modbus masters
consecutively starting from 01.
20/24.71 w 04/98
4-15
Volume 3
5. Flow Equations and Algorithms

5.1.
Flow Equations and Algorithms for

Revision 20 (U.S. Units)
The calculations performed for liquid flows are as follows:
5.1.1.
Flow Rate At Flowing Conditions: Bbls/Hr
Gross Flow Rate (IV) =
Total Pulses per Second

x 3600
Nominal K Factor (Pulses / Bbls)
When Linearization Correction Factor is Selected:

Gross Flow Rate = Gross (IV) =
5.1.2.
Pulses
x LCF x 3600
K Fator
Net Flowrate At Base Conditions: Bbls/hr (Except

Propylene)
Net Flowrate (GSV) = Gross Flowrate (IV) x VCF x CPL x MF

(NSV) = GSV x CSW
5.1.3.
Mass Flowrate: KLbs/hr (Except Propylene)
Mass Flowrate = Gross Flowrate (IV) x Flowing Density x MF / 1000

If no Live Density is applied:
Mass Flowrate = Net Flowrate (GSV) x Density @ 60OF / 1000
20/24.71 w 04/98
5-1
Chapter 5
Flow Equations and Algorithms
5.1.4.
Equivalencies
Where:
MF = Meter Factor is entered from keypad, downloaded from SCADA or other
remote device, or automatically changed by a sequence of proves
Flowing Density = [Flowing gr/cc / .999012] x Wt. of water at 60OF & 14.696
Psia.
Density at 60OF = SG 60 x Wt. of water at 60OF & 14.696 Psia.
CSW = [1- (% S&W/100)]
VCF = Volume Correction Factor (ASTM D1250)
= Exp (-Alpha T x Delta T x (1+.8 x Alpha T x Delta T))
Delta T = T Actual - T Reference
Rhot = Product density at reference temperature
= 141.5 x Density of Water / (API + 131.5)
Where API = API gravity at reference temperature
Alpha T = Correction of expansion at reference temperature
= [K0 + (K1 x Rhot)] / Rhot
When the product is between the jet group and the gasoline group:
Alpha T = A + B / Rhot
Where:
K0 and K1 are physical constants derived from mathematical data published by
the American Petroleum Institute in the API Manual of Petroleum Measurement
Standards and are as follows:
Table 6A, 23A
Product Type: Crude Oil
Gravity API: 0-100, Relative Density: .6110 to 1.0760

K0 = 341.0957 K1 = 0.0
Table 6B, 23B
Product Type: Fuel Oil
Gravity API: 0 -37, Relative Density: .8400 to 1.0760

K0 = 103.8720 K1 = 0.2701
Table 6B, 23B
Product Type: Jet Group
Gravity API: 37.1-47.9, Relative Density: .7890 to .8395

K0 = 330.3010 K1 = 0.0
Table 6B, 23B
Product Type: Gasolines
Gravity API: 52.1-85, Relative Density: .6535 to .7705

K0 = 192.4571 K1 = .2438
5-2
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

Table 6B, 23B
Product Type: Between Jet and Gasoline
Gravity API: 48-52, Relative Density: .7710 to .7885

A = -0.00186840
B = 1489.0670
F = Compressibility factor for hydrocarbon using API Chapter 11.2.1 for liquids
0 - 90 API using API Chapter 11.2.2 for Hydrocarbons 0.350 to 0.637
relative density and -50OF to 140OF
CPL = Correction for pressure on liquid
= 1 / 1 - (P - Pe) x F
P = Flowing pressure in PSIG
Pe = Equilibrium vapor pressure which is calculated from the correlations
developed by Dr. R. W. Hankinson et al of Phillips Petroleum Company
for member companies of the GPA and published as GPA Technical
Publication No. 15.
Temperature Range : -50OF to 140OF. Relative Density Range : .49 to .676
For Propylene
Net Flowrate = Gross Flowrate x CCF x MF
Mass Flowrate = Gross Flowrate x MF x Flowing SG x Wt of H2O @60OF &
14.696 Psia
where:
CCF = Ratio of Calculated Flowing Density to Density at 60OF and Saturation
Pressure.
Calculated Flowing Density = Density at Flowing Temperature and Pressure
Calculated using API Chapter 11.3.3.2
3
Flowing SG = (Calculated Flowing Density in Lbs/Ft x 0.0161846) / 0.999012
Density of Ethane/Propane C3+ Mixes

Density at Flowing Temperature and Pressure is calculated based on a
computer algorithm developed by Phillips Petroleum Aug. 1992. The algorithm
was based on data points published in GPA TP1, TP2 and TP15 publications.
Density and other physical properties of Ethylene (IUPAC)

The physical properties of Ethylene calculated are: density, viscosity and
isentropic exponent at flowing temperature and pressure. These are calculated
using equations based on the International Union of Pure and Applied
Chemistry Ethylene Tables (IUPAC).
Density of Ethylene (NIST)

Ethylene density is calculated using NIST 1045 standard (formerly NBS 1045)
20/24.71 w 04/98
5-3
Chapter 5

Density of Ethylene (API)
Ethylene density is calculated using the API 11.3.2.1 (formerly API 2565). This
is the unmodified original standard.
5.1.5.
Prove Gross Flowrate (Uni- and Bi-Directional)

= Total (Pulses/Second ) / (Pulses/Bbl) * 3600
5.1.6.
Prove Gross Flowrate (Compact)

= (Prover Volume / Tdvol) * 3600
5.1.7.
Prove Meter Factor

= (PV x CTSP x CPSP x CTLP x CPLP) / (Prove Pulses x CTLM x CPLM)
5.1.8.
Equivalencies
Where:
PV = Base prover volume at 60OF and 0 PSIG
CTSP = Correction for temperature on steel
For Uni- or Bi-Directional Prover

= 1 + ( T - Tbase) tc
tc = Coefficient of cubical expansion per OF of the prover tube
T = The average prover temperature in OF
For Compact Prover

= [1 + ( T - Tbase) tcp] x [1 + (Ti - Tbase) tci]
tcp = Square Coefficient of expansion per OF of the prover tube
tci = Linear Coefficient of expansion per OF of the prover switch rod
CPSP = Correction for pressure on steel
= 1 + ((P- pbase x D) / (E x t))
P = Internal pressure in PSIG
D = Internal diameter in inches
E = Modulus of elasticity for prover tube
t = Wall thickness of prover tube in inches
Pbase = Base pressure of Prover
CTLP = Correction for the effect of prove temperature
= CTL, where T actual is replaced by average temperature at prover during
a prove
5-4
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

CPLP = Correction for the effect of prover pressure
= CPL, where P is replaced by average pressure at prover during a prove
CTLM = Volume correction factor of meter temperature
= CTL, where T actual is replaced by average temperature at meter during
a prove
CPLM = Correction for the effect of meter pressure
= CPL, where P is replaced by average pressure at meter during a prove
When Using Pulse Interpolation Method

Interpolated Counts = Integer Counts (Tdvol / Tdfmp)
When Proving Propylene Product

CPLM and CPLP are set to 1.0000
CTLM and CTLP are set equal to CCFM and CCFP
CCF = Ratio of Density at Flowing Conditions to Density at Reference
Conditions as per API Chapter 11.3.3.2
When Proving Ethylene Product

All liquid correction factors are set to 1.0000. Meter Factors are calculated
based on mass flow at the meter verses ethylene mass in the prover.
5.1.9.
PID Control
Primary Variable error % ep

ep = Primary Setpoint % Span - Primary Variable % Span Forward Action
ep = Primary Variable % Span - Primary Setpoint % Span Reverse Action
Secondary Variable error % es
es = Sec Gain * (Sec Setpoint % Span - Sec Variable % Span) Forward Action
es = Sec Gain * (Sec Variable % Span - Sec Setpoint % Span) Reverse Action
Control Output % C0 (Before Startup Limit Function)
C0 = Primary Gain * (ep + e) Controlling on Primary Variable
C0 = Primary Gain * (es + e) Controlling on Secondary Variable
Integral Error e
e = (Rpts/minp * Sample period * ep) + e n-1 Controlling on Primary Variable
e = (Rpts/mins * Sample period * es) + e n-1 Controlling on Secondary Variable
20/24.71 w 04/98
5-5
Chapter 5
5.1.10. Solartron
Density gm/cc
Solartron density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a
Solartron frequency densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure
corrections as detailed below.
Uncompensated Density
2
D = K0 + (K1 x t) + (K2 * t )
Where:
t = Densitometer oscillation time period in microseconds.
K0, K1, K2 = Calibration constants supplied by Solartron.
Temperature Compensated Density

Dt = D x (1 + K18 x (Tf - 68)) + K19 x (Tf - 68)
Where:
Tf = Temperature in degrees F
K18, K19 = Calibration constants supplied by Solartron.
Temperature & Pressure Compensated Density

Dpt = Dt x (1 + K20 x P) + (K21 x P)
Where:
Pf = Flowing pressure in PSIG
K20 = K20A + K20B x P
K21 = K21A + K21B x P
K20A, K20B, K21A & K21B are calibration constants supplied by Solartron.
Additional Equation for Velocity of Sound Effects (Solartron

Only)
For LPG Products in the range of 0.350 - 0.550 gr/cc the following term can be
applied to the temperature and pressure compensated density Dtp.
Dvos = Dpt + Kr (Dpt - Kj)
Users wishing to implement the above term are advised to contact Solartron
to obtain a reworked calibration sheet containing the coefficients 'Kr' and 'Kj'.
(Typically, Kr = 1.1 and Kj = 0.5)
User not wishing to implement the above term should enter 0.0 for Kr.
5-6
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
5.1.11. Sarasota Density gm/cc

Sarasota density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a
Sarasota densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as
shown below.
Corrected Density = DCF x d0'(t -t0') / t0' [2 + K (t-t0') / t0']
Where:
t0 = A calibration constant in microseconds
t0' = Tcoef x (Tf - Tcal) + Pcoef x (Pf - Pcal) + t0
DCF = Density correction factor
do = A calibration constant, mass/volume*
t = The densitometer oscillation period in microseconds
K = Spool calibration constant
Tf = Flowing temperature OF
Tcoef = Temperature coefficient , microseconds / OF
Pf = Flowing pressure in psig
Pcoef = Pressure coefficient in microseconds / psig
Pcal = Calibration pressure in psig
* Note: d0' must be expressed in the units of gm/cc
20/24.71 w 04/98
5-7
Chapter 5
5.1.12. UGC Density gm/cc

UGC density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a UGC
densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as shown
below.
2
Uncorrected density = K0 + (K1 x t) + (K2 x t )

2
Corrected Density = DCF x (Kp3D + Kp2D + Kp1) (Pf - Pc) + (Kt3D + Kt2D + Kt1)
x (Tf - T) + Density)
Where: K0, K1, K2 = Calibration constants of density probe which are entered
via the keypad
D = Uncorrected density gm/cc
t = Densitometer oscillation time period in microseconds
Pf = Flowing Pressure in psig
Kt1,2,3 = Temperature constants
Kp1,2,3 = Pressure constants
Tf = Flowing temperature in Deg.F
T =Calibration temperature in Deg.F
Pc = Calibration pressure Psig
5.1.13. Densitometer Calibration Constants

In many cases the densitometer constants supplied by the manufacturers are
based on SI or Metric units. You must ensure that the constants entered are
based on gr/cc, degrees Fahrenheit and PSIG. Contact the densitometer
manufacture or Omni if you require assistance.
5.1.14. Linearzing Coefficients

for Helical Turbine Meters:
LCF = a + b/x + c/x^2 + d/x^3 + e/x^4 + f/x^5 + g/x^6
for PD Meters:
LCF = a + (x^c)/b
Where x = Flowrate Q/ Viscosity u
= (Bbl/hr) / Centistokes
5-8
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
5.2.
Flow Equations and Algorithms for

Revision 24 (Metric Units)
The calculations performed for liquid flows are as follows:
5.2.1.
Flowrate At Flowing Conditions: m3/hr

3
Gross Flowrate = Total Pulses/Second / Nominal K-Factor (Pulses / m ) * 3600
5.2.2.
Net Flowrate At Base Conditions: Nm3/hr (Except

Propylene)
Net Flowrate = Gross Flowrate x VCF x CPL x MF
5.2.3.
Mass Flowrate: ton/hr (Except Propylene)
Mass Flowrate = Gross Flowrate x Flowing Density x MF / 1000

If no Live Density is applied:
Mass Flowrate = Net Flowrate x Density @15OC and equilibrium pressure /
1000
5.2.4.
Equivalencies
Where:
MF = Meter Factor is entered from keypad, downloaded from SCADA or other
remote device, or automatically changed by a sequence of proves
VCF = Volume Correction Factor (ASTM D1250)
= Exp (-Alpha T x Delta T x (1+.8 x Alpha T x Delta T))
Delta T = T Actual - T Reference
Alpha T = Correction of expansion at reference temperature
= [K0 + (K1 x Rhot)] / Rhot
When the product is between the jet group and the gasoline group:
Alpha T = A + B / Rhot
Where:
K0 and K1 are physical constants derived from mathematical data published by
the American Petroleum Institute in the API Manual of Petroleum Measurement
Standards and are as follows:
20/24.71 w 04/98
5-9
Chapter 5
5.2.5.
Calculations For Liquid Flows When Mass Pulses

is Selected
Gross Flowrate (m 3 / hr) =
Mass Pulses
x 3600
Density x Meter Factor
Mass Flowrate (m 3 / hr) =
Mass Pulses
x 3600
K Factor
Mass Pulses
x VCF x CPL x 3600
Density
Net Flowrate (m 3 / hr) =

where:
K Factor = Pulses/kg
Table 54A
Product Type: Crude Oil

3
Density: 610.5 to 1075 kg/m

K0 = 613.9723 K1 = 0.0
Table 54B,
Product Type: Fuel Oil

3
Density: 839 to 1075 kg/m
K0 = 186.9696 K1 = 0.4862
Table 54B
Product Type: Jet Group

3
Density: 788 to 838.5 kg/m

K0 = 594.5418 K1 = 0.0
Table 54B
Product Type: Gasolines

3
Density: 653 to 771 kg/m
K0 = 346.4228 K1 = .4388
Table 54B
Product Type: Between Jet and Gasoline

3
Density: 770.5 to 787.5 kg/m

A = -0.00336312
B = 2680.3206
F = Compressibility factor for hydrocarbon using API Chapter 11.2.1M for

3
Crude Oil (638 to 1075 kg/m density, -30OC to 90OC), using API Chapter
3
11.2.2M for Hydrocarbon Products (350-637 kg/m density, -46OC to
O
60 C).
5-10
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

CPL = Correction for pressure on liquid
= 1 / 1 - (P - Pe) x F
P = Flowing pressure in kpa g
Pe = Equilibrium vapor pressure which is calculated from the correlations
developed by Dr. R. W. Hankinson et al of Phillips Petroleum Company
for member companies of the GPA and published as GPA Technical
Publication No. 15.
3
Temperature Range: -46OC to 60OC. Density Range: 490 to 676 kg/m
For Propylene:
Net Flowrate = Gross Flowrate x CCF x MF
Mass Flowrate = Gross Flowrate x MF x Flowing Density (kg/m3)
where:
CCF = Ratio of Calculated Flowing Density to Density at 15 deg.C and
Saturation Pressure.
Calculated Flowing Density = Density at Flowing Temperature and Pressure
Calculated using API Chapter 11.3.3.2*
* Calculated using US unit algorithm with input and output variables converted using
appropriate conversion factors.
5.2.6.
Density of Ethane/Propane C3+ Mixes
Density at Flowing Temperature and Pressure is calculated based on a

computer algorithm developed by Phillips Petroleum Aug. 1992. The algorithm
was based on data points published in GPA TP1, TP2 and TP15 publications.
5.2.7.
Density and other physical properties of Ethylene

(IUPAC)
The physical properties of Ethylene calculated are: density, viscosity and

isentropic exponent at flowing temperature and pressure. These are calculated
using equations based on the International Union of Pure and Applied
Chemistry Ethylene Tables (IUPAC).
Density of Ethylene (NIST)

Ethylene density is calculated using NIST 1045 standard (formerly NBS 1045)
Density of Ethylene (API)

Ethylene density is calculated using the API 11.3.2.1* (formerly API 2565). This
is the unmodified original standard.
* Calculated using US unit algorithm with input and output variables converted using
appropriate conversion factors.
20/24.71 w 04/98
5-11
Chapter 5
5.2.8.
Prove Gross Flowrate (Uni- and Bi-Directional)

3
= Total (Pulses/Second) / (Pulses/m ) * 3600
5.2.9.
Prove Gross Flowrate (Compact)

= (Prover Volume/ Tdvol) * 3600
5.2.10. Prove Meter Factor

= (PV x CTSP x CPSP x CTLP x CPLP) / [(Prove Pulses/K) x CTLM x CPLM]
5.2.11. Equivalencies
Where:
PV = Base prover volume at 15OC and 0 kpa
CTSP = Correction for temperature on steel
For Uni- or Bi-Directional Prover

= 1 + ( T - Tbase) tc
tc = Coefficient of cubical expansion per OC of the prover tube
T = The average prover temperature in OC
Tbase = User entry
For Compact Prover

= [1 + ( T - Tbase) tcp] x [1 + (Ti - Tbase) tci]
tcp = Square Coefficient of expansion per OC of the prover tube
tci = Linear Coefficient of expansion per OC of the prover switch rod
CPSP = Correction for pressure on steel
= 1 + ((P - Pbase x D) / (E x t))
P = Internal pressure in kpa
D = Internal diameter in centimeters
E = Modulus of elasticity for prover tube
t = Wall thickness of prover tube in centimeters
CTLP = Correction for the effect of prove temperature
= CTL, where T actual is replaced by average temperature at prover during
a prove
CPLP = Correction for the effect of prover pressure
= CPL, where P is replaced by average pressure at prover during a prove
5-12
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3

CTLM = Volume correction factor of meter temperature
= CTL, where T actual is replaced by average temperature at meter during
a prove
CPLM = Correction for the effect of meter pressure
= CPL, where P is replaced by average pressure at meter during a prove
When Using Pulse Interpolation Method

Interpolated Counts = Integer Counts (Tdvol / Tdfmp)
When Proving Propylene Product

CPLM and CPLP are set to 1.0000
CTLM and CTLP are set equal to CCFM and CCFP
CCF = Ratio of Density at Flowing Conditions to Density at Reference
Conditions as per API Chapter 11.3.3.2*
* Note: API Chapter 11.3.3.2 requires input variables to be US units of measure and
provides flowing density in US units. The Omni converts metric units to and from US units
and uses the algorithm as is.
When Proving Ethylene Product

All liquid correction factors are set to 1.0000. Meter Factors are calculated
based on mass flow at the meter verses ethylene mass in the prover.
5.2.12. Proving with Mass Pulses

MFm =
BPV x C TSP x CPSP x Avg Density x DF

Pulses / K Factor
where:
BPV = Base Prover Volume
Avg Density = Average Density during each run
DF = Density Factor for the Densitometer
5.2.13. If no Prover Densitometer is used:

Prover Density = Meter Density x
C TLP x C PLP
C TLM x C PLM
5.2.14. PID Control

Primary Variable error % ep
20/24.71 w 04/98
ep = Primary Setpoint % Span - Primary Variable % Span

Action
Forward
ep = Primary Variable % Span - Primary Setpoint % Span

Action
Reverse
5-13
Chapter 5

Secondary Variable error % es
es = Sec Gain * (Sec Setpoint % Span - Sec Variable % Span) Forward Action
es = Sec Gain * (Sec Variable % Span - Sec Setpoint % Span) Reverse Action
Control Output % C0 (Before Startup Limit Function)
C0 = Primary Gain * (ep + e) Controlling on Primary Variable
C0 = Primary Gain * (es + e) Controlling on Secondary Variable
Integral Error e
e = (Rpts/minp * Sample period * ep) + e n-1 Controlling on Primary Variable
e = (Rpts/mins * Sample period * es) + e n-1 Controlling on Secondary Variable
5-14
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
5.2.15. Solartron
Density kg/m3
Solartron density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a
Solartron frequency densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure
corrections as detailed below.
Uncompensated Density
2
D = K0 + (K1 x t) + (K2 * t )
Where:
t = Densitometer oscillation time period in microseconds.
K0, K1, K2 = Calibration constants supplied by Solartron.
Temperature Compensated Density

Dt = D x (1 + K18 x (Tf - 20)) + K19 x (Tf - 20)
Where:
Tf = Temperature in degrees C
K18, K19 = Calibration constants supplied by Solartron.
Temperature & Pressure Compensated Density

Dpt = Dt x (1 + K20 x P) + (K21 x P)
Where:
Pf = Flowing pressure in kpa.g
K20 = K20A + K20B x P
K21 = K21A + K21B x P
K20A, K20B, K21A & K21B are calibration constants supplied by Solartron. These
are usually based on Bar pressure units. They must be converted to kpa
based pressure units.
Additional Equation for Velocity of Sound Effects (Solartron Only)

For LPG Products in the range of 350 - 550 kg/m3 the following term can be
applied to the temperature and pressure compensated density Dtp.
Dvos = Dpt + Kr (Dpt - Kj)
Users wishing to implement the above term are advised to contact Solartron
to obtain a reworked calibration sheet containing the coefficients ' Kr' and ' Kj'.
(Typically, Kr = 1.1 and Kj = 500.)
Users not wishing to implement the above term should enter 0.0 for Kr.
20/24.71 w 04/98
5-15
Chapter 5
5.2.16. Sarasota Density kg/m3

Sarasota density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a
Sarasota densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as
shown below.
Corrected Density = DCF x d0'(t -t0') / t0' [2 + K (t-t0') / t0']
Where:
t0 = A calibration constant in microseconds
t0' = Tcoef x (Tf - Tcal) + Pcoef x (Pf - Pcal) + t0
do = A calibration constant, mass/volume*
t = The densitometer oscillation period in microseconds
K = Spool calibration constant
Tf = Flowing temperature OC
Tcoef = Temperature coefficient , microseconds / OC
Pf = Flowing pressure in kpa.g
Pcoef = Pressure coefficient in microseconds / kpa.g
Pcal = Calibration pressure in kpa.g
3
* Note: do' must be expressed in the units of kg/m
5-16
20/24.71 w 04/98
Volume 3
5.2.17. UGC Density kg/m3

UGC Density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a UGC
densitometer and applying temperature and pressure corrections as shown
below.
2
Uncorrected density = K0 + (K1 x t) + (K2 x t )

2
Corrected Density = DCF x (Kp3D + Kp2D + Kp1) (Pf - Pc) + (Kt3D + Kt2D + Kt1)
x (Tf - T) + Density)
Where: K0, K1, K2 = Calibration constants of density probe which are entered
via the keypad
3
D = Uncorrected density kg/m
t = Densitometer oscillation time period in microseconds

Pf = Flowing Pressure in kpa.g
Kt1,2,3 = Temperature constants
Kp1,2,3 = Pressure constants
Tf = Flowing temperature in Deg.C
T =Calibration temperature in Deg.C
Pc = Calibration pressure kpa.g
5.2.18. Densitometer Calibration Constants

In many cases the densitometer constants supplied by the manufacturers are
based on SI or Metric units. You must ensure that the constants entered are
3
based on kg/m , degrees Celsius and kpagauge. Contact the densitometer
manufacture or Omni if you require assistance.
20/24.71 w 04/98
5-17

Modbus
Database Addresses and Index Numbers
Volume 4
MODBUS DATABASE ADDRESSES

AND INDEX NUMBERS
1. User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001 - 2999)........................................ 1-1
1.1. Custom Data Packets or Modicon G51 Compatible Register Arrays...............1-1
1.2. Archive Control Flags.............................................................................................1-1
1.3. Status / Command Data..........................................................................................1-2
1.3.1. Reading and Writing the Physical Digital I/O....................................................... 1-2
1.3.2. Programmable Booleans....................................................................................... 1-2
1.3.3. Programmable Accumulator Points ..................................................................... 1-2
1.3.4. Meter Run Status and Alarm Points ..................................................................... 1-3
1.3.5. Micro Motion
Alarm Status Points ..................................................................... 1-5
1.3.6. More Meter Run Status and Alarm Points ............................................................ 1-6
1.3.7. User Scratch Pad Boolean Points ........................................................................ 1-6
1.3.8. User Scratch Pad One-Shot Boolean Points........................................................ 1-6
1.3.9. Command Boolean Points/Variables.................................................................... 1-7
1.3.10. Meter Station Alarm and Status Points ............................................................ 1-10
1.3.11. Prover Alarm and Status Points ....................................................................... 1-14
1.3.12. Meter Totalizer Roll-over Flags......................................................................... 1-16
1.3.13. Miscellaneous Meter Station Alarm and Status Points ................................... 1-17
1.3.14. Commands Which Cause Custom Data Packets to be Transmitted Without a
Poll...................................................................................................................... 1-18
1.3.15. Commands Needed To Accomplish a Redundant Flow Computer System ... 1-18
1.3.16. Commands to Recalculate and Print Selected Batch ...................................... 1-19
1.3.17. Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags ...................................................................... 1-19
20/24.71+ w 04/98
1.3.18. Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags ..................................................... 1-20

1.3.19. Status Booleans Relating to Redundant Flow Computer Systems................. 1-21
1.3.20. More Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags ............................................ 1-21
2. 16-Bit Integer Data (3001 - 3999) ............................................................................. 2-1

2.1. Custom Data Packet Definition Variables............................................................. 2-1
2.1.1. Custom Data Packet #1..........................................................................................2-1
2.2. Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data......................................................................... 2-2

2.3. Meter Run 16-Bit Integer Data ............................................................................... 2-2
2.4. Scratchpad 16-Bit Integer Data ............................................................................. 2-4
2.5. User Display Definition Variables.......................................................................... 2-4
2.5.1. User Display Number 1 ..........................................................................................2-4
2.6. Data Used to Access the Raw Data Archive Records.......................................... 2-6
2.7. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data ............................................................... 2-8
2.8. Meter Station 16-Bit Integer Data .......................................................................... 2-8
2.9. Batch Stack Storage of Product Numbers to Run ............................................. 2-10
2.9.1. Meter #1 Batch Sequence .................................................................................... 2-10
2.10. Flow Computer Time and Date Variables ......................................................... 2-11

2.11. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data ........................................................... 2-12
2.12. Prover 16-Bit Integer Data ................................................................................. 2-12
3. 8-Character ASCII String Data (4001 - 4999) ............................................................ 3-1

3.1. Meter Run ASCII String Data.................................................................................. 3-1
3.2. Scratch Pad ASCII String Data .............................................................................. 3-2
3.3. User Display Definition String Variables............................................................... 3-2
3.4. String Variables Associated with the Station Auxiliary Inputs ............................ 3-3
ii
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Volume 4
Modbus
3.5. Meter Station 8-Character ASCII String Data ........................................................3-3

3.5.1. Meter #1 Batch ID................................................................................................... 3-5
3.5.2. Meter #2 Batch ID................................................................................................... 3-5
3.5.3. Meter #3 Batch ID................................................................................................... 3-5
3.5.4. Meter #4 Batch ID................................................................................................... 3-6
3.6. Prover ASCII String Data ........................................................................................3-6
4. 32-Bit Integer Data (5001 - 5999) .............................................................................. 4-1

4.1. Meter Run 32-Bit Integer Data................................................................................4-1
4.2. Scratch Pad 32-Bit Integer Data ............................................................................4-4
4.3. Station 32-Bit Integer Data ....................................................................................4-5
4.4. More Meter Run 32-Bit Integer Data ......................................................................4-6
4.4.1. Meter #1 Batch Size ............................................................................................... 4-6
4.4.2. Meter #2 Batch Size ............................................................................................... 4-6
4.4.3. Meter #3 Batch Size ............................................................................................... 4-6
4.4.4. Meter #4 Batch Size ............................................................................................... 4-6
4.5. Prover 32-Bit Integer Data......................................................................................4-9

4.5.1. Compact Prover TDVOL and TDFMP Pulses ..................................................... 4-10
5. 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (6001 - 8999)......................................................... 5-1

5.1. Digital-to-Analog Outputs 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data..................................5-1
5.2. User Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data....................................................5-2
5.3. Programmable Accumulator 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Variables .....................5-2
5.4. Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ...........................................................5-3
5.5. Scratch Pad 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data........................................................5-6
5.6. PID Control 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data .........................................................5-7
5.7. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ..................................5-8
5.8. Miscellaneous Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data..................................5-10
5.9. Meter Station 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ....................................................5-11
5.10. Prover Data - IEEE Floating Point......................................................................5-15
5.10.1. Configuration Data for Prover........................................................................... 5-15
5.10.2. Last Prove Data.................................................................................................. 5-17
5.10.3. Data Rejected During Prove.............................................................................. 5-17
5.10.4. Prove Run Data.................................................................................................. 5-18
5.10.5. Prove Average Data ........................................................................................... 5-19
5.10.6. Prove Run - Master Meter Data ......................................................................... 5-20
5.10.7. Proving Series Data........................................................................................... 5-21
5.10.8. Data of Meter Being Proved .............................................................................. 5-22
20/24.71+ w 04/98
iii
5.10.9. Mass Prove Data................................................................................................. 5-22
5.11. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data.............................. 5-24
5.11.1. Previous Batch Average .................................................................................... 5-24
5.11.2. Previous Hours Average ................................................................................... 5-25
5.11.3. Previous Days Average..................................................................................... 5-25
5.11.4. Statistical Moving Window Averages of Transducer Inputs............................ 5-26
5.11.5. Miscellaneous In Progress Averages................................................................ 5-26
5.11.6. Previous Batch and Daily Average Data ........................................................... 5-26
5.11.7. More Miscellaneous In Progress Averages ...................................................... 5-27
5.11.8. Previous Batch Quantities................................................................................. 5-27
5.11.9. Miscellaneous Live or Calculated Data............................................................. 5-28
5.11.10. Station - Previous Batch Average Data........................................................... 5-28
6. ASCII Text Data Buffers (9001 - 9499) ..................................................................... 6-1

6.1. Custom Report Templates ..................................................................................... 6-1
6.2. Previous Batch Reports......................................................................................... 6-1
6.3. Previous Prove Reports......................................................................................... 6-2
6.4. Previous Daily Reports .......................................................................................... 6-2
6.5. Last Snapshot Report ............................................................................................ 6-2
6.6. Miscellaneous Report Buffer ................................................................................. 6-3
7. Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001 - 18999) .............................................. 7-1

7.1. Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data ............................................... 7-1
7.1.1. Meter Run Configuration Data...............................................................................7-1
7.1.2. Prover Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data .............................................................7-3
7.1.3. General Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data.................................7-4
7.1.4. Serial Port Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data.......................................................7-4
7.1.5. Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data ...........7-6
7.1.6. Programmable Logic Controller Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data....................7-7
7.1.7. Peer-to-Peer Setup Entries 16-Bit Integer Data ....................................................7-9
7.1.8. Raw Data Archive Files 16-Bit Integer Data ........................................................ 7-14
7.2. Flow Computer Configuration 16-Character ASCII String Data ........................ 7-17
7.3. Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit Long Integer Data ................................... 7-19
7.4. Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ........................ 7-27
iv
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
1. User-Defined, Status and Command Data

(0001 - 2999)
1.1.
INFO - This data is accessed
using Modbus function code
03 for reads and 16 for
writes. Boolean data bits are
packed 8 to a byte.
Custom Data Packets or Modicon G51

Compatible Register Arrays
These three addresses specify reserved areas used to access user defined
groups of data variables. Data can be accessed as read only blocks of data or
the data is arranged as an array of adjacent 16-bit registers which can be read
or written independently, if the Modicon Compatible mode is selected when
setting up the serial port.
0001
Custom Data Packet / Array #1

Maximum 250 bytes using Modbus RTU mode (for Packet/Array definition see Index
3001-3040).
0201

Maximum 250 bytes using Modbus RTU mode(for Packet/Array definition see Index
3041-3056).
0401

Maximum 250 bytes using Modbus RTU mode(for Packet/Array definition see Indices
3057-3096).
1.2.
Archive Control Flags
Data to be added into the Text Archive RAM is flagged by embedding Boolean
Point 1000 or 2000 within the appropriate custom report immediately preceding
the data to be archived. You may enable or disable the archiving of data by
resetting or setting this variable.
1000
Archive Control Flag

Report data following flag will be archived not printed.
2000
Archive Control Flag

Report data following flag is printed and archived.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
1-1
Chapter 1
User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001- 2999)
1.3.
1.3.1.
IMPORTANT
Never set a physical I/O point

which has been assigned as
an input as this could cause
a DC voltage to appear on
the input terminals of that
point which may conflict with
any voltage already present
on those terminals.
Status / Command Data

Reading and Writing the Physical Digital I/O
The current status of physical Digital I/O Points 01 through 12 (Omni 3000) or
01 though 24 (Omni 6000) can be accessed by reading Modbus Indexes 1001
through 1024.
All points which are to be written to exclusively via the Modbus must first have
the point assigned to Modbus control by entering zero (0) for 'Digital Point
Assign' (see Chapter 9). Assigning to '0' prevents the Omni application software
from overwriting the Modbus write.
1001
Digital I/O Point #1
to
1024
1.3.2.
reading.
Digital I/O Point #24
Programmable Booleans
Points 1025 through 1088 are updated every 100 msec with the current value of
the programmable Boolean statements (see Chapter 10). You may read from
or write to these variables, but anything that you write may be overwritten by the
flow computer depending upon the logic functions programmed into the logic
statement.
1025
Boolean Point #25
to
1088
1.3.3.
Boolean Point #88
Programmable Accumulator Points
Points 1089 through 1099 are paired with Floating Point Variables 7089 through
7099. For example, numeric data placed in 7089 can be output as pulses by
assigning a Digital I/O Point to 1089.
1089
Programmable Accumulator #1
Used to pulse out data placed into 7089.
to
1099

Used to pulse out data placed into 7099.
1-2
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
1.3.4.
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
Note:
* Used to assign
accumulator to the front
panel counters or digital
I/O points)
Meter Run Status and Alarm Points
example: Point 1105 is the Meter Active Flag for Meter Run #1. Point 1405
would be the Meter Active Flag for Meter Run #4.
*
1n01
Pulses - Gross Indicated Volume
1n02
Pulses - Net Volume (GSV)
1n03
Pulses - Mass
1n04
Pulses - Net Standard Volume

S&W corrected GSV.
1n05
Meter Run Active Flag

Flow pulses above threshold frequency.
1n06
Meter Being Proved

Activates during proving of this meter.
1n07

Clears if acknowledged.
1n08

Toggle ON/OFF.
1n09
Auto Prove Problem

Ten consecutive attempts to auto-prove have failed.
1n10
Batch Preset Reached

Batch total equal or exceeds the batch preset.
1n11

Batch total is within X volume or mass units of the batch preset (X is stored at 5n38).
1n12

500 msec pulse.
1n13
Calculation Alarm
Usually temperature, pressure or density is outside of the range of the algorithm selected.
1n14
Override In Use - Density Pressure

Override in use for any reason.
1n15
Auto Prove Flag

Indicates that flowmeter n will be automatically proved based on changes in flow rate or
meter run time, etc. It is cleared if prove sequence is completed or prove is aborted.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
1n16
Override In Use - Temperature
1n17
Override In Use - Pressure
1n18
Override In Use - Gravity/Density Transducer
1n19
Override In Use - Density Temperature
1-3
Chapter 1

1n20

reading.
INFO - Transducer and flow

rate alarms remain set while
the alarm condition exists.

For points 1n20-1n23, flow rate units are either gross volume or mass units (depending
on which unit is selected) for all products.
1n21
1n22
1n23
1n24
Meter Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
1n25
Meter Temperature - Low Alarm
1n26
Meter Temperature - High Alarm
1n27
Meter Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n28
Meter Pressure - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
1n29
Meter Pressure - Low Alarm
1n30
Meter Pressure - High Alarm
1n31
Meter Pressure - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n32
Gravity/Density - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
1n33
Gravity/Density - Low alarm
1n34
Gravity/Density - High Alarm
1n35
Gravity/Density - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n36
Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
1n37
Density Temperature - Low Alarm
1n38
Density Temperature - High Alarm
1n39
Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n40
Spare
to
1n43
Spare
1n44
1n45
Density Pressure - Low Alarm
1n46
Density Pressure - High Alarm
1n47
1n48
Turbine - Meter Comparitor Alarm

Only when dual pulse fidelity check enabled.
1n49
Turbine - Channel A Failed

Total absence of pulses on Channel A.
1n50
Turbine - Channel B Failed

Total absence of pulses on Channel B.
1n51
Turbine - Difference Detected Between A & B Channel

Missing or added pulses.
1-4
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
1n52
Spare
1n53
Spare
1n54

Clears only if acknowledged and alarm condition is cleared.
1n55
Pulses for 500 msec when Meter Active (1n05) goes false.
1n56
1n58
Meter Not Active / Batch Suspended

True when batch is in progress but Meter Active (1n05) is false.
1.3.5.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Batch Start Acknowledge

Pulses for 500 msec when 1727-1730 command is received.
1n59
Micro Motion
- Data
obtained via RS-485 link with
Micro Motion device.
Batch in Progress Flag

Set when flow occurs at start of batch. Reset at batch end command.
1n57
number of the meter run.
Meter Off-line Flag
Spare
Micro Motion
Alarm Status Points
The following Micro Motion Alarm points can be accessed from the RFT via
Modbus and placed in the Micro Motion Alarm Word as the destination address
3n18 in the flow computer, to log the alarm points. The alarms will be logged
into the computer alarm log and will be displayed on the LCD when they occur.
1n60
Micro Motion - EPROM Checksum Failure
1n61
Micro Motion - Transmitter Configuration Change Made
1n62
Micro Motion - Sensor Failure
1n63
Micro Motion - Temperature Sensor Failure
1n64
Micro Motion - Input Over-ranged
1n65
Micro Motion - Frequency Output Over-ranged
1n66
Micro Motion - Transmitter Not Configured
1n67
Micro Motion - Real Time Interrupt Failure
1n68
Micro Motion - mA Output Saturated
1n69
Micro Motion - mA Output Fixed
1n70
Micro Motion - Density Out of Limits
1n71
Micro Motion - Zeroing Operation Failure
1n72
Micro Motion - Transmitter Electronics Failure
1n73
Micro Motion - Slug Flow Detected
1n74
Micro Motion - Self-calibration In Progress
1n75
Micro Motion - Power Reset Occurred
1-5
Chapter 1
1.3.6.
Note: See 2n00 area for
even more meter run alarms
and status points.
1n76
More Meter Run Status and Alarm Points

Batch Re-calculation Acknowledge Flag
Pulses for 500 msec when 1756 command received.
1n77
Correctable Totalizer Error Occurred

Primary totalizer checksum error secondary totalizer checksum OK.
1n78
Non-correctable Totalizer Error

Primary and secondary totalizers reset to zero because both checksums incorrect.
1n79
Spare
to
1n99
1.3.7.
Spare
User Scratch Pad Boolean Points
There are two groups of user scratchpad flags which can be used to store the
results of Boolean statements or to group data to be transmitted or received
over a Modbus data link.
1501
Scratchpad - Point 01
to
1599
1600
Reserved
DO NOT USE!
1601
to
1649
1.3.8.
User Scratch Pad One-Shot Boolean Points
Many times it is necessary to send a command which momentarily turns on a

Boolean point. The following one-shot Boolean points simplify this action. They
remain activated for exactly 2 seconds after they have been written to.
1650
Scratchpad One-Shot - Point 01
to
1699
1-6
Scratchpad One-Shot - Point 50
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
1.3.9.
Turbine/Positive
are considered.

commands are 'edge
triggered'.
Command Boolean Points/Variables
Unless indicated as being Level Sensitive, most commands are 'edge

triggered'. To activate a command simply write a '1' (1 = True) to that point. It is
not necessary to write a '0' (0 = False) after the command. The status of a
command may also be read or used as input in a Boolean or variable
statement.
1700
Dummy
Used only to reserve a digital I/O point to be used as an input. Point 1700 can be
assigned to as many I/O points as needed.
1701
Prover Seal is OK
Must be true when sphere is between detectors.
1702
End Batch - Station

End batch on all meter runs defined in station.
Hardware Interaction Unreliable operation will

result if a command which
has been assigned to a
digital I/O point directly also
needs to be activated via a
Modbus write. This is
because the On/Off state of
the digital I/O point overwrites
the command point every 100
msec and most command
point actions are only
triggered every 500 msec.
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
Station - Change Product Strobe
Points 1703-1706 individual end batch commands always work.
Rising edge triggers batch end and change to product selected by 1743-1746. Used with
Station Product ID Bit 0-3 (1820-1823).
1708

Edge triggered.

rd
1709
1710
1711
1712
Station Alarm Acknowledge

Acknowledges all alarms.
1713
Reset Power Failed Flag

See power fail Flag 1829.
1714

Edge triggered.
1715
1716
1717
1718
Abort the Prove in Progress
1719
Request Local Snapshot Report

Printed on local printer connected to flow computer.
1720
Snapshot Report to Modbus Buffer

Move Snapshot Report to buffer located at 9402.
1721
Alarm Report to Modbus Buffer

Move Alarm Report to buffer located at 9402.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
1-7
Chapter 1

#

commands are 'edge
1722
Points 1722-1725 enable PID startup and shutdown ramping for the respective meter
(see 1752-1755). Level sensitive.
1723
1724
1725
1726
Prover Start Permissive

Checked after temperature and flow are stable. Indicates that the meter divert valves are
lined up. Enables prover sequencing when set.
1727

st
nd
Initiates PID start up sequence by activating 1 and 2 PID Permissive (see 1n57 for
acknowledge pulse). These commands are edge triggered, simply turn on.
Note:
These points are

defaulted to active and
need not be manipulated
unless the application
requires it.
1728
1729
1730
1731
Compact Prover Piston Downstream

Applies only to Brooks SVP, must be false before the piston can be re-launched.
1732

Points 1732-1735 are meter run specific alarms only.
1733
1734
1735
Note:
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
Spare
1741
Remote Up Arrow Key
These points also affect

station totalizing (see also
point 1761). Level
sensitive.
1742
Remote Down Arrow Key

1743

Points 1743-1746 represent the product number to change to as offset binary; i.e., 0000 =
product #1. 1111=product #16 (see 1707, 1747-1750).
1744
1-8
1745
1746
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
1747
Turbine/Positive
are considered.

For points 1747-1750, rising edge triggers a batch end and a change to the product
specified by points 1743-1746.
1748
1749
1750
1751
Freeze Analog Inputs

Used when calibrating analog inputs. Freezes ALL analogs. Level sensitive.
1752

Points 1752-1755 limit the PID ramp-down to the minimum output % setting (see 17221725). Level sensitive.
1753
1754
1755
1756
Spare
to
1759
Spare
1760
Leak Detection Freeze Command

Stores totalizers, temperatures, pressures and density variables to temporary storage (see
5n66 and 7634). This command is usually broadcast to all RTUs simultaneously.
1761
Disable Flow Totalizing Station

This command has no effect in individual meter run totalizing (see also points 17361739). Level sensitive.
1762

At local printer.
to

rd
1769
1770

At local printer.
to
1777
1778

At local printer.
to
1785
1786
Remote Print - Alarm Report

At local printer.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
1-9
Chapter 1

1787
Implement Last Prove Meter Factor

Causes the meter factor determined at the last complete prove to be implemented and
saved. Edge triggered.
Note: More Command

Boolean Points are located
at address 2701.
1788

st
Points 1788-1791 start ramp-down to top off valve setting by deactivating the 1 PID
permissive. These commands are edge triggered; simply turn on.
commands are 'edge
CAUTION
Stored archive data may be

lost! See chapter on Raw
Data Archive before
manipulating these data
points. These functions are
duplicated using integers at
13920 and 13921.
1789
1790
1791
1792

st
nd
Points 1792-1795 deactivate the 1 and 2 PID permissive, causing the valve to ramp to
the top off setting, and then immediately closes the valve. If the valve is already at the
top off setting, the valve immediately closes.
1793
1794
1795
1796
Raw Data Archive Run

Level sensitive.
1797
Reconfigure Archive
Level sensitive.
1798
Recalculate and Print Selected Batch - Station

The previous batch selected by registered 3879 is recalculated. Edge triggered.
1.3.10. Meter Station Alarm and Status Points

reading.
Note:
Data points not specifically connected to a particular meter run are grouped
here. These include flow computer general system alarms and metering group
*
1801
Positive - Gross Volume Pulses (IV)
1802
Positive - Net Volume Pulses (GSV)
1803
Positive - Mass Pulses
1804
Positive - S&W Corrected Net Volume Pulses (NSV)
1805
Negative - Gross Volume Pulses (IV)
1806
Negative - Net Volume Pulses (GSV)
1807
Negative - Mass Pulses
1808
Negative - S&W Corrected Net Volume Pulses (NSV)
1809
Points 1805-1808 refer to flow which occurs in the reverse direction.
* Used to assign
accumulators to the front
panel electromechanical
counters and digital I/O
points.
For points 1809-1812, flow rate units are gross volume or mass units (depending on
which unit is selected) for all products.
1-10
1810
1811
1812
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
1813
Gravity Rate of Change Flag

Set when rate of change of flowing SG exceeds the setting in 7889.
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
1814
Delayed Gravity Rate of Change

Point 1813 delayed by volume specified in 7890.
1815
Any System Alarm

1816

1817
1818

Station batch total is within X volume or mass units of the batch preset (X is stored at
5815).
1819
Batch Preset Reached Flag

Station batch total equal or exceeds the batch preset
1820

Points 1820-1823 are the offset binary representation of the current running product for
the station (0000=Product #1; 1111=Product #16).
1821
1822
1823
1824

Flags 1824-1826 activate/deactivate depending on the run switching threshold settings
and are based on current station flow rates.
1825
1826
1827

See point 1760.
Note:
1828
Day Start Flag


time.
1829
Power Fail Flag
1830

Reports may be lost if 32K spooling buffer overflows due to the printer being off-line or
jammed with paper.
1831
Hour Start Flag
1832
Week Start Flag

1833
Month Start Flag

1834
Year Start Flag

1835

1836
Snapshot Printed
20/24.71+ w 04/98
1-11
Chapter 1

1837

reading.
EPROM error Flag

1838

1839
Zero Value
Always false.
~ 1840

~ 1841

1842

appropriate transaction. If a slave is involved in multiple transactions which fail, only the
first will be flagged.
to
Notes:
1857
1858
1859
1860
Format: 00:00:00.

maximum number of


1861

st
Format: 00:00:00 Jan 1 .

time.

used to conditionally print
appropriate information
messages on the batch
and daily reports.
1862
Station Density - Transducer Failed Low
1863
Station Density - Low Alarm
1864
Station Density - High Alarm
1865
Station Density - Transducer Failed High
1866
Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low
to
1869
Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High
1870
to
1873
1874
Viscosity Appearing on Report Flag
1875
Net Standard Volumes (NSV) Appearing on Report Flag
1876
Batch Recalculation Acknowledge Flag

Pulses for 500 msec when the 1798 command is received.
1877
1-12
Spare
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
*
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
Note:
>

1878

1879
1880


*> 1881
Liter Units Selected Flag

Set when Liter is the selected volume unit.
*> 1882
Cubic Meter Units Selected Flag

3
Set when m is the selected volume unit.
1883
1884
1885
1886
1887
to
1890
1891
to
1894
1895
to
1898
1899
Net Volume @ 2nd Reference Temperature Appears on Reports Flag

Set when 7699 is assigned a non-zero value. Prints on reports.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
1-13
Chapter 1
1.3.11. Prover Alarm and Status Points

reading.
Alarm and Status points connected with the meter proving system are grouped
here. The second digit 9 defines a prover. See the 1700 area for command
points associated with the prover.
1901
Inlet (Left) Pressure - Transducer Low Alarm
1902
Inlet (Left) Pressure - Transducer High Alarm
1903
Outlet (Right) Pressure - Transducer Low Alarm
1904
Outlet (Right) Pressure - Transducer High Alarm
1905
Inlet (Left) Temperature - Transducer Low Alarm
1906
Inlet (Left) Temperature - Transducer High Alarm
1907
Outlet (Right) Temperature - Transducer Low Alarm
1908
Outlet (Right) Temperature - Transducer High Alarm
Note:
1909
Prove Aborted - Temperature Unstable
# These alarms are active
1910
Prove Aborted - Meter-to-Prover Temperature Deviation Exceeded
until the next prove

sequence is started.
1911
Prove Sequence - Successfully Completed
1912
Prove Sequence Aborted - Did Not Complete
1913
1st Detector Sensed - Sphere in Flight Forward Direction
1914
3rd Detector Sensed - Sphere in Flight Reverse Direction
1915
2nd Detector Sensed - In Over-travel Forward Direction
1916
4th Detector Sensed - In Over-travel Reverse Direction
1917
Launch Sphere - Forward Direction

Two second pulse.
1918
Launch Sphere - Reverse Direction

Two second pulse.
1919
Prove Aborted - Run Repeatability Deviation Limit Exceeded
1920
Prove Aborted - Prover Seal Not OK - Sphere Between Detectors
1921
Prove Aborted - Flowrate was Unstable
1922
Prove Aborted - No Prover Permissive Received
1923
Meter Factor Obtained was Not Implemented
1924
Prove Aborted - Meter Selected was not Flowing
See 1701.
See 1726.
See 1n05.
1925
Plenum - Charge Required

Points 1925 and 1926 refer to Brooks small volume provers only. Plenum pressure can be
automatically adjusted by adding or venting nitrogen.
1926
Plenum - Vent Required
1927
Brooks Small Volume Prover - Run Command Output

Active low output to launch piston.
1928
Prove Sequence - Successfully Completed Flag

500 msec pulse at end of prove.
1-14
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
1929
Using Fixed Override - Prover Inlet (Left) Temperature
1930
Using Fixed Override - Prover Outlet (Right) temperature
1931
Using Fixed Override - Prover Inlet (Left) Pressure
1932
Using Fixed Override - Prover Outlet (Right) Pressure
1933
Mass Prove Flag
1934
Net Prove Flag
1935
Mass Prove Report Flag
1936
Net Prove Report Flag
Note:
1937
Mass Calculation in Use Flag
1938
Meter Factor Repeatability in Use Flag
1939
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
cause data to be
the prover report.
Set when run deviation is based on meter factor.
Count Repeatability in Use Flag

Set when run deviation is based on meter counts.
1940
Prover Density - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
1941
Prover Density - Low Alarm
1942
Prover Density - High Alarm
1943
Prover Density - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1944
Prover Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
to
1947
Prover Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1948
Prover Density Pressure - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
to
1951
Prover Density Pressure - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1952
Spare
to
20/24.71+ w 04/98
1954
Spare
1955
Viscosity Linearization - Proving Mode Selected
1956
Viscosity Linearization - Mode NOT Selected
1957
Spare
1958
Spare
1-15
Chapter 1

*
1959

reading.
1960
1961
1962
1963
1964
Note:
1965
1966
1967

cause data to be
the prover report.
1.3.12. Meter Totalizer Roll-over Flags

conditionally print characters (usually **) in front of the totalizer which has
Template will show how this is accomplished. The second digit of the index
number defines the number of the meter run. See also points at 2801 for station
versions of these flags.
Note: The In Progress flags
are those which the flow
computer uses when printing
the reports on the connected
printer.
another device such as a
1-16
2n01
2n02
Batch In Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n03
2n04
2n05
2n06
2n07
2n08
2n09
2n10
2n11
2n12
2n13
2n14
Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n15
2n16
2n17
2n18
Previous Batch n - Net GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n19
2n20
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
Turbine/Positive
are considered.

2n21
Previous Batch n - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n22
Previous Batch n - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n23
Previous Batch n - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n24
Previous Batch n - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n25
2n26
2n27
2n28
2n29
2n30
2n31
2n32
2n33
Batch In Progress - 2nd Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n34
Daily In Progress - 2nd Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n35
Previous Batch n - 2nd Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n36
Previous Daily - 2nd Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n37
2n37
2n37
2n37

Points
rather than function code 03.
2601
to
2604
2605
Inlet Temperature - Override in Use
2606
Outlet Temperature - Override in Use
2607
Inlet Pressure - Override in Use
2608
Outlet Pressure - Override in Use
2620

2621

True after power up or system reset, clears when reset power fail command is set (1713).
2622

On means that spring adjustment was made. Off means autumn adjustment was made.
2623

0 = Ok; 1 = Fail.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
1-17
Chapter 1

reading.

rd
when communicating via VSAT satellite systems where operating cost is
directly proportional to RF bandwidth used.
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712

the other.
2713

2714

Assigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers master status (see 2864).
2715

2716

1-18
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
1.3.16. Commands to Recalculate and Print Selected

Batch
Turbine/Positive
are considered.


printer.
another device such as an
20/24.71+ w 04/98
2756

When one of the commands 2756-2759 is given, the previous batch selected by 3n51 is
recalculated. Edge triggered.
2757
2758
2759

conditionally print characters (usually ** ) in front of the totalizer which has
Template will show how this is accomplished. See also points at 2n01 for meter
run versions of flags.
2801
2802
Batch In Progress - Net (GSV)) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
2811
2812
2813
2814
Daily In Progress - Cumulative - (GSV) Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2815
2816
2817
2818
Previous Batch n - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2819
2820
1-19
Chapter 1

reading.

2821
2822
Previous - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2823
2824
Previous - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag
2825
2826
2827
2828
2829
2830
2831
2832

2833
Batch In Progress - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag
2834
Daily In Progress - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag
2835
Previous Batch n - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag
2836
Previous Daily - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag
2837
Spare
to
2851
Spare

Note: It is unlikely that the

user would have any use for
these variables.
1-20
2852
2853
2854
2855
2856
2857
2858
2859
2860
2861
2862
Spare
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4

Computer Systems
2863
Watchdog Status Out

Normally High Watchdog. Monitored by other flow computer in a redundant system (see
2713).
2864
Master Status
2714).

Turbine/Positive
are considered.
2865
2866
2867
2868
2869
Spare
to
2999
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Spare
1-21
Modbus
Volume 4
2. 16-Bit Integer Data (3001 - 3999)

2.1.
INFO - These short integers
are accessed using Modbus
function code 03 for reads,
06 for single writes and 16
for multiple register writes.
2.1.1.
Custom Data Packet Definition Variables

Custom Data Packet #1
The 16-bit integers needed to define the 20 groups of data that make up
Custom Data Packet #1 which is accessed at database Index 0001 are listed
below.
3001
Group 1 - Starting Index Point Number
3002
Group 1 - Number of Index Points
to
3039
3040
2.1.2.
The 16-bit integers needed to define the 8 groups of data that make up Custom
Data Packet #2 which is accessed at database Index 0201 are listed below.
3041
3042
to
3055
3056
2.1.3.
below.
3057
3058
to
20/24.71+ w 04/98
3095
3096
2-1
Chapter 2
16-Bit Integer Data (3001- 3999)
2.2.
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
Note:
>

> 3097
Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data

Select Units
0=m3; 1=Liter.
3098
Number of Totalizer Digits

Totalizers roll at: 0=9 digits; 1=8 digits.
3099
Select Batch Preset Unit

0=Net; 1= Gross; 2=Mass.
2.3.
Meter Run 16-Bit Integer Data
example: 3106 is the 'Meter Active Frequency' for Meter Run # 1. The same
point for Meter Run # 4 would be 3406.
3n01
Override Code - Temperature

For points 3n01-3n05: 0=Never use; 1=Always use; 2=Use if transmitter fails; 3=If
transmitter fails use last hours average.
3n02
Override Code - Pressure
3n03
Override Code - Gravity/Density
3n04
Override Code - Density Temperature
3n05
Override Code - Density Pressure
3n06
Active Threshold Hz
Point 1n05 is set when flow pulses exceed this frequency.
3n07
Prover Volume Select

Brooks SVP: 0=Use downstream; 1=Use upstream.
3n08
Auto Prove Enable

0=No auto-prove; 1=Enable auto-prove.
3n09
Spare
3n10
Viscosity Linearized Gross (IV) Volume

0=No; 1=Apply Liquid Correction Factor (LCF).
3n11
Spare
3n12
Spare
3n13
Meter Factor Used in Net and Mass

0=No; 1=Yes.
3n14
Is Meter Already Temperature Compensated?

0=No; 1=Yes.
3n15
Viscosity Correction Polynomial

0=Positive Displacement Meter; 1=Helical Turbine Meter.
3n16
BS&W Source
0=None; 1=Auxiliary #1; 2=Auxiliary #2; 3=Auxiliary #3; 4=Auxiliary #4; 5=Modbus.
2-2
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
3n17
Viscosity Source
0=None; 1=Auxiliary #1; 2=Auxiliary #2; 3=Auxiliary #3; 4=Auxiliary #4; 5=Modbus.
3n18
Micro Motion - Alarm Word

Via RS-485 from device (see also 1n60 -1n75).
3n19
PID Control Mode
3n20
Setpoint Mode
Do not write if 3n20 is 1. 1=Manual; 0=Auto.

Read only. DO NOT WRITE! 1=Local; 0=Remote.
3n21
PID Loop Status

Read only. 1=Secondary; 0=Primary.
3n22
Frequency Point - K Factor #1

For points 3n22-3n33, see the 17500 area for matching K-Factors.
3n23
3n24
3n25
3n26
3n27
3n28
3n29
3n30
3n31
3n32
3n33
3n34
Comparitor Error Threshold

When dual pulse error checking enabled only.
3n35
Notes:
# 2s complement numbers
based on span entries
17176 through 17189.
Values expressed as
percentages of span in
tenth percent increments;.
i.e., 1000 represents
100.0%
* Unsigned integer
totalizers cumulative
based. They roll at 65536.
~ 2s complement numbers
based on the 4-20 mA
spans. Values are
expressed as percentages
of span in tenth percent
increments; i.e., 1000
equals 100.0 %.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Spare
to
3n39
Spare
3n40
Current Net (GSV) Flowrate
3n41
Net (GSV) Totalizer
3n42
Current Gross Flowrate
3n43
Gross Total
3n44
Current Mass Flowrate
3n45
Mass Total
~ 3n46
Current Meter Run Pressure
~ 3n47
Current Meter Run Temperature
~ 3n48
Current Transducer Density/Gravity
3n49
Current S&W Corrected Net (NSV) Flowrate
3n50
S&W Corrected Net (NSV) Total
3n51
Move Previous Batch Number to Print Area
3n52
Number of Calculation Times of Batch Report
2-3
Chapter 2
2.4.
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
Scratchpad 16-Bit Integer Data
Ninety-nine integer registers are provided for user scratch pad. These registers
are typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peer-to-peer
operations or similar operations.
3501
Scratchpad - Short Integer #1
to
3599
2.5.
User Display Definition Variables
The 16-bit integers needed to define the variables that appear in the eight User
Displays are listed below. Look in the 4601 area for string associated with
setting up User Displays.
2.5.1.
User Display Number 1
3601
Database Index Number of 1st Variable
3602
Decimal Places for 1st Variable
3603
Database Index Number of 2nd Variable
3604
Decimal Places for 2nd Variable
3605
Database Index Number of 3rd Variable
3606
Decimal Places for 3rd Variable
3607
Database Index Number of 4th Variable
3608
Decimal Places for 4th Variable
2.5.2.
3609

to
3616
2.5.3.
3617
th
Decimal Places for 4 Variable

to
3624
2-4
th
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
2.5.4.
3625

to
3632
2.5.5.
3633

to
3640
2.5.6.
3641

to
3648
2.5.7.
3649

to
3656
2.5.8.
3657

to
3664
20/24.71+ w 04/98
th
2-5
Chapter 2
2.6.
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
Data Used to Access the Raw Data

Archive Records
See the chapter describing how to use the raw data archiving features of the
flow computer including how to manipulate the pointers below.
3701
Archive 701 - Maximum Records

Number of data records in archive file.
3702
Archive 701 - Current Record Number

Number of the last record updated.
3703
Archive 701 - Request Record Number

Write the number of the record you wish to read.
3704

3705

3706

3707

3708

3709

3710

3711

3712

3713

3714

3715

3716

3717

3718

2-6
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
3719

3720

3721

3722

3723

3724

3725

3726

3727

3728

3729

3730

3731

3732

3733

3734

3735

3736

20/24.71+ w 04/98
2-7
Chapter 2
2.7.
Turbine/Positive
Displacement/Coriolis
Liquid Flow Metering
Systems, with K Factor
Linearization. Both US and
metric unit versions are
considered.
3737
More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data

Archive File System - Memory Allocation Status
0=OK; 1=Allocation Error.
3738
Time Tag
3739
Time Tag
3740
Time Tag
MM/DD or DD/MM format.

YY/HH format
MM/SS format.
3741
New Archive
Bit 0-Bit 9 for files 701-710
Notes:
* Unsigned integer
based. They roll at
65536.
3742
Spare
to
3768
Spare
3769
Number of Historical Alarms to Send to Modbus Buffer
~ To avoid flushing the

audit trail, audit events
other than complete
downloads to the flow
computer are usually not
documented in the audit
trail unless serial port
passwords have been
enabled. If pass-words
are enabled, the target
address is recorded for
single point writes.
Rigorous auditing of a
serial port or group of
serial ports can be
activated by placing the
appropriate hexadecimal
code in 3800 (S = Serial
Port):
00 00 00 AA = Audit S1
00 00 AA 00 = Audit S2
00 AA 00 00 = Audit S3
AA 00 00 00 = Audit S4
To monitor multiple
ports; e.g:
AA 00 AA 00 = Audit S4
& S2
17176 through 17189.
Values expressed as
tenth percent
increments. i.e. 1000
represents 100.0% . No
over range or under
range checking is done.
2-8
The number of historical alarms indicated are written to the Modbus buffer (9402)
3770
Spare
to
3799
2.8.
~
3800
Spare
Meter Station 16-Bit Integer Data

Special Diagnostic Function
Used to enable rigorous Audit Trail reporting of all serial port transactions (see side
bar note).
3801

Common Batch Stack - Station.
3802
Current Net (GSV) Flowrate
3803
Net (GSV) Totalizer
3804
Current Gross (IV)Flowrate
3805
Gross (IV) Totalizer
3806
3807
Mass Totalizer
3808
Current Pressure
3809
Current Temperature
3810
Current Gravity/Density
3811
Allen Bradley - CRC Error Counter
3812
Allen Bradley - Message Type Error Counter
20/24.71+ 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
3813
Algorithm Select - Product #1

Points 3813-3828 select the API, GPA, ASTM, NIST calculations that will be used when
selecting these products.
3814
3815
3816
3817
3818
3819
3820
3821
3822
3823
3824
3825
3826
3827
3828
3829
Flow Average Factor

Number of 500 msec calculation cycles to average.
3830
Print Priority
0=Not sharing a printer; 1=Master; n=slaves 2-12.
3831
Number of Nulls After CR

Used to slow data to a printer if no hardware handshake.
3832
Print Interval in Minutes

Time interval between automatic snapshot reports.
3833
Automatic - Weekly Batch Select

0=None; 1=Monday; 7=Sunday.
3834
Automatic - Monthly Batch Select

st
0=None; 1=1 day of the month.
3835
Automatic - Hourly Batch Select

0=No; 1=Yes.
3836
Default Report Templates

0=Custom templates; 1=Default reports.
3837
Batch Stack Mode Select

0=Independent stacks; 1=Common stack.
3838
Clear Daily @ Batch End Select

0=24hr Totals; 1=Cleared at batch end.
3839
Spare
to
3841
Spare
3842
Select Date Type

Selects date format: 0=dd/mm/yy; 1=mm/dd/yy.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
2-9
Chapter 2
2.9.
20/24.71 - This database
Revision 20/24.71 for
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
The following 24 registers are treated as either one 24-position shift stack or, 4
separate 6-position shift stacks depending upon register 3837. Data in the
stack(s) is shifted automatically at the beginning of a new batch. A new
batch starts after a either a station batch end (1702) or meter batch end (1703
to 1706) command is received and meter pulses occur. Data on the top of a
stack is the current running product for the batch in progress. This entry is
discarded (popped off) and replaced with the entry below on receipt of a batch
end. A batch stack may be stopped from shifting by leaving the second entry
0. Note that these entries are only part of the batch stack. Matching entries for
other data types such as long integers and strings can be found at 5819 and
4852. All three data type stacks act as a single unit, they all synchronize and
shift together.
2.9.1.
Meter #1 Batch Sequence
3843
Sequence #1 - Individual Batch Stack or Common Batch Stack Sequence #1
3844
3845
3846
3847
3848
2.9.2.
2-10
Batch Stack Storage of Product

Numbers to Run
3849
3850
3851
3852
3853
3854
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
2.9.3.
3855
3856
3857
3858
3859
3860
2.9.4.
3861
3862
Sequence #2 - Individual Batch Stack or Common Batch Stack Product #20
3863
3864
3865
3866
2.10. Flow Computer Time and Date Variables

Time and date can be read and written here. See also 4847 and 4848.
3867
Current - Hour
0-23.
3868
Current - Minute
0-59.
3869
Current - Second
0-59.
3870
Current - Month
1-12.
3871
Current - Day of Month

1-31.
3872
Current - Year
0-99; Year 2000=00.
3873
Current - Day of Week

Read only. 1=Monday; 7=Sunday.
3874
Disable Daily Report

0=print daily report; 1=no daily report.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
2-11
Chapter 2
2.11. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data

3875
Spare
3876
Override Code - Density
3877
3878
3879
Move Previous n Batch to Print Area
3880
Density Factor - Select A/B - Product #1
to
3895
Density Factor - Select A/B - Product #16
3896
Spare
to
3899
Spare
2.12. Prover 16-Bit Integer Data

3901
Prove Run
3902
Proving Meter Number
3903
Outlet (Right) - Pressure %

0-999.
3904
Outlet (Right) - Temperature %

0-999.
3905
Inlet (Left) - Pressure %

0-999.
3906
Inlet (Left) - Temperature %

0-999.
3907
Prove Counts
3908
Override Code - Prover Density/Gravity
3909
Override Code - Prover Density Temperature
3910
Override Code - Prover Density Pressure
3911
Enable Trial Prove Report

0=No; 1=Yes.
2-12
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
3912
Number of Passes/Run
3913
Number of Prover Runs to Average

Maximum is 10.
3914
Number of Total Prove Runs
3915
Inactivity Timer
Seconds.
3916
Temperature Stability Sample Time
3917
Override Code - Inlet (Left) Temperature
3918
Override Code - Outlet (Right) Temperature
3919
Override Code - Inlet (Left) Pressure
3920
Override Code - Outlet (Right) Pressure
3921
Uni- or Bi-directional Prover

0=Uni, 1=Bi; 2=Uni-Compact; 3=Bi-SVP; 4=Master Meter Prove; 5=2 Series Bi.
3922
Automatic Implement Prove Meter Factor
3923
Apply Meter Factor Retroactively

0=No; 1=Yes.
3924
Prover Density Stability Timer
3925
Flow Stable Period

Minutes.
3926
Meter Down Period

Hours.
3927
Print Run Passes (Compact Prove)

0=No; 1=Yes.
3928
Run Repeatability on Meter Factor

0=No; 1=Yes.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
3929
Spare
3930
Proved Meter Temperature Compensated
3931
Run # - 4th Last
3932
Run # - 3rd Last
3933
Run # - 2nd Last
3934
Run # - Last
3935
Run # - 1 Run
st
nd
3936
Run # - 2
3937
Run # - 3rd Run
Run
3938
Run # - 4 Run
th
th
3939
Run # -5 Run
3940
Run # - 6th Run
3941
Run # - 7th Run
3942
Run # - 8th Run
3943
Run # - 9 Run
3944
Run # - 10 Run
th
th
2-13
Chapter 2

3945
Current Prove Passes
3946
Spare
to
3999
2-14
Spare
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
3. 8-Character ASCII String Data (4001 - 4999)

3.1.
INFO - These ASCII string
variables are accessed using
Modbus function codes 03
for all reads and 16 for all
writes.
Note: The index number of

each string refers to the
complete string which
occupies the space of 4
registers. It must be
accessed as a complete unit.
You cannot read or write a
partial string. Each point
counts as one point in the
normal Omni Modbus mode.
Meter Run ASCII String Data
example: 4114 is the 'Meter ID' for Meter Run #1. The same point for Meter
Run #4 would be 4414. Each ASCII string is 8 characters occupying the
equivalent of 4 short integer registers (see the side bar comments).
4n01
Running Batch - Start Date
4n02
Running Batch - Start Time
4n03
Batch End - Date
4n04
Batch End - Time
4n05
Running Product Name
4n06
Current - Calculation Mode

Algorithm set used, in string format.
4n07
Current - Batch ID
Characters 1-8.
Modicon Compatible
Mode - For the purpose of
point count only, each string
counts as 4 registers. The
starting address of the string
still applies.
4n08
Current - Batch ID
Characters 9-16.
4n09
Meter Factor Used in Net / Mass

Used on reports. It contains Yes or No. Characters 1-8.
4n10
Linear Correction Factor (LCF) Used in Gross

Characters 1-8
Note:
# Last batch end for this

meter run.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
4n11
Meter - Serial Number
4n12
Meter - Size
4n13
Meter - Model
4n14
Meter - ID
4n15
Flow Meter Tag
4n16
Spare
4n17
Transmitter Tag - Temperature
4n18
Transmitter Tag - Pressure
4n19
Transmitter Tag - Densitometer
4n20
Transmitter Tag - Density Temperature
4n21
Transmitter Tag - Density Pressure
4n22
Output Tag - PID Control
3-1
Chapter 3
8-Character ASCII String Data (4001- 4999)

4n23
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
Spare
to
4n30
Spare
4n31
Previous Batch n - Batch Start Date
4n32
Previous Batch n - Batch Start Time
4n33
Previous Batch n - Batch End date
4n34
Previous Batch n - Batch End Time
4n35
Previous Batch n - Product Name
4n36
Previous Batch n - API Table
4n37
Previous Batch n - Batch ID

Characters 1-8.
4n38
Previous Batch n - Batch ID

Characters 9-16.
4n39
3.2.
Previous Batch n - Meter Factor Used in Net
Scratch Pad ASCII String Data
Storage for ninety-nine ASCII strings is provided for user scratch pad. These
registers are typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peerto-peer operations or similar operations.
4501
Scratchpad - ASCII String #1
to
4599
3.3.
User Display Definition String Variables
The string variables which define the descriptor tags that appear in the eight
User Displays and the key press combinations which recall the displays are
listed below.
INFO - See 3601 area for
more data points needed to
setup the user displays.
4601
User Display #1 - Descriptor Tag - Line #1
4602
4603
4604
4605
to
4632
4633
User Display #1 - Key Press Sequence
to
4640
3-2
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
3.4.
writes.

Modicon Compatible
still applies.
4707
String Variables Associated with the

Station Auxiliary Inputs
Auxiliary Tag - Input #1
to
4710
3.5.
Meter Station 8-Character ASCII String

Data
4801
Station - Batch Start Date
4802
Station - Batch Start Time
4803
Station - Batch End Date
4804
Station - Batch End Time
4805
Station - Running Product Name
4806
Station - Current Calculation Mode
4807
Date of Last Database Change

Updated each time the Audit Trail is updated.
4808
Time of Last Database Change
4809
Reserved
4810
Esc Sequence to Print Condensed

Raw ASCII characters sent to printer (see 14149 for Hex ASCII setup).
4811
Esc Sequence to Print Normal

4812
Daylight Savings Starts

Date format field (**/**/**).
4813
Daylight Savings Ends

4814
Density/Gravity Tag
4815
Station - ID
4816
Station - Density Temperature Tag
4817
Station - Density Pressure Tag
4818
Print Interval Timer Start Time

Time format field (**:**:**).
4819
Time to Print Daily Report

4820
Product #1 - Name
to
4835
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Product #16 - Name
3-3
Chapter 3
20/24.71 - This database
Revision 20/24.71 for
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
4836
Flow Computer ID
4837
Company Name
Characters 1-8.
4838
Company Name
Characters 9-16.
4839
Company Name
Characters 17-24.
4840
Company Name
Characters 25-32.
4841
Company Name
Characters 33-38. (Note: Last two characters are spares.)
4842
Station Location
Characters 1-8.
4843
Station Location
Characters 9-16.
4844
Station Location
Characters 17-24.
4845
Station Location
Characters 25-32.
4846
Station Location
Note:
4847
Current Date
4848
Current Time
Point 3842 selects date format (see also 3870-3872).
* The flow computer time

and date can be set by
writing to these ASCII
variables. Be sure to
include the colons ( : ) in
the time string and the
slashes ( / ) in the date
string.
See also 3867-3869.
4849
Example: 20.71
4850
Online Password / EPROM Checksum

Dual function point. Write password. Read provides EPROM Checksum.
4851
3-4
Software Version Number
Spare
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
3.5.1.
writes.

Modicon Compatible
still applies.
Meter #1 Batch ID
4852
4853
Batch ID
4854
4855
Batch ID
4856
4857
Batch ID
4858
4859
Batch ID
4860
4861
Batch ID
4862
4863
Batch ID
3.5.2.
Meter #2 Batch ID
4864
4865
Batch ID
to
4874
4875
Batch ID
3.5.3.
Meter #3 Batch ID
4876
4877
Batch ID
to
20/24.71+ w 04/98
4886
4887
Batch ID
3-5
Chapter 3
3.5.4.
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
Meter #4 Batch ID
4888
4889
Batch ID
to
4898
4899
Batch ID
3.6.
Prover ASCII String Data
4901
Prove Meter - Product Name
4902
Prove Meter - Calculation Mode Text
4903
Prove Meter - Batch ID

Characters 1-8.
4904
Prove Meter - Batch ID

Characters 9-16.
4905
Prove Meter - Serial Number

Manufacturers Number.
4906
Prove Meter - Size
4907
Prove Meter - Model

Manufacturer Model Number.
3-6
4908
Prove Meter - ID
4909
Prove Meter - Tag
4910
Spare
4911
Prover - Inlet (Left) Temperature Tag
4912
Prover - Outlet (Right) Temperature Tag
4913
Prover - Inlet (Left) Pressure Tag
4914
Prover - Outlet (Right) Pressure Tag
4915
Plenum Pressure Tag
4916
Prover - Density/Gravity Tag
4917
Prover - Density Temperature Tag
4918
Prover - Density Pressure Tag
4919
Spare
4920
Reserved
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
4921
Prove - Date
4922
Prove - Time
4923
Selected Table Text
4924
Prove - Meter Product Name
4925
Prove - Meter ID
4926
Prove - Meter Serial #
4927
Prove - Meter Size
4928
Prove - Meter Model
4929
Previous Prove - Meter Factor Date
4930
Previous Prove - Meter Factor Time
4931
Prove - Result String

Characters 1-8. Printed on Prove Report.
4932

Characters 9-16.
4933

Characters 17-24.
4934

Characters 25-32.
4935
Prove - Reason String

Characters 1-8. Printed on Prove Report.
4936

Characters 9-16.
4937

Characters 17-24.
4938

Characters 25-32.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
4939
Master Meter - ID
4940
Master Meter - Serial Number
4941
Master Meter - Size
4942
Master Meter - Model
3-7
Modbus
Volume 4
4. 32-Bit Integer Data (5001 - 5999)

4.1.
INFO - These 32-bit long
integer variables are
for multiple writes. Note that
the index number for each
variable refers to one
complete long integer which
occupies the space of two
16-bit registers. It must be
partial 32-bit integer. Each
32-bit long integer counts as
one point in the normal Omni
Modbus mode.
Modicon Compatible
point count only, each 32-bit
integer counts as two
registers. The starting
address of the 32-bit integer
still applies.
Notes:
example: 5105 is the 'Cumulative Gross Totalizer' for Meter Run # 1. The same
5n01
Batch in Progress - Gross Totalizer

Points 5n01-5n04 represent the total batch quantities measured so far for the batch in
progress. Results are moved to 5n50 area at the end of the batch.
5n02
Batch in Progress - Net Totalizer
5n03
Batch in Progress - Mass Totalizer
5n04
Batch in Progress - NSV Totalizer
5n05
Cumulative In Progress - Gross Totalizer
5n06
Cumulative In Progress - Net Totalizer
5n07
Cumulative In Progress - Mass Totalizer
5n08
Cumulative In Progress - NSV Totalizer
5n09
Todays In Progress - Gross Totalizer
Points 5n05-5n08 are non-resetable totalizers which are snapshot for opening readings.
Points 5n09-5n12 are total daily quantities measured since the day start hour today.
These are moved to the 5n54 area at the start of a new day.
5n10
Todays In Progress - Net Totalizer
5n11
Todays In Progress - Mass Totalizer
5n12
Todays In Progress - NSV Totalizer
5n13
Meter Factor in Use Now
5n14
Average Meter Factor - Batch in Progress
5n15
Average Meter Factor - Todays In Progress
5n16
Batch Preset Remaining
5n17
5n18
Dual Pulse (Comparitor) Error Counts for Batch
* The increment for all

totalizers depends upon
the totalizer resolution
settings shown in the
Factor Setup menu of
OmniCom. They can only
be changed via the
keypad entries made in
the Pass-word
Maintenance menu after
Resetting all Totalizers.
# These Variables are

stored with 4 places after
the implied decimal point.
i.e. 10000 is interpreted
as 1.0000
When pulse fidelity check enabled only.
5n19
In Progress Batch Report Number

Increments each batch start.
5n20
Raw Input Counts (500 msec)

Turbine counts this 500 msec cycle.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
4-1
Chapter 4
Turbine/Positive
are considered.

#
5n21
Meter Factor - Product #1
5n22
5n23
5n24
5n25
5n26
5n27
5n28
5n29
Meter Factor - Product # 9
5n30
5n31
5n32
5n33
5n34
5n35
5n36
5n37
Meter Factor - Change Retroactive Barrels/m3
5n38
Batch Preset Warning

3
Bbl/m .
5n39
Spare
5n40
Spare
5n41
Micro Motion - Frequency
5n42
Micro Motion - Mass Total
5n43
In Progress - Raw Input Counts for Hour

Raw turbine counts for the hour so far.
5n44
In Progress - Gross Total for Hour

Points 5n44-5n47 represent the total quantities for the current hour in progress. These
will be moved to 5n74 area at the start of the new hour.
5n45
In Progress - Net Total for Hour
5n46
In Progress - Mass Total for Hour
5n47
In Progress - NSV Total for Hour
5n48
In Progress - Raw Input Counts for Batch

Raw turbine counts; this batch.
5n49
In Progress - Raw Input Counts for Day

Raw turbine counts; today so far.
5n50
Previous Batch n - Gross Totalizer

Points 5n50-5n53 represent the total batch quantities for the previous batch.
4-2
5n51
Previous Batch n - Net Totalizer
5n52
Previous Batch n - Mass Totalizer
5n53
Previous Batch n - NSV Totalizer
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
5n54
Modbus mode.
Modicon Compatible
still applies.
Previous Days - Gross Totalizer

Points 5n54-5n57 are the total quantities for the previous day; day start hour to day
start hour.
5n55
Previous Days - Net Totalizer
5n56
Previous Days - Mass Totalizer
5n57
Previous Days - NSV Totalizer
5n58
Current Batch - Opening Gross Totalizer

Points 5n58-5n61 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at the start of the batch in progress.
These variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous batch.
5n59
Current Batch - Opening Net Totalizer
5n60
Current Batch - Opening Mass Totalizer
5n61
Current Batch - Opening NSV Totalizer
5n62
Todays - Opening Gross Totalizer

Points 5n62-5n65 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at day start hour for today. These
variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous day.
5n63
Todays - Opening Net Totalizer
5n64
Todays - Opening Mass Totalizer
5n65
Todays - Opening NSV Totalizer
5n66
Cumulative - Gross Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command

Points 5n66-5n69 are cumulative totalizers snapshot when the Leak Detection Freeze
Command (1760) is received (see also points 7634, 7644, 7654 & 7664).
5n67
Cumulative - Net Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
5n68
Cumulative - Mass Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
5n69
Cumulative - NSV Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
5n70
Increment - Gross Totalizer

Points 5n70-5n73 contains the incremental integer counts that were added to the
totalizers for this current cycle (500msec).
5n71
Increment - Net Totalizer
5n72
Increment - Mass Totalizer
5n73
Increment - NSV Totalizer
5n74
Previous Hourly - Gross Total

Points 5n74-5n77 represent the total quantities measured for the last hour. These are
moved here from 5n44 area at the end of hour.
5n75
Previous Hourly - Net Total
5n76
Previous Hourly - Mass Total
5n77
Previous Hourly - NSV Total
5n78
Previous Batch n - Opening Gross

Data from 5n58 area gets moved to 5n78-5n81 at the end of each batch.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
5n79
Previous Batch n - Opening Net
5n80
Previous Batch n - Opening Mass
5n81
Previous Batch n - Opening NSV
4-3
Chapter 4

5n82
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
Previous Days - Opening Gross

Data from 5n62 area gets moved to 5n82-5n85 at the end/beginning of each day.
5n83
Previous Days - Opening Net
5n84
Previous Days - Opening Mass
5n85
Previous Days - Opening NSV
5n86
Previous Batch n - Closing Gross Total
5n87
Previous Batch n - Closing Net Total
5n88
Previous Batch n - Closing Mass Total
5n89
Previous Batch n - NSV Total
5n90
Previous Batch n - Batch Report Number

Use this value on Batch Report.
5n91
Previous Batch n - Batch Product Number
5n92
Spare
to
5n95
Spare
5n96
Batch Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature
5n97
Daily Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature
5n98
Previous Batch n Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature
5n99
Previous Daily Net @ 2nd Reference temperature
4.2.
Scratch Pad 32-Bit Integer Data
Ninety-nine 32-bit integer registers are provided for user scratch pad. These
registers are typically used to store the results of variable statement
calculations, to group data that will be moved via peer-to-peer operations or
similar types of operations.
5501
Scratchpad - 32-Bit Integer #1
to
5599
4-4
Scratchpad - 32-Bit Integer #99
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
4.3.
Modbus mode.
Modicon Compatible
still applies.
Note:

be changed via the
the Pass-word
20/24.71+ w 04/98
5801
Station 32-Bit Integer Data

Batch in Progress - Gross Totalizer
Points 5801-5804 are total batch quantities measured so far for the batch in progress.
These are moved to 5850 area at the end of the batch.
5802
Batch in Progress - Net Totalizer
5803
Batch in Progress - Mass Totalizer
5804
Batch in Progress - NSV Totalizer
5805
Cumulative in Progress - Gross Totalizer

Points 5805-5808 are non-resetable totalizers which are snapshot for opening readings.
5806
Cumulative in Progress - Net Totalizer
5807
Cumulative in Progress - Mass Totalizer
5808
Cumulative in Progress - NSV Totalizer
5809
Todays in Progress - Gross Totalizer

Points 5809-5812 are total daily quantities measured since the day start hour today.
These are moved to the 5854 area at the start of a new day.
5810
Todays in Progress - Net Totalizer
5811
Todays in Progress - Mass Totalizer
5812
Todays in Progress - NSV Totalizer
5813
Spare
5814
Line Pack Remaining
5815
Batch Preset Warning
5816
Batch Preset Remaining
5817
Running Product ID
5818
Batch Number
4-5
Chapter 4
4.4.
4.4.1.
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
More Meter Run 32-Bit Integer Data

Meter #1 Batch Size
5819
Current Batch Size or Common Batch Stack Sequence #1 - Batch

Size
5820
Batch Sequence #2 - Batch Size or Common Batch Stack Sequence

#2 - Batch Size
5821

#3 - Batch Size
5822

#4 - Batch Size
5823

#5 - Batch Size
5824

#6 - Batch Size
4.4.2.
5825
Meter #2 Batch Size

Size
to
5830
4.4.3.
5831

#12 - Batch Size
Meter #3 Batch Size

Size
to
5836
4.4.4.
5837

#18 - Batch Size
Meter #4 Batch Size

Size
to
4-6
5842

#24 - Batch Size
5843
Spare
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
5844
Modbus mode.
Points 5844-5847 represent the total station quantities for the current hour in progress.
These will be moved to 5n74 area at the start of the new hour.
5845
Station - In Progress - Net Total for Hour
5846
Station - In Progress - Mass Total for Hour
5847
Station - In Progress - NSV Total for Hour
5848
Time in hhmmss format

Read (e.g.: the number 103125 represents 10:31:25).
5849
Date in yymmdd format

Read (e.g.: the number 970527 represents May 27, 1997). The date format used here
does not follow the US/European format selection.
5850
Modicon Compatible
still applies.
Station - In Progress - Gross Total for Hour
Previous Batch n - Gross Totalizer

Points 5850-5853 are total batch quantities for the previous batch. These are moved here
from 5801 area at the end of a batch.
5851
Previous Batch n - Net Totalizer
5852
Previous Batch n - Mass Totalizer
5853
Previous Batch n - NSV Totalizer
5854
Previous Days - Gross Totalizer

Points 5854-5857 are total quantities for the previous day; day start hour to day start
hour. These are moved here from 5809 area at the end of the day.
5855
Previous Days - Net Totalizer
5856
Previous Days - Mass Totalizer
5857
Previous Days - NSV Totalizer
5858
Current Batch - Opening Gross Totalizer

Points 5858-5861 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at the start of the batch in progress.
These variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous batch.
5859
Current Batch - Opening Net Totalizer
5860
Current Batch - Opening Mass Totalizer
5861
Current Batch - Opening NSV Totalizer
5862
Todays - Opening Gross Totalizer

Points 5862-5865 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at day start hour for today. These
variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous day.
5863
Todays - Opening Net Totalizer
5864
Todays - Opening Mass Totalizer
5865
Todays - Opening NSV Totalizer
5866
Cumulative - Gross Total @ Freeze

Points 5866-5869 are cumulative totalizers snapshot when the Leak Detection Freeze
Command (1760) is received (see also points 7634, 7644, 7654 & 7664).
20/24.71+ w 04/98
5867
Cumulative - Net Total @ Freeze
5868
Cumulative - Mass Total @ Freeze
5869
Cumulative - NSV Total @ Freeze
4-7
Chapter 4

*
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
Note:

be changed via the
the Pass-word
5870
Increment - Gross Totalizer

Points 5870-5873 contain the incremental integer counts that were added to the totalizers
for this current cycle.
5871
Increment - Net Totalizer
5872
Increment - Mass Totalizer
5873
Increment - NSV Totalizer
5874
Previous Hourly - Gross

Points 5874-5877 represent the total quantities measured for the last hour. These are
moved here from 5844 area at the end of hour.
5875
Previous Hourly - Net
5876
Previous Hourly - Mass
5877
Previous Hourly - NSV
5878
Previous Batch n - Opening Gross

Data from 5858 area gets moved to points 5878-5881 at the end of each batch.
5879
Previous Batch n - Opening Net
5880
Previous Batch n - Opening Mass
5881
Previous Batch n - Opening NSV
5882
Previous Days - Opening Gross
5883
Previous Days - Opening Net
5884
Previous Days - Opening Mass
5885
Previous Days - Opening NSV
5886
Previous Batch n - Closing Gross Total
Data from 5862 area gets moved to points 5882-5885 at the end/beginning of each day.
5887
Previous Batch n - Closing Net Total
5888
Previous Batch n - Closing Mass Total
5889
Previous Batch n - Closing NSV Total
5890
Previous Batch n - Batch Number
5891
Previous Batch n - Product Number
5892
Spare
to
5895
Spare
5896
Batch Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature
5897
Daily Net @ 2
5898
Previous Batch n Net @ 2
5899
4-8
nd
Reference Temperature
nd
Previous Daily Net @ 2
nd
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
4.5.
Modbus mode.
Prover 32-Bit Integer Data
5901
Prove Counts
5902
TDVOL Timer Pulses

Timer Pulses accumulated between detectors switches (each pulse is 200nsec).
5903
TDFMP Timer Pulses

Timer Pulses accumulated between first flow pulse after each detector switches (each
pulse is 200nsec).
5904
Spare
to
5919
Spare
5920
Pulses - Total Linear Correction Factor - 1st Run
to
Modicon Compatible
still applies.
5929
Pulses - Total Linear Correction Factor - 10th Run
5930
Net Total since Last Prove
5931
Prove Report Number
5932
Previous Prove Totalizer
5933
Totalizer Reading This Prove
5934
Pulses - Forward - 4th Last
5935
Pulses - Total - 4th Last
5936
Pulses - Forward - 3rd Last
5937
Pulses - Total - 3rd Last
5938
Pulses - Forward - 2nd Last
5939
Pulses - Total - 2nd Last
5940
Pulses - Forward - Last
5941
Pulses - Total - Last
5942
Pulses - Forward - 1st Run
5943
Pulses - Total - 1st Run
to
th
5960
Pulses - Forward - 10 Run
5961
Pulses - Total - 10th Run
5962
Previous Meter Factor - from Last Prove
5963
Actual Meter Factor - Current Run
5964
Flowmeter Frequency - 1st Run
to
5973
20/24.71+ w 04/98
th
Flowmeter Frequency - 10 Run
4-9
Chapter 4
4.5.1.
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
Compact Prover TDVOL and TDFMP Pulses
5974
Compact Prover - TDVOL Timer Pulses - 1st Run
5975
Compact Prover - TDFMP Timer Pulses 1st Run
to
5992
Compact Prover - TDVOL Timer Pulses - 10th Run
5993
Compact Prover - TDFMP Timer Pulses - 10th Run
5994
Meter Factor - Trial Prove
5995
Meter Factor - Linear
5996
Meter Factor - GSVp/GSVm
5997
Spare
to
5999
4-10
Spare
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
5. 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (6001 - 8999)

Turbine/Positive
are considered.
INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE

Floating Point variables are
function code 03 for all
reads, 06 for single writes or
16 for single or multiple
writes. Note that the index
number for each variable
refers to the complete
floating point variable which
16- bit registers. It must be
partial variable. Each floating
point variable counts as one
point in the normal Omni
Modbus mode.
Modicon Compatible Mode

- For the purpose of point
count only, each IEEE float
point counts as 2 registers.
The starting address of the
variable still applies.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
6001
Reserved
to
6999
5.1.
Reserved
Digital-to-Analog Outputs 32-Bit IEEE

Floating Point Data
Any analog output point which physically exists can be read via these point
numbers. Data returned is expressed as a percentage of the output value.
Only those points which physically exist and have been assigned to Modbus
control by assigning zero (0) at 'D/A Out Assign' (see Volume 3) should be
written to Outputs which are not assigned to Modbus control will be overwritten
every 500 msec by the flow computer. Data written should be within the range
of -5.00 to 11000.
7001
Analog Output #1
to
7012
Analog Output #12
7013
Spare
to
7024
Spare
5-1
Chapter 5
32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (6001- 8999)
5.2.
Modbus mode.

User Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating

Point Data
Database points 7025 through 7088 have been assigned as user variables (see
Volume 3). The value contained in the variable depends on the associated
program statement which is evaluated every 500 msec. You may read these
variables at any time. You may also write to these variables but anything you
write may be overwritten by the flow computer depending on the evaluation of
the statement. Leave the statement blank or simply put a comment or prompt
into it to avoid having the flow computer overwrite it.
7025
User-Programmable Variable #1
to
7088
5.3.
User-Programmable Variable #64
Programmable Accumulator 32-Bit IEEE

Floating Point Variables
Points 7089 through 7099 are paired with Boolean Point Variables 1089 through
1099. Numeric data placed in 7089, for example, can be output as pulses by
assigning a digital I/O point to 1089.
7089
Data placed into 7089 is pulse out using 1089.
to
7099

Data placed into 7099 is pulse out using 1099.
5-2
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
5.4.
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
The second digit of the index number defines the meter run number. For
example: 7105 is the 'Temperature' variable for Meter Run #1. The same point
for Meter Run #4 would be 7405.
< 7n01
INFO - Calculated averages

can be either flow weighted
or time weighted depending
upon point number.
Notes:
< 7n02
Flowrate - Net
3
Bbl or m /hr.
Flowrate - Mass
Klb or ton/hr.
< 7n04
Flowrate - NSV
3
Bbl or m /hr.
7n05
Temperature
7n06
Pressure
7n07
Density
3
Lb/ft or kg/m . Indicates calculated propylene/ethylene density.
7n08
7n09
Flowing Transducer Density Before Factoring

Temperature and pressure corrected.
< Current live values which

are updated every
500msec.
Flowrate - Gross
Bbl or m /hr.
< 7n03
number of the meter run
number.
Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point

Data
Flowing Transducer Density After Factoring

7n09=7n08 x 7n43.
* Current values in use

now.
7n10
Density Transducer Temperature

Corrects for transducer expansion effects.
7n11
Density Transducer Pressure

Information only! Transducer unaffected by pressure.
7n12
API Flowing
7n13
API @ 60 F / API @ Reference Temperature
7n14
Specific Gravity Flowing
7n15
Specific Gravity @ 60 F / Density @ 15 C
7n16
VCF
7n17
Volume Correction Factor.
CPL
Correction Factor for Pressure on Liquids.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
5-3
Chapter 5

Modbus mode.

Notes:

7n18
Batch In Progress - Average Meter Run Temperature
7n19
Batch In Progress - Average Meter Run Pressure
7n20
Batch In Progress - Average of Density Flowing
7n21
Batch In Progress - Average Density Transducer Temperature
7n22
Batch In Progress - Average Density Transducer Pressure
7n23
Batch In Progress - Average API Flowing
7n24
Batch In Progress - Average API @ 60 F / API @ Reference

Temperature
7n25
Batch In Progress - Average Flowing Specific Gravity
7n26
Batch In Progress - Average Specific Gravity @ 60 F / Density @

7n27
Batch In Progress - Average VCF
7n28
Batch In Progress - Average CPL
7n29
Day In Progress - Average Temperature
7n30
Day In Progress - Average Pressure
7n31
Day In Progress - Average Density Flowing
7n32
Day In Progress - Average Density Transducer Temperature
7n33
Day In Progress - Average Density Transducer Pressure
7n34
Day In Progress - Average API Flowing
7n35
Day In Progress - Average API @ 60 F / API @ Reference

Temperature
7n36
Day In Progress - Average Specific Gravity Flowing
7n37
Day In Progress - Average Specific Gravity @ 60 F / Density @

* Current values in use

now.
~ The data in these

variables may be
calculated real time or the
same data as entered
elsewhere depending on
the fluid type selected or
the equation of state
selected.
5-4
* ~ 7n38
Day In Progress - Average, VCF
* ~ 7n39
Day In Progress - Average, CPL
* ~ 7n40
Current K Factor
7n41
Weighted Average K Factor - Batch Flow
7n42
Weighted Average K Factor - Daily Flow
7n43
Density - Factor in Use
7n44
Density - Factor B
7n45
Z Factor of Carbon Dioxide
7n46
Current Viscosity CST
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
7n47
Coefficient b
Viscosity coefficients used with helical or turbine meters.
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
7n48
Coefficient a
7n49
LCF
Linear Correction Factor.

number of the meter run
number.
7n50
Coefficient c
7n51
Coefficient d
7n52
Coefficient e
7n53
Coefficient f
7n54
Coefficient g
7n55
Spare
to
7n60
Spare
Note:
7n61
Meter Run Gross/Mass Flowrate - Low Limit
7n62
Meter Run Gross/Mass Flowrate - High Limit
7n63
Meter Temperature - Low Limit
7n64
Meter Temperature - High Limit
7n65
Meter Temperature - Override
7n66
Meter Temperature - @ 4mA
7n67
Meter Temperature - @ 20mA
7n68
Meter Pressure - Low Limit
Indicates meter run gross

or mass flow rate
depending on which unit
is selected
to
7n72
Meter Pressure - @ 20mA
7n73
Gravity / Density Transducer - Low Limit

Indicated at either flowing or reference conditions, depending on which is selected.
to
7n77
Gravity / Density Transducer - @ 20mA
7n78
Density Transducer Temperature - Low Limit
to
7n82
Density Transducer Temperature - @ 20mA
7n83
Density Transducer Pressure - Low Limit
to
7n87
Density Transducer Pressure - @ 20mA
7n88
Density Transducer - Correction Factor

Used to correct densitometer.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
5-5
Chapter 5

*

Modbus mode.
Densitometer - Constant #1
K0/D0.
7n90
7n91
7n92
7n93
7n94
7n95
K1/T0.
K2/Tcoef.
K18/Tcal/Tc.
K19/Pcoef/Kt1.
K20A/Pcal/Kt2.
K20B/Kt3.
7n96
K21A/Pc.
*
7n89
7n97
K21B/Kp1.
7n98

Kr. (For UGC densitometers: Kr/KP2.)
7n99

Kj. (For UGC densitometers: Kj/KP3.)
Note:
* Various factors used by

various vendors of digital
densitometers.
5.5.
Scratch Pad 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point

Data
Ninety-nine IEEE 32-bit floating point registers are provided for user scratch
pad. These registers are typically used to store and group data that will be
moved via peer-to-peer operations or similar uses.
7501
Scratchpad - IEEE Float #1
to
7599
5-6
Scratchpad - IEEE Float #99
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
5.6.
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
PID Control 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point

Data
7601
PID Control #1 - Local Primary Variable Setpoint Value
7602
PID Control #1 - Primary Setpoint Value in Use
~ 7603
PID Control #1 - Remote Primary Setpoint Value
^ 7604
PID Control #1 - Control Output Percent
< 7605
PID Control #1 - Secondary Variable Setpoint
7606
Notes:
7607
# Do not write to these
~ 7608
^ 7609
< 7610
7611
7612
variables. They are

provided for read only
information.
* Writing to these variables

will have no effect as the
flow computer overwrites
these values with either
the remote or local
primary Setpoint value
depending on the
operating mode of the
control loop.
~ 7613
^ 7614
< 7615
7616
7617
~ Only writes made while in

the 'Remote' mode will be
meaningful. These
variables are overwritten
with the current value of
the primary controlled
variable when in all other
modes.
^ Only writes made while in

the 'Manual' mode will be
meaningful. These
variables are overwritten
by the flow computer in all
other operating modes.
< Writes to these variables

are always accepted.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
~ 7618
^ 7619
< 7620
7621 Spare
to
7623 Spare
5-7
Chapter 5
5.7.
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
7624
Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE

Floating Point Data
Equilibrium Pressure - Meter Run #1
Psig/kPa (current live values).
7625

Psig or kPa.
7626

Psig or kPa.
7627

Psig or kPa.

Modbus mode.
7628
Psig or kPa.
7629
Vapor Pressure @ 100 F - Meter Run #1

Current live values.
7630
7631
7632
7633
Vapor Pressure @ 100 F - Prover
7634
Meter Run #1 - Temperature @ Leak Detect Freeze Command
7635
Meter Run #1 - Pressure @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
7636
Meter Run #1 - Density / Gravity @ Leak Detect Freeze Command
7637
Spare
See 1760 command.

INFO - See 7n01 through

7n99 for more meter run
related data.
Equilibrium Pressure - Prover
to
7639
Spare
7640
Meter Run #1 - Gross Volume Increment
7641
Meter Run #1 - Net Increment Volume
7642
Meter Run #1 - Mass Increment
7643
Meter Run #1 - NSV Increment
7644
Meter Run #2 - Temperature @ Freeze Command
7645
Meter Run #2 - Pressure @ Freeze Command
7646
Meter Run #2 - Density / Gravity @ Freeze Command
7647
Spare
to
7649
5-8
Spare
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4

Modbus mode.

INFO - See 7n01 through

7n99 for more meter run
related data.
7650
7651
Meter Run #2 - Net Volume Increment
7652
7653
7654
7655
7656
7657
Spare
to
7659
Spare
7660
7661
7662
7663
7664
7665
7666
7667
Spare
Notes:
* These variables represent

the incremental flow
which is accumulated
each 500 msec.
calculation cycle in float
format (also see points
5n70 for integer format).
to
7669
Spare
7670
7671
7672
7673
7674
Station - Temperature @ Freeze Command
7675
Station - Pressure @ Freeze Command
7676
Station - Density / Gravity @ Freeze Command
7677
Spare
# Flowing variables are

snapshot and stored here
when the Leak Detection
Freeze command (1760)
is received (also see
points 5n66).
to
7679
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Spare
5-9
Chapter 5
Turbine/Positive
are considered.

*
7680
Station - Gross Volume Increment
7681
Station - Net Volume Increment
7682
Station - Mass Volume Increment
7683
Station - NSV Volume Increment
7684
Spare
to
7698
Spare
Notes:
* These variables represent

the incremental flow
which is accumulated
each 500 msec.
calculation cycle in float
format (also see points
5n70 for integer format).
7699
2nd Reference Temperature

Other than 60F or 15C.
5.8.
Miscellaneous Variables 32-Bit IEEE

Floating Point Data
The percentage of span for each of the 24 process input channels is available
as a floating point variable point.
INFO - The data is only
meaningful when the input
channel is used as an analog
input or a Honeywell digital
transducer input. For pulse
type input channels see data
points located at 15131
through 15154.
7701
Process Input - Channel # 1
to
7724
Process Input - Channel # 24
7725
Spare
to
5-10
7782
Spare
7783
Sequence #2 Batch Size - Meter #1
7784
7785
7786
7787
7788
7789
7790
7791
Batch Preset Warning - Meter #1
7792
7793
7794
7795
Batch Preset Warning - Station
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4

Modbus mode.
7796
Meter Factor - Meter #1
7797
7798
7799
5.9.
7801
Station - Gross Flowrate

3
Bbl or m /hr.
7802
Station - Net Flowrate

3
Bbl or m /hr.
7803
Meter Station 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point

Data
Station - Mass Flowrate

Klbs/hr.
7804
Station - NSV Flowrate

3
Bbl or m /hr.
7805
Gravity/Density
7806
Density Temperature
7807
Density Pressure
7808
Spare
7809
Auxiliary Input #1
Points 7809-7812 represent miscellaneous live input signals provided for user-defined
functions.
7810
Auxiliary Input #2
7811
Auxiliary Input #3
7812
Auxiliary Input #4
7813
Time - hhmmss
Read only (e.g.: the number 103125 represents 10:31:25).
7814
Date - yymmdd
Read only (e.g.: the number 970527 represents May 27/ 97; the date format used here
does not follow the US/European format selection).
7815
Spare
to
7820
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Spare
5-11
Chapter 5
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
5-12

7821
Product #1 - API Override / Thermal Expansion Coefficient
7822
Product #1 - Specific Gravity Override / Reference Density
7823
7824
7825
7826
7827
7828
7829
7830
7831
7832
7833
7834
7835
7836
7837
7838
7839
7840
7841
7842
7843
7844
7845
7846
7847
7848
7849
7850
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
7851
7852
7853
Gross/Mass Flowrate - Low Limit

Indicates flow rate low limit in gross or mass units, depending on which unit is selected.

Modbus mode.
7854
Gross/Mass Flowrate - High Limit

Indicates flow rate high limit in gross or mass units, depending on which unit is selected.
7855
Flow Threshold - Run Switch Flag #1 - Decreasing Flow
7856
Flow Threshold - Run Switch Flag #1 - Increasing Flow
7857
See 1824.
See 1825.
7858
7859

See 1826.
7860
7861
Station - Pressure - Low Limit

Points 7861-7865 are configuration settings used when the pressure is a live 4-20 mA.

7862
Station - Pressure - High Limit
7863
Station - Pressure - Override
7864
Station - Pressure - @ 4mA
7865
Station - Pressure - @ 20mA
7866
Station - Gravity/Density - Low Limit

Points 7866-7870 are configuration settings used when the gravity/density is a live 4-20
mA.
7867
Station - Gravity/Density - High Limit
7868
Station - Gravity/Density - Override
7869
Station - Gravity/Density - @ 4mA
7870
Station - Gravity/Density - @ 20mA
7871
Station - Density Temperature - Low Limit

Points 7871-7875 are configuration settings used when the gravity/density is a live 4-20
mA.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
7872
Station - Density Temperature - High Limit
7873
Station - Density Temperature - Override
7874
Station - Density Temperature - @ 4mA
7875
Station - Density Temperature - @ 20mA
5-13
Chapter 5
Turbine/Positive
are considered.

7876
Station - Density Correction Factor
7877
Station - Densitometer - Constant #1
7878
7879
K0/D0.

K1/T0.

K2/Tcoef.
7880

K18/Tcal/Tc.
7881

K19/Pcoef/Kt1.
7882

K20A/Pcal/Kt2.
Notes:
7883
7884

densitometers.
# Miscellaneous conversion
7885
factors and constants.
7886
7887

K20B/Kt3.

K21A/Pc.

K21B/KP1.

Kr. (For UGC densitometers: Kr/KP2.)

Kj. (For UGC densitometers: Kj/KP3.)
7888
Weight of Water
3
Lbm/Bbl or Kg/m .
7889
Gravity Rate of Change
7890
Line Pack Delay

3
Net Bbl or m .
7891
Local Atmospheric Pressure
7892
Contract Base Temperature
7893
Kg/m3 to lb/ft3
7894
Contract Base Pressure
7895
Spare
7896
Auto Prove Mode - Startup Flow
7897
Auto Prove Mode - Maximum Flow between Proves
7898
Auto Prove Mode - Minimum Flow Rate Change
7899
Auto Prove Mode - Delta Flow Rate

Flow rate unstable check.
5-14
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
5.10. Prover Data - IEEE Floating Point

Modbus mode.

7901
Prover - Inlet (Left) Temperature
7902
Prover - Outlet (Right) Temperature
7903
Prover - Temperature in Use
7904
Prover - Inlet (Left) Pressure
7905
Prover - Outlet (Right) Pressure
7906
Prover - Pressure in Use
7907
Prover - Plenum Pressure

Compact Prover.
7908
Prover - Run Time
7909
Volume - Master Prove
7910
Volume - Test Meter
7911
Calculated Plenum Pressure
7912
Prover - Density/Gravity
7913
Prover - Density Temperature
7914
Prover - Density Pressure
7915
Prover - Uncorrected Density
7916
Prover - Density
7917
Invar Rod Temperature

Small Volume Prover.
7918
Overtravel
3
Bbls/m .
5.10.1. Configuration Data for Prover

7919
Prover - Volume
3
Bbls/m .
7920
Prover - Diameter
Inches/mm.
7921
Prover - Wall Thickness

Inches/mm.
7922
Prover - Modulus of Elasticity
7923
Prover - Coefficient of Cubic Expansion
7924
Prover - Base Pressure
7925
Prover - Temperature Stability Limits
7926
Prove & Meter - Temperature Deviation
7927
Prover - Count Deviation %

[(Maximum Deviation - Minimum Deviation) / Minimum Deviation] x 100%.
7928
Prover - Acceptable Meter Factor Deviation %

[(New Meter Factor - Previous Meter Factor) / Previous Meter Factor] x 100%.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
5-15
Chapter 5
Turbine/Positive
are considered.

7929
Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - Low Limit
7930
Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - High Limit
7931
Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - Override
7932
Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - @ 4mA
7933
Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - @ 20mA
7934
Prover - Temperature Outlet (Right) - Low Limit
to
7938
Prover - Temperature Outlet (Right) - @ 20mA
7939
Prover - Pressure Inlet (Left) - Low Limit
to
7943
Prover - Pressure Inlet (Left) - @ 20mA
7944
Prover - Pressure Outlet (Right) - Low Limit
to
5-16
7948
Prover - Pressure Outlet (Right) - @ 20mA
7949
Flow Rate % Change Threshold
7950
Linear Thermal Coefficient
7951
Plenum Pressure - Constant
7952
Plenum - Deadband %
7953
Plenum Pressure - @ 4mA
7954
Plenum Pressure - @ 20mA
7955
Prover - Volume Upstream
7956
Prover - Specific Gravity @ 60 F / Density @ Meter Factor
7957
Prover - Temperature @ Meter Factor
7958
Prover - Pressure @ Meter Factor
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
5.10.2. Last Prove Data

Modbus mode.
7959
Prover - Volume
7960
Prover - Diameter
Inches/mm.
7961
Prover - Wall Thickness

Inches/mm.
7962
Prover - Modulus of Elasticity
7963
Prover - Coefficient of Cubic Expansion
7964
Prover - K Factor
7965
Prover - Master Meter K Factor
7966
Prover - Previous Meter Factor @ Flowrate
5.10.3. Data Rejected During Prove

The following refers to the data rejected during Prove Run #3. The same data is
available for the Last, 1st and 2nd Prove Runs at the following addresses:
7967
3rd Run - Meter Temperature
7968
3rd Run - Meter Pressure
7969
3rd Run - Prover Temperature
7970
3rd Run - Prover Pressure
7971
3rd Run - Reference Gravity
7972
3rd Run - Flowrate
7973
2nd Run - Meter Temperature
to
7978
2nd Run - Flowrate
7979
1 Run - Meter Temperature
st
to
st
7984
1 Run - Flowrate
7985
Last Run - Meter Temperature
to
7990
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Last Run - Flowrate
5-17
Chapter 5
5.10.4. Prove Run Data

Turbine/Positive
are considered.
The following data refers to Prove Run #1. The same data is available for all 10
prove runs at the following addresses:
7991
1st Run - Meter Temperature
7992
1st Run - Meter Pressure
7993
1st Run - Prover Temperature
7994
1st Run - Prover Pressure
7995
1st Run - Specific Gravity @ 60 F / Density @ Reference Temperature
7996
1st Run - Flowrate
7997
2nd Run - Meter Temperature
to
8002
2nd Run - Flowrate
8003
3rd Run - Meter Temperature
to
8008
3rd Run - Flowrate
8009
4th Run - Meter Temperature
to
8014
4th Run - Flowrate
8015
to
8020
5th Run - Flowrate
8021
to
th
8026
6 Run - Flowrate
8027
to
th
8032
7 Run - Flowrate
8033
th
to
8038
5-18
8th Run - Flowrate
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
8039
Modbus mode.

to
8044
9th Run - Flowrate
8045
to
8050
10th Run - Flowrate
5.10.5. Prove Average Data

8051
Prove - Average Counts
8052
Prove - Average Meter Temperature
8053
Prove - Average Meter Pressure
8054
Prove - Average Prover Temperature
8055
Prove - Average Prover Pressure
8056
Prove - Average SG @ 60F / Density @ Reference Temperature
8057
Prove - Average Flowrate
8058
Prove - % Deviation Between Runs
8059
Prove - CTSP
Prover Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on Steel.
8060
Prove - CPSP
Prover Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on Steel.
8061
Prove - CTLP
Prover Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on a Liquid.
8062
Prove - CPLP
Prover Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on a Liquid.
8063
Prove - CCFP
Prover Combined Correction Factor.
8064
Prove - Corrected Prover Volume

Base Volume of Prover x [8063].
8065
Prove - Metered Volume
8066
Prove - CTLM
Meter Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on a Liquid.
8067
Prove - CPLM
Meter Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on a Liquid.
8068
Prove - CCFM
Meter Combined Correction Factor.
8069
Prove - Corrected Meter Volume
8070
Prove - Average Counts multiplied by Linear Correction Factor
8071
Prove - Meter Factor Deviation % from Previous Meter Factor
8072
Prove - Actual K Factor
8073
Prove - Average Flowmeter Hertz
8074
Prove - Prover Compressibility F Factor
Meter Volume [8065] x [8068].
20/24.71+ w 04/98
5-19
Chapter 5
Turbine/Positive
are considered.

8075
Prove - Meter Compressibility F Factor
8076
Prove - Average Observed Density
8077
Prove - Average SG @ 60F / Density @ Reference Temperature
8078
Prove - Average Linear Correction Factor
8079
Prove - Average Viscosity
5.10.6. Prove Run - Master Meter Data

The following data refers to Master Meter Prove Run #1. The same data is
available for all 10 prove runs at the following addresses:
8080
1st Run - Master Meter - Volume -
8081
1st Run - Master Meter - Meter Factor
8082
1st Run - Master Meter - CTL
8083
1st Run - Master Meter - CPL
8084
1st Run - Master meter - CCF
8085
1st Run - Master Meter - Corrected Volume
8086
1st Run - Proved Meter - Volume
8087
1st Run - Proved Meter - CTL
8088
1st Run - Proved Meter - CPL
8089
1st Run - Proved Meter - CCF
8090
1st Run - Corrected Meter Volume
8091
1st Run - Meter Factor
8092
2nd Run - Master Meter - Volume
to
8103
2nd Run - Meter Factor
8104
3rd Run - Master Meter - Volume
to
8115
3rd Run - Meter Factor
8116
4 Run - Master Meter - Volume
th
to
th
8127
4 Run - Meter Factor
8128
5th Run - Master Meter - Volume
to
8139
5-20
th
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
8140
Modbus mode.

to
8151
6th Run - Meter Factor
8152
to
8163
8164
to
8175
8176
to
8187
8188
to
8199
5.10.7. Proving Series Data

Note:
> 8200
Series #1 - Average Counts
>
> 8201
Series #1 - Average Meter Temperature
> 8202
Series #1 - Average Meter Pressure
> 8203
Series #1 - Average Prover Temperature
> 8204
Series #1 - Average Prover pressure
> 8205
Series #1 - Average Gravity @ 60 F or Reference Temperature
> 8206
Series #1 - Average Flowrate
> 8207
Series #1 - CTSP
> 8208
Series #1 - CPSP
> 8209
Series #1 - CTLP
> 8210
Series #1 - CPLP
> 8211
Series #1 - Average Net Prover Volume
> 8212
Series #1 - CTLM
> 8213
Series #1 - CPLM
> 8214
Series #1 - Average Gross Meter Volume
> 8215
Series #1 - Net Meter Volume

20 for US customary units
20/24.71+ w 04/98
5-21
Chapter 5
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
Notes:

> 8216
Series #1 - Prover Volume @ Prover Pressure
> 8217
Series #2 - Prover Volume @ Prover Pressure
> 8218
Series #1 - Meter Factor
> 8219
Series #2 - Meter Factor
>* 8220
Proving Meter - Gravity
>* 8221
Proving Meter - Density Temperature
>* 8222
Proving Meter - API @ 60 F / API
>* 8223
Proving meter - Specific Gravity @ 60 F
>

20 for US customary
units.
* Points 8220-8223 are only
for Exxons Prover Report.
5.10.8. Data of Meter Being Proved

8224
Temperature
8225
Pressure
8226
Flowrate
8227
Transducer Density
8228
Specific Gravity @ 60 F / Density @ Reference Temperature
8229
API @ 60 F / API @ Reference Temperature
8230
Gross Flowrate
5.10.9. Mass Prove Data

The following data refers to Mass Prove Run #1. The same data is available for
all 10 prove runs at the following addresses:
8231
1st Run - Prover Temperature
8232
1st Run - Prover Pressure
8233
1st Run - Prover Density or Linear Viscosity
8234
8235
1st Run - Meter Pressure
8236
1 Run - Meter Density
8237
1 Run - Meter Density @ Reference Temperature
8238
1st Run - CTLP
st
st
st
Prover Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on a Liquid.
8239
1st Run - CPLP

Prover Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on a Liquid.
8240
st
1 Run - CTLM
Meter Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on a Liquid.
8241
st
1 Run - CPLM
Meter Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on a Liquid.
8242
1st Run - CTSP or LCF

Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on Steel.
8243
st
1 Run - CPSP
Correction factor for the Effect of Pressure on Steel.
5-22
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4

Modbus mode.

8244
1st Run - Prove Volume
8245
1st Run - Prove Mass
8246
1st Run - Meter Mass
8247
1st Run - Meter Factor
8248
2nd Run - Prover Temperature
to
8264
2nd Run - Meter Factor
8265
3rd Run - Prover Temperature
to
8281
3rd Run - Meter Factor
8282
4th Run - Prover Temperature
to
8298
8299
to
8315
8316
to
8332
8333
to
8349
8350
to
th
8366
8367
to
8383
8384
10 Run - Prover Temperature
th
to
8400
th
8401 Linear Meter Volume

8402 Linear Corrected Meter Volume
20/24.71+ w 04/98
5-23
Chapter 5

8403 Spare
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
Note: See 5n50 and 5850

for matching totalizer data.
to
8500 Spare
5.11. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE

Floating Point Data
The following data refers to Meter Run #1. The same data is available for all
meter runs at the following addresses:
o
o
o
o
Meter Run #1
Meter Run #2
Meter Run #3
Meter Run #4
@
@
@
@
8501
8601
8701
8801
through
through
through
through
8599
8699
8799
8899
5.11.1. Previous Batch Average
Previous Batch Average Refers to data stored at the

time of the last Batch End
command. It will remain valid
until the next batch end. This
is the data that should be
used by SCADA or MMIs to
build Monthly or Batch
Reports.
5-24
8501
Previous Batch n - Average Temperature
8502
Previous Batch n - Average Pressure
8503
Previous Batch n - Average Density
8504
Previous Batch n - Average VCF
8505
Previous Batch n - Average CPL
8506
Previous Batch n - Average Meter factor
8507
Previous Batch n - Average Specific Gravity
8508
Previous Batch n - Average SG @ 60 F / Density @ Reference

Temperature
8509
Previous Batch n - Average Density Temperature
8510
Previous Batch n - Average Density Pressure
8511
Previous Batch n - Average Density Correction Factor
8512
Previous Batch n - Average Unfactored Density
8513
Previous Batch n - Average K Factor
8514
Previous Batch n - Average Viscosity
8515
Previous Batch n - Average Linear Correction Factor
8516
Previous Batch n - Average Gross Flowrate
8517
Previous Batch n - Average %S&W
8518
Previous Batch n - Average Equilibrium Pressure
8519
Previous Batch n - Average API @ 60 F
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
5.11.2. Previous Hours Average

Modbus mode.
8520
Previous Hours - Average Temperature
8521
Previous Hours - Average Pressure
8522
Previous Hours - Average Density
8523
Previous Hours - Average Specific Gravity @ 60F / Density @

8524
Previous Hours - Average K Factor
8525
Previous Hours - Average Meter Factor
8526
Previous Hours - Average %S&W
8527
Spare
to
8530

Previous Hours Average Refers to data stored at the

end of the last hour. It is valid
for one hour and is then
overwritten. This is the data
that should be used by
SCADA or MMIs which need
hourly averages.
Previous Days Average Refers to data stored at the

end of the contract day. It is
valid for 24 hours and
overwritten at the day start
hour. This is the data that
should be used by SCADA or
MMIs to build daily reports.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Spare
5.11.3. Previous Days Average

8531
Previous Days - Average Temperature
8532
Previous Days - Average Pressure
8533
Previous Days - Average Density
8534
Previous Days - Average VCF
8535
Previous Days - Average CPL
8536
Previous Days - Average Meter Factor
8537
Previous Days - Average Specific Gravity
8538
Previous Days - Average SG 60 F / Density @ Reference

Temperature
8539
Previous Days - Average Density Temperature
8540
Previous Days - Average Density Pressures
8541
Previous Days - Average Density Correction Factor
8542
Previous Days - Average Unfactored density
8543
Previous Days - Average K Factor
8544
Previous Days - Average Viscosity
8545
Previous Days - Average Linear Correction Factor
8546
Previous Days - Average Gross Flowrate
8547
Previous Days - Average %S&W
8548
Previous Days - Average Equilibrium Pressure
5-25
Chapter 5

8549
Previous Days - Gross in Float Format

3
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
INFO - The indicated data

(8501-8599) refers to Meter
Run #1. The same data is
available for all meter runs at
the following addresses:
Meter Run #1:
8501 through 8599
Meter Run #2:
8601 through 8699
Meter Run #3:
8701 through 8799
Meter Run #4:
8801 through 8899
Note: See 5n50 and 5850

for matching totalizer data.
Bbl/m .
8550
Previous Days - Net in Float Format

3
Bbl/m .
8551
Previous Days - Mass in Float Format

Klb/ton.
8552
Previous Days - NSV in Float Format

3
Bbl/m .
8553
Previous Days - Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature in Float Format
8554
Spare
to
8555
Spare
5.11.4. Statistical Moving Window Averages of

Transducer Inputs
8556
Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Temperature
8557
Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Pressure
8558
Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Density
8559
Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Density Temperature
8560
Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Density Pressure
5.11.5. Miscellaneous In Progress Averages

8561
In Progress - Density Correction Factor - Batch Average
8562
In Progress - Density Correction Factor - Daily Average
8563
In Progress - Unfactored Density - Hourly Average
8564
In Progress - Unfactored Density - Daily Average
8565
Spare
8566
Spare
5.11.6. Previous Batch and Daily Average Data

Notes:
> 8567
VCF @ 15 C
>
> 8568
VCF @ Reference Temperature
> 8569
Density @ Reference Temperature

5-26
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
5.11.7. More Miscellaneous In Progress Averages

Modbus mode.

8570
In Progress - Hourly Average - Temperature
8571
In Progress - Hourly Average - Pressure
8572
In Progress - Hourly Average - Density
8573
In Progress - Hourly Average - Specific Gravity @ 60F / Density @

8574
In Progress - Hourly Average - K Factor
8575
In Progress - Hourly Average - Meter Factor
8576
In Progress - Hourly Average - %S&W
8577
In Progress - Batch Average - Viscosity
8578
In Progress - Batch Average - Linear Correction Factor
8579
In Progress - Batch Average - Gross Flowrate
8580
In Progress - Daily Average - Viscosity
8581
In Progress - Daily Average - Linear Correction Factor
8582
In Progress - Daily Average - Gross Flowrate
8583
In Progress - Daily Average - %S&W
8584
In Progress - Daily Average - %S&W
8585
Spare
5.11.8. Previous Batch Quantities

Previous Batch
Quantities - Refers to data
stored at the time of the last
Batch End command. It will
remain valid until the next
batch end. These variables
are floating point duplicates
of integer data at 5n50 area.
These points are for MMI or
SCADA retrieval, not for
Batch Recalculation.
8586
Previous Batch - Gross in Float Format
8587
Previous Batch - Net in Float Format
8588
Previous Batch - Mass in Float Format
8589
Previous Batch - NSV in Float Format
8590
Previous Batch - Net @ 2
nd
Note: See 8501 area for

other Previous Batch data.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
5-27
Chapter 5
5.11.9. Miscellaneous Live or Calculated Data

Turbine/Positive
are considered.
INFO - The indicated data

(8501-8599) refers to Meter
Run #1. The same data is
available for all meter runs at
the following addresses:
Meter Run #1:
8501 through 8599
Meter Run #2:
8601 through 8699
Meter Run #3:
8701 through 8799
Meter Run #4:
8801 through 8899
> 8591
Specific Gravity @ 60F

Calculated Specific Gravity @ 60F using Table 23B when Table 24C is selected.
8592
Spare
8593
Spare
8594
Meter Density
8595
Spare
8596
Spare
8597
Meter Current - %S&W
8598
Meter Current - CSW
8599
Meter Current - VCF @ 2nd Reference Temperature
5.11.10. Station - Previous Batch Average Data
Notes:
8901
Station - Previous Batch n - Average Temperature
>
8902
Station - Previous Batch n - Average Pressure
8903
Station - Previous Batch n - Average Density
8904
Station - Previous Batch n - Average VCF
8905
Station - Previous Batch n - Average CPL
8906
Station - Previous Batch n - Average Meter Factor
8907
Station - Previous Batch n - Average Specific Gravity
8908
Station - Previous Batch n - Average Specific Gravity @ 60 F /

Density @ Reference Temperature

8909
Station - Previous Batch n - Average Density Temperature
8910
Station - Previous Batch n - Average Density Pressure
8911
Station - Previous Batch n - Average Density Correction Factor
8912
Station - Previous Batch n - Average Unfactored Density
8913
Station - Previous Batch n - Average K Factor
8914
Station - Previous Batch n - Average Viscosity
8915
Station - Previous Batch n - Average Linear Correction Factor
8916
Station - Previous Batch n - Average Gross Flowrate
8917
Station - Previous Batch n - Average %S&W
8918
Station - Previous Batch n - Average Equilibrium Pressure
8919
Station - Previous Batch n - Average API @ 60 F
8920
Station - Previous Batch n - Average API
8921
Spare
to
8930
5-28
Spare
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4

Modbus mode.

8931
Station - Previous Daily - Average Temperature
8932
Station - Previous Daily - Average Pressure
8933
Station - Previous Daily - Average Density
8934
Station - Previous Daily - Average VCF
8935
Station - Previous Daily - Average CPL
8936
Station - Previous Daily - Average Meter Factor
8937
Station - Previous Daily - Average Specific Gravity
8938
Station - Previous Daily - Average Specific Gravity @ 60 F / Density

@ Reference Temperature
8939
Station - Previous Daily - Average Density Temperature
8940
Station - Previous Daily - Average Density Pressure
8941
Station - Previous Daily - Average Density Correction factor
8942
Station - Previous Daily - Average Unfactored Density
8943
Station - Previous Daily - Average K Factor
8944
Station - Previous Daily - Average Viscosity
8945
Station - Previous Daily - Average Linear Correction Factor
8946
Station - Previous Daily - Average Gross Flowrate
8947
Station - Previous Daily - Average %S&W
8948
Station - Previous Daily - Average Equilibrium Pressure
8949
Station - Previous Daily - Gross in Float Format
8950
Station - Previous Daily - Net in Float Format
8951
Station - Previous Daily - Mass in Float Format
8952
Station - Previous Daily - NSV in Float Format
8953
Station - Previous Daily - 2nd Net @ Reference Temperature in Float

Format
8954
Station - Previous Daily Average - API
8955
Station - Previous Daily Average - API @ 60 F
8956
Spare
to
8960
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Spare
5-29
Chapter 5
Turbine/Positive
are considered.

8961
Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Temperature
8962
Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Pressure
8963
Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Density
8964
Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - VCF
8965
Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - CPL
8966
Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Meter Factor
8967
Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Specific Gravity
8968
Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - SG60 / Dens @ Ref
8969
Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Density Temp
8970
Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Density Pressure
8971
Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Dens Corr Factor
8972
Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Unfactored Density
8973
Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - K Factor
8974
Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Viscosity
8975
Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - LCF
8976
Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Gross Flowrate
8977
Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - %S&W
8978
Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Equilibrium

Pressure
8979
Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - API60
8980
Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - API
8981
Spare
to
8985
Spare
8986
Station - Previous Batch - Gross in Float Format
8987
Station - Previous Batch - Net in Float Format
8988
Station - Previous Batch - Mass in Float Format
8989
Station - Previous Batch - NSV in Float Format
8990
Station - Previous Batch - Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature
8991
Spare
to
8999
5-30
Spare
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
6. ASCII Text Data Buffers (9001 - 9499)

6.1.
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
INFO - These ASCII text

buffers are accessed using
for reads and 66 for writes.
The index number for each
9000 type variable refers to
the complete text buffer
which may be as big as 8192
bytes. Data is transmitted or
received as multiple
transmissions of 128 byte
packets (see Chapter 6)
Custom Report Templates
These are ASCII text files which serve as a format template for certain printed
reports.
9001
Report Template - Snapshot / Interval
9002
Report Template - Batch
9003
Report Template - Daily
9004
Report Template - Prove
9005
Spare
to
9100
6.2.
Spare
Previous Batch Reports
Copies of the last 8 Batch Reports are stored.

9101
Batch Report - Last
9102
Batch Report - 2nd Last
9103
Batch Report - 3rd Last
9104
Batch Report - 4th Last
9105
9106
Batch Report - 6 Last
9107
Batch Report - 7 Last
9108
9109
Spare
th
th
to
9200
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Spare
6-1
Chapter 6
ASCII Text Data Buffers (9001- 9499)
6.3.
INFO - These ASCII text
buffers are accessed using
for reads and 66 for writes.
The index number for each
9000 type variable refers to
the complete text buffer
which may be as big as 8192
bytes. Data is transmitted or
received as multiple
transmissions of 128 byte
packets (see Chapter 6)
Previous Prove Reports
Copies of the last 8 Prove Reports are stores

9201
Prove Report - Last
9202
Prove Report - 2nd Last
9203
Prove Report - 3rd Last
9204
Prove Report - 4th Last
9205
9206
9207
9208
9209
Spare
to
9300
6.4.
Spare
Previous Daily Reports
Copies of the last 8 Daily Reports are stores

9301
Previous Days Report - Last
9302
Previous Days Report - 2nd Last
9303
Previous Days Report - 3rd Last
9304
Previous Days Report - 4th Last
9305
9306
9307
9308
9309
Spare
to
9400
6.5.
9401
6-2
Spare
Last Snapshot Report

Last Local Snapshot / Interval Report
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
6.6.
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
Miscellaneous Report Buffer
The following buffer is used to retrieve miscellaneous reports. Report data is

loaded into this buffer depending on which bit is written to integer point 15129.
Reports which are retrieved using this buffer are:
o
o
o
o
o
Current Snapshot Report

Alarm Report
Audit Trail Report
Status Report
Product File Report
Text Archive Data defined by integers 15127 and 15128 is also retrieved using
this buffer.
9402
Miscellaneous Report Buffer
9403
Spare
to
13000
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Spare
6-3
Modbus
Volume 4
7. Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001 18999)
CAUTION!
Flow computer configuration

data is especially critical to
the correct operation of the
flow computer. Any
modifications to this data
while operating the flow
computer could cause
unpredictable results which
could cause measurement or
control errors. Users are
encouraged to consult with
before manipulating
configuration data directly via
a serial port or programmable
variable statements.

Turbine/Positive
are considered.
The following data is especially critical to the correct operation of the flow
computer. Any modifications to this data while operating the flow computer
could cause unpredictable results which could cause measurement or control
errors. Users are encouraged to consult with Omni before manipulating
configuration data directly via a serial port or programmable variable
statements.
7.1.
7.1.1.
Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit

Integer Data
Meter Run Configuration Data
13001
Meter Run #1 - Flow I/O Point
13002
Meter Run #1 - Temperature I/O Point
13003
Meter Run #1 - Temperature Type

0=DIN RTD; 1=Amer RTD; 2=4-20mA/Honeywell.
13004
Meter Run #1 - Pressure I/O Point
13005
Meter Run #1 - Density I/O Point
13006
Meter Run #1 - Density Type

1=API; 2=SG; 3=gr/cc; 4=Solartron; 5=Sarasota; 6=UGC.
13007
Meter Run #1 - Density Temperature I/O Point
13008
Meter Run #1 - Density Temperature Type

13009
Meter Run #1 - Density Press I/O Point
13010
Meter Run #1 - Density @ Reference Conditions

0=Flowing; 1=Reference.
13011
Spare
13012
Spare
13013
Meter Run #1 - Flowmeter Dual Pulse Fidelity

0=No; 1=Yes.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
7-1
Chapter 7
Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001- 18999)

13014
CAUTION!

flow computer. Any
before manipulating

to
13023
13024
Spare
13025
Spare
13026
13027
to
13036
13037
Spare
13038
Spare
13039
13040
to
7-2
13049
13050
Spare
13051
Spare
13052
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
7.1.2.
Prover Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data
13053
Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - I/O Point
13054
Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - Type

13055
Prover - Temperature Outlet (Right) - I/O Point
13056
Prover - Temperature Outlet (Right) - Type

13057
Prover - Pressure Inlet (Left) - I/O Point
13058
Prover - Pressure Outlet (Right) - I/O Point
13059
Prover - Plenum Pressure - I/O Point
13060
Prover - Density Temperature - I/O Point
13061
Prover - Density Temperature - Type

13062
Prover - Density Pressure - I/O Point
13063
Gravity Sample Time

Seconds.
13064
Station - Pressure - I/O Point
13065
Station - Density - I/O Point
13066
Station - Density - Type

13067
Station - Density Temperature - I/O Point
13068
Station - Density Temperature - Type

13069
Prover - Density - I/O Point
13070
Prover - Density - Type

Notes:
<
< 13071
Select Pressure Unit

2
0=kpa; 1=Bar; 2= kg/cm .

20/24.71+ w 04/98
13072
Spare
13073
Spare
7-3
Chapter 7
7.1.3.
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
13074
General Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit

Integer Data
Flow Computer Type
0=3000; 1=6000.
13075
Number of A Combo Modules Installed
13076
Number of B Combo Modules Installed
13077
Number of C Combo Modules Installed
13078
Number of Digital Modules Installed
13079
Number of Serial Modules Installed
13080
Number of E Combo Modules Installed
13081
Number of H Combo Modules Installed
13082
Number of ED Combo Modules Installed
13083
Spare
13084
Spare
7.1.4.
13085
Serial Port Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data

Serial Port #1 - Port Type
0=Printer; 1=Modbus.
13086
Serial Port #1 - ID
Read only point which reports back the number of the port you are connected to.
13087
Serial Port #1 - Baud Rate

1200-38400 bps.
13088
Serial Port #1 - Data Bits

7 or 8.
13089
Serial Port #1 - Stop Bits

0, 1 or 2.
13090
Serial Port #1 - Parity

O, E, N.
13091
Serial Port #1 - Transmit Key Delay

0=0hms; 1=50 msec; 2=100 msec; 3=150 msec.
13092
Serial Port #1 - Modbus ID

0-247.
13093
Serial Port #1 - Protocol Type

0=RTU; 1=ASCII; 2=RTU Modem.
13094
Serial Port #1 - Enable CRC Checking

0=No CRC, 1=CRC check.
13095
Serial Port #1 - Modicon Compatible

0=Omni Mode; 1=Modicon 984 Mode.
7-4
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
CAUTION!

flow computer. Any
before manipulating

13096
13097
13098
13099
13100
Serial Port #2 - Transmit Key Delay
13101
Serial Port #2 - Modbus ID
13102
Serial Port #2 - Modbus Mode RTU / ASCII
13103
13104

0=Omni; 1=Modicon 984 compatible.
13105
Spare
to
13107
Spare
13108
13109
13110
13111
13112
Serial Port #3 - Transmit Delay
13113
Serial Port #3 - Modbus or Node ID
13114

0=Modbus RTU; 1=Modbus ASCII; 2=Modbus RTU Modem (Relaxed Timing).
13115
13116
Serial Port #3 - Modicon

Compatible
0=Omni; 1=984 compatible.
13117
Spare
to
13119
Spare
13120
13121
13122
13123
13124
Serial Port #4 - Transmit Delay
13125
13126
Serial Port #4 - Modbus or Node ID
13127

0=Modbus RTU; 1=Modbus ASCII; 2=Modbus RTU Modem (Relaxed Timing); 3=AllenBradley Full Duplex DF1; 4=Allen-Bradley Half Duplex.
13128

0=Omni, 1=984 compatible. If Allen-Bradley Protocol selected above: 0=CRC; 1=BCC
error checking.
20/24.71+ w 04/98
7-5
Chapter 7
7.1.5.
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
Proportional Integral Derivative (PID)

Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data
13129
PID Loop #1 - I/O Point Assignment - Remote Setpoint
13130
PID Loop #1 - Primary Variable
13131
PID Loop #1 - Secondary Variable
13132
PID Loop #1 - Primary Action

0=Forward; 1=Reverse.
13133
PID Loop #1 - Secondary Action

0=Forward; 1=Reverse.
13134
PID Loop #1 - Error Select

0=Low; 1=High.
13135
PID Loop #1 - Startup Mode

0=Last state; 1=Manual.
13136
to
13142
13143
to
13149
13150
to
7-6
13156
13157
I/O Point Assignment - Auxiliary Input #1
13158
13159
13160
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
7.1.6.
CAUTION!
Programmable Logic Controller Configuration 16Bit Integer Data

flow computer. Any
before manipulating

13161
PLC Group #1 - Starting Address

Allen-Bradley PLC-2 Translation Tables.
13162
PLC Group #1 - Index 1
13163
PLC Group #1 - Number of Points 1
13164
13165
13166
13167
13168
13169
13170
13171
13172
13173
13174
13175
13176
13177
13178
13179
13180
13181
13182
13183
13184
13185
13186
13187
13188
13189
13190
13191
13192
13193
13194
13195
to
20/24.71+ w 04/98
13225
13226
7-7
Chapter 7
Turbine/Positive
are considered.

13227
13228
to
13258
13259
13260
13261
to
13271
13272
13273
13274
to
13284
13285
13286
Spare
to
13288
Spare
13289
Mass Pulses - Meter #1

For points 13289-13292: 0=No; 1=Yes.
13290
13291
13292
13293
Input Type - Auxiliary Input #1

For points 13293-13296: 0=DIN; 1=Amer; 2=4-20mA.
13294
13295
13296
13297
Spare
to
13299
7-8
Spare
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
7.1.7.
CAUTION!
Peer-to-Peer Setup Entries 16-Bit Integer Data

flow computer. Any
before manipulating

13300
Current Master ID
Real-time. Shows current peer-to-peer master.
13301
Reserved Register
Debug only.
13302
Transaction #1 - Slave ID
13303
Transaction #1 - Read / Write
13304
Transaction #1 - Source Index
13305
Transaction #1 - Number of Points
13306
Transaction #1 - Destination Index
13307
to
13311
13312
to
13316
13317
to
13321
13322
to
13326
13327
to
13331
13332
to
13336
20/24.71+ w 04/98
7-9
Chapter 7

13337
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
to
13341
13342
to
13346
13347
to
13351
13352
to
13356
13357
to
13361
13362
to
13366
13367
to
13371
13372
to
13376
13377
to
13381
7-10
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
13382
CAUTION!

flow computer. Any
before manipulating

Next Master ID
A non zero entry here turns on peer-to-peer mode.
13383
Last Master ID In Sequence
13384
Retry Timer
Number of 50 msec ticks between retries; default=3.
13385
Activate Redundancy Mode

0=single unit; 1=dual flow computer system.
13386
Number of Decimal Places for Gross & Net Totalizer
13387
Spare
13388
Number of Decimal Places for Mass Totalizer
13389
Spare
13390
Number of Decimal Places for Factors on Batch Report
13391
Number of Decimal Places for Meter Factor on Batch Report
13392
Number of Decimal Places for Factors on Prove Report
13393
Number of Decimal Places for Meter Factor on Prove Report
13394
Spare
13395
Spare
13396
Override Code - Auxiliary Input #1
13397
13398
13399
13400
Spare
13401
Spare
13402
Meter Run #1 - Temperature Damping Factor
13403
Meter Run #1 - Pressure Damping Factor
13404
Meter Run #1 - Density Temp Damping Factor
13405
Meter Run #1 - Density Press Damping Factor
13406
Spare
13407
Spare
13408
to
13411
20/24.71+ w 04/98
7-11
Chapter 7
Turbine/Positive
are considered.

13412
Spare
13413
Spare
13414
to
13417
13418
Spare
13419
Spare
13420
to
13423
13424
Damping Factor - Station - Density Temperature
13425
Damping Factor - Station - Density Pressure
13426
Damping Factor - Prover - Inlet (Left) Temperature
13427
Damping Factor - Prover - Outlet (Right) Temperature
13428
Damping Factor - Prover - Inlet (Left) Pressure
13429
Damping Factor - Prover - Outlet (Right) Pressure
13430
Damping Factor - Plenum Pressure
13431
Damping Factor - Prover - Density Temperature
13432
Damping Factor - Prover - Density Pressure
13433
Damping Factor - Auxiliary Input #1
13434
13435
13436
13437
Spare
to
13449
7-12
Spare
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
CAUTION!

flow computer. Any
before manipulating

13450
Insert Batch Stack - Meter #1
13451
13452
13453
13454
Insert Batch Stack - Station
13455
Delete Batch Stack - Meter #1
13456
13457
13458
13459
Delete Batch Stack - Station
13460
Remote Key Press
13461
Beep Counts
13462
Redundancy - Master PID #1 - Valve Mode

Slave keeps copy of primary units settings in points 13462-13469 in case it becomes
master.
13463
Redundancy - Master PID #1 - Setpoint Mode
13464
13465
13466
13467
13468
13469
13470
Redundancy - Slave PID #1 - Valve Mode
13471
Redundancy - Slave PID #1 - Setpoint Mode
13472
13473
13474
13475
13476
13477
13478
Spare
to
13499
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Spare
7-13
Chapter 7
7.1.8.
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
Raw Data Archive Files 16-Bit Integer Data
The following entries are used to define the record structure of each Raw Data
Archive file:
13500
Archive 701 #1 - Starting Index
13501
Archive 701 #1 - Number of Points
to
13530
13531
Archive 701 #16 - Number of points
13540
13541
to
13570
13571
13580
13581
to
13610
13611
13620
13621
to
13650
13651
13652
Spare
to
13659
Spare
13660
13661
to
7-14
13690
13691
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
CAUTION!

flow computer. Any
before manipulating

13700
13701
to
13730
13731
13740
13741
to
13770
13771
13780
13781
to
13810
13811
13820
13821
to
13850
13851
13860
13861
to
13890
13891
13892
Spare
to
13899
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Spare
7-15
Chapter 7

13900
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
Trigger Boolean - Archive 701

Points 13900-13909 contain the point numbers of the trigger points which cause the data
to be stored when the trigger goes from low to high.
13901
13902
13903
13904
13905
13906
13907
13908
13909
13910
Spare
to
13919
CAUTION!
*13920
Spare
Archive Run ?
0=Stops archiving; 1=Starts archiving.
POTENTIAL FOR DATA

LOSS! Read Archive
documentation before
manipulating points 13920
and 13921.
*13921
Reconfigure Archive?
0=No configuration allowed; 1=Configuration changes allowed.
13930
Archive 711 #1 Starting Index

Points 13930-13961 are dummy read-only points which show the structure of the Alarm
Archive.
13931
Archive 711 #1 Number of Points
to
13960
13961
13962

Points 13962-13993 are dummy read-only points which show the structure of the Audit
Trail.
13963
to
13992
13993
13994
Spare
to
14000
7-16
Spare
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
7.2.
for reads, and 16 for writes.
Note that the index number
for each string refers to the
occupies the space of eight
partial string. Each string
Modicon Compatible
Mode - For the purposes of
still applies.
14001
Flow Computer Configuration 16Character ASCII String Data

Boolean Statement #1025
to
14048
14049
OmniCom - Download Serial Number & File Name
14050
OmniCom - Download PC ID
14051
Variable Statement #7025
to
14098
14099
Spare
14100
Station Total and Flowrate Definition
14101
Comment String (Remarks) - Boolean Statement #1025
to
14148
Comment String (Remarks) - Boolean Statement #1072
14149
Printer Condense Mode String

Points 14149 & 14150 represent the hexadecimal ASCII version of what is actually sent to
the printer.
14150
Printer Uncondensed Mode String
14151
Comment String - Variable Statement #7025
to
14198
14199
Spare
to
14200
Spare
14201
to
14216
20/24.71+ w 04/98
7-17
Chapter 7

14217
CAUTION!

flow computer. Any
before manipulating

for reads, and 16 for writes.
for each string refers to the
occupies the space of eight
partial string. Each string
Modicon Compatible
Mode - For the purposes of
still applies.
Spare
to
14220
Spare
14221
to
14236
14237
Spare
to
14240
Spare
14241
Comment String - Boolean Statement #1073
to
14256
Comment String - Boolean Statement #1088
14257
Spare
to
14260
Spare
14261
to
14276
14277
Spare
to
14300
Spare
14301
Comment String - Assign - Digital to Analog Output #1
to
14312
Comment String - Assign - Digital to Analog Output #12
14321
Comment String - Assign - Digital I/O Point #1
to
14344
7-18
Comment String - Assign - Digital I/O Point #24
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
14360
Comment String - Assign - PID #1 - Primary Variable
14361
Comment String - Assign - PID #1 - Secondary Variable
14362
14363
14364
14365
14366
14367
14380
Comment String - Assign - Front Panel Counter A
14381
Comment String - Assign - Front Panel Counter B
14382
Comment String - Assign - Front Panel Counter C
14383
Spare
to
15000
7.3.
for multiple writes.
for each variable refers to
one complete long integer
which occupies the space of
two 16-bit registers. It must
be accessed as a complete
unit. You cannot read or write
a partial 32-bit integer. Each
Modbus mode.
Modicon Compatible
still applies.
15001
Spare

Long Integer Data
Assign - Analog Output #1
to
15012
Assign - Analog Output #12
15013
Digital Point #1 - Assignment
15014
Digital Point #1 - Timer - Delay On

100 msec ticks.
15015
Digital Point #1 - Timer - Delay Off

100 msec ticks.
15016
Digital Point #1 - Timer - Pulse Width

10 msec ticks.
15017
to
15020
15021
to
20/24.71+ w 04/98
7-19
Chapter 7
CAUTION!

flow computer. Any
before manipulating

Modbus mode.
15024
15025
to
15028
15029
to
15032
15033
to
15036
15037
to
15040
15041
to
15044
15045
to
Modicon Compatible
still applies.
15048
15049
to
15052
15053
to
15056
7-20
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
15057
to
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
15060
15061
to
15064
15065
to
15068
15069
to
15072
15073
to
15076
15077
to
15080
15081
to
15084
15085
to
15088
15089
to
15092
20/24.71+ w 04/98
7-21
Chapter 7

15093
to
CAUTION!

flow computer. Any
before manipulating

Modbus mode.
15096
15097
to
15100
15101
(10msec Ticks)
to
15104
15105
to
15108
15109
Assign - Front Panel Counter A
15110
Assign - Front Panel Counter B
15111
Assign - Front Panel Counter C
15112
Max Comparitor - Error Counts per Batch - Meter #1

Points 15112-15115 represent dual pulse error checks.
15113
15114
15115
15116
Spare
to
Modicon Compatible
still applies.
15119
Spare
15120
Input / Output Status of Digital Points

Real-time, read-only! Indicates which points are inputs (1) and which are outputs (0).
#1=Bit 0; #24=Bit 23.
15121
Spare
15122
On/Off Status of Digital Points

Real-time, read-only! #1=Bit 0; #24=Bit 23: 0 =Off, 1=On.
7-22
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
20/24.71+ w 04/98
15123
Prove Run Number
15124
Proving Meter Number
15125
Prove Counts
7-23
Chapter 7

15126
32-Bit Packed Status Word

Exclusively for OmniCom use (see Bit Layout below).
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
LSB
B0
Not Proving
B16
Flow Rate Unstable
B1
Overtravel Forward
B17
No Prove Permissive
B2
Launch Forward
B18
Prover Seal Not OK
B3
1 Detector
B19
Meter Not Active
B4
In Flight Forward
B20
Piston Downstream
B5
2 Detector
B21
Checking Plenum
B6
Overtravel Reverse
B22
Master Meter Proving
B7
Launch Reverse
B23
Check Stability Master Meter
B8
In Flight Reverse
B24
Spare
B9
Prove Aborted
B25
Spare
B10
Prove Complete
B26
Power Fail Flag
B11
Checking Stability
B27
End Batch #4
B12
Prover/Meter Temp Limits
B28
End Batch #3
B13
Prover Inactivity
B29
End Batch #2
B14
Bad Repeatability
B30
End Batch #1
B15
Prove Temperature Unstable
B31
End Batch Station
st
nd
MSB
15127
Text Archive Data - Number of Days to Retrieve

Exclusively for OmniCom use.
15128
Text Archive Data - Starting Date of Requested

Fix date format (YYDDMM).
15129
32-Bit Command Word #1

LSB
B0
Prove Seal OK
B16
Trial Prove Meter #4
B1
End Batch Station
B17
Abort Prove in Progress
B2
End Batch Meter #1
B18
Send Snapshot to Printer
B3
End Batch Meter #2
B19
Load Snapshot to 9402
B4
End Batch Meter #3
B20
Load Alarms to 9402
B5
End Batch Meter #4
B21
Load Prod File to 9402
B6
Spare
B22
Load Status to 9402
B7
Request Prove Meter #1
B23
Load Audit Trail to 9402
B8
B24
Spare
B9
B25
Spare
B10
B26
Spare
B11
Alarm Acknowledge
B27
Spare
B12
Reset Power Fail Flag
B28
Spare
B13
B29
Spare
B14
B30
Spare
B15
B31
Spare
MSB
7-24
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
15129
CAUTION!

flow computer. Any
before manipulating
LSB

Modbus mode.
Modicon Compatible
still applies.
32-Bit Command Word #2
B0
Decrease PID #1 Setpoint @ 1%

Rate
B16
Decrease PID #1 Valve @ 1%

Rate
B1
Increase PID #1 Setpoint @ 1%

Rate
B17
Increase PID #1 Valve @ 1%

Rate
B2
Decrease PID #1 Setpoint @

0.1% Rate
B18
Decrease PID #1 Valve @ 0.1%

Rate
B3
Increase PID #1 Setpoint @ 0.1%

Rate
B19
Increase PID #1 Valve @ 0.1%

Rate
B4

Rate
B20

Rate
B5

Rate
B21

Rate
B6

0.1% Rate
B22

Rate
B7

Rate
B23

Rate
B8

Rate
B24

Rate
B9

Rate
B25

Rate
B10

0.1% Rate
B26

Rate
B11

Rate
B27

Rate
B12

Rate
B28

Rate
B13

Rate
B29

Rate
B14

0.1% Rate
B30

Rate
B15

Rate
B31

Rate
MSB
15130
Spare
15131
Raw Process Input - Input #1

Real-time, read-only! 1kHz~1mA.
to
15154
Raw Process Input - Input #24
15155
Spare
to
15199
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Spare
7-25
Chapter 7

Archive Data File Size
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
Note:
* Archive Data File Size These variables contain

the number of bytes each
archive file uses within
memory. They are
updated when the
archiving process is
started and memory is
allocated. The maximum
memory that can be
allocated to this group of
variables is a total of
229359 bytes.
Information Only Data!

*
15200
Size of Text - Archive File
15201
Size of Archive - File 701
15202
15203
15204
15205
15206
15207
15208
15209
15210
15211
Spare
15212
Spare
15213
Archive File n Failed

Indicates which archive file failed; e.g.: if archive files 1-4 occupy allocated memory, this
point will read 5 (n=1-10). (See points 2623, 15200-15210, and 15214.)
15214
Total Number of Archive Files Allocated
15215
Spare
to
17000
7-26
Spare
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
7.4.
CAUTION!
17001

IEEE Floating Point Data
Digital-to-Analog - Output #1 - @ 4mA
Engineering units which equal to 0%.

flow computer. Any
before manipulating
17002
17048
Pulses per Unit - Digital I/O #24

Modbus mode.
17049
Pulses per Unit - Counter A
17050
Pulses per Unit - Counter B
17051
Pulses per Unit - Counter C
17052
PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - Low Limit


Engineering units which equal to 100%.
to
17023
17024
17025
Pulses per Unit - Digital I/O #1
to
Setpoint download will be limited to this setting.
17053
PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - High Limit

Setpoint download will be limited to this setting.
17054
17055
PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - @ 4mA

Sets the zero of the controller.
PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - @ 20mA

Sets the maximum span of the controller.
17056
PID #1 - Primary Gain
17057
PID #1 - Primary Repeats/Minute
17058
PID #1 - Secondary Value - @ Zero
17059
PID #1 - Secondary Value - @ Full Scale
17060
PID #1 - Secondary Gain
17061
PID #1 - Secondary Repeats/Minute
17062
PID #1 - Maximum Ramp Up Rate % - p/500 msec
Note:
# Input expected is
Limits rate of valve movement at startup only.
engineering units.
17063
PID #1 - Secondary Setpoint
17064
PID #1 - Maximum Ramp Down Rate % - p/500msec

Limits the rate of valve movement at shutdown only.
17065
PID #1 - Min Output % - To Ramp To

Top-up valve % open.
17066
PID #1 - Deadband %
No change in output if the % error is less than this
20/24.71+ w 04/98
7-27
Chapter 7

17067
Turbine/Positive
are considered.
to
17081
PID #2 - Deadband %
17082
to
17096
PID #3 - Deadband %
17097
to
17111
17112
PID #4 - Deadband %
Output in Percent - Digital to Analog #1

Read-only, Live Value.
to
17123
Output in Percent - Digital to Analog #12

Read-only, Live Value.
17124
Spare
to
17135
Spare
17136
PID #1 - Primary Controlled Variable Value
17137
PID #1 - Secondary Controlled Variable Value
17138
PID #1 - Control Output %
17139
PID #1 - Primary Setpoint Value
17140
PID #1 - Secondary Setpoint Value
17141
Spare
to
17145
Spare
17146
to
17150
7-28
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
17151
Spare
to
CAUTION!

flow computer. Any
before manipulating

Modbus mode.

20/24.71+ w 04/98
17155
Spare
17156
to
17160
17161
Spare
to
17165
Spare
17166
to
17170
17171
Spare
to
17175
Spare
17176
Meter #1 - Full Scale - Gross Flowrate
17177
Meter #1 - Full Scale - Mass Flowrate
Used to scale integer volume flow rate variables 3140 & 3142.
Used to scale integer mass flow rate variable 3144.
17178
Spare
17179
Spare
17180
17181
17182
Spare
17183
Spare
17184
17185
17186
Spare
17187
Spare
7-29
Chapter 7
Turbine/Positive
are considered.

17188
17189
17190
Spare
17191
Spare
17192
Station - Full Scale - Gross
17193
Station - Full Scale - Mass
(Used to scale integer volume flow rate variables 3802 & 3804.
Used to scale integer mass flow rate variable 3806.
17194
Not Use
to
17197
Not Use
17198
Alarm Deadband %
0-5%. Global dead-band applied to all analog alarms. Variable must return this % out of
alarm for alarm to cancel.
17199
Spare
to
17202
Spare
17203
F Factor - Product #1
to
17218
Notes:
<

< 17219
F Factor - Product #16
Reference Temperature - Product #1
to
< 17234
17235
Reference Temperature - Product #16
Spare
to
17259
7-30
Spare
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
CAUTION!

flow computer. Any
before manipulating
17260
Prover - Density/Gravity - Low Limit
17261
Prover - Density/Gravity - High Limit
17262
Prover - Density/Gravity - Override
17263
Prover - Density/Gravity - @ 4mA
17264
Prover - Density/Gravity - @ 20mA
17265
Prover - Density Temperature - Low Limit
to
17269
Prover - Density Temperature - @ 20mA
17270
Prover - Density Pressure - Low Limit
to
Modbus mode.
17274
Prover - Density Pressure - @ 20mA
17275
Prover - Density Correction Factor A
17276
Prover - Densitometer - Constant #1

K0/D0.
17277

K1/T0.
17278

K2/Tcoef.
17279
17280
17281
17282
17283
17284
K18/Tcal/Tc.
K19/Pcoef/Kt1.

K20A/Pcal/Kt2.
K20B/Kt3.

densitometers.

K21A/Pc.

K21B/Kp1.
Note:
17285

Kr. (For UGC densitometers: Kr/Kp2.)
17286

Kj. (For UGC densitometers: Kj/Kp3.)
17287
Prover - Density Correction Factor B
17288
Reserved
to
17379
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Reserved
7-31
Chapter 7
Turbine/Positive
are considered.

17380
Auxiliary Input #1 - Low limit
17381
Auxiliary Input #1 - High Limit
17382
Auxiliary Input #1 - Override Value
17383
Auxiliary Input #1 - @ 4mA
17384
17385
to
17389
17390
to
17394
17395
to
17399
17400
Spare
to
17500
Spare
17501
Meter #1 - K Factor #1
See 3122 for matching flow frequency entry.
17502
17503
17504
17505
17506
17507
17508
17509
17510
17511
17512
17513
Spare
to
17600
7-32
Spare
20/24.71+ w 04/98
Modbus
Volume 4
17601
CAUTION!
to

flow computer. Any
before manipulating
17612
17613
Spare
to
17700
Spare
17701
to

Modbus mode.
17712
17713
Spare
to
17800
Spare
17801
to

17812
17813
Spare
to
17899
Spare
17900
Reserved
to
These addresses are

reserved for product
development.
Reserved
18175
Reserved
to
Note:
18174
20000
Reserved
20001
Reserved
to
20/24.71+ w 04/98
49999
Reserved
7-33
Volume 4d
Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers

1815
Any System Alarm
1816
Application Revisions
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
database corresponds to
23.71/27.71 for
Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow
Metering Systems. Both US
and metric unit versions are
considered.
1817

1818
Gas Chromatograph - Failure

Gas chromatograph fatal error received.
1819
Gas Chromatograph - Mol% - Override in Use
1820
Gas Chromatograph - Communication Alarm
Mol% overrides in product area being used.

Communication lost with gas chromatograph.
1821
Spare
to
1826
Spare
1827

See point 1760.
Note:
1828
Day Start Flag
1829
Power Fail Flag
1830

time.

Reports may be lost if 32K spooling buffer overflows due to the printer being off-line
or jammed with paper.
1831
Hour Start Flag
1832
Week Start Flag

1833
Month Start Flag
1834
Year Start Flag
1835
1836
Snapshot Printed

1837
EPROM Error Flag

1838

1839
23/27.71+ 05/98
Spare
1-11
Chapter 1

05 for single point writes
and 15 for multiple bit
writes. Boolean data is
packed 8 points to a byte
when reading.

~
1840
1841

1842

appropriate transaction. If a slave is involved in multiple transactions which fail, only
the first will be flagged.
to
1857
1858
1859
1860
Notes:

maximum number of
Format: 00:00:00.
1861

st
Format: 00:00:00 Jan 1 .

time.
1862
Reference Specific Gravity - Transducer Failed Low
1863
Reference Specific Gravity - Low Alarm
1864
Reference Specific Gravity - High Alarm
1865
Reference Specific Gravity - Transducer Failed High
1866
Mol% Nitrogen - Transducer Failed Low
to
1869
Mol% Nitrogen - Transducer Failed High
1870
Mol% Carbon Dioxide - Transducer Failed Low
to
1873
Mol% Carbon Dioxide - Transducer Failed High
1874
Heating Value - Transducer Failed Low
to
1877
Heating Value - Transducer Failed High
1878

1879

1880

1-12
1881
Spare
1882
Spare
23/27.71+ 05/98
Volume 4d
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.

1883
1884
1885
1886
1887
to
1890
1891
Note:

used to conditionally
print appropriate
information messages
on the batch and daily
reports.
to
1894
1895
to
1898
1899
Spare
to
2000
23/27.71+ 05/98
Spare
1-13
Chapter 1
1.3.9.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Note: The In Progress

flags are those which the
flow computer uses when
printing the reports on the
connected printer.
Use the Previous flags if
the report is being printed
by another device such as a
after it prints the local
report.
1-14
Meter Totalizer Roll-over Flags
conditionally print characters (usually **) in front of the totalizer which has rolled
on the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni Custom Report Template
will show how this is accomplished. The second digit of the index number
defines the number of the meter run. See also points at 2801 for station versions
of these flags.
2n01
2n02
Batch In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n03
2n04
Batch In Progress - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n05
2n06
Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n07
2n08
Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n09
2n10
Daily In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n11
2n12
Daily In Progress - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n13
2n14
Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n15
2n16
Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n17
Previous Batch - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n18
Previous Batch - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n19
Previous Batch - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n20
Previous Batch - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n21
Previous Batch - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n22
Previous Batch - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n23
Previous Batch - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n24
Previous Batch - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n25
2n26
Previous Daily - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n27
2n28
Previous Daily - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
23/27.71+ 05/98
Volume 4d

2n29

when reading.
2n30
Previous Daily - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

rd
2n40
Spare
2n41
Meter Hourly Archive Trigger Flag
2n42
Spare
2n31
2n32
Previous Daily - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n33
Spare
to

to
2n99
Spare
2500
Spare
to
2600
23/27.71+ 05/98
Spare
1-15
Chapter 1

Points
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
rather than function code
03.
2601
Override in Use - Auxiliary Input #1
2602
2603
2604
2605
Override in Use - Reference Specific Gravity
2606
Override in Use - % Nitrogen Transducer
2607
Override in Use - % Carbon Dioxide Transducer
2608
Override in Use - Heating Value Transducer
2620

2621

True after power up or system reset, clears when reset power fail command is set
(1713).
2622

On means that spring adjustment was made. Off means autumn adjustment was
made.
2623

0=Ok; 1=Fail.
2624
Spare
to
2700
1-16
Spare
23/27.71+ 05/98
Volume 4d

when reading.

rd
when communicating via VSAT satellite systems where operating cost is directly
proportional to RF bandwidth used.
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712

the other.
2713
2714
Assigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers master status (see
2864).
2715
2716

23/27.71+ 05/98
1-17
Chapter 1
1.3.13. Boolean Status Points Used for Meter Tube

Switching
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Status inputs and outputs are required to achieve the automatic meter tube
switching function. The command input points below are used to interface to
motor-operated valve (MOV) limit switch signals and allow the user to take an
MOV out of service. See 2877 to 2896 for points needed to send MOV open
and close commands.
2717
Meter #1- MOV - Open Status

Must be activated when the MOV is fully open.
rather than function code
03.
How the MOV Limit

Switches are Interpreted 2717=On
2717=Off
2717=Off
2717=On
2718=Off Open
2718=On Closed
2718=Off Travel
2718=On Illegal
2718
Meter #1 - MOV - Closed Status
2719
Meter #1 - MOV - In Service Command / Status
Must be activated when the MOV is fully closed.

Read/Write point used to remove an MOV from service. The flow computer also
controls this point. Level sensitive.
2720
Meter #2 - MOV - Open Status
2721
2722
Meter #2 - MOV - In Service Status
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
Spare
to
2732
Spare
1.3.14. Archive Trigger Commands

2733
Archive Trigger Command - Meter #1
2734
2735
2736
2737
Spare
The archive trigger commands will trigger Point 2n41 Meter Hourly Archive Flag.
to
2800
1-18
Spare
23/27.71+ 05/98
Volume 4d

when reading.

rd


printer.
Use the Previous flags if
the report is being printed
by another device such as
an SCADA or MMI. This is
after it prints the local
report.
23/27.71+ 05/98
conditionally print characters (usually ** ) in front of the totalizer which has rolled
on the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni Custom Report Template
will show how this is accomplished. See also points at 2n01 for meter run
versions of flags.
2801
2802
Batch In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2803
2804
Batch In Progress - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2805
2806
Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2807
2808
Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2809
2810
Daily In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2811
2812
Daily In Progress - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2813
2814
Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2815
2816
Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2817
Previous Batch - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2818
Previous Batch - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2819
Previous Batch - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2820
Previous Batch - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2821
2822
Previous - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2823
2824
Previous - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2825
2826
Previous Daily - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2827
2828
Previous Daily - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
1-19
Chapter 1
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.

2829
2830
Previous Daily - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2831
2832

Previous Daily - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag
2833
Spare
to
2857
Spare

2858
Print 0 Decimal Place for Gross Totalizer
2859
Print 1 Decimal Place for Gross Totalizer
2860
Print 2 Decimal Places for Gross Totalizer
2861
Print 3 Decimal Places for Gross Totalizer
2862
Spare

Computer Systems
2863
Watchdog Status Out

Normally High Watchdog. Monitored by other flow computer in a redundant system
(see 2713).
2864
Master Status
2714).
1-20
2865
2866
2867
2868
2869
Print 0 Decimal Place for Net Totalizer
2870
Print 1 Decimal Place for Net Totalizer
2871
Print 2 Decimal Places for Net Totalizer
2872
Print 3 Decimal Places for Net Totalizer
23/27.71+ 05/98
Volume 4d

when reading.

2873
Print 0 Decimal Place for Energy Totalizer
2874
Print 1 Decimal Place for Energy Totalizer
2875
Print 2 Decimal Places for Energy Totalizer
2876
Print 3 Decimal Places for Energy Totalizer
1.3.19. Boolean Command Outputs and Status Points

Used For Meter Tube Switching
Status inputs and outputs are required to achieve the automatic meter tube
switching function. The command output points below are used to open and
close the motor-operated valve (MOV). Alarm points are also provided which
indicate MOV problems. See 2717 for points needed to interface to the MOV
limit switches.
2877
Meter #1 - Open MOV - Command Out
2878
Meter #1 - Close MOV - Command Out
Activates to open MOV.

Activates to close MOV.
2879
Meter #1 - MOV - Alarm Out
2880
Meter #1 - Time-out Alarm - Opening MOV
2881
Meter #1 - Time-out Alarm - Closing MOV
MOV limit switches are indicating an illegal valve position.

MOV took too long opening.
MOV took too long closing.
MOV Alarms: Any MOV

alarm will cause the flow
computer to take the MOV
out of service (see 2719)
and send a close MOV
command.
2882
to
2886
2887
to
2891
2892
to
2896
2897
Spare
to
3000
23/27.71+ 05/98
Spare
1-21
Volume 4d
2. 16-Bit Integer Data (3001 - 3999)

2.1.
2.1.1.
Custom Data Packet Definition Variables

below.
3001
3002
to
3039
3040
2.1.2.
The 16-bit integers needed to define the 8 groups of data that make up Custom
Data Packet #2 which is accessed at database Index 0201 are listed below.
3041
3042
to
3055
3056
2.1.3.
below.
3057
3058
to
23/27.71+ 05/98
3095
3096
2-1
Chapter 2
2.2.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data
3097
Spare
3098
Number of Totalizer Digits

Totalizers roll at: 0=9 digits; 1=8 digits.
3099
Spare
3100
Spare
2.3.
example: 3106 is the 'Meter Active Frequency' for Meter Run # 1. The same
3n01
Override Code - Temperature

For points 3n01-3n05: 0=Never use; 1=Always use; 2=Use if transmitter fails; 3=If
transmitter fails use last hours average.
3n02
Override Code - Pressure
3n03
Override Code - Gravity/Density
3n04
3n05
3n06
Active Threshold Hz
Point 1n05 is set when flow pulses exceed this frequency.
3n07
Use Transducer Density
3n08
Turbine or Differential Pressure
3n09
Override Code - Differential Pressure
3n10
Static Pressure - Location Select
3n11
AGA 8 - Method Selection
3n12
Orifice Taps
3n13
Disable Downstream/Upstream Temperature - Isentropic Correction
0=Use equation; 1=Use transducer.

0=Use differential pressure; 1=Use turbine meter.
0=Upstream; 1=Downstream.
1 to 3=1994; 4 to 6=1992; 7 to 12=1985
0=Flange; 1=Pipe; 2=Corner taps; 3=D&D/2; 4=Nozzle; 5 & 6= Venturi
Note:
0=No; 1=Yes.
# Downstream
temperature can be
corrected to upstream
conditions assuming an
isentropic expansion
after the orifice. Default
is Disable because
AGA 3 / API 14.3 DO
NOT mandate this
correction.
2-2
3n14
Product Number Select
3n15
Gas Chromatograph Analyzer - Stream Number Selection
3n16
Spare
1 to 4.
23/27.71+ 05/98
Volume 4d

3n17
Hour in Progress - Flow Time

500msec ticks (0-7200).

3n18
Last Hours - Flow Time

500msec ticks (0-7200).
3n19
PID Control Mode
3n20
Setpoint Mode
Do not write if 3n20 is 1. 1=Manual; 0=Auto.

Read only. DO NOT WRITE! 1=Local; 0=Remote.
3n21
PID Loop Status

Read only. 1=Secondary; 0=Primary.
3n22

For points 3n22-3n33, see the 17500 area for matching K-Factors.
3n23
3n24
3n25
3n26
3n27
3n28
3n29
3n30
3n31
3n32
3n33
3n34
Comparitor Error Threshold

When dual pulse error checking enabled only.
Notes:
17176 through 17189.
Values expressed as
tenth percent
increments;. i.e., 1000
represents 100.0%
~ 2s complement numbers
based on the 4-20 mA
spans. Values are
expressed as
tenth percent
increments; i.e., 1000
equals 100.0 %.
23/27.71+ 05/98
Spare
3n36
Meter Run - Flow Time - Hours Since Day Start
3n37
Meter Run - Flow Time - Minutes Since Day Start
3n38
Meter Run - Flow Time - Hours Previous Day
3n39
Meter Run - Flow Time - Minutes Previous Day
3n40
Current Net Flowrate
3n41
Net Totalizer
3n42
* Unsigned integer
based. They roll at
65536.
3n35
3n43
Gross Total
3n44
3n45
Mass Total
3n46
Current Meter Run Pressure
3n47
Current Meter Run Temperature
3n48
Current Transducer Density/Gravity
3n49
Energy Flowrate
3n50
Energy Total
2-3
Chapter 2
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.

3n51
Applied Automation - Gas Chromatograph Status
3n52
Applied Automation - Gas Chromatograph Alarm Code
3n53
Spare
to
3n99
Spare
3500
Spare
2.4.
Scratchpad 16-Bit Integer Data
Ninety-nine integer registers are provided for user scratch pad. These registers
are typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peer-to-peer
operations or similar operations.
3501
to
2-4
3599
3600
Spare
23/27.71+ 05/98
Volume 4d
2.5.
The 16-bit integers needed to define the variables that appear in the eight User
Displays are listed below. Look in the 4601 area for string associated with setting
up User Displays.
2.5.1.
3601

3602
3603
3604
3605
3606
3607
3608
2.5.2.

st
3609
Database Index Number of 1 Variable
3610
3611
3612
3613
3614
3615
3616
2.5.3.
23/27.71+ 05/98
User Display Definition Variables
th

st
3617
3618
3619
3620
3621
3622
3623
3624
th
2-5
Chapter 2
2.5.4.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
3625
st
3626
3627
3628
3629
3630
3631
3632
2.5.5.
3633
th

st
3634
3635
3636
3637
3638
3639
3640
2.5.6.
3641
2-6
th

st
3642
3643
3644
3645
3646
3647
3648
th
23/27.71+ 05/98
Volume 4d
2.5.7.
3649
st
3650
3651
3652
3653
3654
3655
3656
2.5.8.
3657
23/27.71+ 05/98
th

st
3658
3659
3660
3661
3662
3663
3664
th
2-7
Chapter 2
2.6.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Data Used to Access the Raw Data

Archive Records
See the chapter describing how to use the raw data archiving features of the flow
computer including how to manipulate the pointers below.
3701
3702

3703

3704

3705
3706

3707
3708
3709

3710
3711
3712

3713
3714

3715

3716

3717
3718

2-8
23/27.71+ 05/98
Volume 4d


3719
3720
3721

3722
3723
3724

3725
3726

3727

3728

3729
3730

3731
3732
3733

3734
3735

3736

23/27.71+ 05/98
2-9
Chapter 2
2.7.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
3737
More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data

Archive File System - Memory Allocation Status
0=OK; 1=Allocation Error.
3738
Spare
to
3750
Spare
3751
Run Switching in Auto Mode
3752
Run Switching Timer
0=No; 1=Yes.
Seconds allowed for flow to settle during MOV operations.
3753
Spare
to
3768
Spare
3769
Number of Historical Alarms to Modbus Buffer

Used by OmniCom when reading the Historical Alarm Report. OmniCom first writes to
this variable the number of historical alarm events to be included on the report.
2-10
23/27.71+ 05/98
Volume 4d
2.8.
Gas Chromatograph 16-Bit Integer Data
The data points below are used to map the component order of the GC analysis
to the component order needed by AGA8.
3770 Component # n for % Methane
3771 Component # n for % Nitrogen
3772 Component # n for % Carbon Dioxide
3773 Component # n for % Ethane
3774 Component # n for % Propane
3775 Component # n for % Water
3776 Component # n for % Hydrogen Sulfide
3777 Component # n for % Hydrogen
3778 Component # n for % Carbon Monoxide
3779 Component # n for % Oxygen
3780 Component # n for % i-Butane
3781 Component # n for % n-Butane
3782 Component # n for % i-Pentane
3783 Component # n for % n-Pentane
3784 Component # n for % n-Hexane
3785 Component # n for % n-Heptane
3786 Component # n for % n-Octane
3787 Component # n for % n-Nonane
3788 Component # n for % n-Decane
3789 Component # n for % Helium
3790 Component # n for % Argon
3791 Component # n for Heating Value
3792 Component # n for Reference Specific Gravity
3793
Spare
to
3799
23/27.71+ 05/98
Spare
2-11
Chapter 2
2.9.
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Notes:
* Unsigned integer
based. They roll at
65536.
3800
Meter Station 16-Bit Integer Data

Special Diagnostic Function
Used to enable rigorous Audit Trail reporting of all serial port transactions (see side
bar note).
3801
Spare
3802
Current Net Flowrate
3803
Net Totalizer
3804
3805
Gross Totalizer
3806
3807
Mass Totalizer
3808
Spare
~ To avoid flushing the

audit trail, audit events
other than complete
downloads to the flow
computer are usually not
documented in the audit
trail unless serial port
passwords have been
enabled. If pass-words
are enabled, the target
address is recorded for
single point writes.
Rigorous auditing of a
serial port or group of
serial ports can be
activated by placing the
appropriate hexadecimal
code in 3800 (S = Serial
Port):
000A = Audit S1
00A0 = Audit S2
0A00 = Audit S3
A000 = Audit S4
To monitor multiple
ports; e.g:
A0 A0 = Audit S4 & S2
17176 through 17189.
Values expressed as
tenth percent
increments. i.e. 1000
represents 100.0% . No
over range or under
range checking is done.
to
3810
Spare
3811
Current Energy Flowrate
3812
Energy Totalizer
3813
Fluid Type Select - Product #1
3814
3815
3816
3817
AGA 8 Method Select - Product #1
3818
3819
3820
3821
Heating Value Method Select - Product #1
3822
3823
3824
3825
Spare
0=AGA 5; 1=GPA 2172-96
to
3828
2-12
Spare
23/27.71+ 05/98
Volume 4d


3829
Flow Average Factor
3830
Print Priority
3831
Number of Nulls After CR
3832
Print Interval in Minutes
Number of 500 msec calculation cycles to average.

0=Not sharing a printer; 1=Master; n=slaves 2-12.
Used to slow data to a printer if no hardware handshake.
Time interval between automatic snapshot reports.
3833
Automatic - Weekly Batch Select
3834
Automatic - Monthly Batch Select
0=None; 1=Monday; 7=Sunday.

st
0=None; 1=1 day of the month.
3835
Automatic - Hourly Batch Select

0=No; 1=Yes.
3836
Default Report Templates

0=Custom templates; 1=Default reports.
3837
Gas Chromatograph Analyzer - Type Select
3838
Clear Daily @ Batch End Select
0=Applied Automation; 1=Danalyzer.

0=24hr Totals; 1=Cleared at batch end.
3839
Analyzer Number
3840
Gas Chromatograph - Result Interval
3841
Gas Chromatograph - Listen Only Mode
ID Used in communications
Will ask gas chromatograph for data if no new result sent within this many minutes.
0=Be master; 1=Be slave - listen only.
3842
Select Date Type

Selects date format: 0=dd/mm/yy; 1=mm/dd/yy.
23/27.71+ 05/98
2-13
Chapter 2
2.10. Danalyzer Gas Chromatograph Data

23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
INFO - The addresses on

the right (3047-3057) are
the corresponding
addresses in the Danalyzer.
3843
Danalyzer - Alarm Word - 3046

For point 3843-3854, see Danalyzer documentation for complete details about
mapping of alarm registers. Critical alarms in this register.
3844
3845
3846
3847
3848
3849
3850
3851
3852
3853
3854
3855
Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Month
3856
Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Day
3857
Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Year
3858
Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Hour
3859
Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Minute
3860
Spare
Critical alarms in this register.
Points 3855-3859 represent the time and date when the last analysis was started.
to
3866
2-14
Spare
23/27.71+ 05/98
Volume 4d
2.11. Flow Computer Time and Date Variables

Time and date can be read and written here. See also 4847 and 4848.
3867
Current - Hour
0-23.
3868
Current - Minute
3869
Current - Second
3870
Current - Month
0-59.
0-59.
1-12.
3871
Current - Day of Month

1-31.
3872
Current - Year
3873
Current - Day of Week
3874
Disable Daily Report
0-99; Year 2000=00.

Read only. 1=Monday; 7=Sunday.
0=print daily report; 1=no daily report.
23/27.71+ 05/98
2-15
Chapter 2
2.12. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data

23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
3875
Spare
to
3879
Spare
3880
Override Code - Reference Specific Gravity
3881
Override Code - Nitrogen
3882
Override Code - Carbon Dioxide
3883
Override Code - Heating Value
3884
Override Code - Gas Chromatograph
3885
Spare
to
4000
2-16
Spare
23/27.71+ 05/98
Volume 4d
3. 8-Character ASCII String Data (4001 - 4999)

3.1.
variables are accessed
using Modbus function
codes 03 for all reads and
16 for all writes.

accessed as a complete
unit. You cannot read or
write a partial string. Each
point counts as one point in
the normal Omni Modbus
mode.
Modicon Compatible
starting address of the
string still applies.
Meter Run ASCII String Data
example: 4114 is the 'Meter ID' for Meter Run #1. The same point for Meter Run
#4 would be 4414. Each ASCII string is 8 characters occupying the equivalent of
4 short integer registers (see the side bar comments).
4n01
Running Batch - Start Date
4n02
Running Batch - Start Time
4n03
Batch End - Date
4n04
Batch End - Time
4n05
Running Product Name
4n06
Current - Calculation Mode

Algorithm set used, in string format.
4n07
Spare
4n08
Spare
4n09
Meter Factor Used in Net / Mass

Used on reports. It contains Yes or No. Characters 1-8.
4n10
Spare
4n11
Meter - Serial Number
4n12
Meter - Size
4n13
Meter - Model
4n14
Meter - ID
4n15
Flow Meter Tag / Low Range Tag - Differential Pressure
4n16
Differential Pressure - High Range Tag
4n17
Transmitter Tag - Temperature
4n18
Transmitter Tag - Pressure
4n19
Transmitter Tag - Densitometer
Note:
# Last batch end for this

meter run.
23/27.71+ 05/98
4n20
Transmitter Tag - Density Temperature
4n21
Transmitter Tag - Density Pressure
4n22
Output Tag - PID Control
3-1
Chapter 3

4n23
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
Spare
to
4n99
Spare
4500
Spare
3.2.
Scratch Pad ASCII String Data
Storage for ninety-nine ASCII strings is provided for user scratch pad. These
registers are typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peerto-peer operations or similar operations.
4501
to
4599
3.3.
User Display Definition String Variables
The string variables which define the descriptor tags that appear in the eight
User Displays and the key press combinations which recall the displays are
listed below.
INFO - See 3601 area for
more data points needed to
setup the user displays.
4601
4602
4603
4604
4605
to
4632
4633
to
4640
4641
Spare
to
4706
3-2
Spare
23/27.71+ 05/98
Volume 4d
3.4.
variables are accessed
using Modbus function
codes 03 for all reads and
16 for all writes.

accessed as a complete
unit. You cannot read or
write a partial string. Each
point counts as one point in
the normal Omni Modbus
mode.
Modicon Compatible
starting address of the
string still applies.
4707
String Variables Associated with the

Station Auxiliary Inputs
to
4710
4711
Spare
to
4806
3.5.
Spare
Meter Station 8-Character ASCII String

Data
4807
Date of Last Database Change
4808
Time of Last Database Change
4809
Reserved
4810
Esc Sequence to Print Condensed
Updated each time the Audit Trail is updated.
4811
Esc Sequence to Print Normal

4812
Daylight Savings Starts

4813
Daylight Savings Ends

4814
Spare
4815
Station - ID
4816
Spare
4817
Spare
4818
Print Interval Timer Start Time

4819
Time to Print Daily Report

23/27.71+ 05/98
3-3
Chapter 3
23.71+ & 27.71+ - This
23.71/27.71 for
considered.
4820
Product #1 - Name
4821
Product #1 - Name
4822
Product #1 - Name
4823
Product #4 - Name
4824
Spare
to
4831
Spare
4832
Reference Specific Gravity Tag
4833
Nitrogen Tag
4834
Carbon Dioxide Tag
4835
Heating Value Tag
4836
Flow Computer ID
4837
Company Name
4838
Company Name
Characters 1-8.
Characters 9-16.
4839
Company Name
Characters 17-24.
4840
Company Name
4841
Company Name
4842
Station Location
4843
Station Location
Characters 25-32.
Characters 1-8.
Characters 9-16.
4844
Station Location
4845
Station Location
4846
Station Location
4847
Current Date
4848
Current Time
Characters 17-24.
Characters 25-32.
Note:
Point 3842 selects date format (see also 3870-3872).
* The flow computer time

and date can be set by
writing to these ASCII
variables. Be sure to
include the colons ( : ) in
the time string and the
slashes ( / ) in the date
string.
See also 3867-3869.
4849
Software Version Number
4850
Online Password / EPROM Checksum
Example: 23.71
Dual function point. Write password. Read provides EPROM Checksum.
4851
Spare
to
5000
3-4
Spare
23/27.71+ 05/98

,lk

TB: 960701
Overview of OmniCom Configuration PC Software
TB: 960702
Communicating with Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers
TB: 960703
Storing Archive Data within the Flow Computer
TB: 960704
Communicating with Honeywell ST3000 Smart Transmitters
TB: 970701
Stability Requirements: Final Calibration of Flow Computer
TB: 970702
Secondary Totalizers Provide Net Volume at Temp. Other than 15C or 60F
TB: 970801
Using Boolean Statements to Provide Custom Alarms in the Flow Computer
TB: 970802
Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database: Overview
TB: 970803
Meter Factor Linearization
TB: 970804
Calculation of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy: Using Gas Chromatograph,
Product Overrides or Live 4-20mA Analyzer Inputs of SG and HV
TB: 970901
Dual Pulse Flowmeter Pulse Fidelity Checking
TB: 980201
Communicating with Honeywell TDC3000 Systems
TB: 980202
Recalculating a Previous Batch within the Flow Computer
TB: 980301
Replacing EPROM Chips
TB: 980401
Peer-to-Peer Basics
TB: 980402
Using the Peer-to-Peer Function in a Redundant Flow Computer Application
TB: 980501
Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Sensor Interface Issues
TB: 980503
Serial I/O Modules: Installation Options
Date: 07
23
96
Author(s): Kenneth D. Elliott
TB # 960701
Overview of OmniCom Configuration PC

Software
Contents
User Manual Reference This technical bulletin
complements the
information contained in
Volume 3, Chapter 2 Flow
Computer Configuration,
and is applicable to all
firmware revisions.
This bulletin was previously
published as an appendix to
user manuals of firmware
revisions Version .70 and
earlier.
OmniCom Configuration
PC Software - This
powerful software package
allows you to setup, copy or
modify, and save to disk
entire configurations for
Omni flow computers. It
also allows you to create
custom reports and
displays. You can work
online, offline and remotely.
Scope....................................................................................................................2
Abstract ................................................................................................................2
Configuring the Flow Computer ........................................................................2
Report Configurator ............................................................................................3
Operations Utilities and Help .............................................................................3
Dial-up Access.....................................................................................................3
Passwords Using OmniCom ..............................................................................3
Local Keypad Access .................................................................................................... 4
Changing Passwords at the Keypad ............................................................................. 4
Setting Up the Initial 'Level B' and 'Level C' Passwords for each Modbus Port............. 5
Maintaining the Modbus Port Password Using OmniCom ........................................... 5
Disabling Modbus Port Passwords................................................................................ 6
Getting Started ....................................................................................................6

Installation Requirements.............................................................................................. 6
Installation Procedure.................................................................................................... 6
Opening a File ............................................................................................................... 7
View............................................................................................................................... 7
Off-line ........................................................................................................................... 7
On-line ........................................................................................................................... 7
Reports .......................................................................................................................... 8
Utilities........................................................................................................................... 8
I/O Point Assignment List ........................................................................................................ 8
OmniCom Setup ................................................................................................................... 8
OmniCom Application ............................................................................................................ 9
Archive Start/Stop Command .................................................................................................. 9
Prover Commands..................................................................................................................10
Diagnostics.............................................................................................................................10
Omni Front Panel Emulator ....................................................................................................10
Help ............................................................................................................................. 10
Registration of License and Software Support ............................................................ 11
TB-960701 ALL REVS
Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 Flow Computers
Technical Bulletin
Scope
OmniCom Software is compatible with all firmware revisions of Omni
6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers. It is installed in a personal computer from
which you can configure your flow computer.
Abstract
OmniCom is a simple-to-use yet sophisticated PC-based configuration program
that can be used to setup, copy or modify, and save to disk entire configurations
for Omni flow computers. You can also select custom report options and modify
report templates and Omni display screens that are resident within the program,
or create new ones. These can then be uploaded to the flow computer. Default
reports provide standard data and formats for most requirements.
Major application programming has already been developed by Omni and is
resident in EPROM. This is of particular importance in custody transfer
measurement contracts. They require that the relevant API, AGA, GPA or ISO
standards are fully implemented and not exposed to tampering.
The OmniCom program allows you to develop your own system requirements by
a simple process of menu selection and table completion. This replicates the
data entry tables which can be accessed through the front panel keypad of your
Omni Flow Computer.
Configuring the Flow Computer

For Further Help - If you
require further help, call
Omnis technical support at:
+1-281-240-6161
Configuring the flow computer involves specifying what transducers are going to
be used, their calibrated ranges and the physical I/O points being assigned.
Other data needed by the flow computer relates to the flowing product to be
measured, the type of calculations to be used, and communication and control
features.
You will usually configure the flow computer in the Off-line Mode and then upload
your data. You do not have to be connected to the flow computer at this time.
You will usually go to the Online Menu only when you need to communicate
directly with the flow computer. Any changes made are immediately reflected in
the flow computer.
TB-960701 ALL REVS
TB-960701
Report Configurator
One of OmniCom's indispensable features is the ability to reformat default
reports by using OmniCom's report templates. This is the ONLY feature not
available through the front panel keypad. Any variable defined in the Modbus
database, or programmed as a variable can be inserted into a report with
accompanying text. Reports can be created in languages other than English to
suit local needs.
Operations Utilities and Help

Accessing Help in
OmniCom - At the 'Using
Help' feature, press [Enter]
and [F1] for editing
keystrokes.

+1-281-240-6161
Operational tools such as remotely proving meters, and reading hardware

diagnostics are provided. Diagrams are also provided for communications cable
hook-up. Application Programs and PC Setup for OmniCom can also be
selected. As you work through the entries, you will find entry-sensitive Help that
explains the meaning of the particular entry. Whether at the flow computer
keypad or at a PC there is always assistance.
Dial-up Access
Omni Flow Computers encourages the installation of a telephone dial-up modem
as a ready means of providing installation and maintenance support for
customer and vendor alike. Serial communication passwords provide enhanced
security. Three levels of password pre-exist within Omni flow computers to
provide privileged or restricted access to critical configuration and calibration
data.
The OmniCom program allows you to upload/download data to and from the flow
computer in an on-line mode at a range of baud rates by direct-wire or by
telephone dial-up modem access. This is particularly useful when the flow
computer is in use. Occasionally, you will want to modify configuration or
calibration data, or just monitor activity. You can do all this without interfering
with pipeline or process operations or with communication links to host SCADA
or DCS systems.
Passwords Using OmniCom

Except when changing transducer high/low alarm limits, a password is usually
asked for when changing the configuration data within the computer.
The flow computer has independent password protection of the following:
INFO - For Firmware
Revisions 70+, Physical
Serial Port #1 is selectable
as a Modbus RTU, Modbus
RTU (modem), or printer
port. This serial port on
previous revisions was only
a printer port.
TB-960701 ALL REVS
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Local Keypad access

Modbus Port #1 (Physical serial Port #1)
Technical Bulletin
Local Keypad Access

Three password levels are provided:
a) Privileged Level - Allows complete access to all entries within the flow
computer including keypad passwords (b) and (c) below. The initial
privileged password for each Modbus port is selected via this password
level.
b) Level 1 - This level allows technician access to most entries within the
flow computer with the exception of I/O Points assignments,
programmable variables and Boolean statements and passwords other
than Keypad level 1.
c) Level 1A - Allows access to the following entries:
Meter factors and K Factors
Densitometer correction factors (pycnometer factor)
d) Level 2 - Allows access to the operator type entries. These entries
include:
Transducer manual overrides
Product gravity overrides
Prover operations
Batching operations
Changing Passwords at the Keypad

1) At the keypad press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter]
2) With the cursor blinking on 'Misc Configuration' press [Enter]
3) With the cursor blinking on 'Password Main?'
press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter]
4) Enter the 'Privileged Level' Password (up to 6 characters) press [Enter]
5) The 'Level 1',Level 1A and 'Level 2' passwords can now be viewed and
changed if required.
INFO - Level B and Level C
port cannot be viewed or
changed from the keypad.
6) Scroll down to access each of the Modbus serial port 'Level A' passwords.
These are labeled 'Ser1Passwd', Ser2 Passwd', 'Ser3 Passwd' and Ser4
Passwd corresponding to the physical port numbering for Modbus Ports
1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively.
TB-960701 ALL REVS
TB-960701
Setting Up the Initial 'Level B' and 'Level C' Passwords for
each Modbus Port
7) Enter an initial 'Level A' Password for the appropriate physical serial port
at the keypad of the Omni Flow Computer as described above.
8) Connect a PC running OmniCom Software to the selected serial port of
the Omni Flow Computer. Open a file and 'Receive Omni Configuration
Data'.
9) A red pop-up screen will appear which notes that a password is required
to proceed. If any other screen appears at this point, check wiring and
communication settings, Modbus ID, baud rate, etc.
10) Do not enter the 'Level A' password at this point. Keep pressed [Alt] as
you press [E] to edit the passwords. A second red pop-up screen will
appear asking for the 'current valid password'. A good practice would be
to use uppercase letters (activate [CapsLock] on the keyboard) because
when setting passwords from the flow computers keypad, they are
always entered in uppercase.
11) Enter the 'Level A' password that was selected for this serial port.
12) You are asked if you would like to change the 'Level A', 'Level B' and
'Level C' passwords. Select to change 'Level B' at this point. You will be
asked to enter a password. As you enter the password, asterisks will
show in place of the characters you typed. You will be asked to re-enter
the password to ensure that what you typed was correct.
13) To setup a Level C password, repeat Steps 2 and 6 substituting Level
C for Level B at Step 6.
Maintaining the Modbus Port Password Using OmniCom

After the initial passwords have been setup for each of the Modbus serial ports
as shown above, they may be changed at any time while logged on with
OmniCom.
1) While keeping pressed the [Alt] key, press [E] at any time and the popup screen appears asking for a password. This screen can be forced to
appear by keeping pressed [Alt] as you press [P] while viewing any
editing screen; i.e., any screen with data fields that can be edited.
2) When asked, enter your current password. Password Level B and Level
C users are allowed to change only their own password levels. Level A
password users can change levels A, B and C.
TB-960701 ALL REVS
Technical Bulletin
Disabling Modbus Port Passwords

INFO - Level B and Level C
(serial) port cannot be
viewed or changed from the
keypad; i.e., you must use
OmniCom to view, change
or delete these password
levels.
Level B and Level C passwords should be disabled via OmniCom (see

sidebar) before disabling the privileged Level A password at the keypad.
1) To disable each password proceed as though you are going to change or
set-up the password.
2) Press the [Delete] key six (6) times where the initial password was
entered followed by the [Enter] key (no asterisks will show).
3) When asked to re-enter the password, re-enter six [Delete] key presses
followed by the [Enter] key.
4) Repeat this procedure for both Level B and Level C passwords.
5) From the Omni flow computer keypad, delete the 'Level A' password for
the appropriate Modbus serial port (see Volume 3). To do this, move the
cursor to the serial Level A password to disable and press the [Clear] key
and then the [Enter] key.
Getting Started
CAUTION!
Terminate and Stay

Resident (TSR) programs
such as SideKick and
Keyboard Macro processors
can affect the operation of
high speed communication
programs such as
OmniCom. They do this by
'stealing' processor cycles
or turning off the hardware
interrupt system of the
personal computer. These
programs may have to be
disabled when you are in
the 'On-line' Mode, if you
encounter difficulties
communicating with the
Omni flow computer.
Installing OmniCom
Revisions Previous to 70 Before you install earlier
revisions of OmniCom
software, you must save
your existing phone
directory entries and setup.
For instructions and any
other assistance you may
need, please contact our
technical support staff at
the following phone number:
+1-281-240-6161
Installation Requirements
To properly run OmniCom, and have sufficient memory for report templates and
copies of the database, you will require the following:
IBM PC (or compatible)
MS DOS, V3.3 or later (excepting 4.01)
640Kb RAM
20Mb Free Hard Disk Space with a minimum of one floppy disk drive, 3"
1.44 Mb
Monochrome or color monitor with EGA or VGA graphics capability
One RS-232 serial port
One LPT port (optional)
One RS-232 modem (optional at various supported baud rates)
Installation Procedure
OmniCom is delivered on 1.44 Mb, 3" diskettes in an archived format. To
install, do the following:
1) Insert the diskette into your PC's corresponding floppy disk drive.
2) Type the respective drive letter followed by a colon (e.g.: A: or B).
3) Type Install and press [Enter].
The OmniCom installation program will guide you through the rest of the
installation.
TB-960701 ALL REVS
TB-960701
Opening a File
Accessing Help in
keystrokes.

+1-281-240-6161
First open an existing Omni-supplied file. Each application and derived files
come with their own set of templates. You can then 'SAVE AS' to create a new
file to commence your configuration. Each file that you create will occupy
approximately 60 Kbytes of disk space. This includes 36 Kbytes for the
configuration file and 6 Kbytes for each of the four custom report templates.
All menu selections are supported by entry-sensitive Help. No matter where you
are, by pressing [F1] you can obtain an explanation of the requirements for your
entry selection.
View
Files can be viewed separately or in parallel with a file that is currently being
edited. This allows you to compare various numeric entries in similar files. This
can be helpful if you are maintaining historical files that track changes you have
made. You may not be able to use the View feature with certain variations of
flow computer configuration files because newer firmware include additional
entry fields not available in earlier revisions.
Off-line
You will usually begin in the Off-line Mode to configure your flow computer. It
naturally leads in to the 'Omni Configuration' Menu selections. Only when you
complete this section will you be able to activate the various 'Setup' options and
proceed to establish your calibration ranges and other related data. Before you
begin the configuration of I/O, be sure you know what number and type of
physical I/O has been installed in the flow computer. A mismatch between your
off-line configuration and physical hardware will not make a data upload to the
flow computer meaningful in key areas of your configuration data.
On-line
When you have completed building your configuration database, you are then
ready to upload data to your Omni flow computer. The OmniCom program uses
the Modbus RTU binary protocol which mandates the use of 8 data bits. Be
sure that the serial I/O parameters in both devices have been properly setup
before attempting to communicate. Baud rate and parity settings are less critical
but must also be the same.
With a direct-connect to a PC, OmniCom will perform an auto baud rate search
and display an error if baud rates are incompatible (see 2.5.16. Serial
Input/Output Settings in Volume 3). Baud rates from 1.2 kbps to 38.4 kbps are
supported. When using a modem, the auto baud rate search is not performed. In
this case, the baud rate is that at which the modem is setup. Some personal
computers may not have the processing power to support the higher baud rates.
Note also that modems are capable of using a higher baud rate at the RS-232
connector than they are communicating on the telephone line. If the modems
connect but the flow computer does not respond, try adjusting the flow
computers baud rate.
TB-960701 ALL REVS
Technical Bulletin
Reports
The 'Report' Menu allows you to retrieve snapshot and historical reports from the
flow computer or from your hard disk. These are pre-formatted default reports
that are included in the Omni application software. You can also customize your
own reports from standard templates. By using the on-screen report editor, you
can add or delete text and data character strings which identify the variable in
the computer's Modbus database. [F1] for help describes the control functions
to enable you to format the report easily. Bring up a report template and move
the cursor onto the 'XXXX.XX' fields. Press [Enter] and a pop-up menu defines
the variable being used. Type or edit text anywhere, move the cursor and
keeping pressed [Shift] as you press [$] enables you to enter or delete any
database address from the report.
Utilities
The Utilities Menu has several useful tools for setting up and maintaining
OmniCom. The utilities available are:
I/O Point Assignment List

OmniCom Setup
OmniCom Application
Archive Maintenance
Prover/Batch End Commands

Diagnostics
Omni Panel
I/O Point Assignment List

When the configuration of your flow computer is complete, you should review
your assignment of physical I/O by accessing the display under 'I/O Point
Assignment List'. An I/O mismatch can result in erroneous calibration ranges
and consequential errors in measurement and control of your metering system!
This utility shows a summary list that indicates what physical I/O points are
assigned to which variables. Point numbers with asterisks '*' next to them are
used for more than one variable. Check the list to ensure you have not assigned
a physical I/O point to more than one transducer type; e.g.: An I/O point cannot
be assigned to a temperature and pressure transmitter at the same time. The
flow computer will not allow this to happen in the On-line mode, but OmniCom
does not check for this in the Off-line mode.
OmniCom Setup
This utility allows you to:
Select the type of video monitor.
Turn the sound effects on/off.
Setup the modem command strings.
TB-960701 ALL REVS
TB-960701

OmniCom Application
Use this utility before you start to select the software version of OmniCom that
matches the firmware version number of your Omni flow computer. The firmware
versions are:
US VERSIONS
Turbine / Positive Displacement /
Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering
20 Systems (with K Factor
Linearization)
21
Orifice / Differential Pressure

Turbine / Positive Displacement

22 Liquid Flow Metering Systems
(with Meter Factor Linearization)
23
Orifice / Turbine Gas Flow

Metering Systems
METRIC VERSIONS
Turbine / Positive Displacement /
Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering
24 Systems (with K Factor
Linearization)
25
Orifice / Differential Pressure

Turbine / Positive Displacement

26 Liquid Flow Metering Systems
(with Meter Factor Linearization)
27
Orifice / Turbine Gas Flow

Metering Systems
Archive Start/Stop Command
WARNING!
Warning: The flow computer

will not accept changes
made to the archive setup
at the time of a 'Transmit
Omni Configuration' upload
unless the archiving feature
has been turned off.
Accessing Help in
keystrokes.
When this menu is entered, OmniCom tries to establish communications with the
flow computer using the comm parameter settings currently selected in the 'Start
Comm' submenu of the 'Online' menu. It does this to establish the status of the
'Archive' flag and 'Archive Config Enable' flag. Check comm settings if all items
on the menu are inactive; i.e., OmniCom is unable to communicate with the
target computer.
Any changes made to the flow computers configuration which involves the
format of the data record, number of records in an archive file, or the total
number of archive files within the flow computer, will cause the memory used to
store the archive data to be reinitialized. This would cause all data stored in
archive to be lost. Therefore, no changes to the target flow computers archive
configuration will be allowed unless automatic data archiving has been disabled
and the 'Archive Config Enable' flag is on.

+1-281-240-6161
TB-960701 ALL REVS
Technical Bulletin
Prover Commands
Proving features displayed here can only be viewed when communicating
directly with an Omni Flow Computer.
You may monitor or control the operation of a meter prover which is controlled by
a remote Omni flow computer. You must have already established
communications with the flow computer before making this selection. If you have
not established communications with a flow computer you will receive one of the
following error messages:
Byte count does not match expected - OmniCom is confused and thinks
your modem is connected to a flow computer. Try dialing out first.
No response from Omni - You are either not connected to anything or the
slave ID number of the flow computer you are trying to talk to does not match
OmniCom's setting.
Use the 'Shift' key with the appropriate 'Function' key to select the flowmeter you
wish to remote prove.
The 'Status Window' shows the event history and the 'Omni Display' echoes data
shown locally at the Omni flow computer.
Diagnostics
You must be connected and online with a flow computer for this selection to
work. The screen displays diagnostic information about the flow computer
such as number and type of I/O modules fitted, status of digital I/O, current
output percent of analog outputs and raw input signals coming into the flow
computer.
Omni Front Panel Emulator

When this feature is selected, an illustration of the Omni front panel is displayed
by which all the functions of an Omni Flow computer are emulated. Use the
mouse to click on simulated buttons to access real time displays and make
entries. OmniCom is actually displaying the same LCD display buffer information
and the mouse click are actually sending data into the same key stroke buffer as
the front panel keypad. Performance is much better at 9600 baud or higher. You
must have setup the baud rate and other communication settings in the 'Start
Comm' menu before you can use Omni Panel.
Help
Accessing Help in
keystrokes.
10
You can further customize your Help screens by making use of an on-screen
editor. Via this feature you can modify Help text by additions or deletions to suit
your own needs and operations. Windows can be resized and repositioned to
suit your own personal preference. This can be particularly useful as an
additional memory aid, if the Operations Manual is not available to you, or if
additional information is required for other users of this program.
TB-960701 ALL REVS
TB-960701
Registration of License and Software Support

+1-281-240-6161
TB-960701 ALL REVS
Remember to mail in the registration of your distribution diskette to Omni flow

computers. OmniCom is provided with each Omni flow computer on a singleuser license basis. Any additional installations of this program will require reregistration by the user. This will ensure that you will have the opportunity to
receive free telephone support, and notice of program revisions and new add-on
programs for your installation.
11
Date: 07
23
96
TB # 960702
Communicating with Allen-Bradley

Programmable Logic Controllers
Contents
complements the
information contained in the
User Manuals, and is
applicable to all firmware
revisions.
earlier.
Allen-Bradley
Communications - This
feature allows
communicating with AllenBradley PLCs. However,
Omni Flow Computers is
not responsible for the
operation, connectivity or
compatibility of AllenBradley products, and
furthermore, we do not
warrant these products.
Scope....................................................................................................................1
Abstract ................................................................................................................2
Protocol and Error Checking .............................................................................2
PLC Supported ....................................................................................................2
Flow Computer Database ...................................................................................2
4th and 5th Digit from the Right Identifies Type of Variable .......................................... 2
rd
3 Digit from Right Identifies which Area within the Application.................................... 3
How the Allen-Bradley Accesses the Omni Flow Computer Database .......3
PLC-2 ............................................................................................................................ 3
PLC-3 ............................................................................................................................ 3
PLC-5 ............................................................................................................................ 3
Valid Starting Addresses of PLC-5 Files ....................................................................... 4
16-Bit Integers ......................................................................................................................... 4
8-Character Strings.................................................................................................................. 4
32-Bit Integers ......................................................................................................................... 4
32-Bit IEEE Floating Points ..................................................................................................... 4
Bit Integers .............................................................................................................................. 4
16-Character Strings................................................................................................................ 4
32-Bit Integers ......................................................................................................................... 4
32-Bit IEEE Floating Points ..................................................................................................... 4
Scope
All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers allow
communications with Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs).
This technical bulletin refers to communication aspects specific to the Omni Flow
Computer and serves as information only. Please refer to the manufacturer for
any support or information on Allen-Bradley products.
TB-960702 ALL REVS
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
The Omni 6000 flow computer provides serial communications between the flow
computer and an Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), usually
via a KE or KF Communication Module connected to the Data Highway. Data is
transmitted serially at a maximum rate of 38.4 kbps using 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
and no parity bit. Average speed of response to a message request is
approximately 75 msec.
Protocol and Error Checking

Both the DFI full duplex protocol and the half duplex protocol are supported.
CRC or BCC error checking can be utilized when using either full duplex or half
duplex.
PLC Supported
The Omni computer supports the following Allen-Bradley PLC types and
messages. Note that bit level operations are not supported.
PLC-2
PLC-3
PLC-5
SLC-502/3
Unprotected Block Reads and Writes

Word Range Reads and Writes
Typed Reads and Writes
Unprotected Typed Reads and Writes
Flow Computer Database

Serial Ports #1, #2, #3 and #4 in .71+ firmware revisions support
communications using superset of Modbus Protocol. This is the native
communications language of the flow computer. Several thousand variables are
available within the Database. The primary numbering system used to identify
these variables is their 'index number'. The actual digits of the index number
indicate the type of variable and in many cases application area within the
computer.
4th and 5th Digit from the Right Identifies Type of

Variable
1???
3???
4???
5???
7???
8???
13???
14???
Variable is a digital status or command bit

Variable is a 16 bit signed integer
Variable is a 8 character ASCII string
Variable is a 32 bit IEEE floating point
Variable is a 32 bit IEEE floating point
Variable is a 16 character ASCII string
15??? Variable is a 32 bit signed integer

17??? Variable is a 32 bit IEEE floating point
TB-960702 ALL REVS
TB-960702
Communicating with Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers
3rd Digit from Right Identifies which Area within the

Application
?1??
?2??
?3??
?4??
?5??
?6??
?7??
?8??
?9??
Variable relates to Meter Run #1

Variable is scratchpad
Variable is PID related or scratchpad
Variable is a command write.
Variable is related to station functions
Variable is related to prover functions
How the Allen-Bradley Accesses the Omni

Flow Computer Database
PLC-2
This family is usually limited as to the type of data and address range. Data is
always transferred as block reads and writes.
Five translation tables are provided where the user can specify what data within
the database will be concatenated into read or write groups. The starting
address of each data block is selectable.
Note: The PLC2 does not
understand 32-bit integer or
32-bit IEEE floating points
but can pass these variable
types to devices that do
understand them.
Translation Tables #1 through #3 are used to set up block reads which

can contain status points packed 16 to a word, 16-bit or 32-bit integers
and IEEE floating points.
Translation Table #4 is used for block writes of status and command bits
only. Data is packed 16 to a word.
Translation Table #5 provides for block writes to any selected data.
PLC-3
This family can use the methods described above as well as 'word range reads
and writes' of any variable within the database (see PLC-5 list for starting
addresses).
PLC-5
This family utilizes 'typed reads and writes' of the complete Database. To
accommodate the PLC-5 'file system method of addressing, the Modbus index
numbers serve as the basis of the internal file system of the computers as it
appears to a PLC-5 device. Table below shows typical examples:
TB-960702 ALL REVS
Technical Bulletin
MODBUS INDICES VERSUS PLC-5 ADDRESSES

MODBUS INDEX #
PLC-5 ADDRESS
ELEMENT SIZE
COMMENT
1101
1217
1701
3201
3210
3901
4101
4102
5101
5102
5103
7401
7405
N11:01
N12:17
N17:01
N32:01
N32:10
N39:01
B41:01
B41:02
N51:01
N51:02
N51:03
F74:01
F74:05
1 Word (16 Flags)

1 Word (16 Flags)
1 Word (16 Flags)
1 Word (Integer)
1 Word (Integer)
1 Word (integer)
1 Byte (ASCII)
1 Byte (ASCII)
1 Word (Long Integer)
2 Words (IEEE Float)
2 Words (IEEE Float)
Meter #1 Status Flags

Meter #2 Status Flags
Command Flags
Meter #1 Data
Offsets track
Prover Data
4 Words per Variable
1 Byte per element
2 Words per variable
Same again
Offsets track
Valid Starting Addresses of PLC-5 Files

16-Bit Integers
N10:01 N11:01 N12:01 N13:01 N14:01 N15:01 N16:01 N17:01 N18:01 N19:01
N30:01 N31:01 N32:01 N33:01 N34:01 N35:01 N36:01 N37:01 N38:01 N39:01
8-Character Strings
B41:01 B42:01 B43:01 B44:01 B45:01 B46:01 B47:01 B48:01 B49:01
32-Bit Integers
N51:01 N52:01 N53:01 N54:01 N55:01 N58:01 N59:01
32-Bit IEEE Floating Points

F70:01 F71:01 F72:01 F73:01 F74:01 F75:01 F76:01 F77:01 F78:01 F79:01
Bit Integers
N130:01 N134:01
16-Character Strings
B140:01
32-Bit Integers
N150:01
32-Bit IEEE Floating Points

F170:01
TB-960702 ALL REVS
Date: 07
23
96
TB # 960703
Storing Archive Data within the Flow

Computer
Contents
complements the
Volume 2 and Volume 3,
and is applicable to all
firmware revisions 71+.
earlier.
Data Archiving - The

archiving feature allows you
to store raw data, ASCII text
data and historical reports.
Scope....................................................................................................................1
Abstract ................................................................................................................2
Raw Data Archiving.............................................................................................2
Retrieving Data.............................................................................................................. 3
Raw Data Archive Point Addresses............................................................................... 4
Archive Configuration Changes..................................................................................... 5
Setting the 'Reconfig Archive' Flag .......................................................................................... 6
Possible Loss of Data when Starting and Stopping the Archive ............................................... 6
Defining the Archive Records .................................................................................................. 6
How The Available Memory Is Allocated ....................................................................... 7

Checking The Archive File Memory Status Screens ..................................................... 8
Summary 0f Raw Data Archiving Features.................................................................... 9
Raw Data Archive Definition: Alarm/Event Log and Audit Event Log .........10
Alarm/Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address 711.................................... 10
Audit Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address 712. .................................... 10
Using The Custom Reports to Access the Text Archive Feature.................11

Custom Report Templates ...............................................................................12
Scope
All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the
archiving feature. This feature allows you to archive raw data, ASCII data and
historical reports
TB-960703 ALL REVS
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
Definitions & Terminology
Archive Address - A
unique Modbus address
used to read a data record
from an archive file. These
addresses are in the 700
series; i.e., 701, 702, 703,
etc.
Archive Record - A
structure containing a fixed
set of data variables which
cannot exceed 250 bytes in
length. Data within the
record can be of any valid
data type in any order.
Archive Trigger Boolean The actual event which
causes the flow computer to
capture and store a record
within the archive file. The
trigger can be any Boolean
including the result of a
Boolean statement.
Block Read - Modbus
protocol block read requires
that Function Code 03 (read
multiple registers) be used
to retrieve data.
Circular Archive File - A
file of n records arranged
as a circular buffer which
always contains the most
recent n records; i.e., the
oldest data record is
overwritten by each new
record as it is added.
Current Record Pointer A 16-bit read-only integer
register containing a
number between 0 and n,
representing the position of
the most recently added
record within the archive
file. The pointer is adjusted
after each complete record
is added. A value of 0
indicates that no data
records have been added
since the last initialization of
the archive memory.
The flow computer provides three distinct methods of storing data. These are as
follows:
1) Raw Data Archive
Data records are defined and stored in raw binary

format in circular files of 'n' records per file. Ten user
configurable files are provided as well as an alarm
file and audit trail file. This data can be retrieved
using standard Modbus Function Codes 3 and 6.
2) Text Archive Data
ASCII data which is captured and saved whenever a

Snapshot, Daily, Batch End or Prove report is
printed. Data is stored chronologically. To retrieve
this data you must use OmniCom, OmniView or a
custom Modbus driver which understands the
proprietary Omni Modbus Function Codes 64 and
65.
3) Historical Reports
These are exact copies of data that was sent to the

local printer in ASCII format. The flow computer
stores the last eight copies of each of the following
reports: Daily, Batch End and Prove.
Method 3 is limited to storing the last eight reports and is therefore not
considered archive data. Therefore this chapter will be limited to describing how
Methods 1 and 2 are used to store archive data within the flow computer.
Raw Data Archiving

A maximum of ten archive files can be user configured. Two additional archive
files, the alarm archive and audit trail archive are also included but are fixed in
format and cannot be user configured.
Each user configurable archive file consists of 'n' archive records, where 'n' is
defined by the user. A record consists of a time and date stamp followed by a
number of user defined variables of any valid data type as described by its
archive record definition table. The amount of memory an archive consumes is
calculated by multiplying the record size in bytes times the number of records in
the archive. Associated with each archive file is an archive trigger Boolean.
Data is captured and stored in each of the archive files whenever the appropriate
trigger occurs; e.g., at the end of a batch or beginning of the day, etc. Three
additional registers per archive file serve to indicate (a) maximum number of
records, (b) current record pointer and (c) requested record to read pointer.
(Continues)
TB-960703 ALL REVS
TB3-960703
Retrieving Data
Definitions & Terminology
(Continued)
Maximum Records
Register - A 16-bit readonly integer adjacent to the
Current Record Pointer
which contains the number
n, indicating the maximum
number of records within
the archive file.
Requested Record
Pointer - A 16-bit read/write
integer used to select a
specific record within an
archive file.
Time and Date Stamp - Six
bytes of binary data
representing the date and
time that the archive record
was stored. The byte order
is as follows:
Byte 1 = Month (1-12) or
Day (1-31)
Byte 2 = Day (1-31) or
Month (1-12)
Byte 3 = Year (0-99)
Byte 4 = Hour of Day (023)
Byte 5 = Minute (0-59)
Byte 6 = Seconds (0-59)
European Format
Selected (dd/mm/yy)
Valid Data Types 32-bit IEEE floating point
data
32-bit long integer data
16-bit integer data
8-byte ASCII string data;
byte packed Boolean
status data
Data records are retrieved one record at a time by writing the number of the
record required, to the requested record pointer register. The data can then be
accessed immediately by a block read of the archive address. Data must be
read as one complete block. Also, because the flow computer always responds
with a complete record, the 'number of registers' field of the Modbus poll request
is ignored by the flow computer.
The following record retrieval method is simple and efficient; it works well
assuming that there is only one host device retrieving data. The method
assumes that the number of the last record retrieved is left in the requested
record pointer within the flow computer. This will not be the case when more
than one host device will be retrieving data; in this case each host device must
know the number of the last record it retrieved.
1) Read the maximum records register, current record pointer and
requested record pointer. These registers are adjacent to each other in
the flow computers database.
2) A current record pointer value of 0 indicates that the archive file has
been initialized (i.e. cleared to binary zeroes/ASCII Nulls) and no trigger
event has occurred since initialization).
3) Compare the contents (just read) of the current record pointer with the
requested record pointer.
4) If the records numbers are equal no additional records have been added
since the last read and no further action is needed.
5) If the record numbers are not equal, increment the value of requested
record pointer.
6) If the resultant value is greater than the value obtained from the
maximum record pointer, roll-over has occurred and record number one
should be retrieved by writing '1' to the requested record pointer
register. Otherwise write the incremented value to the requested record
pointer register.
7) After writing to the requested record pointer register in the flow
computer, the selected archive record can be read immediately using
Modbus function '3' (read multiple registers). Archive file addresses are in
the 700 area of the flow computers database (i.e., archive file 1 = 701,
archive file 2 = 702 etc.).
8) Repeat steps 3 through 7 until all records are read.
During the normal course of events, the host attempts to read the next record in
sequence based on the number of the last record it retrieved. An archive record
containing binary 0s indicates that the archive has been initialized since the last
read and that the host should restart by reading record number one (assuming
that the current record pointer is not 0)
TB-960703 ALL REVS
Technical Bulletin
Raw Data Archive Point Addresses
Archive #1
Record Access Address

Access Record Date/Time Only
Maximum # of Records
Last Record Updated Pointer
Record Req To Read Pointer
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0701
0751
3701
3702
3703
Archive #2

Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0702
0752
3704
3705
3706
Archive #3

Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0703
0753
3707
3708
3709
Archive #4

Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0704
0754
3710
3711
3712
Archive #5

Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0705
0755
3713
3714
3715
Archive #6

Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0706
0756
3716
3717
3718
Archive #7

Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0707
0757
3719
3720
3721
Archive #8

Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0708
0758
3722
3723
3724
Archive #9

Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0709
0759
3725
3726
3727
TB-960703 ALL REVS
TB3-960703
Archive #10

Record Req To Read Pointer4
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0710
0760
3728
3729
3730
Alarm Archive

Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0711
0761
3731
3732
3733
Audit Archive

Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read Only
Read/Write
0712
0762
3734
3735
3736
Archive Configuration Changes

Archive configuration changes can be made via OmniCom or directly from the
key-pad of the flow computer. As the OmniCom program includes extensive help
screens which document this subject, this appendix will concentrate on
configuring the archive features via the keypad.
From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter]. The LCD screen displays:

Select 'Misc. Configuration' and press [Enter]. The following displays:

#$ %

!"
!"
!"
Select 'Password Maint' and press [Enter]. Enter the privileged password when
prompted and scroll down the screen until the following is displayed:
&'() & &

)
&#
* !
&#
* ) ! "
) &%% %
TB-960703 ALL REVS
Technical Bulletin
Setting the 'Reconfig Archive' Flag

Any configuration changes that are made to any of the archive files such as
changes to the size or number of records will force the flow computer to
reallocate and clear to zero the RAM memory used to store archive data. To
avoid accidental data loss, the flow computer requires that two entries are
manipulated correctly before changes to the archive configuration can be made.
The 'Reconfig Archive' flag must be set to 'Y and the Archive Run' flag must
be set to 'N'.
Possible Loss of Data when Starting and Stopping the Archive

To conserve archive storage, the user may on some occasions wish to set the
'Archive Run' flag to 'N' . This can be done at any time without loss of existing
data as long as the 'Reconfig Archive' flag is not set to 'Y'. If the 'Reconfig
Archive' flag is accidentally set to 'Y' no data will be lost until the 'Archive Run'
flag is set to 'Y' (this allows the user to retrieve data before it is lost).
Defining the Archive Records

After setting the 'Reconfig Archive' flag to 'Y' as described above, press the
[Prog] key once to return to the 'Misc Setup' menu. It will be possible to define or
change any archive file configuration by scrolling down the display until the
following screen is displayed:

&#
* +
% ,,
Enter a number between 1 and 10 to select a specific archive file to modify (1 for
example). The following screen will display:
&) -. /01 ) ()

21 3
0
21

0
24 3
0
24

0
Begin entering the data that you require to be archived. The example below will
cause variables 7101, 7102, 7103, 5101, 5102 and 5103 to be archived.
INFO - The Alarm and
Audit Trail archive files are
fixed format and cannot be
changed.
&) -. /01 ) ()

21 3
/101
21

5
24 3
6101
24

5
TB-960703 ALL REVS
TB3-960703
A maximum of 16 groups of variables may be included in an archive record.

Data can be of any valid type. The record is limited to a total of 250 data bytes
remembering that the time and date stamp included in each record occupies 6
bytes. Scrolling down the screen displays the following:
&) -. /01 ) ()

3 )
0

7%
0
Circular Archive File - A
file of n records arranged
as a circular buffer which
always contains the most
recent n records; i.e., the
oldest data record is
overwritten by each new
record as it is added.
Enter the maximum number of archive records to be contained within this

circular archive file.
At the 'Trig Boolean' entry, enter the database address of the Boolean trigger
which will cause the flow computer to store the archive data record. For
example, entering 1831 (the 'hour start flag) would cause the flow computer to
store data at hourly intervals.
Once you have entered all the necessary data for all of the archive records
return to the following screen which is in the 'Password Maintenance' menu.
)
&#
* !
&#
* ) ! "
INFO - Redefining the
archive Boolean trigger
does not cause the archive
RAM to be cleared.
Set 'Reconfig Archive' to 'N' and 'Archive Run' to 'Y'. At this point the flow
computer will reinitialize archive RAM memory and attempt to allocate memory
as configured.
How The Available Memory Is Allocated

Approximately 250,000 bytes of memory are available for the storage of archived
data, this includes 'Raw Data' and 'ASCII Text Data'. Archive memory is
allocated dynamically, i.e. the memory required to satisfy the 'Raw Data Archive'
is allocated first, one archive file at a time. The memory remaining after the Raw
Data Archive files are setup is what is used by the Text Archive described later.
TB-960703 ALL REVS
Technical Bulletin
Checking The Archive File Memory Status Screens

The 'Archive File Memory Status' screens display automatically whenever the
user attempts to re-start data archiving for the first time after reconfiguring the
archive structure. These screens can also be accessed at any time by pressing
'Setup' 'Status' 'Display' while in the display mode. A correctly configured archive
structure is indicated by the following screen.
INFO - The number of files
allocated changes
depending on how many
archive files have been
configured
&) -. +8 &

&#
* 9
(:
+
% &%%
5
An incorrectly configured archive structure is indicated by the following screen.
&) -. +8 &

&#
* 9
+
% &%%
5
Archive memory errors are caused when RAM memory is insufficient for the
number and size of archive files configured. In this case the 'Start Archive'
command is ignored and the flow computer allocates memory to as many
archive files as possible. The number on the 'Files Allocated' line of the display
shows how many files were allocated before the memory ran out.
Scroll down the screen to see the actual number of bytes allocated to each
archive file. All remaining memory not allocated to the 'Raw Data Archive Files' is
allocated to the 'Text Archive' buffer. The display below is typical.
&) -. +8 &

/0; &
<
10000
/10 &
<
=1;4
3&
< 10046>
TB-960703 ALL REVS
TB3-960703
Summary 0f Raw Data Archiving Features

Ten independent archive files are available for user configuration.
Two additional archive files, the 'alarm event log' and 'audit trail log' are
provided.
Archive files consist of multiple records in a circular array.
Mixed types of variable data can be stored in records of 250 bytes
maximum.
Except for the 'alarm log' and 'audit trail log', content and maximum
number of records in an archive file are configurable.
Data is read in block form one record at a time.
Each archive has a unique address (701, 702, 703, etc.)
Each archive has a set of integer registers used to indicate most current
record pointer, maximum number of records, and required record pointer.
Data is captured and stored in an archive file whenever the appropriate
trigger event occurs.
Multiple archive files can be controlled by the same trigger event.
Empty archive records contain binary 0s / ASCII Null characters.
To avoid errors, host devices reading archive data should dynamically
determine the record pointer roll over value based on the number of
record integers read each time from the flow computer.
Any configuration changes made to the archive setup such as redefinition
of any record or change in the number of records within any archive will
cause all data stored in the entire archive system to be reset. To prevent
accidental erasure of all archived data the user must first halt all archiving
by setting the Archive Run/Halt Flag' to false (0), and setting the 'Config
Archive Flag' to true (1).
TB-960703 ALL REVS
Technical Bulletin
Raw Data Archive Definition: Alarm/Event Log

and Audit Event Log
Alarm/Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address
711
Note: Alarm types are:
0 = Log event, sound
beeper and display in
LCD any edge change
in bit identified by field
#3.
1 = Log event, sound
beeper and display in
LCD rising edge
changes in bit identified
by field #3
2 = Event log any edge
change in bit identified
by field #3. No beeper
or LCD display action.
3 = Event log rising edge
changes in bit identified
by field #3. No beeper
or LCD display action.
Rising edge change means
0 to1 transition.
Note: Fields 5 and 6 are set

to 0.0 when the variable
type changed is String.
Fields 7 and 8 contain null
characters when the
variable type changed is
NOT a string. When fields 7
and 8 contain 8 character
strings the remaining 8
characters are padded with
nulls.
10
Field #1
3-Byte Date
(MM, DD, YY or DD, MM, YY)
Field #2
3-Byte Time
(HH, MM, SS)
Field #3
16-Bit Integer
(Modbus Index # of alarm or event)
Field #4
1 Byte
(Alarm Type - see sidebar)
Field #5
1 Byte
(Boolean Value, 1 or 0 representing Alarm or OK)
Field #6
IEEE Float
(Value of transducer variable at the time of alarm

or event)
Field #7
32-Bit Integer
(Volume totalizer at time of event or alarm)
Field #8
32-Bit Integer
(Mass totalizer at the time of the event or alarm)
Audit Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address

712.
Field #1
3-Byte Date
(MM, DD, YY or DD, MM, YY)
Field #2
3-Byte Time
(HH, MM, SS)
Field #3
16-Bit Integer
(Event number, increments for each event, rolls

at 65535)
Field #4
16-Bit Integer
(Modbus index of variable changed)
Field #5
IEEE Float
(Numeric variable value before change - old

value)
Field #6
IEEE Float
(Numeric variable value after change - new value)
Field #7
16-Char ASCII (String variable value before change - old value)
Field #8
16-Char ASCII (String variable value after change - new value)
Field #9
32-Bit Integer
Field #10 32-Bit Integer
(Volume totalizer at time of change)

(Mass totalizer at the time of the change)
TB-960703 ALL REVS
TB3-960703
Using The Custom Reports to Access the Text

Archive Feature
The actual data which will be archived in the 'Text Archive' buffer is identified
within the body of a 'User Custom Report Template'. This is done by enclosing
the data in question between braces '{}' and preceding the opening brace '{'
character with either Boolean 1000 (archive the data identified between the
braces) or Boolean 2000 (print and archive the data identified between the
braces). In the example 'Batch End' report shown below, the first half of the
report will be printed and stored in the 'Text Archive' while the second half of the
report will not print but will be stored in the 'Text Archive'.
The user has embedded a

Boolean point address 2000
to indicate that the following
data enclosed by the {}
characters is to be printed
and archived.
When embedding the point,
set the width=1
and number of decimal
places=0.
The User has embedded a

Boolean point address 1000
to indicate that the following
data enclosed by the {}
characters is to be archived
only and not printed.
When embedding the point,
set the width=1
and number of decimal
places=0.
INFO - Data is archived

only when the report is
processed for the first time.
Reprinting a stored report
does not cause any data to
be stored in the archive.
TB-960703 ALL REVS
X{
Batch Report
Date :
XX/XX/XX
Company Name
Time : XX:XX:XX
Meter ID
XXXXXXXX
Product ID
XXXXXXXX
API Table Selected
XXXXXXXX
Batch Start Date
XX/XX/XX
Batch Start Time
XX:XX:XX
Batch End Date
XX/XX/XX
Batch End Time
XX:XX:XX
Batch Gross (IV) BBL
XXXXXXXXX
Batch Net (GSV) BBL
XXXXXXXXX
Batch Mass LB
XXXXXXXXX
X{
Opening Gross (IV) BBL
XXXXXXXXX
Opening Net (GSV) BBL
XXXXXXXXX
Opening Mass LB
XXXXXXXXX
Closing Gross (IV) BBL
XXXXXXXXX
Closing Net (GSV) BBL
XXXXXXXXX
Closing Mass LB
XXXXXXXXX
Batch Flow Weighted Averages:
Gross Flow (IV) BBL/HR
XXXXXX.X
Temperature Deg.F
XXXXXX.X
Pressure PSIG
XXXXXX.X
Flowing Density GM/CC
XXXXXX.X
API @ 60 Deg.F
XXXXXX.X
VCF
X.XXXX
CPL
X.XXXX
Meter Factor
X.XXXX
}
Computer ID :
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XX/XX/XX
XX:XX:XX
XX/XX/XX
XX:XX:XX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX}
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXX.X
XXXXX.X
XXXXX.X
XXXXX.X
XXXXX.X
X.XXXX
X.XXXX
X.XXXX
The template files shown below can be used to archive text data whenever the
report is processed.
1)
2)
3)
4)
'FILENAME.TP1'
'FILENAME.TP2'
'FILENAME.TP3'
'FILENAME.TP4'
Snapshot Report
Batch Report
Daily Report
Prover Report
11
Technical Bulletin
Custom Report Templates

A default selection of files with the extension 'TP?' are created automatically
when OmniCom is installed, They can be found in the 'OMNI2?' subdirectories.
For example the OMNI20 subdirectory contains the following template files:
Note:
* To avoid duplication and

conserve disk space
these templates do not
have matching TP1,
TP2 and TP3 templates.
Select TP1 though TP3
from the appropriate set
(A, B, C or D) above
depending on
independent or common
product.
REV20A.TP1
Interval Report
Independent Products
REV20A.TP2
Batch Report
REV20A.TP3
Daily Report
REV20A.TP4
Prove Report
REV20B.TP1
Interval Report
REV20B.TP2
Batch Report
REV20B.TP3
Daily Report
REV20B.TP4
Prove Report
REV20C.TP1
Interval Report
Common Product
REV20C.TP2
Batch Report
Common Product
REV20C.TP3
Daily Report
Common Product
REV20C.TP4
Prove Report
Common Product
REV20D.TP1
Interval Report
Common Product
REV20D.TP2
Batch Report
Common Product
REV20D.TP3
Daily Report
Common Product
REV20D.TP4
Prove Report
Common Product
REV20E.TP4*
Prove Report
Master Meter Method
REV20M.TP4*
Prove Report
Mass Meter Proving
Normal Pipe Prover
REV20MC.TP4* Prove Report
Mass Meter Proving
Double Chronometry
REV20LC.TP4* Prove Report
Double Chronometry
Viscosity Linearization
REV20LP.TP4*
Pipe Prover
Viscosity Linearization
Prove Report
Double Chronometry
Normal Pipe Prover
Double Chronometry
Normal Pipe Prover
Templates can only be accessed if they exist; i.e., if you are currently working on
'FILENAME.OMI' opening the custom templates will just create an empty file.
You must first create a set of templates by copying the appropriate sample
templates as follows:
1) At the OmniCom File menu select 'Shell to DOS'.
2) Type the following to create a set of custom templates for a common
product system using a full sized pipe prover (assumes Rev. 20.??
application):
COPY OMNI20\REV20D.TP? OMNI20\filename.TP?
3) Type EXIT to return to OmniCom.
In the above example OMNI20 is the sub directory which contains all files related
to Application Revision 20. Likewise OMNI24 refers to Revision 24 applications.
12
TB-960703 ALL REVS
Date: 07
23
96
TB # 960704
Communicating with Honeywell

ST3000/STT3000 Smart Transmitters
Contents
complements the
User Manual, and is
revisions.
earlier.
Communication with
Honeywell
ST3000/STT3000 Smart
Transmitters - This feature
allows you to communicate
with Honeywell Smart
Temperature and Pressure
Transmitters, via Omnis H
type Process I/O Combo
Module and using
Honeywells DE Protocol.
Scope....................................................................................................................1
Abstract ................................................................................................................1
Digitally Enhanced (DE) Protocol Overview .....................................................2
Transmitter Database..........................................................................................2
Using the Honeywell Handheld Communicator ............................................3
Combo Module LED Status Indicators..............................................................3
Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode. .................................................4
Auto Mode ..................................................................................................................... 4
Manual Operation .......................................................................................................... 4
Viewing the Status of the Honeywell Transmitter from the Omni Front
Panel .....................................................................................................................4
Scope
All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the
feature of communicating with Honeywell ST3000 Smart Transmitters. This
feature uses Honeywells Digitally Enhanced (DE) Protocol and requires that an
H Combo I/O Module be installed in your flow computer.
Abstract
Using 'H' Combo I/O Modules, the Omni Flow Computer can communicate with
Honeywell Smart Temperature and Pressure Transmitters using Honeywells
DE Protocol. Up to 4 transmitters can be connected to each 'H' Type Combo
Module, with loop power being provided by the combo module.
TB-960704 ALL REVS
Technical Bulletin
Digitally Enhanced (DE) Protocol Overview

Digital data is transmitted serially between the flow computer and Honeywell
Smart Transmitters by modulating the current in the two wire loop connecting the
devices. Power for the transmitter is also taken from this current loop. Data is
transmitted at 218.47 bits per second with a digital '0' = 20 mA and a digital '1 =
4 mA.
In normal operation, the Honeywell transmitter operates in the '6-byte Broadcast
Mode'. In this mode, the transmitter transmits the following data to the flow
computer every 366 msec:
Byte #1
Status Flags
Byte #2-#4 Process Variables % Span Value (3-byte floating point)
Byte #5
Database ID (indicates where in the transmitters database Byte
#6 below belongs)
Byte #6
Database Data Value
Transmitter Database
By using the data contained in Bytes #5 and #6, the flow computer builds and
maintains an exact copy of the smart transmitters configuration database. A
transmitter database varies in size from about 90 bytes for a pressure transmitter
to 120 bytes for a temperature transmitter. It takes between 30 and 45 seconds
to completely build a copy of the transmitter database within the flow computer.
The transmitter database is continuously compared against the flow computer
configuration settings for that transmitter. The flow computer automatically
corrects any differences between the databases by writing the correct
configuration data to the transmitter.
TB-960704 ALL REVS
TB-960704
Using the Honeywell Handheld

Communicator
The flow computer is responsible for configuring the following entries within the
transmitter:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Lower Range Value (LRV) or Zero

Transmitter Span or Upper Range Limit (URL)
Damping Factor
Tag Name
Any changes made to 1, 2 and 3 using the handheld communicator will be

overwritten by the flow computer. In the digital mode it is not necessary to
calibrate the transmitter output using the handheld communicator. The digital
signal can be calibrated using the normal Omni analog input method described
in Chapter 8 of Volume 1.
Combo Module LED Status Indicators

Each I/O channel of the 'H' Combo module has a set of two LED indicators, one
green and one red. The green LED shows all communication activity taking
place on the channel (flow computer, transmitter and handheld communicator if
connected). The Red LED lights only when the flow computer is transmitting data
to the transmitter.
Normal digital operation is indicated by a regular pulsation of the green LED
(about 3 per second). The red LED will be seen to blink whenever a
configuration change is made in the flow computer which affects that particular
transmitter.
TB-960704 ALL REVS
Technical Bulletin
Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode.

Auto Mode
Connecting an analog mode Honeywell smart transmitter to the computer will
cause the flow computer to automatically switch the transmitter to the digital DE
mode, sending out a communication request to the Honeywell transmitter. A
switch over to the digital mode by the transmitter will cause the green LED on the
H combo module to pulse steadily indicating that communications have been
established.
Manual Operation
For manual operation, do the following:
1. Disable communications between the Honeywell transmitter and the flow
computer by deleting all I/O point assignments within the flow computer to
that I/O point.
2. Using the Honeywell SFC, SCT or any Honeywell handheld
communicator, press [Shift] [A/D] and wait till the handheld displays
'Change to Analog?'
3. Answer (Yes) by pressing [Enter]. SFC Working will be displayed. The
'H' Combo modules green LED on that channel will stop pulsing.
4. Re-enter the I/O point to cause the Omni to send the communication
request command to the Honeywell and after three command sends the
green LED on the Honeywell module will pulse at a steady 3Hz rate.
Viewing the Status of the Honeywell

Transmitter from the Omni Front Panel
To verify the data being received from the smart transmitter, press [Input]
[Status] and [Enter] from the front panel. The following displays:

! "! # $

% &
!

' (
))))))))

# *
+
,
-*

TB-960704 ALL REVS
TB-960704
H1-2 Transmitter
: Indicates the Honeywell Combo Module (H1) and the

channel number on that module (Channel 2 in this case).
PV%
: Process variable value in percentage of the transmitters

span. A -25.00 displayed on the Omni could mean that
the transmitter is not communicating (see Status
definition below).
Status
: There are five status states.

1) OK
: Communications
between
the
flow
computer and smart Honeywell transmitter
are OK. The database within the
transmitter matches the flow computer.
2) Idle
: This flow computer I/O point has been

assigned to a Honeywell transmitter but is
not receiving data from the transmitter.
Possible cause is a wiring problem such as
reversal of wiring. If you observe the status
LEDs you will note that the flow computer
attempts to establish communications by
sending a wake-up command every 10
seconds or so.
3) Bad PV : Communications
between
the
flow
are OK but the transmitter has determined
that a critical error has occurred within the
transmitter meaning the value of the
process variable cannot be trusted. The
flow computer will set the transducer
failure alarm and follow the fail code
strategy selected by the user for this
transducer.
4) DB Error : Communications
between
the
flow
are OK but the flow Computer has
determined that the database within the
flow computer does not agree with the
database within the transmitter. If you
observe the status LEDs you will note that
the flow computer attempts to correct the
transmitters database by writing the correct
data to the transmitter once every 30-45
seconds or so.
TB-960704 ALL REVS
Technical Bulletin
5) 4 Byte
: The transmitter is operating in the 4-Byte

Broadcast Mode. Because the flow
computer will not tolerate this mode of
operation, this status display should only
be displayed momentarily as the flow
computer will automatically switch the
transmitter into the 6-Byte Broadcast
Mode.
LRV
: Lower Range Value of the transmitter in engineering

units. Engineering units are degrees Celsius for
temperature transmitters, inches of water for differential
pressure transmitters, and pounds per square inch for
pressure transmitters.
Span
: The Span of the transmitter in engineering units (the Span

is the difference between the lower and upper ranges of
the transmitter). Engineering units are degrees Celsius for
temperature transmitters, inches of water for differential
pressure transmitters, and pounds per square inch for
pressure transmitters. The flow computer will display DB
Error if the user tries to enter a span of 0% or a span
which would exceed the transmitters upper range limit'
(URL).
Damp Seconds
: Damping Time of the transmitter output in seconds.
Conformity Bit
: Meaningful only with differential pressure transmitters.

Conformity Bit 0 = linear output; Conformity Bit 1 = square
root output. This bit should always be 0 for smart
temperature transmitters.
Software Revision : Current Software installed within the smart device.

Serial #
: Serial Number of the smart transmitter.
Transmitter Type : Valid transmitter types are:

TT = Temperature Transmitter
DP = Differential Pressure Transmitter
GP = Gauge Pressure Transmitter
TB-960704 ALL REVS
TB-960704
TB-960704 ALL REVS
URL
: Upper Range Limit of the transmitter in engineering units.

The transmitter will not accept configuration entries which
exceed this value.
ID/TAG
: ASCII string used to identify the transmitter.
SV
: Secondary Process Variable Value expressed in C. This

represents sensor temperature for pressure transmitters,
and junction temperature for temperature transmitters.
The flow computer may or may not have a value in this
field, depending upon whether the SV is included in the
part of the transmitters database which is sent to the
Omni.
Date: 07
02
97
TB # 970701
Stability Requirements: Final Calibration of

Flow Computer
Contents
complements the
Volume 1, and is applicable
to Revision 20.70/24.70+.
published with a different
page layout.
Scope....................................................................................................................1
Abstract ................................................................................................................1
Instructions..........................................................................................................1
Scope
All Omni 6000/3000 Flow Computers have calibration stability requirements.
Abstract
Because of the temperature sensitivity and bit resolutions of the A/D and D/A
converters, and the high accuracy requirements, it is important that the following
procedures are followed when calibrating flow computer I/O circuits.
Instructions
(1) Adjust the power supply to give 5.05-5.10 volts at backplane test points.
(2) All final calibrations must be performed using the matching set of combo
modules and power supply module (i.e. changing the power supply or
adjusting the voltage during the final calibration requires that a sample
calibration made up to that point be checked. If there is a noticeable
change, all calibrated points should be rechecked).
(3) Before calibrating, eliminate temperature gradient errors by closing the
box and allowing at least 20 minutes for temperature stabilization to
occur. Ensure that unit is not in a high air draft area (i.e. in the path of a
fan or AC duct) Make adjustments such as jumper repositioning quickly.
Wherever possible keep the unit closed to retain internal heat. Board
replacements will require that sufficient time be allowed to achieve
temperature stability.
(4) Observe temperature stability requirements of any equipment used in the
calibration process (i.e., current and voltage generators, digital voltmeters
etc.)
TB-970701 ALL.70+
Date: 07
04
97
TB # 970702
Secondary Totalizers Provide Net Volume at

Temperatures Other than 15C or 60F
Contents
complements the
Volumes 2, 3 and 4,
applicable to firmware
revisions 20/24.71+ and
21/25.71+.
page layout.
Scope....................................................................................................................1
Abstract ................................................................................................................1
Database Location of Second Set of Net Totalizer Data Points .....................2
Keypad Entries Needed to Display the Extra Totalizers..................................2
Scope
All firmware Versions 20/24 and 21/25, Revisions.70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000
Flow Computers have secondary net totalizers for when more than one
reference temperature is required.
Abstract
Some times it is necessary to provide net totalizers at more than one reference
temperature.
Following are the Modbus data points that are used to provide secondary net
totalizers in the Omni. Secondary totalizers are calculated real time just like the
normal totalizers.
The secondary totalizers are activated by setting up floating point data point
7699 with the secondary reference temperature required. This data point is
initialized to 0 at a cold start up which effectively disables the extra totalizers and
their appearance on the Omni default reports (obviously, 0 cannot be used as a
second reference temperature).
You may set up 7699 with a simple variable statement. For example: 7699=#68
will provide a second set of net totalizers corrected to 68 degrees. You may also
initialize point 7699 via a one time Modbus write. If you choose to use the
statement method you may remove the statement immediately after you enter it,
but you should probably leave it to serve as a document trail.
Note that the Omni initializes point 7699 to 0.0 on a cold boot. A cold boot occurs
after a Clear All Ram command is executed.
TB-970702 ALL.70+
Technical Bulletin
Database Location of Second Set of Net

Totalizer Data Points
Meter #1
Meter #2
Meter #3
Meter #4
Station
CURRENT
BATCH
PREVIOUS
BATCH
CURRENT
DAILY
PREVIOUS
DAY
5196
5296
5396
5496
5896
5198
5298
5398
5498
5898
5197
5297
5397
5497
5897
5199
5299
5399
5499
5899
Keypad Entries Needed to Display the Extra

Totalizers
Secondary totalizers are viewed using the same key presses used to view the
normal net totalizers. For example: pressing [Meter] [n] [Net] or [Net] [Meter]
[n] will display meter n net flow rates and totalizers followed by the secondary
net totalizers. Pressing [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Net] will display the batch net
totalizer followed by the secondary batch net totalizer. Likewise, the Station
secondary totals are viewed using the same key presses that are used to view
the normal station net total. Pressing [Net] will display the station net totalizer
followed by the secondary net totalizer. Pressing [Batch] [Net] will display the
station batch net totalizer followed by the secondary batch net totalizer.
TB-970702 ALL.70+
Date: 08
04
97
TB # 970801
Using Boolean Statements to Provide

Custom Alarms in the Flow Computer
Contents
Scope....................................................................................................................1
Abstract ................................................................................................................1
Example:........................................................................................................................ 2
Scope
complements the
User Manual, and is
revisions Version .70+.
page layout.
All firmware revisions Version .70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers
have the feature of customizing alarms with Boolean statements.
Abstract
The flow computer automatically records and logs many important alarm events
and status changes. These events include transducer Low Alarm and High
Alarm states and failure of any transducer connected to the flow computer which
is measurement related.
There are instances however where the flow computer user would like to monitor
other internal or external status events that may have nothing to do with the
measurement functions. These alarms may be the result of a digital I/O point
changing state, or the result of a Boolean logic statement or a variable statement
comparison.
Because of this requirement, the last 16 Boolean statements of the flow
computer serve the dual function of evaluating normal logic expressions, and
also providing user configurable alarm messages. The alarm message text to be
logged and displayed can be entered into the expression fields in any of these
last 16 Boolean statements. These statement numbers are, 1057 through 1072
for flow computers with 48 Boolean statements, and 1073 through 1088 for
computers with 64 statements.
Each Boolean statement has an associated status point which is accessed using
the same address as the statement number (Modbus Point 1072 for instance).
The logic state of this status bit normally reflects the logical result of the
statement (1 or 0, true or false). When the statement is used to provide a custom
alarm message it functions in a different manner. To cause an alarm message to
be logged, simply turn on the status point associated with the message.
TB-970801 ALL.70+
Technical Bulletin
Example:
In this example, the user wishes to monitor a tank level switch that is connected
to Digital I/O Point #1. When the tank level is high, the level switch applies 24
volts to the digital I/O point.
Digital I/O Point #1 is first assigned to the Dummy Boolean 1700, this reserves
the Point as a digital Input . Modbus Point 1001 will simply follow the digital level
applied to the terminals of digital point #1. Had it been Digital Point #22, Modbus
Point 1022 would be affected.
1025:
1072=1001
Move logic value of Digital I/O #1 into Point 1072.
1072:
High Level Alarm
Actual alarm text which appears in alarm log.
Statement 1025 (above) is used to transfer the logic state of Digital I/O Point #1
to Point 1072, activating the user alarm whenever 24 volts is applied to the input
terminals by the tank high level switch contacts.
TB-970801 ALL.70+
Date: 08
08
97
TB # 970802
Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database:

Overview
Contents
complements the
Volume 4 Modbus
Database Address and
Index Numbers,
revisions .70+.
page layout.
Modbus Database Modbus function codes are

shown in hexadecimal
th
notation. The 4 digit (from
the right) of the data point
address defines the data
type.
TB-970802 ALL.70+
Scope....................................................................................................................1
Abstract ................................................................................................................2
Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database Extents .........................................4
I/O Driver Concerns When Interfacing to Omni Equipment..........................12
For Example: ..........................................................................................................................12
Write Single Variable - Modbus Function 06 ............................................................... 12

Address Ranges - Future Expansion........................................................................... 12
Scope
All firmware revisions Versions 70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers
are characterized by a Modbus database structured as described in this
technical bulletin.
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
The following are the data types within the database:
Digital Flag Bits
: Also known as Boolean bits, status bits and

command bits. All data points of this type can
be read via Modbus function code 01 and
written to using function codes 05 and 0F .
Function codes 01 and 0F transfer byte
packed data that is sent in the byte order they
are prepared (not word order). Points are
packed eight to a byte, packing from least
significant to most significant Unused bit
positions within a byte are cleared on
transmission from the Omni and ignored by
the Omni when receiving.
Writing to status points is allowed but normally
is pointless as the status point will be
refreshed by the Omni every 500 ms.
Valid addresses for this type of data are:
1XXX i.e. 1101, 1705, 1921 etc.
16-bit Integer Registers
: All data points of this type can be read via

Modbus function code 03 and written to using
function codes 06 and 10.
Byte order transmitted is: MS byte then LS
byte.
X3XXX i.e. 3121, 13133 etc.
8-character ASCII Strings : All data points of this type can be read via
function code 10 (note that function code 06 is
not available on this data type).
Byte order transmitted is as you would type it.
4XXX i.e. 4101, 4502 etc.
32-bit Integer Registers
: Formatted as twos complement. All data

points of this type can be read via Modbus
function 03 and written to using function codes
06 and 10.
Byte order transmitted is: MS byte of MS word,
LS byte of MS word, MS byte of LS word then
LS byte of LS word.
Valid addresses for this data type are: X5XXX
i.e. 5101, 15205 etc.
TB-970802 ALL.70+
TB-970802
32-bit IEEE Floating Point : All data points of this type can be read via
Modbus function 03 and written to using
function codes 06 and 10.
Byte order transmitted is: Mantissa Sign
bit/Exponent byte,
LS Exponent bit/MS
mantissa byte, middle significant mantissa
byte then LS mantissa byte.
Valid addresses for this data type are: X7XXX
i.e. 7210, 17006 etc.
16-character ASCII Strings : All data points of this type can be read via
function code 10 (note that function code 06 is
not available for this data type).
Byte order transmitted is as you would type it.
14XXX i.e. 14001, 14022 etc.
TB-970802 ALL.71+
Technical Bulletin
Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database

Extents
Data within the Omni Flow Computer data base is organized in logical groups.
Certain data written to the Omni requires special processing to occur in the Omni
before it is stored in the data base. Other data is grouped together because it is
related in function i.e. a collection of real-time data for a specific process.
The list that follows shows the extent of each table or set of data points within
the data base. Because the sets of data are not connected, data from adjacent
sets cannot be read or written in the same poll.
Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database Extents
DATA POINT
ADDRESS
DATA TYPE
APPLICABLE
MODBUS
FUNCTION CODES
(HEX)
COMMENTS
Used to
Read (Write)
03
00001
Mixed
03 (06) (10)
03
00201
Mixed
03 (06) (10)
03
00401
Mixed
0701
Mixed
03
0702
Mixed
03
0703
Mixed
03
0704
Mixed
03
0705
Mixed
03
0706
Mixed
03
0707
Mixed
03
0708
Mixed
03
0709
Mixed
03
0710
Mixed
03
03 (06) (10)
User-defined read only packet - Omni

native mode.
User-defined array - Modicon
compatible.
native mode.
User defined array - Modicon
compatible.
native mode.
User defined array - Modicon
compatible.
#1 User defined data archive record Firmware Revisions .70+.
#10 User defined data archive record
- Firmware Revisions .70+.
TB-970802 ALL.70+
TB-970802
Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database Extents (Continued)
DATA POINT
ADDRESS
DATA TYPE
APPLICABLE
MODBUS
FUNCTION CODES
(HEX)
COMMENTS
Used to
Read (Write)
0711
Mixed
03
0712
Mixed
03
Status &
Command
01, (05), (OF)
Status
01
Status
01
Status
01
Status
01
Status &
Command
01, (05), (OF)
Status &
Command
01, (05), (OF)
Status
01
Status
01
Status
01
Status
01
Status
01
Status
01
Status
01
1001
to
1099
1101
to
1199
1201
to
1299
1301
to
1399
1401
to
1499
1501
to
1699
1701
to
1799
1801
to
1899
1901
to
1999
1301
to
1399
2001
to
2100
2101
to
2199
2201
to
2299
2301
to
2399
TB-970802 ALL.71+
Alarm/Event Log archive record Firmware Revisions .70+.

Audit Log archive record - Firmware
Revision Versions .70+.
Point 1600 is a dummy point included

to concatenate tables 15XX and
16XX.
Reserved for Future Expansion currently will return error exception 02

(illegal data address).
Technical Bulletin
DATA POINT
ADDRESS
DATA TYPE
APPLICABLE
MODBUS
FUNCTION CODES
(HEX)
COMMENTS
Used to
Read (Write)
2401
to
2499
2501
to
2699
2701
to
2799
2801
to
2899
2901
to
2999
3001
to
3099
3101
to
3199
3201
to
3299
3301
to
3399
3401
to
3499
3501
to
3599
3601
to
3699
3701
to
3799
3801
to
3899
3901
to
3999
Status
01
Status
01
Status &
Command
01, (05), (OF)
Status
01
Status
01
16-bit Integer
Register
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Register
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Register
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Register
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Register
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Register
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Register
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Register
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Register
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Register
03, (06), (10)


TB-970802 ALL.70+
TB-970802
DATA POINT
ADDRESS
DATA TYPE
APPLICABLE
MODBUS
FUNCTION CODES
(HEX)
COMMENTS
Used to
Read (Write)
4001
to
4099
4101
to
4199
4201
to
4299
4301
to
4399
4401
to
4499
4501
to
4599
4601
to
4699
4701
to
4799
4801
to
4899
4901
to
4999
5001
to
5099
5101
to
5199
5201
to
5299
5301
to
5399
5401
to
5499
TB-970802 ALL.71+
8-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
8-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
8-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
8-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
8-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
8-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
8-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
8-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
8-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
8-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
03, (06), (10)
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
03, (06), (10)
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
03, (06), (10)
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
03, (06), (10)
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
03, (06), (10)


Technical Bulletin
DATA POINT
ADDRESS
DATA TYPE
APPLICABLE
MODBUS
FUNCTION CODES
(HEX)
COMMENTS
Used to
Read (Write)
5501
to
5599
5601
to
5699
5701
to
5799
5801
to
5899
5901
to
5999
6001
to
6099
6101
to
6199
6201
to
6299
6301
to
6399
6401
to
6499
6501
to
6799
6801
to
6899
6901
to
6999
7001
to
7099
7101
to
7199
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
03, (06), (10)
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
03, (06), (10)
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
03, (06), (10)
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
03, (06), (10)
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
Applicable to Firmware Revisions

22/26.71+ only.
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit, 2s Complement (Firmware

Revision 23.70+ only).
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)

32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)

32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)

Revisions 23.70+ and 22/26.71+
only).
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)

22/26.71+ only.
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)

32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)

32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)

TB-970802 ALL.70+
TB-970802
DATA POINT
ADDRESS
DATA TYPE
APPLICABLE
MODBUS
FUNCTION CODES
(HEX)
COMMENTS
Used to
Read (Write)
7201
to
7299
7301
to
7399
7401
to
7499
7501
to
7599
7601
to
7699
7701
to
7799
7801
to
7899
7901
to
8499
8501
to
8599
8601
to
8699
8701
to
8799
8801
to
8899
8901
to
8999
9001
to
9499
9500
to
13000
TB-970802 ALL.71+
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
ASCII Text
Buffers
41, (42)

20/24.71+ and 22/26.71+ only.

20.71+ and 22/26.71+ only.
Maximum of sixty-four 128-byte
buffers per data point .
Reserved for Future Expansion - currently will return error exception 02

Technical Bulletin
DATA POINT
ADDRESS
DATA TYPE
APPLICABLE
MODBUS
FUNCTION CODES
(HEX)
COMMENTS
Used to
Read (Write)
13001
to
13299
13301
to
13399
13401
to
13499
13501
to
13599
13601
to
13699
13701
to
13799
13801
to
13899
13901
to
13999
14001
to
14099
14101
to
14199
14201
to
14299
14301
to
14399
14400
to
15000
15001
to
15299
15300
to
17000
10
16-bit Integer
Registers
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Registers
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Registers
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Registers
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Registers
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Registers
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Registers
03, (06), (10)
16-bit Integer
Registers
03, (06), (10)
16-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
16-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
16-character
ASCII String
03, (10)
16-character
ASCII String
03, (10)

32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)

TB-970802 ALL.70+
TB-970802
DATA POINT
ADDRESS
DATA TYPE
APPLICABLE
MODBUS
FUNCTION CODES
(HEX)
COMMENTS
Used to
Read (Write)
17001
to
17399
17401
to
17499
17501
to
17899
17901
to
18099
18101
to
18199
18200
to
49999
TB-970802 ALL.71+
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
Not applicable to Firmware Revisions

22 & 26.
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)
Not applicable to Firmware Revisions

21/25 & 22/26.
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)

32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
03, (06), (10)

23/27.71+ only.

11
Technical Bulletin
I/O Driver Concerns When Interfacing to Omni

Equipment
Most but not all of the data is grouped in blocks of 100 or so data points. These
blocks in many cases are not connected.
Limit requests for contiguous data across different blocks by examining the third
digit from the right of the data point start and end addresses. If the digit is
different break up the poll request.
For Example:
An application requires data from points 7188, 7201 and 7210 to be read and
displayed on screen. An intelligent I/O driver may determine that it is more
efficient to read 23 data points starting with point 7188 and discard the unused
data. In this particular example the Omni will transmit the data for points 7188
through 7199 and blank data will be returned for data points 7200 through 7210
because the data requested is in two different blocks within the Omni. To obtain
the data correctly the I/O driver should determine that point 7188 and point 7201
are in different data blocks (because the third digit from the right changed from a
1 to a 2) and send out two data requests; one request for point 7188 and another
for points 7201 through 7210.
Write Single Variable - Modbus Function 06

Omni software revisions 20.44 and greater implement this function on all 16-bit
and 32-bit data points. Revisions prior to 20.44 implement function 06 on 16-bit
integers only. To maintain compatibility with early Omni software revisions it may
be advisable to use function 10 to write to single data points as well as multiple
data points.
Address Ranges - Future Expansion

Some of the address ranges specified in this document encompass more data
than may be available on all applications at this time, Omni advises that for
future compatibility any software driver developed should be able to support
these address ranges.
12
TB-970802 ALL.70+
Date: 08
12
97
TB # 970803

Contents
complements the
Volume 2 and Volume 3,
applicable to Firmware
Revision 22.70+/26.70+.
page layout.
Scope....................................................................................................................1
Abstract ................................................................................................................2
Meter Factor Linearization Function .............................................................................. 2
Meter Factor Validation and Control Chart Functions ................................................... 3
Scope
Firmware Revisions 22.70+ and 26.70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow
Computers have the feature of Meter Factor Linearization. This feature applies to
Turbine/Positive Displacement Liquid Flow Metering Systems (with Meter Factor
Linearization).
TB-970803 22/26.70+
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
Meter Factor Linearization Function
Flowmeter performance varies depending upon flow rate and fluid viscosity. The
flow computer can compensate for this variation in performance by applying a
meter factor which is determined by interpolation of a base meter factor curve.
The user develops this base meter factor curve by proving the flowmeter at
various flow rates and determining the meter factors for those flow rates.
A base meter factor curve must be developed for each product or fluid viscosity.
The curve can consist of from one to twelve meter factor / flow rate points.
The MF is continuously adjusted for

flowrate during a delivery. The MF is
flow weight averaged for the batch.
Prove Base
Flowrate
Meter Factor
The flow computer lifts or lowers
the MF curve based on the MF
obtained at the latest official
flowmeter proving.
MFs are normalized to the

Prove Base Flowrate for
validation / comparison and
historical archival purposes.
Flowrate
Fig. 1.
Base Meter Factor Curve
TB-970803 22/26.70+
TB-970803
Meter Factor Validation and Control Chart Functions

The second purpose of the base meter factor curve is also to act as a reference
against which any meter factors developed during subsequent provings of the
flowmeter can be compared. As an aid to this comparison the user specifies the
base proving flow rate. This value is the flow rate which is considered to be the
normal for the flowmeter concerned. For comparison purposes, each
subsequent meter factor is normalized to the base proving flow rate and must
pass two tests before it can be implemented. The first test checks that the
calculated meter factor is within some maximum percentage deviation from the
base curve.
The second test verifies that the meter factor when normalized to the base
proving flow rate is within some maximum percentage deviation from the
historical average of the last n meter factors. Only normalized and implemented
meter factors are included in the historical average. The number n can be one
through 10.
Test 2 - Maximum Deviation

Allowed From The Average
of The Last n Meter Factors
Meter Factor at
Actual Flowrate
(Passes Test 1)
Historical Average of
Last n Meter Factors
Base MF Curve
Test 1 - Maximum Deviation

Allowed From Base Curve
Fig. 2.
TB-970803 22/26.71+
Meter Factor Normalized to

Prove Base Flowrate
(Fails Test 2)
The Function of the Meter Factor Base Curve
Date: 08
28
97
TB # 970804
Calculation of Natural Gas Net Volume and

Energy: Using Gas Chromatograph, Product
Overrides or Live 4-20mA Analyzer Inputs of
Specific Gravity and Heating Value
Contents
complements the
Volume 3, applicable to
Revision 23.71/27.71.
page format.
Natural Gas Net Volume

and Energy Calculation Natural gas net volume and
energy calculations apply to
all gas flow computers,
(firmware Revisions
23/27.71) shipped after July
1997. These calculations
are considered using a gas
chromatograph, product
overrides, or live 4-20 mA
analyzer inputs of specific
gravity (SG) and heating
value (HV).
TB-970804 23/27.71+
Scope....................................................................................................................1
Abstract ................................................................................................................2
Basic Calculations ..............................................................................................2
Critical Configuration Entries Which Affect the Calculation of Net Volume
and Energy ...........................................................................................................2
Density of Air at Base Conditions .................................................................................. 2
Gas Relative Density (SG) ............................................................................................ 3
Gas Heating Value (HV) ................................................................................................ 3
Key Analyzer Setup Menu Entries Needed ................................................................... 3
No Gas Chromatograph Used - Manual Overrides Required ................................................... 3
Component Analysis Data Obtained From a Gas Chromatograph ........................................... 4
Using Manual Overrides for Component Analysis Data............................................................ 4
Component Analysis Data via a Serial Data Link ..................................................................... 4
Using Live Inputs for Heating Value, Specific Gravity, Nitrogen or Carbon Dioxide.................. 4
Scope
Computers have the feature of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy Calculation.
This feature applies to Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. This bulletin
covers natural gas net volume and energy calculations using a gas
chromatograph, product overrides, or live 4-20 mA analyzer inputs of specific
gravity (SG) and heating value (HV).
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
Gas compositional data needed by the flow computer to calculate flowing
density, mass flow and energy flow of natural gas can be obtained from various
sources. The following describes how the flow computer should be configured
for each possible scenario.
Basic Calculations
The basic calculations are:
Net Volume = Mass Flow / Density @ Base Conditions
Energy = Net Volume x Heating Value
(1)
(2)
Density at Base Conditions can be obtained by one of the following methods:
(GC Relative Density) x (Density of Air @ Base Conditions)

(Override Relative Density) x (Density of Air @ Base Conditions)
(Live 4-20mA Relative Density) x (Density of Air @ Base Conditions)
Calculated using Detailed Method of AGA 8
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Heating Value is obtained using one of the following methods:

Heating Value Calculation
- The flow computer always
calculates Heating Value
using one of the mentioned
standards, even if it is
instructed not to use it.
These calculated values are
stored in the data base and
can be used to compare
against the values obtained
from the GC or calorimeter.
7629=Mtr #1 calculated HV
GC Analysis HV
Manual Override HV
Live 4-20mA HV
Calculated using AGA 5, GPA 2172 or ISO 6976
(component analysis required)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
Component Analysis Data is obtained from one of the following sources:
Online Danalyzer or Applied Automation Gas Chromatograph

Manual Overrides in the Fluid Data Analysis menu
Serial Communication Link
Live 4-20mA SG, HV, N2 and CO2
(AGA 8 gross calculation methods only)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
Critical Configuration Entries Which Affect the

Calculation of Net Volume and Energy
Density of Air at Base Conditions
This entry is in the Factor Setup menu. Setting this entry to 0 ensures that gas
density at base conditions is calculated using AGA 8. (method (6) previous
page). Entering the density of air at base conditions assuming a valid gas
relative density (SG) is available (see next paragraph) will override the AGA 8
calculation of gas density at base conditions. In this case gas density at base
conditions is calculated using either method (3), (4) or (5) (previous page).
TB-970804 23/27.71+
TB-970804
Calculation of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy
Gas Relative Density (SG)

This entry is located in the Fluid Analysis Data menu. One entry per active
product is required. It is mandatory that this field contain a valid value of SG for
all AGA 8 gross calculation methods except for 1985 method #4. The data in
this field can be manually entered or, automatically overwritten by a live 4-20mA
input of SG if it exists. This entry also serves as the GC SG override if a GC is
providing gas relative density (SG) and a GC failure occurs.
Entering a minus value in this field will force the flow computer to calculate gas
density at base conditions using AGA 8. (method (6) previous page). Entering
the gas relative density (SG) assuming a non zero Density of Air @ Base
Conditions is entered (see above) will override the AGA 8 calculation of gas
density at base conditions. In this case gas density at base conditions is
calculated using either method (3), (4) or (5) (previous page).
When an AGA 8 detailed method is selected and a GC is used to provide gas
relative density (SG), this entry field is ignored unless a GC failure occurs and
the GC Fail Code entry is set to Use Override on GC Failure.
Gas Heating Value (HV)

This entry is located in the Fluid Analysis Data menu. One entry per active
product is required. It is mandatory that this field contain a valid value of HV for
AGA 8 gross calculation method #1 and also AGA 8 1985 methods #2 and #4.
The data in this field can be manually entered or, automatically overwritten by a
live 4-20mA input of HV if it exists. This entry also serves as the GC HV
override if a GC is providing gas heating value (HV) and a GC failure occurs.
Entering a minus value in this field will force the flow computer to use a
calculated gas heating value (HV) calculated using either AGA 5, GPA 2172 or
ISO 6976 ( method (10) previous page). Entering a positive value into the gas
heating value (HV) entry will override the AGA 5, GPA 2172 or ISO 6976
calculation of gas heating value (HV).
When an AGA 8 detailed method is selected and a GC is used to provide gas
heating value (HV), this entry field is ignored unless a GC failure occurs and the
GC Fail Code entry is set to Use Override on GC Failure.
Key Analyzer Setup Menu Entries Needed

The following text discusses only those key entries that must be made to ensure
that the right values for component analysis are used in the calculation of Net
Volume and Energy Flow.
No Gas Chromatograph Used - Manual Overrides Required

Select Always Use Fluid Data Overrides for GC Fail Code in the Analyzer
Setup menu. No other entries are needed.
TB-970804 23/27.71+
Technical Bulletin
Component Analysis Data Obtained From a Gas Chromatograph

Select either Never Use Fluid Data Overrides or On Fail Use Fluid Data
Overrides for GC Fail Code in the Analyzer Setup menu to ensure that the GC
data is used in place of the Fluid Data & Analysis Data overrides.
Using the GC Heating Value and Relative Density. To ensure that the
heating value and relative density calculated by GC are used in the
calculations, make sure that component numbers are assigned for the
Heating Value and Specific Gravity entries in the Analyzer Setup menu.
The number entered is not critical, simply use the next consecutive numbers
after all the other components are numbered.
Ignoring the GC Heating Value and Relative Density. Entering 0 for the
component number for Heating Value and Specific Gravity entries in the
Analyzer Setup menu causes the flow computer to ignore the heating value
and relative density sent by the GC and to use the override values entered in
the Fluid Data & Analysis Data menu.
Using Manual Overrides for Component Analysis Data

Activate the Fluid Data & Analysis entries by selecting Always Use Fluid Data
Overrides for GC Fail Code in the Analyzer Setup menu. No other entries are
needed in the Analyzer Setup menu.
Enter the compositional analysis data values into the appropriate fields in the
Fluid Data & Analysis menu.
Component Analysis Data via a Serial Data Link

Compositional analysis data values should be written into the appropriate
Modbus points normally containing the manual overrides in the Fluid Data &
Analysis menu.
Using Live Inputs for Heating Value, Specific Gravity, Nitrogen or

Carbon Dioxide
In the Station Configure menu, assign valid I/O points where 4-20mA and/or
Solartron 3096 gravitometer signals will be connected. Input valid scaling factors
in the Station N2 / SG Setup menu.
Note that override data fields in Product #1 entries of the Fluid Data & Analysis
Data menu are overwritten by live data values when 4-20mA inputs are used for
HV, SG, N2 or CO2.
TB-970804 23/27.71+
Date: 09
01
97
TB # 970901
Dual Pulse Flowmeter Pulse Fidelity

Checking
Contents
complements the
Volumes 1, 3 and 4, and is
applicable to firmware
revisions 20/24, 22/26 and
23/27 Versions .71+,
relating to helical turbine
flowmeters.
page layout.
Pulse Fidelity Checking The dual pulse fidelity

checking feature allows you
to reduce flowmeter
measurement uncertainty
caused by added or missing
pulses due to electrical
transients or equipment
failure.
Scope....................................................................................................................1
Abstract ................................................................................................................2
Installation Practices ..........................................................................................2
How the Flow Computer Performs Fidelity Checking .....................................3
Correcting Errors ................................................................................................3
Common Mode Electrical Noise and Transients ........................................................... 3
Noise Pulse Coincident with an Actual Flow Pulse ....................................................... 3
Total Failure of a Pulse Channel ................................................................................... 4
Alarms and Displays ...........................................................................................4
Scope
Firmware Revisions 20/24, 22/26 and 23/27 Versions.70+ of Omni 6000/Omni
3000 Flow Computers have the feature of Dual Pulse Fidelity Checking. This
feature applies to Turbine/Positive Displacement Liquid and Gas Flow Metering
Systems.
TB-970901 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
The object of dual pulse fidelity checking is to reduce flowmeter measurement
uncertainty caused by added or missing pulses due to electrical transients or
equipment failure. Correct totalizing of flow must be maintained whenever
possible. This is achieved by correct installation practices and by using turbine or
positive displacement flowmeters which provide two pulse train outputs. In
addition, an E Combo I/O Module must be installed and the correct configuration
settings entered in the Omni Flow Computer.
The two pulse trains are called the A pulse and the B pulse. In normal
operation, both signals are equal in frequency and count but are always
separated in phase or time. The API Manual of Petroleum Measurement
Standards (Chapter 5, Section 5) describes several levels of pulse fidelity
checking ranging from Level E to Level A. Level A is the most stringent method,
requiring automatic totalizer corrections whenever the pulse trains are different
for any reason.
For all practical purposes, Level A as described in the API document is probably
unachievable. The Omni Flow Computer implements a significantly enhanced
Level B pulse security method by not only continuous monitoring and alarming of
error conditions but also correcting for obvious error situations, such as a total
failure of a pulse train or by rejecting simultaneous transient pulses. No attempt
is made to correct for ambiguous errors, such as missing or added pulses.
These errors are detected, alarmed and quantified only.
Installation Practices
When using pulse fidelity checking, it is assumed that the user begins with and
maintains a perfect noise free installation. The user must ensure that each pulse
train input to the flow computer is a clean, low impedance signal which will not be
subject to extraneous noise or electromagnetic transients. Any regular
occurrence of these types of events must cause the equipment and/or wiring to
be suspect and investigated. Pulse fidelity check circuitry is not intended to
facilitate continued operation with a poor wiring installation which is prone to
noise or transient pickup.
TB-970901 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+
TB-970901
Dual Pulse Flowmeter Pulse Fidelity Checking
How the Flow Computer Performs Fidelity

Checking
Hardware on the E Combo I/O Module of the Omni Flow Computer continuously
monitors the phase and sequence of the two pulse trains. It also monitors the
frequency of the pulse trains. The flow computer determines the correct
sequence of flowmeter pulses based on the time interval between pulses rather
than the absolute phase difference. It does this by comparing the leading edges
of both pulse trains at a set clock interval of 16 microseconds. Maintaining a
minimum phase shift between the pulse trains (as indicated below) ensures that
related pulse edges of each channel are, in worst case, at least 5 clock samples
apart.
MAXIMUM PULSE
INPUT FREQUENCY
MAXIMUM PHASE
SHIFT REQUIRED
1.5 kHz
45 degrees
3.0 kHz
90 degrees
6.0 kHz
180 degrees
Correcting Errors
Missing or added pulses to either pulse train are considered ambiguous errors
and cannot be corrected. However, they are detected with a 100% certainty and
will be counted, eventually causing an alarm. Totalizing will continue using the A
Pulse Train.
Common Mode Electrical Noise and Transients

INFO - A certainty of 85% is
a conservative specification.
Tests on production units
show that a 95% detection
is a more typical proportion.
This is due to the time skew
between pulse channels
being closer to 1 sec than
2 sec.
Common mode electrical noise and transients occur at the same instant in time
(during the same clock period) on each pulse channel. They are detected with a
certainty of 85%*. The certainty can never be 100% because of the slight
differences in time (approximately 2 microseconds) that it takes each pulse to
travel through its associated input circuitry. These simultaneous pulses are not
used to totalize flow but are counted and will cause an alarm.
Noise Pulse Coincident with an Actual Flow Pulse

It is possible that a common mode noise pulse can occur during the same
sample period as an actual flow pulse. In this case, the pulse would be detected,
alarmed and rejected for totalizing, causing a missing pulse. Statistically though,
worst case at 3 kHz pulse input frequency, the odds are approximately 20:1 that
the pulse should be rejected. To not reject the pulse would mean accepting 20
times as many extra flow pulses. The 20:1 ratio is based on the ratio of the
periodic time of the flow pulses divided by the periodic time of the sample period
(e.g.: 333.3sec / 16sec approximately equals 21).
TB-970901 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+
Technical Bulletin
Total Failure of a Pulse Channel

A total failure of either pulse train will be detected with a 100% certainty. The flow
computer will alarm this condition and continue totalizing with the remaining
pulse train as recommended in API MPMS (Chapter 5, Section 5).
Alarms and Displays

To avoid spurious nuisance alarms such as can occur when flow begins, pulse
fidelity checking is disabled until the incoming frequency exceeds a user preset
frequency. Any differences in the two pulse trains will then be accumulated and
used to trigger an alarm when a user preset value is exceeded. Error
accumulations can be displayed or printed at any time. They are reset only at the
start of a new batch. Alarms are time tagged and recorded in the historical alarm
log.
TB-970901 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+
Date: 02
06
98
TB # 980201
Communicating with Honeywell TDC3000

Systems
Contents
complements the
User Manual, and is
revisions Versions .71+.
Communication Options
with Honeywell TDC3000
Systems - The Omni flow
computer can communicate
with Honeywell TDC3000
Systems via SIO modules
in combination with APM or
HPM modules. PLCG or
CLM modules communicate
directly with the Omni.
Scope....................................................................................................................1
Abstract ................................................................................................................2
Communication Method 1: APM / HPM - SIO....................................................2
FTA Array Points ........................................................................................................... 3
32-Bit Long Integer Variables .................................................................................................. 3
Configuring The Omni Flow Computer .......................................................................... 4

Data Grouping Option (a) Custom Data Packet Setup.................................................. 4
Modbus Function Codes Used to Access Custom Packet Data Within The Omni........ 4
Data Grouping Option (b) Variable Statement Moves to Scratchpad Variables ............ 6
Communication Method 2: Programmable Logic Gateway (PLCG)...............6

Selection of Communication Method................................................................8
Scope
MVIP Testing - The Omni
flow computer has been
tested by Honeywell
Phoenix as part of their
MVIP certification program.
Contact Honeywell at:
All firmware revisions Version .71+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 flow computers
have the capability of communicating with Honeywell TDC3000 Systems. This
is a new feature that requires specified communication modules.
(602) 313-5830
TB-980201 ALL.71+
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
This technical bulletin addresses the various serial communication options that
can be used to transfer data between Omni flow computers and Honeywell
TDC3000 systems. The hardware equipment used and the limitations of each
method are also discussed.
Three types of serial communication modules are available:
1) Serial I/O (SIO) module in combination with either an Advanced Process

Manager (APM) or High Performance Process Manager (HPM) module.
2) Programmable Logic Controller Gateway (PLCG)

3) Communication Link Module (CLM)
MVIP testing was performed using an Omni 6000 and Honeywell module types
(1) and (2) above. Due to the unavailability of equipment and time constraints,
tests were not performed using the CLM module. After MVIP testing it was the
opinion of the Honeywell engineer that communications with the more powerful
and flexible CLM module would pose no problem to the Omni. The nature of the
types of tasks performed by the CLM module usually mean that a certain amount
of custom I/O driver programming is the norm. This being the case, the CLM is
the most flexible but also most expensive connectivity option.
Communication Method 1: APM / HPM - SIO

Honeywell engineers state that with regard to serial communication there are no
differences between the APM-SIO connection and the HPM-SIO connection.
This document will target the APM system but all discussion will also apply to the
HPM system.
The APM is a I/O rack system used to get I/O signals into the DCS system. It is
comprised of a plug in APM processor module and various other serial I/O,
analog I/O and digital I/O plug in modules. The APM rack system can be
expanded by adding one or more additional racks. Assuming open slots are
available, up to 16 SIO modules can be connected to each APM system. Each
SIO module is connected to the target equipment via a Field Termination
Assembly (FTA). Each FTA has 2 serial ports with each port individually
configurable as either an RS232 port or 2 wire RS485 port. Port characteristics
are as follows:
Modicon compatible Modbus RTU protocol

Maximum baud rate of 19200 kbps
Data bits 8
Stop bits and parity selectable
TB-980201 ALL.71+
TB-980201
FTA Array Points

Each FTA has a maximum amount of memory space allocated by the APM. This
memory is organized in 16 blocks called Array Points. In addition, each HPM or
APM is limited to 80 Array points in total that must be shared between all the SIO
modules in its rack system. Each Array Point can therefore hold 512 bits of data
and can hold one type of data variable.
Each Array Point can therefore be configured as one of the following:
512
32
16
16
Coils or Status points.

16 bit Short Integer registers
IEEE Floating point variables
32 bit Long Integer variables (see below)
With a maximum of 16 array points available per FTA it can be seen that data
consolidation and grouping becomes very important. Typical TDC3000-Omni
systems will require a mixture of data types to be exchanged, this further
complicates the configuration process. The user must take care not to waste
valuable memory space by partially filling array points. Try to minimize the types
of variable (e.g.: if you only need to read a few short integers consider converting
them to long integers within the flow computer using variable statements). The
limited number of array points also impacts how many Omni flow computers can
be connected (multi dropped) to each FTA for example: Most applications
require long integer totalizers, IEEE floating point values and also alarm
statuses. This means that at least 3 array points will be needed per Omni and
that assumes that 16 IEEE floats, 16 totalizers and 512 alarms will be sufficient
to transfer all the data needed by the TDC3000 system (extremely unlikely, as
there could be up to 4 meter runs configured).
32-Bit Long Integer Variables

Long integer types are not supported directly by the TDC3000 system. They can
be read as 2 concatenated 16-bit short integers and combined within the
TDC3000 system. The Honeywell cannot write to Omni long integer types
because the Honeywell SIO Modbus protocol does not support Modbus function
code 16 (write multiple registers) for integer registers. The protocol does
however support writing to IEEE Floating point variables. Omnis experience has
shown that there are very few instances where the TDC3000 system needs to
write long integers within the flow computer. Typical long integer data that there
has been a need to write in the past has been duplicated in IEEE floats as shown
below and on following page.
TB-980201 ALL.71+
Long Integer
IEEE Float
Meter #1 - Current MF in Use

5113
5213
5313
5413
7796
7797
7798
7799
Station Running Batch Size

Station Next Batch Size
5819
5820
7787
7783
Technical Bulletin
Long Integer
IEEE Float
Meter #1 - Next Batch Size
5820
7783
Meter #2 - Running Batch Size

5825
5826
7788
7784

5831
5832
7789
7785

5837
5838
7790
7786
Configuring The Omni Flow Computer

Setup the flow computer serial port settings to match the Honeywell FTA settings
and make sure to select Modicon Compatible.
In view of the Honeywell array point limitation it is important to group the data as
efficiently as possible within the Omni flow computer. Two options are available:
1) Custom data packet arrays
2) Move data to flow computer scratchpad variables using Variable
Statements
Method 1 must be used if it will be necessary to both read and write into the
variables. Method 2 can only be used when it is only necessary to read data.
Data Grouping Option (a) Custom Data Packet Setup

The Omni flow computer has 3 custom data packet areas where data can be
grouped. These 3 data areas are addressed starting at Modbus addresses
0001, 0201 and 0401. Configure these data areas by completing the custom
packet setup menus in the flow computer.
When the Omni serial port is set as being Modicon Compatible the custom
packet data is read / write accessible by the TDC3000 system. Unlike the FTA
arrays, the Omni does allow mixed data types within a custom data packet/array.
This means that multiple FTA array points can be associated with one custom
packet.
Modbus Function Codes Used to Access Custom Packet

Data Within The Omni
The Omni supports the following Modbus function codes to access custom
packet data:
Read Multiple Registers
Write Multiple Registers
Write Single Register
03
16
06
TB-980201 ALL.71+
TB-980201
From the above it can be seen that Boolean variables must be handled
differently when grouped within a custom array. They cannot be accessed using
the normal Modbus function codes 01, 05 and 15. They can be read and written
but as byte packed bits within Registers not as Coils and Status bits. For this
reason it is recommended that writes to Boolean coils be accomplished by using
the normal Modbus function code 05 and writing directly to the database Boolean
point address.
CAUTION!
Because Boolean data is

byte packed the user must
ensure that the number of
Booleans included in the
custom packet are grouped
in such a way as to ensure
that the packet always
contains an even number of
bytes (i.e. the function
codes we are using expect
to be dealing with registers
and you cant have half a
register).
Here is an example showing a typical setup using the custom packet located at
address 0001:
Packet #01 Point #
# of Points
Packet #02 Point #
# of Points
Packet #03 Point #
# of Points
Packet #04 Point #
# of Points
Packet #05 Point #
# of Points
Packet #06 Point #
# of Points
Packet #07 Point #
# of Points
Packet #08 Point #
# of Points
Packet #09 Point #
# of Points
Packet #10 Point #
# of Points
Packet #11 Point #
# of Points
Packet #12 Point #
# of Points
Packet #13 Point #
# of Points
Packet #14 Point #
# of Points
Packet #15 Point #
# of Points
Packet #16 Point #
# of Points
Packet #17 Point #
# of Points
Packet #18 Point #
# of Points
Packet #19 Point #
# of Points
Packet #20 Point #
# of Points
7101
8
7201
8
7301
8
7401
8
5101
4
5201
4
5301
4
5401
4
3101
4
3201
4
3301
4
3401
4
1105
48
1205
48
1305
48
1405
48
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ADDRESS
0001 - 0016
0017 - 0032
FTA ARRAY # USED

1
Total 16 Floats
1
0033 - 0048
0049 - 0064
0065 - 0072
0073 - 0080
0081 - 0088
0089 - 0096
0097 - 0100
0101 - 0104
0105 - 0108
0109 - 0112
0113 - 0115
0116 - 0118
0119 - 0121
0122 - 0124
Total 16 Floats
Total 16 Long Int.
Total 16 Short Int.
Total 24 Packed
Bytes
These packets are available but

are not used in this example.
The above shows a total of 32 floating points,16 long integers, 16 short integers
and 192 Boolean status bits packed in 24 bytes being mapped in 1 custom data
packet and 5 FTA arrays.
TB-980201 ALL.71+
Technical Bulletin
Data Grouping Option (b) Variable Statement Moves to

Scratchpad Variables
Option (b) is limited to when data needs to be read but not written to. Non
contiguous data is moved into the flow computer scratchpad variables located at:
Boolean Scratchpad Variables
Integer Scratchpad Variables
String Scratchpad Variables
Long Integer Scratchpad Variables
Floating Point Scratchpad Variables
1501
3501
4501
5501
7501
through
through
through
through
through
1699
3599
4599
5599
7599
User Boolean statements are used to group Boolean bits as follows:

Example:
1025:
1026:
1501=1105:1169
1565=1205:1269
Move 64 bits to 1501 through 1564

Move 64 bits to 1565 through 1628
User variable statements are used to move all of the remaining data types as
follows:
Example:
7025:
7026:
7501=7101:7103
7504=7201:7203
Move 3 floats to 7501 through 7503

Move 3 floats to 7504 through 7506
Communication Method 2: Programmable

Logic Gateway (PLCG)
The PLCG is meant to receive register data from PLCs representing unscaled
analog values and 16-bit counters. Functionality is built into the PLCG which
allows the user to easily scale analog inputs of 0-9999 or 0-4095 into
engineering units. Alarm points can also be entered and monitored. This
philosophy is at odds with the Omni flow computer as the vast majority of the
variables within the flow computer are in engineering units requiring no scaling or
alarm checking in the PLCG. In addition most of the data is contained in IEEE
floating point format or 32-bit long integer values.
The Modbus protocol supported by the PLCG unlike the APM-SIO module does
not support reads or writes of IEEE floating point data. The protocol also does
not support multiple register writes which would be required to write data to a
flow computer long integer type.
The PLCG can however be configured to scale other nominal ranges such as 0999 of which there are some variables of this type within the flow computer as
shown below:
Mtr#1
Mtr#2
Mtr#3
Mtr#4
Station
Current Gross Flow Rates

Current Net Flow Rates
Current Mass Flow Rates
Current S&W Corrected Flow Rates
3142
3140
3144
3149
3242
3240
3244
3249
3342
3340
3344
3349
3442
3440
3444
3449
3804
3802
3806
Current Temperature
Current Pressure
Current Analog Density
3147
3146
3148
3247
3246
3248
3347
3346
3348
3447
3446
3448
3809
3808
3810
TB-980201 ALL.71+
TB-980201
Counter inputs ranging from 0-65535 are treated more generically requiring no
scaling and are usually used for display purposes or are passed to an
Application Module (AM) for processing.
There are two options to monitor totalizing within the Omni flow computer:
1) Read long integer totalizers as two consecutive counter inputs and

combine in the Application Module (AM) as follows:
Totalizer = (high register * 65536) + low register
2) Read specially provided 16 bit integer non-resetable totalizers that roll at

65536 within the Omni data base shown below.
Gross Totalizer
Net Totalizer
Mass Totalizer
S&W Corrected Net Totalizer
Mtr#1
Mtr#2
Mtr#3
Mtr#4
Station
3143
3141
3145
3150
3243
3241
3245
3250
3343
3341
3345
3350
3443
3441
3445
3450
3805
3803
3807
The advantage of option (1) above is that any of the internal totalizers of the flow
computer can be read in this manner and the results displayed by the TDC3000
system will match the flow computer displayed values. Option (2) is limited to
one set of non-resetable totals which are not normally displayed at the flow
computer and are of limited use.
Using Variable Statements within the Omni flow computer makes it easy to
convert just about any variable within the flow computers data base into a 16-bit
register that can be read by the PLCG as either a counter or an analog
(assuming the data will fit), the only problem being the availability of enough
variable statements (64 are provided).
Example 1: Variable read as counter for display only
7025:
3501=7105*#10
3501 contains M #1 temperature in tenths of

degrees
Example 2: Variable read as unscaled analog 0-4095 representing 50 to 150 F

7026:
7105-#50
Adjust for 50 degree zero point
7027:
3502=7026*#40.95
100 degree span = 4095, move to scratch

integer 3502
Note that in Example 2 above, no attempt was made to limit the impact of over
or under range values passed to the PLCG. It is the authors understanding that
inputs outside of the expected range cause bad process value alarms in the
PLCG.
TB-980201 ALL.71+
Technical Bulletin
Selection of Communication Method

Analysis of the various methods available shows that communications via the
APM-SIO or HPM-SIO are most likely to provide the best solution, providing
reasonable access to the flow computers database and requiring no custom
driver programming in the TDC3000 system. Because of the awkward
philosophical fit between the PLCG and flow computer type devices, many of the
built in features of the PLCG (such as scaling and alarming) cannot be used. For
this reason the use of a PLCG is not recommended except for instances where
one already exists in a system and has an open port and an APM or HPM is not
available. The CLM module is potentially the most flexible solution but the cost
impact of any custom software driver development must be determined. Omni
does not know whether a compatible protocol driver exists at this time, please
contact Honeywell for more information in this regard.
TB-980201 ALL.71+
Date: 02
23
98
Author(s): Kenneth D. Elliott / T.J. Tajani
TB # 980202
Recalculating a Previous Batch within the

Flow Computer
Contents
Scope....................................................................................................................1

complements the
Volume 2, Chapter 3
Computer Batching
Operations, applicable to
Revision 20.71/24.71+.
Calculations Performed ......................................................................................2
Batch Recalculation - The

batch recalculation feature
allows you to adjust
quantities of the previous 4
batches at measurement
locations where
SG60/API60 and S&W
values only become
available after the batch has
been delivered.
How the Flow Computer Manages the Modbus Database ..............................5
Abstract ................................................................................................................2
Using the Flow Computer Keypad to Recalculate a Previous Batch
Ticket ....................................................................................................................3
Step 1 ............................................................................................................................ 3
Step 2 ............................................................................................................................ 3
Step 3 ............................................................................................................................ 3
Step 4 ............................................................................................................................ 4
Step 5 ............................................................................................................................ 4
Previous Batch Data that Is Writable............................................................................. 6
Conclusion...........................................................................................................7
Scope
Computers have the feature of Batch Recalculation. This feature applies to
Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems (with K
Factor Linearization.
TB-980202 20/24.71+
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
The purpose of recalculating a previous batch is to make batch quantity
corrections based on SG60/API60 and Sediment and Water data becoming
available via sample analysis performed after a batch delivery is complete. At
measurement locations where SG60/API60 and S&W values are not available
online, sampler devices continuously extract a representative sample of fluid
during a batch. At the end of the batch the sample container is sent for lab
analysis. The data obtained from the analysis report can then be used to
recalculate the batch correction factors and therefore batch quantities. Historical
data from these analysis reports is also used to determine what values of
SG60/API60 should be used for real time calculation of future batches that are
known to have similar characteristic. These batches ultimately can also be
recalculated when their actual analysis is determined.
Calculations Performed
The liquid correction factors Ctl and Cpl are first recalculated using the
sample analysis SG60/API60 and the batch flow weighted average
temperature and pressure calculated during the batch.
Gross Standard Volume (GSV) is recalculated using the newly calculated
Ctl and Cpl.
The Sediment and Water correction factor Csw is calculated using the
sample analysis S&W%.
Net Standard Volume (NSV) is recalculated using the recalculated GSV
and Csw factor.
TB-980202 20/24.71+
TB-980202
Using the Flow Computer Keypad to

Recalculate a Previous Batch Ticket
CAUTION!
To ensure that previous

batch data is correctly
recalculated do not
recalculate a batch close to
ending a current batch in
progress.
Step 1
Press [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n] [Enter] (n = meter run number). The Omni
LCD screen will display:

!

"
TIP - Note that only 4 lines

can be displayed at one
time. Use the scroll up or
down arrows keys to display
additional text.
Step 2
Select which previous batch you wish to recalculate. The Omni stores the last 4
completed batches numbered as:
1 = last batch completed
to
4 = oldest batch completed.
Press [] to scroll down to Select Prev # Batch and enter a number between 1
and 4, depending upon which batch is to be recalculated.
The flow computer moves the selected previous batch data to the previous
batch data points within the database (see explanation later in this document)
Step 3
Enter Password when requested.
TB-980202 20/24.71+
Technical Bulletin
Step 4
Scroll to either Enter API60 or Enter SG60. Type in a valid value and press
[Enter].
Step 5
Scroll to Recalculate & Print?. Press [Y] and then [Enter].
At this time the flow computer will recalculate the batch data and send the report
to the printer and the Historical Batch Report Buffer in RAM memory. Batch
report data can also be captured in Raw Data Archive RAM using the trigger
Boolean 1n76. The default batch report shows the batch number as XXXXXXXX where the number ahead of the - is the batch number (5n90) and the
number after the - is the number of times that the batch has been recalculated
(3n52). Variable (3n52) is reset to 0 at the end of a batch and increments each
time the batch is recalculated.
TB-980202 20/24.71+
TB-980202
How the Flow Computer Manages the Modbus

Database
A pointer mechanism has been utilized which avoids having to have duplicate
data points for every batch report variable for each of the four previous batches.
Only one set of data points for previous batch data are mapped within the
Modbus database. A pointer register is used to determine which set of previous
batch data will be available by accessing the previous batch data points within
the Modbus database.
Using the batch gross totalizer variable as an example, we have:
Note: The second digit of
the index number (indicated
as n) defines which meter
run you are working with
(i.e., n = 1, 2, 3 or 4).
Modbus address of Current Batch in Progress Gross Totalizer is 5n01

Modbus address of Previous Batch Gross Totalizer is 5n50
Modbus address of Pointer register to select which previous batch is
mapped is 3n51
As the batch progresses, the gross totalizer (5n01) accumulates flow. At the end
of the batch the flow computer performs the following actions:
1) #3 previous batch data replaces #4 previous batch data

4) Current batch data replaces #1 previous batch data
5) Pointer register 3n51 is set to the value 1 so that the Modbus database
addresses for previous batch will access data for the batch just ended.
This ensures that the batch report which prints immediately at the end of
a batch and gets its data from the Modbus database, includes the correct
information.
The following table (using the batch gross totalizer as an example) shows typical
data that would be read by accessing Modbus points 5n01 and 5n50. The data
read depends upon the value of pointer register 3n51.
TB-980202 20/24.71+
STEP
DESCRIPTION
Technical Bulletin
ST
PREV.
BATCH
RD
PREV.
BATCH
TH
1 PREV.
BATCH
5n01
5n50
5n50
5n50
5n50
Value contained in
Pointer register
3n51.
ND
CURRENT
BATCH
4 PREV.
BATCH
First batch running.
12340
First batch ended.
23450
12340
Second batch
ended.
34560
23450
12340
Third batch ended.
45670
34560
23450
12340
Fourth batch
ended.
56780
45670
34560
23450
12340
Fifth batch ended

with sixth batch
running.
6123
56780
45670
34560
23450
Previous Batch Data that Is Writable

Except for the data listed below, all data points for previous batch transactions
are read only for reasons of data integrity.
METER #1
METER #2
METER #3
METER #4
STATION
SG 60 or Reference
Density (Rev. 24.71)
8508
8608
8708
8808
8908
API 60 Gravity
8519
8619
8719
8819
8919
8517
8617
8717
8817
8917
2756
2757
2758
2759
1798
Sediment and Water

Percentage (BS&W)
Command Boolean which
triggers the recalculation
TB-980202 20/24.71+
TB-980202
Conclusion
Note: Setting these
registers via Variable
Statements is not allowed
and will not produce the
expected results
The flow computer retains data for the last four completed batches. Only one set
of this data can be accessed at a time. Pointer registers, 3151 Meter Run #1,
3251 Meter Run #2, 3351 Meter Run #3, 3451 Meter Run #4n and 3879 for
Meter Station are used to determine what set of batch data will be accessed.
API60/SG60 and S&W data can be adjusted and the batch recalculated by
writing a 1 to points, 2756 for Meter Run #1, 2757 for Meter Run #2, 2758 for
Meter Run #3, 2759 for Meter Run #4 and 1798 for Meter Station.
TB-980202 20/24.71+
Date: 03
10
98
Author(s): Richard Dojs
TB # 980301

complements the
Volume 1, applicable to all
firmware revisions.
Contents
Scope....................................................................................................................1
Abstract ................................................................................................................1
DANGER!
Instructions..........................................................................................................2
Scope
Electrical Shock Hazard!
Dangerous AC voltages are
present on the power supply
module and ribbon cable
when the unit is AC
powered. To avoid electrical
shock which could be fatal,
It is imperative that you
remove all power before
opening and disassembling
the flow computer and take
any other necessary
precautions.
Only qualified technicians
should work on any internal
circuitry. Omni Flow
Computers, Inc. is not
responsible for personal
injuries or accidents that
may occur when working on
flow computer circuitry.
CAUTION!
Static electricity can

damage flow computer
circuitry. Take approved
static device handling
precautions when working
on the flow computer.
The observations and instructions for replacing Erasable Programmable Readonly Memory (EPROM) chips contained in this technical bulletin are applicable to
all firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers. It is strongly
recommended that EPROMs be replaced only by qualified personnel.
Abstract
You will need to replace EPROMs usually to upgrade your flow computer
firmware. Certain critical steps must be performed when replacing EPROMs. It is
strongly recommended that EPROMs be replaced only by qualified personnel.
Before removing any circuit boards from the flow computer, the following must
be observed:
Personal Safety : Although most of the internal circuits are powered by
relatively low voltages, dangerous AC voltages are
present on the power supply module and ribbon
cable when the unit is AC powered. For this reason it
is important to remove all power before
disassembling the computer.
Static Electricity : Static electricity can be generated simply by moving
around on certain surfaces or wearing certain types
of clothing. The flow computers printed circuits can
be damaged by this static electricity. Take approved
static device handling precautions when working on
the flow computer.
After replacement, the old EPROMs must be returned to the manufacturing
department of Omni Flow Computers, Inc. in Stafford, Texas. A Business Reply
Label is available for this purpose.
TB-980301 All Revs
Technical Bulletin
Instructions
To replace EPROM chips, follow these instructions:
(1) Stop flow then end the batch. Record all data by retrieving all reports
and saving and printing the flow computer configuration using
OmniCom Software. Verify that the file in OmniCom is the correct
version.
(2) Enter the Password Maintenance Mode and enter the privileged
password for your computer. Scroll down to Reset All Ram ? and enter
[Y]. For Omni flow computers manufactured after 1995, resetting all
RAM will not affect totalizer and calibration data.
(3) Remove all power from the computer and completely disconnect all
AC/DC power.
(4) If you have an Omni 3000 Flow Computer, remove the Digital I/O
Module from Slot #2. This will allow better access to the CPU Module in
Slot #1.
CAUTION!
When removing the CPU
Module, take extreme care
not to bend or fold the
membrane keypad ribbon
cable too sharply, or the
metallic traces could be
damaged.
Location of EPROM
Chips- The location of the
EPROM chips on the CPU
Module is shown in Fig. 1.
The EPROMs are the two
large 32-pin Integrated
Circuits (ICs or chips) with
labels marked U3 and U4.
Note the position of the
orientation notches at one
end of each EPROM.
(5) The CPU is connected to the front panel via a short ribbon cable that is
folded in a specific manner. Carefully remove the CPU Module just far
enough to unplug this ribbon cable. When removing the CPU Module,
allow the connector edge of the module to tilt towards the back of the
flow computer. This will enable the Ni-Cad battery on the CPU Module to
slide past the program inhibit switch on the front panel assembly. Take
special care not to bend or fold the membrane keypad ribbon cable too
sharply, or the metallic traces could be damaged.
(6) Using an EPROM extractor or small flat-bladed screwdriver, carefully pry
up one end of the EPROM and repeat the prying at its other end. This
will allow the EPROM to be removed without bending any pins.
(7) Lay the module on a non-metallic surface to prevent shorting out the NiCad Battery. Install the new EPROMs making sure that the orientation
notches are correctly positioned and that no pins are bent under the
chip. To install, line up one edge of the EPROM pins making sure that
the opposite edge is lined up with the socket holes, and firmly press the
EPROM into the socket.
(8) Reinstall the CPU Module in the reverse order and apply power.
(9) Initialize the computer using OMNI as the password. Repeat Step (2)
to reset all RAM, and reintialize the flow computer once again using
OMNI as the password.
(10) Manually create a new file based on the oil file printout and upload the
newly created configuration file to the OMNI.
Remember to use the Business Reply Label supplied with your new EPROMs.
Please return the old EPROMs to Omni Flow Computers, Inc.
TB-980301 All Revs
TB-980301
IMPORTANT!
TROUBLESHOOTING TIP:
Omni Display Does Not
Come On After Resetting
All RAM - If the Omni
Display does not come on
after resetting all RAM,
proceed as follows:
(1) Disconnect all power to
the Omni.
(2) Remove CPU Module
and also remove the
System Watchdog
Jumper J3 (See Fig. 1)
on the CPU.
(3) Reinstall CPU Module
with Jumper J3
removed.
(4) Power up the Omni and
reset all RAM again.
Display should be on.
(5) Power down again the
flow computer and
remove CPU Board.
(6) Replace Jumper J3 and
then reinstall the CPU
Module.
(7) Once again, apply
power to the flow
computer. Display
should be normal.
If you encounter any other
difficulties, please contact
our technical staff.
Math
Processor
Central
Processor
Program
EPROM
Program
RAM
Archive
RAM
Backup
Batttery
J1
J2
EPROM Size
1 OR 4 Meg Bit
Select 4 Meg
As Shown
J3
Fig. 1.
System Watchdog
J3 In = Enabled
J3 Out = Disabled
(Always Enabled)
Layout of Central Processor Module Showing Location of EPROM

ICs and Jumper J3.
Phone: (281) 240-6161

Fax: (281) 240-6162
E-mail:
techsupport@omniflow.com
TB-980301 All Revs
Date: 04
06
98
TB # 980401
Peer-to-Peer Basics
Contents
complements the
User Manual, and is
revisions Version .70+.
This is an updated edition
that replaces previously
published bulletins under
the same title.
See also the following:
TB-980402 - Using the
Peer-to-Peer Function in
a Redundant Flow
Computer Application
Volume 1 - 1.6.3. Serial
Communication Modules
Peer-to-Peer
Communications - The
peer-to-peer communication
feature allows you to multidrop up to 32 flow
computers and other
devices in RS-485 serial
communications mode, and
up to 12 using RS-232-C
communications.
schemes allows for
interconnecting two
configured flow computers.
TB-980401 ALL.70+
Scope....................................................................................................................1
Abstract ................................................................................................................2
Determining Which Computer Will Be Master..................................................2
Communication Settings for the Peer-to-Peer Link.........................................3
Foreign Modbus Devices and Single Master Systems ....................................3
Wiring Options.....................................................................................................4
RS-232-C Wiring Requirements.................................................................................... 4
RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Wiring Requirements...................................................... 5
RS-485 Wiring Requirements........................................................................................ 6
Setting up Transactions .....................................................................................8

What Modbus Function Codes Are Used..........................................................8
Special Considerations when Modicon Compatible is Selected for
Port #2 ..................................................................................................................8
Using Peer-to-Peer with Micro Motion Coriolis Mass Meters ......................9
The Micro Motion Meter is a Modicon Compatible Device........................................... 11
Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer Transactions................................................................... 11
Scope
All firmware revisions Version .70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers
have the Peer-to-Peer Communication feature.
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
Communications between Omni flow computers is accomplished using the peerto-peer function. This function is available only on Serial Port #2 with data being
transmitted and received using Modbus RTU protocol. A data transaction list
within each flow computer defines each Read or Write operation to be
transacted for that computer. A maximum of 16 transactions per flow computer
are available. The transaction list must be contiguous (i.e., an empty transaction
will be treated as the end of list).
Two optional serial communication I/O modules are available with your flow
computer: the RS-232-C (compatible) Model #68-6005, and the RS-232-C/RS485 Model #68-6205. The older Model #68-6005 is only capable of RS-232
compatible serial communications. The newer Model #68-6205 is capable of
either RS-232 or RS-485 communications via a selection jumper. When
jumpered for RS-232, the characteristics and functionality of this module is
identical to that of the older RS-232-C module.
Determining Which Computer Will Be Master

Each flow computer wishing to communicate must temporarily become a
Modbus Master so that messages may be initiated and its transaction list
processed. This is accomplished when the current Modbus Master completes its
transaction list and broadcasts the Modbus address of the next computer to be
the master. The computer with the Modbus ID which matches the broadcast
then assumes mastership and proceeds to process its transaction list. A time-out
occurs whenever the next master in sequence does not take mastership and the
broadcast will be retried once. Should the computer still fail to respond, the
current master will attempt to pass mastership to the next computer in sequence
by incrementing the Modbus ID by one and re-broadcasting the new Modbus ID.
Each flow computer needing to process a transaction list (i.e., be a master)
requires the following three entries: (1) Next Master in Sequence; (2) Last
Master in Sequence; and (3) Retry Timer (50mS ticks).
These entries are in the Peer-to-Peer Setup menu and function as follows:
Entry 1 : This entry is the Modbus ID for the next flow computer master. A
non zero entry here is what actually turns on the peer-to-peer
function. Modbus IDs for master devices in the link must be
assigned starting at 1, and for maximum efficiency not contain
any missing IDs (i.e., 1, 2, 3, 4, Not 1, 3, 6, 10, for instance).
Entry 2 : This entry is the Modbus ID for the last flow computer master. Any
master failing to find the next master will keep trying Modbus IDs
until it reaches this ID, it will then start the search again at Modbus
ID 1.
Entry 3 : This entry is used to setup the communication retry rate. When
the peer-to-peer link is solely comprised of Omni flow computers
this entry should be set to 3 ticks (150 msec).
TB-980401 ALL.70+
TB-980401
Peer-to-Peer Basics
Communication Settings for the Peer-to-Peer

Link
The following settings must be used:
Modbus RTU Protocol

8 Data Bits
1 Stop Bit
No Parity
While slower baud rates can be used, 38.4 kbps or 19.2 kbps will provide
maximum performance.
Foreign Modbus Devices and Single Master

Systems
INFO - It is important to
note that in a peer-to-peer
system, only the flow
computers that have a nonzero entry for Next Master
in Sequence are limited to
using Serial Port #2, all of
the other flow computers
are simply acting as
Modbus slaves and can use
any valid Modbus serial
port.
TB-980401 ALL.70+
The peer-to-peer function is not limited to multiple Omni flow computers. Some
applications simply require a single flow computer master to communicate with a
variety of Modbus slave devices which may be flow computers, PLCs etc. In
these cases, the entries 1 and 2 above would be set to 1 in the master flow
computer only, signifying only one master is in the system. Entry 3 above would
normally be set to 3 but may need to be increased depending upon the message
response time of any foreign Modbus devices in the system.
Technical Bulletin
Wiring Options
RS-232-C Wiring Requirements
The following diagram shows the wiring requirements using the RS-232-C
termination option. When multiple flow computers are used as peer-to-peer
masters, they are connected in two-wire, multi-drop mode.
Computer uses a
proprietary tristatable
RS-232-Compatible serial
port, which unlike a normal
RS-232 port, can be multidropped, interconnecting up
to 12 flow computers or
other serial devices.
Om ni #1
Om ni #2
Om ni #3
Om ni #4
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
Fig. 1.
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements using the

RS-232-C Termination Option
TB-980401 ALL.70+
TB-980401
Peer-to-Peer Basics
RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Wiring Requirements

The following diagram shows a typical installation where two flow computers are
connected to a PLC via an RS-232 to RS-485 converter module.
Omni #1
Omni #2
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
5
6
7
8
9
7
8
9
10
11
12
10
11
12
Fig. 2.
TB-980401 ALL.70+
RS-232 to 485
Converter
(Disable Echo)
R
S
2
3
2
TX-A
TX-B
RX-A
RX-B
PLC
R
S
B 4
8
5
A
Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with PLC

using a Standard RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Module
Technical Bulletin
RS-485 Wiring Requirements

Serial I/O Module # 686205, the flow computer
must also have an MV
Module to communicate
with multivariable
transmitters. This serial
module is jumpered to IRQ
3 when used in combination
with an MV Module. Without
an MV Module, the jumper
is placed at IRQ 2. The MV
Module can only be used
with this serial module (686205) and is not compatible
with the Serial I/O Module #
68-6005. For more
information, see Technical
Bulletin # TB-980303.
The diagram below shows a typical peer-to-peer installation using RS-485

communications, where four flow computers are interconnected in a two-wire,
multi-drop mode.
Omni #1
Omni #2
Omni #3
Omni #4
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
6
7
6
(B)
10
10
10
(A)
RS-485 Two-wire
Terminated
11
(A)
11
12
RS-485 Two-wire
Non-terminated
(B)
12
6
(B)
10
11
Fig. 3.
6
(B)
(A)
12
RS-485 Two-wire
Non-terminated
11
(A)
12
RS-485 Two-wire
Terminated

RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop
TB-980401 ALL.70+
TB-980401
Peer-to-Peer Basics
The peer-to-peer communication link may also be used to transfer data to and
from any other Modbus slave device such as a PLC. The following diagram
shows a typical installation using RS-485 where two flow computers are
connected to a PLC in a two-wire, multi-drop mode.
Omni #1
Omni #2
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
5
6
(B)
7
8
9
10
(A)
11
12
RS-485 Two-wire
Terminated
Fig. 4.
TB-980401 ALL.70+
(B)
7
8
9
10
(A)
11
12
PLC
R
S
A 4
8
5
B
RS-485 Two-wire
Non-terminated
Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with PLC

using the RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop
Technical Bulletin
Setting up Transactions
To process a transaction the flow computer requires the following data for each
transaction:
Modbus Broadcast
Address 0 - This address
only applies to write
transactions.
: The Modbus address of the target device.

This can be any valid Modbus address
including the broadcast address 0.
Read or Write
: Select the appropriate operation.
Source Point Number
: Specifies the data base address of the
variable in the source device. For a read
operation the slave is the source. For a write
operation the source is the Omni flow
computer master.
Number of Points
: The number of consecutive data variables to
transfer between devices, starting at the
source point number or address.
Destination Point Number : Specifies the data base address of the
variable in the destination device. For a write
operation the slave is the destination. For a
read operation the destination is the Omni flow
computer master.
Slave ID
What Modbus Function Codes Are Used

The flow computer decides what Modbus function code will be used depending
upon the Omni flow computer data type specified in the transaction.
Transactions involving short or long integers or IEEE floats will use Modbus
function codes 03H for reads and 10H for writes. Boolean variables are packed 8
to a byte starting at LS bit and use function codes 01H for reads and 0FH for
writes.
Special Considerations when Modicon

Compatible is Selected for Port #2
Some adjustments to the previous entries are needed when communicating with
devices that require Modicon Compatible to be selected for the peer-to-peer
port.
1) All data base point addresses (whether source or destination) referring to
the foreign Modicon compatible device, should be entered as one less
than the point address listed. This is needed because the Modicon device
automatically adds one to the address received over the data link and
subtracts one from the address before transmitting. References to data
base point addresses within the Omni flow computer master still use the
normal point address as shown in the Omni documentation.
2) The number of points entry becomes the number of 16 bit registers to
transfer, rather than the number of data variables.
TB-980401 ALL.70+
TB-980401
Peer-to-Peer Basics
Using Peer-to-Peer with Micro Motion

Coriolis Mass Meters
The Omni flow computer can be configured to accept mass or volume pulses
from a Micro Motion (MM) Coriolis Meter RFT transmitter as well as
communicate via Modbus to the device and obtain variables such as fluid density
and MM transducer alarm status.
The flow computer is equipped with special firmware code to make the interface
to the Micro Motion meter more useful and hopefully simpler. The
communication link between the Micro Motion meter and the flow computer is
via the peer-to-peer link. It is possible to have multiple Micro Motion meters
connected to multiple flow computers as shown below.
Omni #1
Omni #2
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
7
8
7
8
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
RS-232 to 485
Converter
(Disable Echo)
R
S
2
3
2
TX-A
TX-B
RX-A
RX-B
Micro
Motion
RFT #2
R
S
27 (Z22) 4
26 (D22) 8
5
R
27 (Z22)
S
26 (D22) 4
8
5
Micro
Motion
RFT #1
Note: Termination Points 26 & 27

correspond to the explosion-proof
field-mount RFT9739; and (D22)
& (Z22) to the rack-mount version
of the model.
Fig. 5.
TB-980401 ALL.70+
Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with Micro

Motion RFT Transmitters using a RS-232 to RS-485 Converter
Technical Bulletin
The following diagram shows a typical peer-to-peer installation using RS-485,

where two flow computers are connected to two Micro Motion RFT9739
transmitters via a proprietary RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module #68-6205.
Micro Motion Elite
Model RFT9739
Transmitter Connectivity Both field-mount (explosionproof) and rack-mount
models of the RFT9739
transmitter have the A and
B channels reversed to the
industry standard applied to
Omni flow computers; i.e.,
the flow computers A
channel connects to Micro
Motions B channel. Omni
has tested this connectivity
with the Micro Motion
RFT9739 Field-Mount
Transmitter, but connecting
to the rack-mount version
has not yet been tested.
Information on this
connectivity has been
provided by Micro Motion,
Inc. Please contact Micro
Motion for further
information.
Omni #1
Omni #2
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
5
6
7 (B)
8
9
10
(A)
11
12
7 (B)
8
9
10
(A)
11
12
RS-485 Two-wire
Terminated
Fig. 6.
10
RS-485 Two-wire
Non-terminated
Note: Termination resistors

may be required with some
installations.
Micro
Motion
RFT9739
#1
Micro
Motion
RFT9739
#2
(B)
26 (D22)
(B)
26 (D22)
(A)
27 (Z22)
120
(A)
27 (Z22)
Note: Termination Points 26 & 27

correspond to the explosion-proof
field-mount RFT9739; and (D22)
& (Z22) to the rack-mount version
of the model.
Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with Micro

Motion RFT9739 Transmitters using the RS-485 Two-wire Multidrop.
TB-980401 ALL.70+
TB-980401
Peer-to-Peer Basics
The Micro Motion Meter is a Modicon Compatible Device

Some adjustments to the peer-to-peer entries are needed when communicating
with devices that require Modicon Compatible to be selected for the peer-topeer port (Serial Port #2).
1) All data base point addresses (whether source or destination) referring to
the foreign Modicon compatible device, should be entered as one less
than the point address listed. This is needed because the Modicon device
automatically adds one to the address received over the data link and
subtracts one from the address before transmitting. References to data
base point addresses within the Omni flow computer master still use the
normal point address as shown in the Omni documentation.
2) The number of points entry becomes the number of 16 bit registers to
transfer, rather than the number of data variables.
Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer Transactions

Note: Meter Run #1 Density
I/O point must be assigned
to 99 and Serial Port #2
must be assigned to be
Modicon Compatible for
this to work correctly. Note
also that the MM Modicon
documentation manual lists
the flowing density as point
number 20249. This is
common with Modicon
compatible devices. Where
there is a 5 digit address,
drop the first digit and
subtract 1 from the point
address before using it in a
transaction.
The following peer-to-peer transaction reads the flowing density of the fluid from
the Micro Motion device (Modbus ID #2) and stores it in data base point 7108
(unfactored density, meter run #1).
Transaction #1
Target Slave ID
Read/Write ?
Source Point #
# of Points
Destination Pnt #
........
........
........
........
........
2
R
248
2
7108
The next transaction reads a 16-bit integer register from the MM meter which
contains packed alarm status bits. These are stored in a special register within
the flow computer which causes them to be time and date tagged, printed and
logged just as though they were flow computer alarms.
Transaction #2
Target Slave ID
Read/Write ?
Source Point #
# of Points
Destination Pnt #
........
........
........
........
........
2
R
0
1
3118
The examples above refer to Meter #1 transactions that the flow computer is
requesting. More transactions may be needed depending upon what data is
required and how many meter runs are being used.
TB-980401 ALL.70+
11
Date: 04
07
98
Author(s): Kenneth E. Elliott
TB # 980402
Using the Peer-to-Peer Function in a

Redundant Flow Computer Application
Contents
complements the
User Manual, and is
revisions Versions .70+.
This is an updated edition of
the bulletin previously
published under the same
title.
Scope....................................................................................................................1
Abstract ................................................................................................................2
RS-232-C Wiring Requirements .........................................................................2
RS-485 Wiring Requirements .............................................................................3
Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer for Redundant Flow Computer Applications....3
Sensing Failures and Switching between Redundant Computers.................5
Changing the Master / Slave Status via a Modbus Serial Port .......................6
Redirecting the Control Signals.........................................................................6
schemes allows for
interconnecting two
configured flow computers.
Sharing Input Signals Between Primary and Secondary Flow Computers ...7
Re-Calibration of Analog Inputs ........................................................................7
Sharing Digital I/O Signals Between Primary and Secondary Flow
Computers ...........................................................................................................7
Scope
All firmware revisions Versions .70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers
have the Peer-to-Peer Communications feature, which is available only on Serial
Port #2. This features includes the capability of setting-up redundant flow
computer schemes.
TB-980402 ALL.70+
Technical Bulletin
Abstract
Redundancy involves using two identically equipped flow computers and
connecting them in such a way to ensure uninterrupted measurement and
control functionality in the event of failure of one of the units. This requires that
all input and output signals are connected to both computers. During normal
operation, one computer is designated the primary and the other computer the
secondary or backup. To ensure synchronization between both devices,
important variables such as PID controller settings, control valve positions and
proving meter factors must be transmitted from the primary flow computer via
the peer-to-peer link to the secondary flow computer. Should a failure of the
primary flow computer occur, the secondary flow computer is automatically
promoted to primary and assumes all control and measurement functions. In this
case the data flow on the peer-to-peer link reverses automatically and the new
master begins to transmit critical data to the slave, assuming that it is
functioning. Peer-to-peer communication errors can occur during the switch over
and are normal. They are cleared by pressing the [Ack] key on the flow
computer keypad or writing to point 1712 (acknowledge station alarms). If the
other flow computer is non-operational, the peer-to-peer communication errors
cannot be cleared.
RS-232-C Wiring Requirements

The following diagram shows the wiring needed when flow computers are
applied in a redundancy scheme via the peer-to-peer feature and using the
proprietary RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005. They are connected in
a two-wire multi-drop mode.
Fig. 1.
Omni #1
Omni #2
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
10
10
11
11
12
12
Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements (RS-232-C

Serial Port)
TB-980402 ALL.70+
TB-980402
RS-485 Wiring Requirements

The diagram below shows the wiring needed when flow computers are applied in
a redundancy scheme via the peer-to-peer feature and using the proprietary RS232/485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205. They are connected in a multi-drop
mode using the RS-485 two-wire termination option.
Omni #1
Omni #2
TB3
(TB2)
TB3
(TB2)
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
5
6
(B)
7
8
9
10
(A)
11
12
RS-485 Two-wire
Terminated
Fig. 2.
(B)
7
8
9
10
(A)
11
12
RS-485 Two-wire
Terminated

RS-485 Two-wire Termination Mode in a Redundant Flow Computer
Scheme
Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer for Redundant

Flow Computer Applications
The Activate Redundancy Mode entry is found in the peer-to-peer setup menu.
Answering Yes causes the Next Master and Last Master entries to disappear
from the menu. They no longer need to be entered as the two flow computers
now manage these two entries automatically. Any data needing to be
synchronized between the flow computers will need to be setup by the user as
transactions in the peer-to-peer menu.
TB-980402 ALL.70+
Technical Bulletin
Two transactions are needed to handle redundant PID control:

Transactions #1 & #2 Both primary and secondary
flow computers must have
these entries if they will be
used for PID control.
Transaction #1 sends
the primary flow
computer PID control
mode settings
(Auto/Manual,
Local/Remote) to the
secondary flow
computer.
Transaction #2 sends
the primary flow
computer PID set points
and valve position values
to the secondary flow
computer.
Transaction #1
Target Slave ID
Read/Write ?
Source Point #
# of Points
Destination Pnt #
........
2
........
W
........ 13462
........
8
........ 13470
Transaction #2
Target Slave ID
Read/Write ?
Source Point #
# of Points
Destination Pnt #
........
........
........
........
........
2
W
7601
20
7601
More peer-to-peer transactions are needed if additional data needs to be

transferred, meter factors for example.
Flow computers containing firmware Revisions 22 or 26 handle meter factor
implementation differently than Revisions 20 or 24. These applications maintain
historical meter factor entries which are triggered and stored when the meter
factor is accepted and implemented at the end of a meter proving. As only the
primary flow computer will be doing the actual proving, three special variables
with associated firmware code have been added to the data base of revisions 22
and 26. By writing to and reading from these variables via the peer-to-peer link,
the secondary flow computer can implement the meter factor result obtained
when the primary computer completes and accepts a prove result.
Transactions #3 & #4
(Applicable to Firmware
Versions 22 & 26 Only) Both primary and secondary
flow computers must have
these entries.
Transaction #3 is used to
send the prove meter
factor (5904) and the
number of the meter last
proved (5905) to the
secondary flow
computer.
Transaction #4 confirms
that the meter factor has
been implemented in the
secondary flow computer
by reading back a copy
of the number of the
meter run just proved
(5906).
The following two transactions are required:

Transaction #3
Target Slave ID
Read/Write ?
Source Point #
# of Points
Destination Pnt #
........
........
........
........
........
2
W
5904
2
5904
Transaction #4
Target Slave ID
Read/Write ?
Source Point #
# of Points
Destination Pnt #
........
........
........
........
........
2
R
5906
1
5906
TB-980402 ALL.70+
TB-980402
Sensing Failures and Switching between

Redundant Computers
When Activate Redundancy is selected in the peer-to-peer menu, data base
variables are activated to provide a redundancy switching mechanism which is
accomplished by cross connecting 4 digital I/O points from each flow computer
(primary and secondary).
These database variables are:
2863
Watchdog status for this computer. Goes true 5 seconds after

initialization and remains true as long as the flow computer is
functioning correctly.
Mastership status for this flow computer. True whenever this flow
computer is the primary or master computer in the redundancy
scheme.
Watchdog status input from the other flow computer. This flow
computer will assume mastership if it sees this point go false.
Mastership status input from the other flow computer. This flow
computer will relinquish mastership if it sees this point go true.
2864
2713
2714
Redundancy Failover
Wiring - Any 4 digital I/O
points may be used to
provide a failover switching
mechanism. Fig. III.8-3 is
an example that shows
digital I/O 9 through 12
being used
O m ni #1
O m ni #2
TB 1
TB 1
8
O th e r M a s te r S ta tu s (2 7 1 4 )
9
M a s te r S ta tu s (2 8 6 4 )
10
O th e rs W a tc hd o g (2 7 1 3 )
11
W a tc h d o g O u t (2 8 6 3 )
12
M a s te r S ta tu s (2 8 6 4 )
O th e rs W a tc hd o g (2 7 1 3 )
10
11
W a tc h d o g O u t (2 8 6 3 )
12
TB 11
TB 11
Fig. 3.
TB-980402 ALL.70+
O th e rs M a s te r S ta tu s (2 7 1 4 )
Omni 6000 / 3000 Redundancy Failover Wiring
Technical Bulletin
Changing the Master / Slave Status via a

Modbus Serial Port
Sometimes it may be necessary to force a swap of primary (master) and
secondary (slave) flow computers. For example, if both primary and secondary
flow computers are functioning correctly (i.e. watchdogs are OK) but the MMI
serial communication link to the primary flow computer was lost, it would be
necessary to make the secondary flow computer the primary. Two special data
base points are available to provide this function, they are:
2715
Note: The 2716 command

will not work if the other flow
computers watchdog status
is not active (i.e., the other
computer must be
functioning correctly before
this flow computer can give
up mastership).
2716
Be Master - writing a one to this point automatically promotes this

flow computer to master. This in turn causes the digital I/O point
which is assigned point 2864 ( Mastership Status ) to go true.
Assuming the digital I/O are cross connected as shown in the
preceding figure, the other flow computer will automatically relinquish
mastership when this happens.
Be Slave - writing a one to this point automatically demotes this flow
computer to slave. This in turn causes the digital I/O point which is
assigned point 2864 ( Mastership Status ) to go false. Assuming the
digital I/O are cross connected as shown in the preceding figure, the
other flow computer will automatically assume mastership when this
happens.
Both the above commands are edge triggered needing only to be turned on, they
do not need to be turned off.
Redirecting the Control Signals

In the event of a primary/secondary flow computer swap, a method is needed to
redirect the appropriate 4-20 mA signals to control valves and other functions.
One way of doing this is to use a DC relay with type C contacts. Suitable relays
are available with multiple sets of contacts. The relay can be energized by the
digital output assigned to indicate Mastership Status from one of the flow
computers.
TB-980402 ALL.70+
TB-980402
Sharing Input Signals Between Primary and

Secondary Flow Computers
In a redundant system all input signals must be connected to both primary and
secondary flow computers. Voltage pulse signals such as flowmeters and
densitometer devices must be connected in parallel to the appropriate inputs of
both flow primary and secondary computers. Current pulse signals must first be
converted to voltage pulses by suitable input shunt resistor or source resistor.
As a general rule, follow the wiring recommendations shown for a normal single
flow computer installation (see Volume 1 of the User Manual) and then simply
wire the second flow computer terminals in parallel with the first computer.
Analog 4-20 mA signals should be converted to 1-5 volt signals by using a low
temperature coefficient precision 250 ohm resistor. For each signal, configure
the combo modules of both flow computers for 1-5 volt inputs and wire them in
parallel across an appropriate 250 ohm resistor mounted externally to the flow
computers.
Re-Calibration of Analog Inputs

Each flow computer input channel which is configured for 1 - 5 volt input signals
will need to be verified for accuracy. Re-calibration may be necessary depending
upon the accuracy of the 250 ohm resistor used and how well it matches the
internal 250 ohm resistor that was used when the input channel was originally
calibrated. The system wiring between the flow computer and the 250 ohm
resistor can also slightly affect the input calibration.
Sharing Digital I/O Signals Between Primary

and Secondary Flow Computers
Digital I/O channels configured as status inputs should be simply wired in parallel
(ORed) with the other flow computer. Digital I/O channels configured as outputs
may possibly require relay isolation similar to that needed for analog outputs
described previously. Typical output signals that need to be relay isolated are
sampler pulse outputs. Prover control signals do not usually need to be relay
isolated as the secondary computer will never be attempting to control the prover
while it is the slave or secondary computer. The user will need to determine
which outputs need to be isolated based on whether it is possible or likely that
the slave computer would activate the output when not in control.
TB-980402 ALL.70+
Date: 05
03
98
TB # 980501
Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Sensor

Interface Issues
Contents
complements the
User Manual, applicable to
Firmware Revision
21.72+/25.72+ and
23/72.+/27.72+.
Scope....................................................................................................................2
Abstract ................................................................................................................2
Important Omni Flow Computer Compatibility Issues When Using SV
Combo Modules ..................................................................................................3
Serial Communication Module Compatibility ................................................................. 3
Other Know System Incompatibilities ............................................................................ 3
Equipment Ordering Limitations .................................................................................... 3
Connectivity Issues When Connecting to the 3095FB Multivariable

Transmitters: Multi-drop versus Point-to-Point ...............................................4
Advantages of Multi-drop Configurations ...................................................................... 4
Disadvantages of Multi-drop Configurations.................................................................. 4
Jumper Settings for the Omni SV Combo Module...........................................5

Setting the Address of the SV Combo Module .............................................................. 6
Setting the Termination Jumpers for the Each of the SV RS-485 Ports........................ 6
Initial Setup of the Rosemount 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter ............8

Connecting the 3095FB to the Omni Flow Computer......................................9
3095FB Transmitter RS-485 Connections................................................................... 10
3095FB Transmitter Power Connections and Requirements ...................................... 10
Isolation and Transient Protection Issues ................................................................... 11
Wiring Considerations When Replacing a Multi-dropped 3095FB Transmitter ........... 11
Configuring the Omni Flow Computer to use the 3095FB Multi Variable
Transmitter.........................................................................................................12
Configuring the Meter Run I/O..................................................................................... 12
Selecting the Device Type ......................................................................................................12
Selecting the SV Combo Module Port.....................................................................................12
Select Modbus Address for 3095FB .......................................................................................12
What I/O Points are Used and Why ........................................................................................12
DP, Pressure and Temperature Setup Entries Needed .............................................. 14
Data Transferred between the 3095FB Transmitter and the Omni Flow
Computer ...........................................................................................................14
Polling Intervals for Process Variables and Critical Alarms......................................... 15
Critical 3095FB Alarms Monitored By The Flow Computer ......................................... 15
Synchronizing the 3095FB and the Flow Computer Configurations ...........16
TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
Technical Bulletin
Viewing the 3095FB Data at the Flow Computer Front Panel.......................16

Installing, Replacing and Calibrating 3095FB Transmitters .........................17
Wiring Issues ...............................................................................................................17
Using the Omni Flow Computer to Set the Modbus Address of the 3095FB...............18
Using a Laptop PC to Trim the 3095FB Calibration.....................................................19
Scope
Firmware Revisions 21.72+/25.72+ and 23.72+/27.72+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000
Flow Computers are affected by the issues contained in this technical bulletin.
This Bulletin applies to Orifice/Differential Pressure Liquid Flow Metering
Systems and to Orifice Gas Flow Metering Systems.
Abstract
The Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable sensor assembly is used to measure
differential pressure (DP), static pressure (SP) and line temperature (T).
Application of the 3095FB is limited to flow computer revisions 21, 23, 25 and 27
which work with differential head devices such as orifice meters, nozzles and
venturi meters. Because the flow computer is limited to a maximum of four meter
runs it is also limited to a maximum of four 3095FB multivariable transmitters.
Data is accessed from the 3095FB transmitter via a 2 wire RS-485 data link at
9600 baud using Modbus protocol. Technically, it would have been possible to
use one of the flow computers standard serial ports to communicate with the
3095FB but this would have caused several problems:
Reduced the number of serial ports available for use with SCADA, PLCs
and OmniCom etc.
Extra 'A type combo modules would have to be purchased simply to
provide analog outputs in a minimum system requiring just the
multivariables.
Omni chose to design a special SV combo module which includes two 2 wire
RS-485 ports and six 4-20 mA analog outputs. With this module it becomes
possible to provide a powerful Omni 3000 system with the following specs:
Four meter runs with Differential Pressure, Static Pressure and
Temperature inputs.
Four communication ports for SCADA, PLC, Printer, OmniCom etc.
Twelve Digital I/O for logic control
Six digital to analog outputs.
This SV module is capable of connecting to one to four 3095FBs in various
multi-drop configurations. A second SV combo module can be utilized in
applications where point to point operation of more than two multivariable
transmitters is desirable.
TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
TB-980501
Important Omni Flow Computer Compatibility

Issues When Using SV Combo Modules
The SV combo modules are effectively serial I/O modules which have been
specially designed to communicate with various multivariable transmitters.
Changes have been made to the IRQ priorities to accommodate these SV
combo modules. These IRQ changes also involve the Serial I/O Combo
Modules that are used to connect to printers, OmniCom, PLCs and SCADA
devices.
Serial Communication Module Compatibility

SV combo modules cannot be installed in flow computer systems containing
RS-232-C Serial I/O Combo modules model type 68-6005. The IRQ settings on
the 68-6005 serial combo module are not jumper selectable and are
incompatible with the 'SV combo modules. The flow computer will not be able to
initialize or boot up if this module is installed (this will be evident by a blank LCD
screen which flashes its backlighting on and off every 1.5 seconds).
The more recent 68-6205 serial module which is both RS-232-C and RS-485
compatible, has jumper selectable IRQ settings, these must be installed in the
IRQ 3 position when an SV combo module is present (see technical bulletin
TB-980503 for more details).
Other Known System Incompatibilities

At the time this bulletin was prepared, it was not possible to install both an SV
combo module and an HV (Honeywell multivariable) combo module.
Equipment Ordering Limitations

Because of the compatibility issues raised in the above paragraphs, it is not
possible for the customer to retrofit existing flow computer installations with SV
combo modules. Any system which requires SV combo modules, must be
purchased new from Omni, or the system must be returned to Omni to be
modified (contact a sales person at Omni for upgrade details and pricing).
TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
Technical Bulletin
Connectivity Issues When Connecting to the

3095FB Multivariable Transmitters: Multi-drop
versus Point-to-Point
The 3095 FB multivariable transmitter is a four wire device, two power wires and
two wires for the RS-485 serial communication link. It can be connected in a
point-to-point or multi-drop wiring configuration.
Advantages of Multi-drop Configurations

The advantages of multi-drop configurations are:
Possibly less wire may be needed to connect devices under certain
conditions. This may or may not be the case depending upon equipment
placement.
One Omni SV Combo module can handle up to four 3095 FB
multivariable transmitters. An Omni 3000 can be used in place of an
Omni 6000 and handle four meter runs.
Disadvantages of Multi-drop Configurations

Disadvantages of multi-drop configurations are:
Multiple Modbus IDs required. Each multi-dropped transmitter must
have a unique Modbus ID which matches the Modbus ID selected within
the flow computer for that meter run multivariable.
Possibility of errors when replacing multivariable transmitters.
Because of the multiple Modbus addresses it is not possible to simply take
a transmitter off the shelf and install it in a multi-drop configuration. This is
because transmitters come from Rosemount with the Modbus address
defaulted to 1 and there may already be a transmitter in the loop using
that address. Adding a second transmitter with the same address as an
existing transmitter would effectively cause a loss of signal on both
transmitters (existing and new). Depending upon where the transmitter is
in the wiring, termination jumpers may or may not be required on the
replacement transmitter (see below).
Transmitter interaction is possible. While not likely, a hardware failure
in one transmitter could compromise the integrity of the shared RS-485
link causing a loss of flow signals for all meter runs. Calibrating a
transmitter via a laptop computer requires the wiring to be disturbed, care
must be taken not to disconnect other transmitters in the same multi-drop
loop.
TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
TB-980501

RS-485 termination requirements more complex. RS-485 transmission
wires must have only one beginning and one end (they cannot be used in
a star configuration). Both ends of the wire must be terminated, meaning
only two devices in the loop need terminating. In a point-to-point
configuration, this simply means both the flow computer and transmitter
are terminated. In a multi-drop configuration, the user must ensure that
only the end devices have the termination jumpers in. This means that
some transmitters may have the terminating jumpers in while others may
have them out. Remember that the Omni may or may not be at the end of
the wire so it may or may not be one of the terminated devices.
Process variable update time may exceed the flow computers 500
msec cycle time. Critical measurement or control systems require that
the process variables be input to the flow computer as fast as possible for
best performance.
Jumper Settings for the Omni SV Combo

Module
The Multi Variable SV Combo module contains several sets of jumpers which
must be installed correctly (see figure below).
Port 2 (4)
Tx/RTS Leds Red
Recv Led Grn
Port 1 (3)
Tx/RTS Leds Red
Recv Led Grn
SV RS-485 Termination Jumpers

Both Jmpers In = Port Terminated
Both Jmpers Out = Port Un-Terminated
Always RTS
SV Address Jumper
Jmp Out =1st SV Combo
nd
Jmp In = 2 SV Combo
Always IRQ 2
2
RTS
T
E
R
M
GND
T
E
R
M
RTS
GND
T
E
R
M
T
E
R
M
BRD SEL
4 IRQ
SV Port 1 ( 3 )
SV Port 2 ( 4 )
Port Numbers in ( ) are for 2nd SV Module
Omni Model 68-6203 Multivariable Interface Module Fig. 1.

SV Combo Module
TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
Technical Bulletin
Setting the Address of the SV Combo Module

The flow computer can accept up to two SV Combo modules, each with a
unique address determined by the BRD SEL jumper shown in Figure 1. With no
jumper fitted the flow computer will report that a SV1 module is installed and SV
ports 1 and 2 will be available. With a jumper installed in the BRD SEL position
the flow computer will report that a SV2 module is installed and SV ports 3 and
4 will be available. Note that a system can have a SV2 module without a SV1
being installed, in this case only SV ports 3 and 4 would be available.
Setting the Termination Jumpers for the Each of the SV

RS-485 Ports
Multivariable RS-485 communication circuits must have two ends only, a star
configuration with more than two ends or a loop configuration with no
ends is not allowed. The devices at both ends of the circuit must be jumpered
to provide termination.
3095 FB
MV
ID #1
Omni
Flow
Computer
3095 FB
MV
ID #2
3095 FB
MV
ID #3
This Device
Must Be
Terminated
3095 FB
MV
ID #4
This Device
Must Be
Terminated
Multi-drop Configuration with Flow Computer

Fig. 2.
Terminated
Both jumpers marked TERM must be installed to terminate a flow computer

SV port (see Fig. 1 previous page). Termination settings for the 3095FB are
shown later in this document.
3095 FB
MV
ID #1
This Device
Must Be
Terminated
3095 FB
MV
ID #4
Omni
Flow
Computer
3095 FB
MV
ID #2
3095 FB
MV
ID #3
This Device
Must Be
Terminated
Multi-drop Configuration with Flow Computer NonFig. 3.

terminated
TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
TB-980501
3095 FB
MV
ID #1
3095 FB
MV
ID #2
3095 FB
MV
ID #3
3095 FB
MV
ID #4
Omni
Flow
Computer
Star Configuration Not Allowed!
Fig. 4.
All 4 MV Ports of
Flow Computer
Must Be Terminated
Unacceptable Configuration - Five Termination Points
3095 FB
MV
ID #1
3095 FB
MV
ID #1
3095 FB
MV
ID #1
3095 FB
MV
ID #1
Omni
Flow
Computer
Using
Independent
MV Ports
Fig. 5.
Modbus IDs of 3095FBs

Can Be The Same In This
Point to Point Configuration
All Four 3095FB

Transmitters
Must Be Terminated
Point-to-Point Wiring Configuration
In the point-to-point configuration each 3095FB transmitter is connected to an

independent SV port of the flow computer. Because each SV port is now
connected to only one 3095FB, each 3095FB can now use the default Modbus
address 1, greatly simplifying transmitter replacement issues discussed later in
this document.
TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
Technical Bulletin
Initial Setup of the Rosemount 3095FB Multi

Variable Transmitter
The 3095FB module has two sets of DIP switches and a jumper set which must
be setup according to the wiring configuration used to connect to the Omni Flow
Computer.
PULL DOWN (B)

PULL UP (A)
AC TERMINATION
All ON = Terminated
All OFF = Un-Terminated
o
OFF
o
ON
o
SECURITY o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Security OFF to
allow configuration
ON
1 2 3
S1 S2
ON
1 2
All ON For 9600 Baud
Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Setup Switches

Fig. 6.
and Jumpers
Place the security jumper in the OFF position, this allows the Omni flow
computer to write to the 3095FB registers ensuring that the internal configuration
matches the flow computer. Both baud rate switches S1 and S2 must be set to
9600; i.e., in the ON position. The termination switches should be all ON or all
OFF depending upon whether device termination is required.
TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
TB-980501
Connecting the 3095FB to the Omni Flow

Computer
TERMINAL
Fig. 7.
Module
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
Port #1(3) RS 485 B wire
Port #1(3) RS 485 A wire
Port #2(4) RS 485 B wire
Port #2(4) RS 485 A wire
Signal Return for 4-20mA Outputs
Signal Return for 4-20mA Outputs
4-20mA Analog Output # 5
10
11
12
Back Panel Termination Assignments - SV Combo
A
RS-485
B
+
PWR
-
Fig. 8.
TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Wiring Terminals
Technical Bulletin
3095FB Transmitter RS-485 Connections

Two terminals are provided marked A and B, these are connected to the A and B
terminals of other multi-dropped 3095FBs and to the Omni SV Combo module
terminals. These connections should be made using twisted pair unshielded wire
with a minimum gauge dependent upon the distance to be run. Use 22 AWG
minimum, 18 AWG maximum for runs less than 1000 ft. Use 20 AWG minimum,
18 AWG maximum for runs of 1000 to 4000 ft. Shielded twisted pair cable can
be used but may have an attenuating effect due to a higher capacitance per foot
thereby limiting the maximum wire run length to less than 4000 ft.
3095FB Transmitter Power Connections and

Requirements
Terminals marked + and - are provided to connect the 3095FB to a 7.5 VDC.
to 24 VDC. power supply. This power supply must be able to provide 10 mA per
installed 3095FB plus an additional 100 mA which is needed when any 3095FB
in the system is transmitting data to the flow computer. Ripple on this power
supply must be less than 2%. Wiring gauge should be selected as per the
previous paragraph and can be unshielded un-twisted pair, but for best
performance should be shielded and twisted.
4000 Ft. Maximum
Omni Flow Computer
Termination ON
No Stubs over 6 ft.
RS 485 Bus
A
MV Port #1
B
A
MV Port #2
B
A
B
A
MV Port #4
B
MV Port #3
7.5 VDC to 24 VDC

Power Supply
150 mA Minimum
+
-
A
RS-485
B
A
RS-485
B
A
RS-485
B
+
PWR
-
+
PWR
-
+
PWR
-
Termination OFF
Termination OFF
Termination ON
Connecting The Flow Computer to Multi-dropped 3095

Fig. 9.
Transmitters
10
TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
TB-980501
Isolation and Transient Protection Issues

The design of the 3095FB transmitter does not provide any DC isolation between
the power connections and the RS-485 connections. Applying voltages between
the power wiring and RS-485 wiring greater than the allowable common mode
voltage of a RS-485 driver circuit could damage the 3095FB. The Omni flow
computer SV port is optically isolated and can handle common mode voltages of
+/- 250 VDC with respect to chassis ground.
Inductive base transient protectors including the Rosemount Model 470, can
adversely affect the output of the 3095FB. Do not use the Model 470 for
transient protection with the 3095FB. If transient protection is desired, install
the optional Transient Protection Terminal Block described in Appendix B of the
Rosemount 3095FB Manual (pub. 00809-0100-4738).
Wiring Considerations When Replacing a Multi-dropped

3095FB Transmitter
If downtime of other 3095FB transmitters in a multi-dropped system cannot be
tolerated, make sure to provide a suitable and safe means of disconnecting
power and signal from each individual 3095FB transmitter. Because of the
power requirements of the RS-485 the 3095FB cannot be made
intrinsically safe. This means that proper safety procedures must be
followed before any covers are removed from any devices or junction
boxes located in hazardous areas. Refer to Rosemount 3095FB Manual
(publication 00809-0100-4738) for correct installation of the 3095FB
transmitter.
TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
11
Technical Bulletin
Configuring the Omni Flow Computer to use

the 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter
Configuring the Meter Run I/O
Selecting the Device Type
The existing Select Turbine Y/N entry in the Config Meter Run menu has
been changed to Select Device Type. Valid selections at this point are:
0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=
DP Sensor
Turbine Meter
3095FB Multivariable
SMV 3000 Multivariable
When 2 is selected above the following entries appear:
Selecting the SV Combo Module Port

The number of ports available depends upon what SV Combo Modules are fitted
in the flow computer. Ports 1 and 2 are available when SV Combo Module #1 is
fitted, ports 3 and 4 when SV Combo Module #2 is present. It is possible to have
SV ports 3 and 4 without SV ports 1 and 2 assuming SV Combo Module #2 is
the only SV module fitted.
Select Modbus Address for 3095FB

In point-to-point mode (i.e., each SV port is connected to a single 3095FB) it is
recommended that you select Modbus ID 1 at this point. This is the default ID
used by Rosemount when the 3095 is shipped. In multi-drop mode each 3095FB
connected to a SV port must have its own address which can be between 1 and
247.
What I/O Points are Used and Why

Even though the multivariable data is obtained serially and not via analog input
channels, the flow computer must have a storage structure in RAM to place the
data. Omni has chosen to treat the data as closely as possible to that obtained
by conventional means and use the same physical I/O RAM structure as is used
for analog inputs. The main difference being that with analog and pulse inputs
you would manually assign the I/O points to be used for each input. When using
the 3095FB multi variable, the flow computer automatically assigns three I/O
point assignments for the DP, temperature and pressure sensors within the
3095FB. The I/O point numbers are allocated in the order that the 3095FBs are
configured using the above three entries (it has nothing to do with SV port or SV
module numbers). The starting I/O point for the first 3095FB configured is the
first point immediately after the last I/O point used by any other A, B, E/D, E or H
combo modules in the system (see examples on facing page).
12
TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
TB-980501
EXAMPLE 1 CONFIGURATION
6000 - 2A - 1B 2SV
A1 Combo Module I/O Points
1-4
5-8
B1 Combo Module I/O Points
9 - 12
st
3095FB Configured Uses
DP=13, T=14, P=15
nd
DP=16, T=17, P=18
rd
3 3095FB Configured Uses
DP=19, T=20, P=21
th
DP=22, T=23, P=24
4 3095FB Configured Uses
Fig. 10.
I/O Points Used by SV Combo Modules - Example 1
EXAMPLE 2 CONFIGURATION
6000 - 1A - 1E/D 1SV
1-4
E/D1 Combo Module I/O Points
5-8
st
DP=9, T=10, P=11
nd
DP=12, T=13, P=14
rd
DP=15, T=16, P=17
th
DP=18, T=19, P=20
2
3
Fig. 11.
I/O Points Used by SV Combo Modules - Example 2
Bi-directional Flow and 3095FB Transmitters

Sometimes it is necessary to use a process variable obtained from a 3095FB in
more than one meter run. For example, When measuring bi-directional flow it is
customary to configure one meter run within the Omni flow computer as forward
flow and a second meter run as reverse flow. To do this, simply configure both
meter runs as Device Type = 2 (3095FB Multi Variable), select the same SV
port and Modbus ID, the Omni flow computer will recognize that both meter runs
are using the same 3095FB device and allocate only one set of I/O assignments.
Referencing 3095FB Variables Elsewhere in the Configuration

While the DP, temperature and pressure obtained from the 3095FB multi
variable are used to calculate flow, it may also be necessary to use either the
temperature and/or the pressure to correct a densitometer device mounted in
close proximity. To do this simply note the I/O point numbers automatically
assigned to the 3095FB when it was configured and reuse these point numbers
as needed.
TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
13
Technical Bulletin
DP, Pressure and Temperature Setup Entries Needed

Once I/O points have been assigned to the 3095FB multi variable transmitter by
the flow computer the Differential Pressure, Temperature and Pressure setup
menus become active. Data entries in these menus are:
Low Alarm Setpoint

High Alarm Setpoint
Override Value
Override Code
0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=
Never Use Override Value

Always Use Override Value
Use Override on a 3095FB Communication Failure or Critical Error
Use Last Hours Average on a 3095FB Communication Failure or Critical
Error
4mA Value (read only)

20mA Value (read only)
Damping Code
0
1
2
3
4
= 0.108 Seconds5
=
3.456 Seconds
= 0.216 Seconds6
=
6.912 Seconds
= 0.432 Seconds7
=
13.824 Seconds
= 0.864 Seconds (Default)
8 = 27.648 Seconds
= 1.728 Seconds
All of these data entries are changeable when using analog transmitters but
when using the 3095FB multi variable transmitter the 4mA and 20mA scaling
values cannot be changed. The upper and lower range of the 3095FB sensors
are fixed by design. The Omni flow computer simply reads these values and
displays them in the 4mA and 20mA fields for information only.
While the 3095FB transmitter has internal alarm setpoints and alarm status
points, Omni has chosen to ignore the 3095FB integral alarming functions and
use the existing flow computer alarm setpoints and alarm status points. The Low
and High Alarm Setpoints of the flow computer therefore behave exactly as they
would with an analog transmitter. The 3095FB Critical Alarm states are
monitored continuously.
Data Transferred between the 3095FB

Transmitter and the Omni Flow Computer
In operation the Omni flow computer automatically sets up the 3095FB
transmitter to use the correct floating point format and units of measure needed
to match the flow computers configuration. The Omni continuously reads the
following data:
14
Process Variables DP, Pressure and Temperature

Individual Transmitter Sensor Ranges
Critical Transmitter Alarms (Sensor failures etc)
Transmitter Information (Body and Fill material etc)
Manufacturers Code
Transmitter Tags
TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
TB-980501
Polling Intervals for Process Variables and Critical

Alarms
The message poll scheme comprises regular reads of the process variable
values and critical alarms every 200msec per 3095FB connected to a flow
computer SV port. This means that in a multi-drop system with four transmitters
the process variable update time will be 4 x 200msec or 800msec.
Critical 3095FB Alarms Monitored By The Flow Computer

Critical alarm points within the 3095FB are monitored and mapped into the Omni
flow computer Modbus database as follows:
Alarms Associated with the 3095FB Providing Data to Meter Run n
MODBUS
ADDRESS
1n96 is flow
^
computer generated.
(SEE ALSO FAILURE CODE SETTING)
1n83
DP signal 10% above upper

range limit
DP transmitter failure flagged
1n84
DP signal 10% below lower

range limit
DP transmitter failure flagged
1n85
Pressure signal 10% above

upper range limit
Pressure transmitter failure flagged
1n86
Pressure signal 10% below

lower range limit
1n87
Note:
ACTION TAKEN IF ALARM IS ACTIVE
ALARM POINT DESCRIPTION
Pressure sensor is shorted
1n88
Pressure sensor bridge is

open circuit
1n89
Temperature signal 10%

above upper range limit
Temperature transmitter failure flagged
1n90
Temperature signal 10%

below lower range limit
1n91
Temperature RTD is
disconnected
1n92
Sensor internal temperature

above upper range limit
DP, P and T, transmitter failures flagged
1n93
Sensor internal temperature

below upper range limit
1n94
Critical 3095FB sensor

electronics failure
1n95
Security jumper of 3095FB is

set to Write Protect
DP, P and T transmitter failures flagged

if write to 3095FB is attempted and fails.
^ 1n96
No Communications between
the Omni and 3095FB unit
TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
15
Technical Bulletin
Synchronizing the 3095FB and the Flow

Computer Configurations
To ensure that the flow computer correctly interprets the 3095FB data, the flow
computer continuously verifies that the configuration of the 3095FB transmitter
matches that required by the flow computer. Additional message polls verifying
this data are interleaved with the normal message polls used to retrieve the
process variables and alarms.
Notes: Numbers in ( ) are
Modbus addresses within
the 3095FB database
**
The flow
computer will attempt to
correct the database of
the 3095FB transmitter if
miss matches are
detected for these
variables.
The flow
computer will adjust its
database to agree with
the 3095FB database if
miss matches are
detected for these
variables.
Critical 3095FB configuration data which is checked every 10 seconds are:
Floating Point Number Format

** (0132)
Measurement Engineering Units of Measure
** (0060 - 0062)
Minimum and Maximum Ranges of each Signal
* (7407 - 7416)
Transmitter Identification (Information Only)
(0001 - 0011)
Damping Factors
** (7421, 7424, 7427)
Transmitter ASCII Tags (3x8 characters)
** (0032 - 0047)
Transmitter Information (Materials of Construction)
(0017 - 0029)
Viewing the 3095FB Data at the Flow

Computer Front Panel
Differential Pressure, Temperature and Pressure variables and averages are
viewed using the normal key press combinations as described in the Omni Flow
Computer User Manual.
A display list of 3095FB transmitter information can be displayed by pressing
Setup n Enter. Data is organized by SV port number n and in the order that
the transmitters were configured. The following information and diagnostic data
is displayed (example shows first transmitter on the #1 SV port as an example):
st
1 digit is the SV port

nd
number, 2 digit is the
Modbus Address of the
3095FB
16

TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
TB-980501

If you continue to scroll down, the following data will be displayed:

!"
#
$
%!!
&'

()*
+
, - " "
- *#
( - ! ".
/
0 %
.# . # ##
.-
0 %
.- ()* 1*
,#
%
#- (.23(4
()*
5
.#
5
/ 5
5 5
Installing, Replacing and Calibrating 3095FB

Transmitters
Wiring Issues
If downtime of other 3095FB transmitters in a multi-dropped system cannot be
tolerated, make sure to provide a suitable and safe means of disconnecting
power and signal from each individual 3095FB transmitter. Because of the
power requirements of the RS-485 the 3095FB cannot be made
intrinsically safe. This means that proper safety procedures must be
followed before any covers are removed from any devices or junction
boxes located in hazardous areas. Refer to Rosemount 3095FB Manual
(publication 00809-0100-4738) for correct installation of the 3095FB
transmitter.
TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
17
Technical Bulletin
Using the Omni Flow Computer to Set the Modbus

Address of the 3095FB
The 3095FB transmitter will normally be shipped with a default Modbus address
of 1. While this is fine for a point to point installation, it will cause a problem if
two or more devices have the same Modbus ID in a multi-drop scheme. The
Modbus ID of a transmitter can be set using the Configurator User Interface PC
Software available from Rosemount. It is anticipated though that some situations
may arise where a 3095FB transmitter must be installed or replaced without this
software being available. In this case the Omni flow computer can be connected
to a 3095FB in the point to point mode using any available SV port and the
Modbus ID changed to what is required in the flow computer configuration.
CAUTION!
This procedure involves

broadcast transmitting a
Modbus address out of a
SV port. All devices
connected to this SV port
will have their Modbus
address set to the ID
broadcast. This would
cause data collisions and a
complete loss of
communication when more
than one 3095FB
transmitter is connected. Be
sure to temporarily
disconnect any 3095FB
transmitters which
addresses you do not want
to change.
Proceed as follows:
1. Setup the 3095FB as described previously in the section titled Initial
Setup of the Rosemount 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter.
2. Setup the 3095FB to be RS-485 terminated.
3. Connect the transmitter to any open SV port (terminal A to A, B to B). The
SV port should be jumpered for RS-485 termination. If this SV channel is
not an open channel, all 3095FB transmitters except the one needing the
address change must be disconnected.
4. Apply power to the 3095FB transmitter.
5. At the flow computer front panel press the following keys:
[Alpha Shift] [Diag]
[Setup] [n] [Enter]
The computer will enter the Diagnostic mode.

Where n is the SV port number that the 3095FB
is connected to.
6. The following warning screen may display ( SV port 1 is used as an

example) or the screen in (7) below will display.
6
(7# 1 )
1#- . 89
1# 3:54;
This means that the flow computer has detected that this SV port is
currently configured to communicate with one or more transmitters. You
may or may not have selected the wrong SV port (see the cautions in
sidebar).
7. If you wish to continue with the address broadcast operation enter Y and
the following screen will display.
6
17- $ <
5= <
>
/
18
TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
TB-980501

8. Scroll down to New Address and enter the address required. Press
Enter and the following message will display.
#- 5= <
9. The flow computer will wait a short time and then attempt to
communicate with the 3095FB using the new address. If communications
are established the following message will be displayed for a few
seconds.
< 17-
The following message will display for a second or two should the
transmission fail.
.# 17-
Should this message appear check your wiring, switch and jumper
settings and repeat the procedure.
10. Disconnect and reinstall 3095FB to the appropriate SV port for normal
operation making sure to observe the termination requirements of only
two devices at the end of a loop being terminated.
Using a Laptop PC to Trim the 3095FB Calibration

The flow computer provides no way of calibrating or trimming the output of the
3095FB multi variable transmitter. To calibrate the transmitter use the
Configurator User Interface PC Software available from Rosemount. The user
must disconnect the 3095FB needing calibrating and connect it in point to point
mode with the Laptop or PC running the Rosemount Interface Software.
Remember to follow all correct safety procedures when removing
transmitter covers or junction boxes. Read the manufactures warnings
and recommendations as printed in the 3095FB manual. Be aware that
when removing a transmitter from a multi-drop installation, wiring may be
disturbed and disruption of the circuit may cause a loss of all measurement
signals due to loss of power, signal or RS-485 termination.
TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+
19
Date: 05
13
98
TB # 980503
Serial I/O Modules: Installation Options

Contents
complements the
Volume 1, and is applicable
to all firmware revisions.
Scope....................................................................................................................1
Abstract ................................................................................................................1
Features and Specifications...............................................................................2
Dual Channel RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model #68-6005 ............................3
RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model #68-6205-A .................................4
RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model #68-6205-B .................................6
RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial Port Jumper Options................................................8
Scope
All Omni 6000/3000 Flow Computers have serial communications capabilities via
proprietary serial I/O modules.
Abstract
Omni flow computers can come equipped with serial I/O modules that
communicate with RS-232-Compatible or RS-485 devices. Omni manufactures
three models of serial modules:
Dual Channel RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005
RS-232-C/RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205-A
RS-232-C/RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205-B
Each serial module has 2 ports. Omni 6000 flow computers can have up to two
serial modules installed for a maximum of 4 ports. Omni 3000 flow computers
typically use one serial module providing 2 ports. Each serial communication port
is individually optically isolated for maximum common-mode and noise rejection.
Jumpers are provided for selection of module address and serial port
communication standards. Communication parameters such as protocol type,
baud rate, stop bits and parity settings are software selectable.
TB-980503 ALL REVS
Technical Bulletin
Features and Specifications

Proprietary serial modules and multi-bus serial I/O interface specifications are:
Omni Serial I/O Modules

MODEL #
TYPE
BASIC COMMUNICATION FEATURES

Dual channel serial communications
providing two RS-232-Compatible
ports.
Communications protocol, baud rate,
stop bits and parity settings are
Dual Channel RS-232Compatible
68-6005
Port #1 is factory-set as RS-232Compatible mode (jumper blocks are

soldered in place).
68-6205-A
RS-232-Compatible / RS-485
(Non-selectable Ports)
Port #2 is factory set to RS-485

mode.
RS-485 communications are jumperselectable as:
2-wire terminated or non-terminated
68-6205-B
RS-232-Compatible / RS-485
(Selectable Ports)
Both Ports #1 and #2 are jumperselectable as either RS-232-C or RS485 modes.

RS-485 communications are jumperselectable as:
compatible serial devices
can be multi-dropped using
Omnis proprietary RS-232Compatible serial port.
Thirty-two devices may be
connected when using the
RS-485 mode.
Typically, one serial I/O
module is used on the Omni
3000, providing two ports. A
maximum of two serial
modules can be installed in
the Omni 6000, providing
four ports.
Omni Multi-bus Serial I/O Interface
DATA OUTPUT VOLTAGE

LOAD IMPEDANCE
RS-485
7.5 volts (typical)
5 volts (differential driver)
1.5 k ohm
120 ohm
10 mA (limited)
20 mA
INPUT LOW THRESHOLD
-3.0 volts
0.8 volts (differential input)
INPUT HIGH THRESHOLD
+3.0 volts
5.0 volts (differential input)
SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT
BAUD RATES
COMMON MODE VOLTAGE
LEDS
RS-232-COMPATIBLE
1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, & 38.4 k bps (software selectable)
250 Volts to chassis ground
channel inputs/outputs & handshaking signals
TB-980503 ALL REVS
TB-980503
Serial I/O Module: Installation Options
Dual Channel RS-232-C Serial I/O Module

Model #68-6005
Omnis proprietary RS-232C serial port.
four ports.
Dual channel serial communication modules can be installed providing two RS232-Compatible ports. Although providing RS-232-C signal levels, the tristate
output design allows multiple flow computers to share one RS-232 device. This
serial module is the oldest model manufactured by Omni.
Address Selection
Jumpers
Jumper Settings - For

information on setting the
jumpers of serial I/O
modules refer to 1.6.3.
Serial Communication
Modules in Volume 1,
Chapter 1 of the User
Manual.
Address S1 (1)
Selected for Serial
Ports 1 & 2
Address S2 (0)
Selected for Serial
Ports 3 & 4
RTS Out
TX Out
Chan. B
RTS Out
TX Out
Chan. A
LED Indicators
RX In
RDY In
Chan. A
RX In
RDY In
Chan. B
Fig. 1. Dual RS-232 Serial I/O Module Model Showing Selection Jumper
and Indicator LEDs
TB-980503 ALL REVS
Technical Bulletin
RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model

#68-6205-A
Omnis proprietary RS-232C serial port. Up to 32
mode. Refer to technical
bulletin TB980401 Peer-toPeer Basics for more
information.
four ports.
Serial I/O Module # 68-6205-A (manufactured 1997) has two communication

ports. The first serial port (Ports #1 and #3 if two 68-6205 modules are installed)
is factory set in the RS-232-C mode (jumpers are soldered into place and cannot
be moved). The second serial port (Ports #2 and #4) is configurable for RS-485
communications only. Although the first serial port provides RS-232-C signal
levels, the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share one
serial link.
Address Selection
Jumpers
Address S1 Selected
for Serial Ports 1 & 2
Address S2 Selected

Manual. For serial port
jumper settings see also
Fig. 6 in this bulletin.
IRQ Select Jumper

IRQ 2 Selected
(If using an SV
Module, select
IRQ 3)
LED Indicators
68-6205
REV: A
Port #2 (#4) Jumpers
(RS-485 Options Only)
(Hard-wired to RS-232-C Only)
Fig. 2. RS-232/485 Module #68-6205-A Showing Selection Jumpers and

Indicator LEDs
TB-980503 ALL REVS
TB-980503
The first serial port jumpers are factory hard-wired for RS-232-C mode. This port
is non-selectable and cannot be changed by the user. The second serial port
jumpers are factory preset in the RS-485 two-wire, terminated positions. This
port is user-selectable for RS-485 two-wire/four-wire terminated/non-terminated
jumper positions (see Fig. 6). Back panel wiring is shown below.
Micro Motion RFT 9739
Devices - Users of Micro
connected to the peer-topeer port (Port #2) of the
Omni, please note that the
resistor networks should be
positioned for 2-wire RS485 and that Terminal A
from the RFT 9739 should
be wired to Omni Terminal
B (7), and B from the RFT
must be wired to Omni
Terminal A (11). Refer to
technical bulletin TB980401
Peer-to-Peer Basics for
more information.
Omni 6000
(Omni 3000)
Terminal
TB3 (TB2)
First
Serial
Port
Second
Serial
Port
RS-232-C
RS-485
2-Wire
RS-485
4-Wire
TX
TERM
RX
RS-232-C
GND
Hard-wired
RTS
RDY
TX-B
RX-A
GND
GND
11
TX-A
12
RX-B
9
10
N/A
Fig. 3. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232-C/RS-485 Module #68-6205-A
TB-980503 ALL REVS
Technical Bulletin
RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model

#68-6205-B
Omnis proprietary RS-232C serial port. Up to 32
mode. Refer to technical
bulletin TB980401 Peer-toPeer Basics for more
information.
four ports.
Serial I/O Module # 68-6205-B is the latest serial module manufactured by Omni
(1998). It is capable of handling two communication ports. Each serial port is
jumper-selectable for either RS-232-Compatible or RS-485 communications.
Although providing RS-232-C signal levels when in this mode, the tristate output
design allows multiple flow computers to share one serial link. In addition to the
RS-232 mode, jumper selections have been provided on each port to allow
selection of RS-485 format. With this option, a total of two RS-485 ports are
available on this model.
Address Selection
Jumpers
Address S1 Selected
Address S2 Selected

Manual. For serial port
jumper settings see also
Fig. 6 in this bulletin.
IRQ Select Jumper

IRQ 2 Selected
(If using an SV
Module, select
IRQ 3)
LED Indicators
68-6205
Port #2 (#4)Jumpers
REV: B
Fig. 4. RS-232-C/RS-485 Module #68-6205-B Showing Selection Jumpers

and Indicator LEDs
TB-980503 ALL REVS
TB-980503
Jumpers for both serial ports are user-selectable to RS-232-C or RS-485

formats (see Fig. 6). The RS-485 options are either 2-wire or 4-wire mode; each
mode can be set as terminated or non-terminated connections. Back panel
wiring is shown below.
Micro Motion RFT 9739
Devices - Users of Micro
connected to the peer-topeer port (Port #2) of the
Omni, please note that the
resistor networks should be
positioned for 2-wire RS485 and that Terminal A
from the RFT 9739 should
be wired to Omni Terminal
B (7), and B from the RFT
must be wired to Omni
Terminal A (11). Refer to
technical bulletin TB980401
Peer-to-Peer Basics for
more information.
Omni 6000
(Omni 3000)
Terminal
TB3 (TB2)
First
Serial
Port
Second
Serial
Port
RS-232-C
RS-485
2-Wire
RS-485
4-Wire
TX
TX-B
TERM
RX
RX-A
GND
GND
GND
RTS
TX-A
RDY
RX-B
TX
TX-B
TERM
RX
RX-A
10
GND
GND
GND
11
RTS
TX-A
12
RDY
RX-B
Fig. 5. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232-C/RS-485 Module #68-6205-B
TB-980503 ALL REVS
Technical Bulletin
RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial Port Jumper Options

Serial Port I/O Software
Settings - Each serial port
is configurable via
OmniCom software or the
Omni front panel. Detailed
information on how to
configure these and other
flow computer settings is
available in Volume 3,
Manual and in OmniCom
Help.
The RS-232-C/RS-485 serial port has been designed so that RS-232 or RS-485
communications standards can be selected by placement of 16-pin resistor
networks into the correct blocks. The following diagrams show the locations of
blocks JB1, JB2, JB3 for the first serial port (Model #68-6205-B only), and JB4,
JB5, JB6 for the second serial port (Models #68-6205-A and #68-6205-B) for
each format. Serial I/O Module #68-6205-A only has the RS-485 options
available for the second serial port, and the first port is hard-wired to the RS-232C position and cannot be changed by the user.
RS-232
JB1 or JB4
JB2 or JB5
RS-485
RS-485 2-WIRE
JB3 or JB6
RS-485
TERMINATED

JB1 or JB4
JB2 or JB5
JB3 or JB6
JB1 or JB4
JB2 or JB5
JB3 or JB6
RS-232/485
NON-TERMINATED
RS-232
Terminated/Nonterminated RS-485 - The

RS-485 devices located at
each extreme end of an RS485 run should be
terminated. Note that the
device located at an
extreme end may or may
not be an Omni Flow
Computer.
RS-232/485 4-WIRE
RS-232

JB1 or JB4
JB2 or JB5
RS-232/485 4-WIRE
RS-485
TERMINATED
JB3 or JB6
JB1 or JB4
RS-232/485
RS-232
JB2 or JB5
JB3 or JB6
RS-485 2-WIRE
RS-232
RS-485
TERMINATED
Fig. 6. Layout of Jumper Blocks Showing RS-232/485 Formats
TB-980503 ALL REVS
LIMITED WARRANTY. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. (Omni Flow) warrants all equipment manufactured by
it to be free from defects in workmanship and materials, provided that such equipment was properly
selected for the service intended, properly installed, and not misused. Equipment which is returned,
transportation prepaid, to Omnis assembly plant within three (3) years after date of shipment, and is found
after inspection by Omni Flow Computers, Inc. to be defective in workmanship or materials, will be repaired
or replaced, at the sole option of Omni Flow Computers, Inc., free-of-charge, and return-shipped at lowest
cost transportation, prepay and add. Warranties on third-party manufactured devices supplied by Omni Flow
or incorporated by Omni Flow in the manufacture of equipment bearing an Omni label shall be extended by
the original device manufacturer.
This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the equipment has resulted from accident, abuse or
misapplication.
NO OTHER WARRANTIES. Omni Flow disclaims any and all warranties, either expressed or implied,
including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantibility, fitness for a particular purpose, and any
other warranties which extend beyond the terms herein. No agreement varying or extending the foregoing
warranties or limitations will be binding upon Omni Flow unless in writing, signed by a duly authorized
officer.
LOSS OR DAMAGE. Omni Flow shall by liable only for loss or damage caused directly by its sole
negligence. Liability of Omni Flow for any claim of any kind for any loss or damage arising out of, or
connected with this warranty; or from the performance or breach hereof shall in no case exceed the price
allocated to the equipment or unit thereof which gives rise to the claim. The liability of Omni Flow shall
terminate three (3) years after the shipment of the equipment from Omni Flow.
NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Omni Flow shall not be liable in any circumstance for
any incidental or consequential damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, loss of business profits
or revenue, business interruption, loss of business information, or other pecuniary loss, or claims of
customers of the purchaser for any and such damages) arising out of the use or inability to use Omni Flow
equipment or devices manufactured by third party manufacturers.
1991-1998
All Rights Reserved
No part of this manual may be used or reproduced in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without
prior written consent of Omni Flow Computers, Inc., Stafford, Texas, USA. Making copies of any part of this manual for any purpose
other than your own personal use is a violation of United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions.
Omni Flow Computers, Inc., pursuant to a policy of product development and improvement, may make any necessary changes to this
document without notice.
Omni 3000 and Omni 6000 are trademarks of Omni Flow Computers, Inc.
OmniCom is a registered trademark of Omni Flow Computers, Inc.
(SINGLE-USER PRODUCTS)
This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and Omni Flow Computers, Inc. By the installation
and use of accompanying equipment manufactured by Omni Flow Computers, Inc., you are agreeing to be
bound by the terms of this Agreement.
OMNI FLOW COMPUTERS SOFTWARE LICENSE

1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. (Omni Flow) grants to you the right to use one
copy of Omni Flow software programs (the SOFTWARE) provided with the accompanying equipment
manufactured by Omni Flow.
2. COPYRIGHT. The SOFTWARE is owned by Omni Flow and is protected by United States copyright
laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, you must treat the SOFTWARE like any other
copyrighted material (e.g.: a book or recording on magnetic media).
3. OTHER RESTRICTIONS. You may not reverse engineer, duplicate, decompile, or disassemble the
SOFTWARE provided on magnetic media in the form of disks or erasable programmable memory circuits
(EPROMs). If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade and transferred by Omni Flow over a modem connection to
magnetic media, or a single hard disk, then you may use the SOFTWARE for the sole purpose of
permanent transfer to EPROMs. You may not retain a copy for backup or archival purposes.
LIMITED WARRANTY
LIMITED WARRANTY. Omni Flow warrants that the SOFTWARE will perform substantially in accordance
with the accompanying written materials provided with the purchase of an Omni manufactured product for a
period of three (3) years from the date of shipment from Omnis production facility.
Omni Flows entire liability shall be, at Omni Flows sole option, (a) remedy any defect and provide you, at
no charge, with replacement magnetic media or (b) download an upgrade via a dial-up modem connection
between Omni Flow and the end user, provided that equipment specified by Omni Flow for that purpose is
used.
This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the SOFTWARE has resulted from accident, abuse or
misapplication.
other warranties which extend beyond the terms herein, with respect to the SOFTWARE and accompanying
hardware. No agreement varying or extending the foregoing warranties or limitations will be binding upon
Omni Flow unless in writing, signed by a duly authorized officer.
NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Omni Flow shall not be liable in any circumstance for
any damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, loss of business profits or revenue, business
interruption, loss of business information, or other pecuniary loss, or claims of customers of the purchaser
for any and such damages) arising out of the use or inability to use the SOFTWARE.
(SINGLE-USER PRODUCTS)
This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and Omni Flow Computers, Inc. By the installation
and use of this product you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this Agreement.
OMNICOM SOFTWARE LICENSE

1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. (Omni Flow) grants to you the right to use one
copy of the OmniCom software program and accompanying written materials (the SOFTWARE) provided
with the accompanying equipment manufactured by Omni Flow.
2. COPYRIGHT. The SOFTWARE and accompanying written materials is owned by Omni Flow or its
suppliers and is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore,
you must treat the SOFTWARE like any other copyrighted material (e.g.: a book or recording on magnetic
media) except that in the sole instance of SOFTWARE provided on 5 or 3 magnetic media disks, you
may (a) make one copy of the SOFTWARE solely for backup or archival purposes, or (b) transfer the
SOFTWARE to a single hard disk provided you keep the original solely for backup or archival purposes.
3. OTHER RESTRICTIONS. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE
provided on magnetic media. You may transfer the SOFTWARE and accompanying written materials on a
permanent basis provided you maintain no copies, and the recipient agrees to the terms of this Agreement.
4. DUAL MEDIA SOFTWARE. If the SOFTWARE is provided on 5 or 3 magnetic media disks, then
you may use the disks appropriate for your single-user computer. You may not use the other disks on
another computer or loan or transfer them to another user except as part of the permanent transfer (as
provided above) of all SOFTWARE and written materials
LIMITED WARRANTY
LIMITED WARRANTY. Omni Flow warrants that the SOFTWARE will perform substantially in accordance
with the accompanying written materials provided with the purchase of an Omni manufactured product for a
period of three (3) years from the date of shipment from Omnis production facility.
Omni Flows entire liability shall be, at Omni Flows sole option, (a) remedy any defect and provide you, at
no charge, with replacement magnetic media or (b) download an upgrade via a dial-up modem connection
between Omni Flow and the end user, provided that equipment specified by Omni Flow for that purpose is
used.
This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the SOFTWARE has resulted from accident, abuse or
misapplication.
other warranties which extend beyond the terms herein, with respect to the SOFTWARE, the accompanying
written materials and hardware.
NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Omni Flow or its suppliers shall not be liable in any
circumstance for any damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, loss of business profits or revenue,
business interruption, loss of business information, or other pecuniary loss, or claims of customers of the
purchaser for any and such damages) arising out of the use or inability to use the SOFTWARE.

Omni 6600 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Omni 6600 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Omni 6600 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Firmware Revisions 20/24.

Liquid: Turbine/PD/ Coriolis Meters

elcome to Omni Flow Computers

User Manual for Revisions 20/24.71.

Effective April 1998

Measure the Difference!

Effective April 1998

Measure the Difference!

Compendium of Technical Bulletins

About Our Company

Omni flow computers Our products are currently

Contacting Our Corporate Headquarters

Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

World-wide Web Site:

Getting User Support

OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.

Omni 6000/Omni 3000 User Manual

About the Flow Computer Applications

About the User Manual

OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.

Compendium of Technical Bulletins

Volume 1. System Architecture and Installation

Basic hardware/software features

Volume 2. Basic Operation

The application-related topics may include:

Volume 3. Configuration and Advanced Operation

Overview of keypad functions

OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.

Omni 6000/Omni 3000 User Manual

Volume 4. Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers

Volume 5. Technical Bulletins

Volume 5 includes technical bulletins that contain important complementary

Conventions Used in this Manual

Several typographical conventions have been established as standard reference

Sample screens that correspond to the flow

OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.

Compendium of Technical Bulletins

2.3.1. Subsection Heading

Page numbering restarts at the beginning of every

Figure captions are numbered in sequence as they

The contents of Volume 1 and Volume 5 are

OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.

Omni 6000/Omni 3000 User Manual

Copyright Information and Modifications Policy

Warranty, Licenses and Product Registration

Copyright 1991-1998 by Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.

Effective April 1998

Measure the Difference!

System Architecture and Installation

SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE AND

1.3. Passive Backplane Mother Board .........................................................................1-4

1.5. Central Processor Module......................................................................................1-8

OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.

Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 User Manual

1.6. Input/Output (I/O) Modules..................................................................................... 1-9

1.7. Operating Power .................................................................................................. 1-17

1.9. Initializing Your Flow Computer .......................................................................... 1-21